OW13.1 User Manual

OmniWin 2013
User Manual
Legal Notice
Copyright © MesserSoft GmbH
All brand and product names are brand names or registered trade marks of the owner
concerned.
MesserSoft products undergo constant change. Though this documentation has been
produced with the greatest possible care, its content may differ from the software
functionality. MesserSoft accepts no liability for incorrect or outdated information.
Using technically challenging software in an improper manner, or using such software
without sufficient qualifications, may lead to system errors. MesserSoft accepts no liability for
faults caused by such improper or unqualified use.
www.messersoft.com Legal Notice

Contents
1 OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars 12
1.1 Introduction 12
1.1.1 Scope of functions and Options 12
1.1.2 OmniWin – Summary of functions 13
1.1.3 Installation 15
1.1.4 Documentation 15
1.1.5 User qualification 16
1.2 Basic operation 16
1.2.1 Main Window of OmniWin 16
1.2.2 Configuring the program window 17
1.2.3 Command Line Dialog 18
1.2.4 Object Info Dialog 19
1.2.5 Plan Info Dialog 22
1.2.6 Adjusting Dialog Windows 32
1.2.7 Selection of the Functions 35
1.2.8 Notes about the Execution of Functions 35
1.2.9 Selection of elements or objects 36
1.3 The Workspace - current tasks 37
1.3.1 Drawings and parts 38
1.3.2 How to open objects in the workspace 39
1.3.3 Closing objects 40
1.3.4 Functions in the context menus 41
1.3.5 Autonest from workspace 43
1.3.6 Changing the properties for multiple objects 44
1.3.7 Display and Configuration Options 45
1.4 Construction of Parts 46
1.4.1 Select Process-Layer 46
1.4.2 Setting the Coordinate System 46
1.4.3 Set Options for Construction of Parts 47
1.5 Preparation for Nesting and Creation of a Nesting Plan 47
1.5.1 Create a new nesting plan 48
1.5.2 Define Machine, Plate Material and Thickness 49
1.5.3 Selecting Parts 49
1.5.4 Placing parts on the nesting plan 50
1.6 Special points for working with open contours 54
www.messersoft.com Contents | 3
1.6.1 Definition of the Start Point for an open contour 54
1.6.2 Cutting sense and cutting kerf compensation for open contours 56
1.7 Summary of the Toolbars 59
1.7.1 Display of incompletely shown Toolbar 61
1.7.2 Add icons to or remove icons from the Toolbar 62
1.7.3 Deactivating and Activating Toolbars with the right mouse button 63
1.8 Customizing Toolbars and Menus to suit 63
1.8.1 The Toolbar card in the Customize dialog 64
1.8.2 The “Commands” Card in the Customize Dialog 65
1.8.3 The “Options” Card in the Customize Dialog 67
1.9 Toolbars in Detail 68
1.9.1 Main Toolbar 68
1.9.2 Zoom Toolbar 69
1.9.3 Draw Toolbar for Part Construction 70
1.9.4 Draw Toolbar for Nesting 71
1.9.5 Modify Toolbar for Part Construction 73
1.9.6 Modify Toolbar for Nesting 74
1.9.7 Snap Toolbar 76
1.9.8 Measure Toolbar 77
1.9.9 CS (Coordinate System) Toolbar 77
1.9.10 Dimension Toolbar 78
1.9.11 Nesting Toolbar 79
1.9.12 View Options Toolbar 80
1.9.13 Nesting Parameter Toolbar 81
1.9.14 Attribute dialog toolbar 81
1.9.15 Profile Toolbars 82
2 OmniWin - Menus and Functions 84

2.1 File Menu 84
2.1.1 New Drawing 85
2.1.2 New Nesting Plan 85
2.1.3 Open 86
2.1.4 Import 86
2.1.5 Close 96
2.1.6 Save 96
2.1.7 Export 96
2.1.8 Export to CSV 97
2.1.9 Generate Production Data 99
2.1.10 Import parts and plans in DIN- or ESSI code 102
2.1.11 Find Contours in Image 103
2.1.12 Reporting 104
2.1.13 Recent Files 117
2.1.14 Exit 117
2.2 Edit Menu 117
2.2.1 Undo 118
2.2.2 Redo 118
2.2.3 Cut 118
2.2.4 Copy 118
2.2.5 Paste 118
2.2.6 Separate Parts 119
2.2.7 Select All 120
2.2.8 Unselect All 120
2.2.9 Invert Selection 121
2.3 View Menu 121
2.3.1 Toolbars 123
2.3.2 Zoom Functions 123
2.3.3 Orbit Tool 125
2.3.4 Default Top Down View 126
2.3.5 Viewing and Rendering Options 126
2.3.6 The Coordinate System 131
2.3.7 Measure Point, Radius, Length and Angle 135
2.3.8 Layer Management 136
2.3.9 Layer translation 137
2.3.10 Part Info 143
2.3.11 OmniWin Options 145
2.3.12 Document options (CAD Options) 169
2.3.13 Customize visible items 175
2.4 Show Menu 176
2.4.1 Grid 177
2.4.2 Absolute CS 178
2.4.3 Relative CS 178
2.4.4 CS Null 178
2.4.5 Show Start-End Marker for Contour Elements 178
2.4.6 Drilling Holes 179
2.4.7 Manipulators 179
2.4.8 Manipulators for easy copy, move, rotate 180
2.5 Draw Menu for Part Construction 188
2.5.1 Point 189
2.5.2 Drill Point 190
2.5.3 Line Commands 190
2.5.4 Circle Commands 192
2.5.5 Arc Commands 195
2.5.6 Ellipse Commands 196
2.5.7 Rectangle Commands 198
2.5.8 Polygon Commands 199
2.5.9 Text 200
2.6 Draw Menu for Nesting 205
2.6.1 Auto Remnant Plate 206
2.6.2 Draw Remnant Plate 213
2.6.3 Delete Remnant Plate 214
2.6.4 Cut Remnant Plate 214
2.6.5 Change Remnant Plate Cut 215
2.6.6 Line Commands 216
2.6.7 Circle Commands 216
2.6.8 Arc Commands 216
2.6.9 Rectangle Commands 217
2.6.10 Change Plate Size 217
2.6.11 Trim plate contour 217
2.6.12 Rotate Plan 218
2.6.13 Mirror Plan 218
2.7 Dimension Menu 218
2.7.1 Horizontal Linear 219
2.7.2 Vertical Linear 220
2.7.3 Aligned 221
2.7.4 Angle 221
2.7.5 Radius 222
2.7.6 Diameter 222
2.7.7 Comment 223
2.7.8 Edit Text 224
2.8 Modify Menu for Part Construction 225
2.8.1 Move 226
2.8.2 Copy 227
2.8.3 Rotate 227
2.8.4 Erase 229
2.8.5 Horizontal Array 229
2.8.6 Vertical Array 230
2.8.7 Array 231
2.8.8 Polar Array 231
2.8.9 Nest Array 232
2.8.10 Trim 235
2.8.11 Chamfer 235
2.8.12 Fillet 236
2.8.13 Extend 237
2.8.14 Scale 237
2.8.15 Mirror 237
2.8.16 Offset 238
2.8.17 Bridge 238
2.8.18 Convert text into closed, simple or continued contours 239
2.8.19 Align Text to Circle 240
2.8.20 Join 242
2.8.21 Join All 242
2.8.22 Explode 242
2.8.23 Explode All 242
2.8.24 Break 243
2.8.25 Toggle Break 243
2.8.26 Approximate - Conversion of Straight Contours into Arcs 244
2.9 Modify Menu when nesting 247
2.9.1 Erase 248
2.9.2 Set Rows 248
2.9.3 Matrix 249
2.9.4 Move 249
2.9.5 Copy 250
2.9.6 Collision control 250
2.9.7 Rotate 250
2.9.8 Mirror 251
2.9.9 Bridge 251
2.9.10 Link 252
2.9.11 Common Cut 1 Contour 253
2.9.12 Common Cut 2 Contours 257
2.9.13 Stitches: Single Stitch - Multiple Stitches 258
2.9.14 Loops - manual/automatic 260
2.9.15 Pre-piercing geometries 262
2.9.16 Common Cut 1 Sequence 268
2.9.17 Common Cut Position 270
2.9.18 Delete Technology 270
2.9.19 Set Left, Set Right, Set Top, Set Bottom 271
2.10 Snap Menu 271
2.10.1 Grid options 272
2.10.2 Snap Modes 272
2.10.3 Snap Release 274
2.11 Nest Menu 274
2.11.1 Create Combined Part 275
2.11.2 Transfer technology from selected part 277
2.11.3 Update Plan With Database Parameters 278
2.11.4 Update Plan with active workspace part 278
2.11.5 Place Lead-in/Lead-out 280
2.11.6 Rotate Lead-in/Lead-out 281
2.11.7 Delete Lead-in/Lead-out 281
2.11.8 Cutting Sense 281
2.11.9 Disable / Enable Contour 282
2.11.10 Automatic Sequence 282
2.11.11 Set Contour Sequence 283
2.11.12 Set Toolpath Sequence 286
2.11.13 Heat Distribution Sequence 286
2.11.14 Set Part Sequence 290
2.11.15 Simulation 293
2.11.16 Show Part Names 294
2.11.17 Show Start Points 295
2.11.18 Set Plate Null 295
2.11.19 Nesting Plan Options (without bevel support) 295
2.11.20 Production Time 325
2.11.21 View / Edit Current Plan Info 326
2.11.22 View / Edit Process DB 327
2.11.23 View / Edit Drill DB 336
2.11.24 Start Auto Nest 336
2.12 Help Menu 336
2.12.1 Licensing 337
2.12.2 Registration 339
2.12.3 Dongles and Licenses in OmniWin 339
3 OmniWin – Advanced Functions 343
3.1 Macros 343
3.1.1 Modified macros 349
3.2 Automatic Nesting 349
3.3 OmniWin-Database (Parts, Plates, Plans, Profiles) 353
3.3.1 Database Dialog Window 353
3.3.2 Menu Database 354
3.3.3 The Key Symbol in the Part Record 368
3.3.4 Working with records and displaying the lists 368
3.3.5 View and filter options 374
3.3.6 Multiple records selection 374
3.4 Profiles for saving configuration settings 375
3.4.1 Creating a profile 376
3.4.2 Activate a profile (Load the settings) 377
3.4.3 Changing a profile 377
3.4.4 CAD Profile 378
3.4.5 Import Profile 379
3.4.6 Machine profile 380
3.4.7 Bevel profile 382
3.5 MultiTorch operation 383
3.5.1 Basic steps for creating a multitorch nesting plan 384
3.5.2 The Multitorch Menu 384
3.5.3 Multitorch Options Dialog 386
3.5.4 Definition of GC position (left/right) 388
3.5.5 Configuration of carriages for marking 389
3.5.6 Configuration of one carriage for marking 389
3.5.7 The Multitorch Dialog – Setting the Carriages 390
3.5.8 Standard scenario example – Multitorch machine with 3 carriages 392
3.5.9 Multiple torch operation with automatic nesting 398
3.6 Bevel Functions 399
3.6.1 Bevel types, cuts and parameters 399
3.6.2 Constructing parts with bevels 402
3.6.3 Advanced (bevel) nesting plans 416
3.6.4 Importing/Exporting of parts and nesting plans with bevel support 449
3.7 Customize Technology Databases - the PerfectCut Editor 451
3.7.1 Material and Material Groups 452
3.7.2 Macro parameters 455
3.7.3 Compensation values 461
3.7.4 Save changes in PerfectCut Editor 465
3.8 Support of drilling heads 465
3.8.1 Function “Drill Point” in the Drawing menu 466
3.8.2 Object Info Dialog Box for the Process “Drill” 469
3.8.3 Adjusting the Drill Database MGDrillDB.mdb 470
3.8.4 Adjustments for drilling tapped holes 474
3.9 Messer Hole Technology 475
3.9.1 Using the Messer Hole Technology 476
3.9.2 Configuration and Process database 476
3.10 Tubes and tube connections (Option Tube) 480
3.10.1 Functions for the cutting of tubes 482
3.10.2 Manipulation of the view of a 3D object 502
3.10.3 Cut selection with / without axis rotation 503
3.10.4 Functions for tube joints 504
3.11 Boiler End for bevel cutting of formed ends (Option) 521
3.11.1 Technical Requirements 521
3.11.2 Installation of the option Boiler End 527
3.11.3 Procedure for generating the cutting geometry 528
3.11.4 Configuration 544
4 Technical Appendix 547

4.1 Appendix A: Postprocessors (PPs) 547
4.1.1 Installation 547
4.1.2 Which Postprocessor should I use? 548
4.1.3 Allocation of the postprocessor to the plan 551
4.1.4 Modifying the PP settings 553
4.1.5 Saving the Configuration for XSL PPs 554
4.1.6 Summary of the PP settings in the INI files 555
4.1.7 PP settings in den INI files for specific scenarios 558
4.1.8 NC output of code on every launch of a process 573
4.1.9 Configuration for REA text marking 574
4.1.10 Current Postprocessors and PPs from previous versions 581
4.2 Appendix B: The Files NEST.MDB and NESTI.MDB 582
4.3 Appendix C: Importing third party drawing formats 583
4.3.1 Import of Quality information 584
4.3.2 Import of DXF drawings with drill holes 584
4.3.3 Import of MI files from ME10 using a converter 587
4.3.4 DSTV Import 588
4.4 Appendix D: Creation of Custom Macros (Drawing Templates) 592
4.4.1 Creation of the macro drawing in OmniWin 593
4.4.2 Creation of the image for the macro drawing 593
4.4.3 Creation of the HTML script file for the new macro 594
4.4.4 Adding the new macro to the list of available macros 598
4.4.5 Commands for macro construction 599
1 OmniWin - Overview and
Toolbars
1.1 Introduction
The User Manual OmniWin divides into four chapters:
OmniWin – Overview and Toolbars

This chapter gives an overview of the features of OmniWin and the basic functions. It
describes the main window, the most important dialogs and the toolbars in OmniWin. In
addition you'll see what you can do to adapt the user interface of OmniWin according to
your needs.
The chapter also contains the basic steps for part construction and for creating a nesting
plan.
OmniWin – Menus and Functions

This chapter describes the Menus and the respective functions.
OmniWin – Advanced Functions

This chapter describes advanced functions some of which are not included in the standard
product scope of functions. Some of the functions become available in OmniWin Enhanced,
OmniWin Professional or even after purchasing additional options. These include e.g.
automatic nesting, drill support or the technology functions.
OmniWin – Technical Appendix

This chapter contains information on the postprocessors and explains special topics, such as
the import of drawings created with third-party applications.
1.1.1 Scope of functions and Options

OmniWin is available as OmniWin Standard OmniWin Enhanced and OmniWin Professional.
OmniWin Standard is the basic package and offers all important functions for numerous
cutting tasks. The Standard version already includes extended functions such as multiple
torch operations or Messer Hole Technology, for example.
OmniWin Enhanced offers all the functions of the Standard Edition. It also includes the
following function:
> Automatic Nesting
OmniWin Professional contains the following functions in addition to OmniWin Enhanced:
www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 12

> Technology functions (Bridge, Link, Common Cuts, Stitches, Remnant plate generation)
> Support of the drilling functions and drill units
> Bevel functions and creation of bevel nesting plans for further processing with OmniBevel
The range of functions can be extended by the purchase of further Options for special
applications:
> Option Boiler End: Cutting of cylindrical penetrations on dished ends
> Option Tube: Cutting of tubes and tube connections
> Advanced (bevel) nesting plans: To work with advanced nesting plans, you need an
OmniBevel license in addition to your OmniWin license.
The complete functionality is described in this documentation, including all options.
You need a Dongle (Software hard-lock plug) to be able to use OmniWin. This is part of the
scope of supply and contains information about the functions available.
1.1.2 OmniWin – Summary of functions

The OmniWin software package is an easy to use program for the creation of nesting plans
for thermal cutting with the oxyfuel, laser and plasma processes on CNC machines.
OmniWin offers extensive functions – the scope available on your system depends upon the
package purchased, possibly with further options.
You can use the following functions and components:
CAD-System
A powerful CAD system especially conceived for the design of parts for thermal cutting is
integrated in OmniWin. This offers typical editing functions such as Zoom, Undo / Redo, Cut
out / Copy / Paste, Select / Deselect / Invert selection. Additionally you can work with various
coordinate systems (absolute and relative, orthogonal and polar).
Make use of the 3D volumetric view for construction - a visual representation is especially
useful when you create parts with bevels.
Macro Functions
You can create parts quickly and easily using the parameterized macros in the Macro
functions.
Nesting and Autonest

In the Standard version, OmniWin offers functions for the manual nesting of parts onto a
plate on screen. The extension “Autonest” lets you automate the nesting process.
When nesting OmniWin switches from the design mode into the nesting mode. The specific
functions in the menus and toolbars are then modified so that the functions necessary for
each purpose are always available.

When nesting you will use a number of individual functions, so you can, for instance, nest
parts individually or in groups, move, rotate, duplicate or mirror parts. For example you can
set the cutting sequence within a nest or also set an automatic distance control for the parts.
Import / Export functions

With these you can take over files from other systems or export to them, e.g. to other CAD
systems, or you can import/export DIN or ESSI code directly:
> Importing parts from DXF-/DWG-/IGES/XML formats, incl. import of meta data (e.g. part
information stored on extra layers).
> Importing of DIN and ESSI code as drawing or plan,
> Exporting to DXF and DWG
With contour recognition you can also import Pixel graphics (e.g. bmp or png).
Print output
Printing out of nesting plans and part drawings
OmniWin database
The OmniWin database (PartLib.mdb) includes:
> Profile for saving individual configurations
> The part library
> The nesting plan library
> The plate library
The libraries make possible simple administration as well as the direct saving and calling of
plates, parts and nesting plans. Parts need not, for example be saved externally as DXF or
DWG files, rather the administration takes place directly in the system. Stored plates can also
be called directly for nesting, or you can save remnant plates you have generated or make
customer specific plate libraries.
Technology Database
The Technology database contains cutting parameters for machines and takes these into
account automatically during nesting depending upon the material, plate thickness and
cutting process. In all this special processes such as Messer Hole Technology are also
implemented.
Bevel support
Using the bevel functions in OmniWin it is possible to set bevels on part contours while
designing them in the CAD Editor. As an extended function you can create nesting plans
with bevel information.
NC Code creation
You can export your nesting plans directly a NC code with the corresponding postprocessor.

Multiple torch support
With the functions for multiple torch support you can determine the number and behavior
of the torches with which you want to cut simultaneously. Certain parameters (e.g. spacing
of the carriages) can be optimized automatically.
Support of drilling heads

Drilled holes are given special consideration during the design of the part in the CAD Editor
and technology data with drilling parameters is available in a separate database.
Tubes and tube connections (Option Tube)

This option offers special functions for the cutting of tubes and tube connections with or
without a rotation axis (Surface or projection cut).
Boiler End for the cutting of dished ends

With the option Boiler End it is possible to create penetration cuts and to output them as NC
codes for the bevel cutting of dished ends using the Plasma Skew Rotator from Messer
Cutting Systems.
1.1.3 Installation
> To install OmniWin, start the program Setup.exe on the OmniWin product medium and
follow the Installation Wizard.
For a complete description of the installation process, please refer to the Quickstart
documentation on the OmniWin product medium in the /doc directory in the corresponding
language directory. The Quickstart documentation will provide current information regarding
system requirements.
1.1.4 Documentation
The OmniWin user manual is available as Online Help and PDF with identical wording. You
can access the Online Help in the "Help" menu, by clicking "Help Contents". The PDF
version is available on the OmniWin product medium.
The user documentation for OmniWin is updated regularly. However, it may not always
reflect the most recent state of the software. This may be the case especially with respect to
screenshots and graphics.
Differences between your system and the documentation may also occur because certain
functions and options are not available on your system (see also „Scope of functions and
Options“ on page 12.).

1.1.5 User qualification
To operate OmniWin, basic skills in the use of the operating system Windows are required.
To work with OmniWin in the most efficient way, we suggest you attend a training course.
1.2 Basic operation

1.2.1 Main Window of OmniWin
After calling OmniWin for the first time, the following window is shown:
The OmniWin Main window consists of the following areas (from top to bottom):
> Title bar
> Menu bar,
> several toolbars,
> Dialogs grouped to the left: Workspace, Macro dialog and Database dialog.
The display and grouping of the dialogs can be configured (see chapter “Combining
Dialog Windows into Groups” on page 33).
> Area for drawings/nesting plans,
> Dialogs grouped to the right: Object Info dialog, Technology dialog and Multitorch dialog
(if enabled).

The display and grouping of the dialogs can be configured (see chapter “Combining
Dialog Windows into Groups” on page 33).
> Command Line Dialog
> Status Bar
1.2.2 Configuring the program window

The various toolbars and the dialog boxes can be moved with the mouse and positioned at
any desired place on the edge of the drawing region or even within drawing region. By
pulling to any of the four edges of the drawing region the toolbar and dialog boxes can be
anchored there (see also chapter “Adjusting Dialog Windows” on page 32). When
positioned inside the drawing region, unanchored windows whose size and shape can be
configured, are created.
To move an anchored toolbar, click on the drag bar
at the left-hand of the toolbar and move it with pressed mouse key.
To move an unanchored toolbar or an anchored or unanchored dialog box, click on the title
bar and move it with pressed mouse key.
To gain more space for the drawing region, you can also close dialog boxes which are not
needed for the operation, and in addition the view of the individual toolbars can be
switched on and off with the help of the functions in the sub-menu “Toolbars” in the
“View” menu:

Toolbars, bars and dialogs which are switched on, i.e. visible, are marked with a tick. For a
description of the individual toolbars see chapter “Toolbars in Detail” on page 68.
The toolbars available in the "View" menu differ – depending on whether you are working
in a drawing or a nesting plan.
OmniWin saves the last values set such as the size and position of a toolbar or a dialog box.
If you work with profiles the layout of the toolbars is stored in the profile.
1.2.3 Command Line Dialog

The “Command Line Dialog” (Command Dialog) is divided into two areas:
> the command input line, (bottom)
> the list box of the previous commands and Inputs (Report Window) (top).
In the “Command Input Line” you will find the commands which you selected by
> Picking a function in the menu system,
> Entering the key combination (short key) for a function
> Clicking on certain symbols in the toolbar
Whereby only those commands which require a further manual input can be repeated in this
line, e.g. the coordinates of a point. Commands which require no further manual input
appear directly in the list of previously entered commands and inputs.
You will always land automatically in the command input line with the tab key.
The last draw or modify command can be repeated with <Enter>, i.e. it appears a new in the
input line.
Calculation functions in the coordinate input

In the coordinate input it is possible to make simple calculations. Besides the four
fundamental operations of arithmetic ( +, - , * , / ) with which you can perform for example
expressions like 193.5/3-25, 64+2*3, also the following operators and modes of operations
are available:
> ^ , ( , ) , < , > , = , ? ,:
> sin, cos, tg, ctg, sqrt, exp, abs, grad, rad, ln, lg
Example:
(tg(0.5)<sin(1))?1:0:
If tg(0.5) less than sin(1), then the result is 1, in the other case 0
Each coordinate input with calculations must have outer brackets. For input of angles degree
arguments are to be used.

If coordinates have to entered in a command, you can directly enter numbers, brackets and
the “+“ and the “-“ sign without having the cursor in the command line. Entering one of
these signs, the cursor directly goes into the command line.
1.2.4 Object Info Dialog

The “Object Info” dialog does not only show the various attributes and their values for
selected elements in a drawing (under "Selected Objects" in the illustration example for a
line)
but also the administration data specified with the function “View / Edit Current Part Info”
in the View menu in a file called ”Part Info”:

as well as - under the Part Info file “Geometry” - the geometry data (Length, Width, Area),
the weight, the cut length and – if present – the marking length, as well as the gross area
and gross weight of a part. The prerequisite for being able to calculate a value is the
existence of correct values for the material and the thickness.
If several elements are selected then only common attributes will be displayed.
Certain geometry parameters such as length, width, cutting length and

marking length as well as selected numerical parameters (for example area,
weight, quantity) can be taken directly from the Part Info dialog into the
pocket calculator of the Macro dialog.
The Part Info can be edited not only with the function “Document info“ in the view menu,
or the symbol in the coordinate system Toolbar, but also directly in the object info
area.
The parameters which can be edited are prefixed with the symbol . To edit a parameter,
click on the value column of the parameter as in the following example for a “Part Info”:

The values for Material and Thickness can be selected from a Listbox.
In addition to the Part Info parameters, it is also possible, if one or more contour elements
have been selected in the part drawing, to define the process allocated to the selected
element(s) from a listbox in the “Selected Objects“ directory:
If only on contour element has been selected then you can only edit the geometry for this
element (in the example an arc segment element):

Changes to the geometry can be reversed with the Undo function.
1.2.5 Plan Info Dialog

As soon as a new plan is created or an existing plan is loaded, the Plan Info dialog appears at
the place where the Object info dialog appears when creating drawings. This contains the
most important plan data and is broken down into the following three directories:
Under “Plan Info” you can find all information which relates to the plan as a whole, as in the
following examples:

The parameters which can be edited are prefixed with the symbol . To edit a parameter,
click on the value column of the parameter. The values for Material and Thickness can - if
editable - be selected from a Listbox.
In the “Geometry” sub-directory of the Plan Info can be found the geometric dimensions of
the plate, the number of lead-in lines, the area used, the sum of all part areas, as well as the
cutting and marking lengths, the length of all rapid traverse paths, the plate weight, the
rectangular plate area used for nesting and the sum of the weights of all parts. You can find
further information about the functions related to plate utilization under “Plate utilization”
on page 30.
In addition, production times and a production statistics are displayed for the plan. The
prerequisites for being able to calculate a value is the existence of a process, a material and a
thickness for the plan. For further information please refer to Production Time on page 325.

The sub-directory “Nested Parts” shows the total quantity and the individual quantities of all
parts nested.
The second directory, “Workspace”, contains the number of parts in the workspace as well
as a sub-directory “Active Part” with the part info data, that is the administration data
allocated with the function „View / Edit Current Part Info” in the View menu for the part

selected in the workspace, as well as the geometric data and weight, cutting and marking
lengths of this part, as in the following example:
The directory ”Selected Objects“ contains the administration and geometry data for a single
part selected on the plan:

Certain geometry parameters such as length and width of the plate, cutting
lengths and marking lengths for all parts as well as selected numerical
parameters (for example area, weight, quantity) can be taken over directly
from the Plan Info into the pocket calculator of the Macro dialog.
The Plan Info can be edited not only with the function “View / Edit current plan info“ in the
Nest menu, or the symbol in the Nest Toolbar, but also directly in the object info area.
The Plan Info Dialog can be switched on and off with the sub-menu of the “View” menu in
the nesting mode:

1.2.5.1 Process Material and Plate Material
A nesting plan can be assigned two types of materials:
> Process material
> Plate material

The process material defines the material of the nesting plan. It is selected from the database
and related to the process data.
The plate material is the original material of the plate. It has no effect on the process data
used for the nesting plan or other calculations – it is mainly intended for information.
Both, the plate material and the process material can be viewed in the Object Info Dialog of
the nesting plan and can be used in reports, or for exporting plan information etc. The
“Plate Material” field can be editable in the Object Info Dialog or not, depending on the way
the plan/plate was created.
Create a nesting plan based on a plate stored in the database:

If you create a plate and save it to the database, the selected material will be stored as plate
material.
The selection list contains the relevant materials from the process database, i.e. these are the
same materials that can be used as process material for nesting plans.
When a nesting plan is created based on the plate, the plate material will be suggested as
process material, but you can select another process material, if necessary.
The „Plate Material“ field in the Object Info Dialog will not be editable in this case. To
change the plate material for the plan, you need to modify the plan record on the Database
tab.
Create the plate when creating the nesting plan:

When you create a nesting plan from scratch, you create the related plate at the same time.
A plate created this way will not be stored in the database. Select the material, thickness and
the process for the nesting plan. The same material will be used as plate material for a start.

To change the plate material edit the “Plate Material” field in the “Plan Info” dialog (when
started from the “Database” tab) or in the Object Info dialog. You can enter any text (i.e.
there is no selection of available materials).
Changing the process material

If you select a different process material for an existing nesting plan later on, the plate
material will not be changed automatically.
Changing the plate material for several objects

Use the functions for changing several records on the Database tab to modify the plate
material for several plates or nesting plans in one step (see also Multiple records selection on
page 374.).

1.2.5.2 Plate utilization
The Plan Info Dialog includes parameters under the node “Geometry” that show the area of
the rectangle circumscribing the area required for the nested parts on the plate:
> Min required plate length (mm/inch)
> Min required plate width (mm/inch)
> Rectangular plate utilization
“Min required plate length” and “Min required plate width” represent the dimensions of a
surrounding rectangle which includes all nested parts, lead-ins, lead-outs, join macros and all
bevel cuts. This does not consider the distance from the part to the plate edge, which needs
to be added when calculating the required plate size, if necessary.
“Rectangular plate utilization” represents the area of the surrounding rectangle.

Please note that for the metric system “Rectangular plate utilization” is calculated in square
meters while length and width are calculated in millimeters.
You can include these parameters as well in the report templates in the export of nesting
plan information.
Export
The parameters are available when you export plan information to csv. They are included in
the “Plan Overview” and “Plan Properties” templates:
For further information please refer to the chapter Export on page 97.
Reports
The parameters can be included in customized reports:

For further information please refer to the chapter Reporting on page 104.
1.2.6 Adjusting Dialog Windows
1.2.6.1 Docking of Dialog Windows with the help of Marks (Stickers)
Dialog windows such as the Macro dialog, the Object-Info Dialog and the Nest dialog can be
docked to the left, right, top or bottom edge of the drawing area using marks (stickers). If
you click in the title line of such a dialog window, you can move it as long as you hold the
mouse button pressed. As this is happening, marks appear at the left, right, top or bottom
edge of the drawing area with which you can dock the dialog window at the required edge
by moving the mouse cursor onto the mark and then releasing the mouse button.

When docking to the left or right of the drawing area the command line dialog, which is
normally at the bottom edge of the drawing area will be cut off.
On moving the dialog window towards the middle of the drawing area an additional group
of four marks appear, which also allow docking at the left, right, top or bottom edge of the
drawing area, if the mouse cursor is moved onto the appropriate mark and then the mouse
button is released. In this case when docking at the left or right edge, the command dialog
box will keep its size and not be cut off.
1.2.6.2 Switching between widow and docked positions of a dialog

window by double-clicking
Instead of changing the view (docked position / free window position) of a dialog window
such as the Nest dialog and the Macro dialog by using the two functions “Nest docked
view” and “Macro docked view”, this can be achieved by double clicking with the mouse in
the title line of the dialog window.
1.2.6.3 Combining Dialog Windows into Groups
Dialog windows such as the Macro dialog, the Object Info Dialog and the Nest dialog, can
be combined into groups. Thus when OmniWin is called, the Object Info Dialog and the Nest
dialog are combined into one group:
The dialog window required is called into the foreground by clicking on one of the card
riders at the bottom edge. The sequence of the card riders can be changed by moving a card
rider with the mouse button pressed.

To separate the two dialog windows you must click one of the card riders and, with the
mouse button still pressed, pull it away. As soon as you release the mouse button the dialog
which has been pulled away will appear as a separate window.
To combine two separate dialog windows, click in the title line of one window and, with the
mouse button still pressed, pull it in the direction of the middle of the window with which
you wish to form a group. Then, in addition to the four docking marks at the edge of the
drawing area (see also chapter “Docking of Dialog Windows with the help of Marks
(Stickers)” on page 32) there will be a group of four marks in the middle of the dialog
window, which permit the docking at the right, left, top or bottom edge of the drawing
window and a further mark in the middle of this group.
If you move the mouse cursor onto this mark and then release the mouse button, the two
dialog windows will be combined into one group.
1.2.6.4 Fixing or Automatically hiding Dialog Windows
Dialog Windows such as the Macro dialog, the Object Info Dialog and the Workspace dialog
now also have a Pin (Pinboard tack) at the right hand end of the title bar. The pin in
this form shows that the window is fixed to the edge. If you click on the pin, the window is
minimized to th edge, as the Object Info and Technology dialog here in the example:

If you move the mouse cursor onto the icon for the hidden window, then the hidden
window opens and stays open as long as the mouse cursor stays within this window. If you
move it out of the window, then the window vanishes again.
If you click on the icon for the hidden window then the window opens and stays open until
the next mouse click.
To fix the window once more, click on the pin again.
1.2.7 Selection of the Functions

The functions or commands in OmniWin can be selected or entered in various ways:
> Each function can be called from a Menu with the mouse. If you are in a function menu
then each function of this menu can be called with a short key (recognizable by an
underlined letter of figure).
Each menu can also be called with a short key.
> There is a Symbol in the toolbar for almost all the sub-menu functions. These are listed in
the subsections of the chapter “Toolbars in Detail” on page 68.
For each function in a menu, the corresponding Toolbar icon – if one exists – will be
displayed to the left of the function text in the menu.
> Some functions in the File menu and all functions in the Edit and Snap menus can be
called with the aid of a Key combination consisting of the <Ctrl> key or the <Alt> key
and a letter. These combinations are shown next to the functions in the menus.
> Additionally, it is possible to define your own short keys (Short keys) with the aid of the
card “Short key” in the function “Options” in the menu “View”. These combinations are
shown next to the functions in the menus as well.
> Almost all functions can be entered as a command in the command input line of the
command line dialog box (see chapter “Command Line Dialog” on page 18).
The functions are described in detail in the menu subsections. There the function
identification in the sub-menus, the corresponding Symbol, the key combination (if there is
one) and the command for the command input line are described.
1.2.8 Notes about the Execution of Functions

Remarks on functions:All functions in OmniWin, regardless of whether they are functions for
part design or nesting, are used in the same way.

> With many functions, after calling the function you will be asked to Select an element or
object (see chapter “Selection of elements or objects” on page 36).
> When executing a function you can go back one step in the operating steps of the
function with the right mouse button, if a function consists of multiple operating steps
(for example in the line function to define the first and second point) This is a reverse
(Undo) action within the function.
If a function consists of only one step then the right mouse button cancels the function.
> The execution of a function can be interrupted at any stage with the <ESC> key.
> The last design (drawing) or change command can be repeated with <Enter>, i.e. it
appears anew in the command line
1.2.9 Selection of elements or objects

With many functions, after calling the function you will be asked to Select an element or
object.
A selection of elements (e.g. with the delete function) can be made before or after the call
of the function with all functions. The request for a selection will always come, even if a
selection has been made in advance. You can then finish the selection with the right mouse
button of make a new or further selection with the left mouse button.
If you want to select particular elements or objects (e.g. parts of a drawing in the part design
of one or more parts when nesting) for an operation then you have the following
possibilities
> To just select a single object, you can click it with the left mouse button. It will then be
displayed in blue and is thus selected.
To select a part in a nesting plan you must click on or near any element of the contour.
If enabled, the Manipulator Tool is shown that allows you to perform certain actions, such
as move, copy, rotate.
If you then click again on another object then this object will be selected and the
previously selected object will be deselected.
> If you want to select several objects one after the other, i.e. to add further objects to the
objects you have already selected, then you must hold down the <Shift> key when
selecting all further objects and simultaneously click the objects with the left mouse
button.
If you not only want to add objects but also wish to deselect already selected objects then
you must hold down the <Ctrl> key and simultaneously click the objects to be deselected
with the left mouse button.
> You can select several objects at once by forming a selection window.
The start point of the selection window can be defined by clicking with the left mouse
button in the drawing window. When forming the window the user has to hold down the
left mouse button. After releasing the mouse button the selection window is defined.

The selection window is always displayed as a rectangle with continuous lines, once it has
been formed.
You have two options when forming the window:
If the window is formed from left to right, then only elements which are completely
located within the window will be selected (“Window” Mode).
If the window is formed from right to left, then everything which is completely in the
selection window and everything which is cut by the selection window is selected
(“Crossing” Mode).
If you want to select several objects by repeatedly forming windows, and add them to
already selected objects, then you also have to hold down the <Shift>-key when forming
the windows.
If you also want to deselect again simultaneously several already selected objects, then
you have also to hold down the <Ctrl>-key when forming the window over the the
objects to deselect.
> If you want to select all objects in the drawing window or in a nesting plan
simultaneously, use the key combination <Ctrl><A> for the "Select all" function in the
Edit menu.
> If you want to deselect all selected objects, this is most easily done with the key
combination <Ctrl><U> for the "Deselect all" function in the Edit menu.
> If you want to deselect all selected objects and at the same time select all previously
unselected objects, this is most easily done with the key combination <Ctrl><I> for the
"Invert all" function in the Edit menu.
1.3 The Workspace - current tasks

The workspace in OmniWin shows all relevant types of objects you are currently working
with:
> Drawings
> Parts
> Combined parts
> Plates
> Nesting plans
Here in the example, you see the parts for nesting in the “Parts” node, and in addition you
see the nesting plan with the parts nested in it.

When you exit OmniWin, your current workspace is saved and reopened when you launch
OmniWin the next time. This workspace information is stored in the OmniWin Process Data
folder. Only the objects stored in the database are remembered in the workspace.
1.3.1 Drawings and parts

The workspace clearly separates drawings and parts.
> A drawing is a CAD construction. It can be saved to a CAD format, such as DXF or DWG.
Drawings cannot be nested, but parts can. To convert a drawing into a part, you need to
save it to the database. You can also create a plate based on a drawing.
> A part is a CAD construction that is stored to the OmniWin database, i.e. it already has
some properties assigned, such as thickness, material or quantity.
It is now always necessary to use the OmniWin database to keep your parts and nestings.
When you work with parts and drawings, OmniWin operates in construction mode, i.e. the
menus show the functions relevant for part construction only.

1.3.2 How to open objects in the workspace
There are several ways to “fill” the workspace:
> Load objects from the database.
> Create a new drawing, or create a new nesting plan. These will become directly available
in the workspace.
> Import stored CAD drawings as parts.
> Open a stored nesting plan XML.
Use Drag and Drop to import parts and plans

Parts and plans can be simply dragged from an Explorer window onto the OmniWin
interface:
When you drag and drop a nesting plan onto the OmniWin interface, the plan will be
directly shown in the workspace and the contained parts will be listed as well.
A CAD drawing will be imported as a part. When you drag and drop a drawing, the Import
dialog opens that allows you to define part properties (see Import on page 86).
Open objects from the database

Load the relevant objects (e.g. parts) in the Database dialog. As you select a checkbox, the
related object will be opened on the instant in the workspace and in the drawing/plan area.

Simply switch to the “Workspace” tab, to see the loaded objects.
To switch between the objects in the drawing/nesting pane, double-click the object in the
workspace you want to show.
1.3.3 Closing objects

To close an object and thus remove it from the workspace, click the “Close” icon for the
object, or use the context menu.
Nested parts can only be closed, if the corresponding nesting plan is already closed.
Otherwise, the context menu item and the “Close” icon are unavailable.
There is also a “Close all” icon available in the Workspace toolbar. This closes all
objects open in the workspace.
If you want to close all objects of a certain object type (e.g. all parts), open the context menu
on the node item, and select “Close all”.

1.3.4 Functions in the context menus
Context menus are available for individual objects and nodes.
1.3.4.1 Objects
The context menus vary depending on the type of object.

“Open/Info/Close” are available for all types of objects:
> Open: Opens the object in the drawing/nesting pane.
> Close: Removes the object from the workspace.
> Info: Shows the Part or Plan info dialog. You can use this to change the object properties.
Other options are available only for some types of objects:
> Create Part: Converts a drawing into a part and saves it to the database.
> Create Plate: Converts a drawing into an empty plate and saves it to the database. Only
elements assigned the layer “Cut” are converted.
> Export: Exports a drawing, part or nesting plan to an external file (e.g. dwg or xml).
> Save: Saves any changes to the part, plate or nesting plan to the database.
> Discard changes: Removes any changes to the part. The part as was stored in the
database is reloaded to the workspace.
> Separate Parts: If a drawing or a part consists of several outer contours, it is split into
multiple drawings. (See also Separate Parts on page 119.)
> Start Auto Nest: Starts the Autonest function. A nesting plan is created first where
necessary.
> Create a nesting: Creates a new nesting plan from the plate. The number of available
plates stored in the database is reduced by one plate.
> Save remnant plate: This is only available for nesting plans after you created a remnant
plate (Draw menu). The remnant is saved to the database and available for further
nestings.
> Generate production data: This is only available for nesting plans. Plan data are exported
to several formats in one step, depending on your settings (see Generate production data
on page 99).

Drawings
Parts
Combined parts
Plates
Nesting plans

1.3.4.2 Nodes
The context menus vary depending on the node type. The functions available perform special
functions or actions for all objects in the respective node.
> Update properties for all drawings/parts: The Part info dialog opens that allows changes
to all objects in the node.
> Save all drawings/parts/plans/plates to database: Saves all objects in the node to the
database.
> Find a drawing/part/plan/plate: Opens a dialog for searching the currently opened objects.
Matches are highlighted in the workspace.
> Update info of all plans/plates: The Plan info dialog opens that allows changes to all
objects in the node.
> Create a nesting: Creates a new nesting plan.
> Add plate: Switches to the Database tab allowing you to open a plate from the database.
> Generate production data for all nesting plans: Data for all nesting plans in the node are
exported to several formats in one step, depending on your settings (see Generate
production data on page 99).
> Close all: Closes all objects in the node.
1.3.5 Autonest from workspace

You can quickly start the autonest function directly from the workspace:
> Open the context menu for a part, a plate or a nesting plan and select “Start Autonest”.
Autonest is available for OmniWin Enhanced and Professional, therefore the autonest
functions will be available with an appropriate dongle.
Plan:
The Autonest function for a nesting plan works the same way as if it was called e.g. from
the Nest menu, i.e. the Autonest dialog is opened.
Plate/Part:
If Autonest is called from the context menu for plates or parts, the dialog for creating a
nesting plan is opened first.
Here, you need to select a process and a machine profile for the new plan. Confirming this
dialog will create a new nesting plan and open the Autonest dialog.

1.3.6 Changing the properties for multiple objects
From the workspace, you can easily update the properties for several objects in one step.
This is only possible for objects of the same type, this example shows the typical procedure
for changing parts:
> Select the parts you want to modify (Ctrl+click).
> Right-click to open the context menu and select “Info”.
> The “Part Info” dialog opens.
Fields that contain values are already common for all selected parts (as the material here
in the example).
Fields that are different for at least one selected part show the entry <varies>. Leaving
such fields will keep the individual value assigned to each part. If you set a value, this will
be applied to all selected parts.
> Enter or select the required value for the fields you want to change and click “OK” to
confirm your changes and close the dialog.
> After closing the “Part Info” dialog, the parts are still selected in the workspace, but
marked with an asterisk to show they are modified. You need to save the modifications to
the database.
> The easiest way to do this is to call the context menu again while the modified objects are
still selected and choose “Save selected”. Or, use the “Save all” icon in the
workspace toolbar.

1.3.7 Display and Configuration Options
1.3.7.1 Workspace Toolbar
The icons in the workspace toolbar change the display options for the workspace or perform
actions for all objects in workspace:
saves all pending changes for all open objects to the database.
closes all objects open in the workspace. If there are modified objects, you’ll be asked
whether to store the changes to the database, or to discard changes.
generates production data for all nesting plans in the workspace.
opens the “Workspace” pane in the OmniWin Options (see Workspace on page 147).
sets the sorting in the workspace. The icon varies depending on the current sorting
(see below).
sets the display options for the workspace.
Sorting objects in the workspace

The objects in a workspace node can be sorted by several criteria.
> Click the arrow next to the icon to select the sort method:
- By name
- By size: The size is defined by the area of the surrounding rectangle.
- By date: The objects are sorted by the time of creation based on the database ID.
> Click directly on the icon to toggle the sort order (ascending/descending).
Display options for the workspace

The “Tree View” display option is the default. It shows thumbnails that depict the actual
object.

1.4 Construction of Parts
Before and during the construction of parts you should
> define the Process-Layer on which the drawing or part of the drawing should be created,
> set the coordinate system depending on the construction conditions and the available
dimensions in your in template drawing,
> note which options are set.
1.4.1 Select Process-Layer

Depending whether your component or parts of the component are to be punch marked,
powder marked or process with the Inkjet, you must select the corresponding Process-
Layer. The Process-Layer for the drawing can be set in the Layer Toolbar (see chapter
“Attribute dialog toolbar” on page 81).
You can set the color, the line type and the line thickness for each individual Layer to set
how that Layer should appear. This is done in the Attributes card in the Options in the View
menu.
1.4.2 Setting the Coordinate System

The coordinate system Absolute Orthogonal is always active initially in a drawing sheet.
Always consider when constructing parts which coordinate system will be easiest to use for
them.
If you need to, you can change the coordinate system with the appropriate functions in the
Coordinate Toolbar (see chapter “CS (Coordinate System) Toolbar” on page 77) or in the
View Menu, or you can manipulate the relative coordinate system with the appropriate
functions in the Coordinate Toolbar or in the View Menu.

1.4.3 Set Options for Construction of Parts
The various options for the construction of parts can be set in the Options dialog. These
include
> settings of filters and special checks on the drawing whenever these are saved or taken
into the list for nesting
> the setting of the sequence of the inner and marking contours
> the pre-selection of the metric or Inch system of measurements
> the setting of the display of the sub-windows for several drawings or plans and the
definition of the background color for the drawing window
> the defaults for the input and output directories for the DXF files
> the settings for dimensioning
> the settings for the attributes for the Process layers selected for the drawing
> the definition of short keys
> the selection of the language
> the presetting of a default font for opening of a text, and determination for the change of
the part- and plan-name after saving, also in the title line of OmniWin and in the Part-
and Plan-Info
> the setting for the NC Import of DIN- and ESSI format files
> the setting of various skins for the appearance of the Icon Bar and the docked windows
and the configuration of the command line dialog box
1.5 Preparation for Nesting and Creation

of a Nesting Plan
The nesting process itself is usually performed in the following steps:
> Create an empty nesting plan.
By doing so you also define the type of nesting plan (for straight cutting or advanced
bevel cutting), a plate to nest on, its size, thickness and material as well as a
machine/cutting process.
> Check the nesting plan options and the process data (databases).
> Select the parts you want to nest from the OmniWin database and open them in the
workspace.
> Nest the parts on the nesting plan (manually or automatically).
> Check and modify lead-in and lead-out lines.
> Check and modify the cutting sequence.
> Save the nesting plan and generate NC code.

1.5.1 Create a new nesting plan
You create a new plan with the function “New nesting plan” in the File menu or with the
symbol in the main toolbar. The following dialog will then open for the definition of
the plan name, the machine, the material, the thickness and the plate dimensions. The input
dialog for a new plan allows the input of information about the job, the programmer and
the customer, as well as the input of specific notes:
Use the “Options” button to directly call the nesting plan options dialog.
After clicking <OK> the plate with the dimensions given will be displayed in the drawing
window:

1.5.2 Define Machine, Plate Material and Thickness
The machine on which the plan is to be cut, as well as the material and the plate thickness
are usually set when you create the nesting plan. These parameters can be set/changed later
in the Nest Parameter Toolbar, if necessary:
Further details see chapter “Nesting Parameter Toolbar” on page 81.
1.5.3 Selecting Parts

The parts to be nested need to be added to the workspace.
The workspace shows all relevant types of objects you are currently working with:
> Drawings
> Parts
> Combined parts
> Plates
> Nesting plans
To add parts to the workspace, they need to be available in the database.
Load the relevant objects (e.g. parts) in the Database dialog.
As you select a checkbox, the related object will be opened on the instant in the workspace.

Simply switch to the “Workspace” tab, to see the loaded objects.
1.5.4 Placing parts on the nesting plan

Start to nest the parts: Drag and drop the parts from the workspace onto the nesting plan.
The Number of parts nested will be shown beneath the part in the workspace.
Part or groups of parts in the nesting plan can be
> deleted
> moved
> copied
> rotated
> mirrored
> nested in the form of a matrix
> automatically moved to the right, left, upwards or downwards
These functions are available in the Modify Toolbar (see chapter “Modify Toolbar for
Nesting” on page 74) and in the Modify menu whilst the nesting plan is active.

1.5.4.1 Lead-ins and lead-outs
Parts placed on the plan receive lead-in and lead-out lines automatically for the outer and
inner contours as set under Options in the “Inner Contour” and “Outer Contour” cards.
You can set the position of the Lead-in and lead-out lines on outer and inner contours
manually, too using the “Place Lead-in/Lead-out” function in the nesting toolbar (see
chapter “Nesting Toolbar” on page 79) or in the Nest menu. Furthermore you can
> rotate individual lead-ins and lead-outs with the function “Rotate Lead-in/Lead-out” in
the Nest menu or the corresponding button in the Nesting Toolbar (see chapter
“Nesting Toolbar” on page 79)
> delete individual lead-ins and lead-outs with the function “Delete Lead-in/Lead-out” in
the Nest menu or the corresponding button in the Nesting Toolbar (see chapter
“Nesting Toolbar” on page 79)
1.5.4.2 Cutting Sequence
When you have completed the nesting plan you should check the Cutting sequence of parts
and change them as necessary. This originally comes from the order in which the parts were
placed on the plan. You can
> automatically redefine this using the function “Automatic Sequence” in the
nesting toolbar (see chapter “Nesting Toolbar” on page 79) or in the Nest menu,
> or set it manually using the function “Set Part Sequence” in the nesting toolbar.
You can also set the Sequence of the contours within a part. The related functions are
located in the Nesting toolbar or in the Nest menu. (see chapter “Nesting Toolbar” on page
79).
1.5.4.3 Saving a plan and generating the cnc format for the machine
Saving the plan and generating the cnc format for the machine is done with the “Save”
function in the main toolbar (see chapter “Main Toolbar” on page 68) and in the File
menu or with the “Save as...” function in the file menu.
If you wish to rework a plan that already exists, you must save it in the XML Format.
To generate the CNC code it is necessary to save in an EIA or ESSI file. This contains the
DIN or ESSI format for the cutting machine.
The CNC code of the nesting plan is output by means of the postprocessor, which can be
selected in the section <Machine Code> of the “System” card of the Nesting plan Options.

1.5.4.4 Customizing lead-in and lead-out lines
After nesting the parts, you can adjust the shape and parameters (length, angle) of individual
lead-in and lead-out lines of nested parts. The lead-line parameters for nesting plans with
vertical cutting are initially taken from the nesting plan options or the part graphics (Layer
Lead-in line/Lead-out). These can be modified later on in the Technology dialog.
> Nest the parts as usual. Initially the lead-ins and outs will be added automatically.
If you have defined leads in the part drawing (Layer Lead-in line/Lead-out), then these will
be taken into the nesting plan, otherwise the leads will be set according to the settings in
the nesting plan options.
> Then select the function “Show Techno contour” in the Technology dialog or in the
Technology menu and click on a lead-in or lead-out line.
You can also use the function “Show lead-in/Show lead-out” in the Technology menu or
in the selection menu of the “Techno contour” button, if you want to select only one
type of lead explicitly.
The lead selected will be highlighted in color. The lead line parameters will be displayed in
the Technology dialog and can be modified there.

> Change the lead type with the selection list “Macro name”.
> Set the parameters:

- P1 – lead length
- P2 - radius
- P3 - angle
You can display graphical information about the parameters (see illustration above) with
the “Help picture” function.

Different parameters are relevant depending upon the lead type
- Straight line (P1, P3)
- Semicircle (P2)
- Quarter circle (P2)
- Straight fillet (P1, P2, P3)
The bevel type “Manual” shows that a lead has been taken from the part graphic. You
can keep the lead unchanged here or select another lead type. Setting of this lead type or
modifying individual parameters is not possible for manual leads in the nesting plan.

Continued cut length
You can specify a continued cut length for all lead-outs (except for “stitch” and “continued
cut”). If you have set a global continued cut length in the nesting plan options, that value
will be used as default here.
For information on how to set the continued cut length for the lead-out type “continued cut
” refer to Lead-out types „stitch“ and „continued cut length“ on page 314.
1.6 Special points for working with open

contours
Open inner or outer contours should be avoided wherever possible for thermal cutting. For
this reason you will find a possibility for checking in the CAD options. (“Don’t allow open
contours” under “Check”).
There are, however, special types of open contours which should be carried out in nesting
plan. These include, for example, slits and separating cuts.
For these cuts no check for open contour will be made if they display a defined start point,
even if the check “Don’t allow open contours” has been activated. The special open
contours will be treated as inner contours and cut before the outer contour. The prerequisite
is the definition of a start point.
1.6.1 Definition of the Start Point for an open contour

You have the following possibilities to define the start point for an open contour:
> Set start point by using a point element, which must be drawn on the Layer “Lead-in”.
> Set start point by using a lead-in element which must be drawn on the Layer “Lead-in”.

By choosing the process, you set whether and how the kerf compensation should be used in
the nested plan.
Open contour with kerf compensation left:
If you define the start point with a point, which is on the layer “Lead-in”, then this contour
will be cut with kerf compensation left. The cutting direction is defined with the start point
element.

Open contour without kerf compensation:
If you define the start point with a lead-in element, then this contour will be cut without kerf
compensation. The cutting direction is defined with the start point element.
1.6.2 Cutting sense and cutting kerf compensation for

open contours
You can easily influence the characteristics of the open contour concerning the cutting
direction and the kerf compensation which are set when designing the part in OmniWin
through the start point element selected in the OmniWin nesting program.
Change kerf compensation
> Click on the cutting sense icon in the toolbar of an open nesting plan.

> Hold the CTRL key down and repeatedly click on an open contour.
The kerf compensation changes on each click (left, right and without kerf compensation).
Kerf compensation left:
Kerf compensation right:

No kerf compensation:
The cutting direction of the open contour can be changed as for closed contours with the
“Cutting direction” command.
1.6.2.1 Example: Open contour with lead-in and lead-out line – no

kerf compensation
Design the open contour with lead-in and lead-out then the lead-in line fixes the start point
of the contour to be cut and the cutting direction. Open contours defined in this way are cut
with no kerf compensation:

1.6.2.2 Example: Defined Start point – Kerf compensation switched
on
Design the open contour with a Start point, which is set on the layer “Lead-in”. The start
point then defines the cutting direction of the open contour. Open contours defined in this
way are cut with kerf compensation active:
1.7 Summary of the Toolbars

The following toolbars are available:
> Main Toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Main Toolbar” on page 68.
> Zoom Toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Zoom Toolbar” on page 69.
> Draw Toolbar:
for Part Construction:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Draw Toolbar for Part
Construction” on page 70.

when nesting:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Draw Toolbar for Nesting” on
page 71.
> Modify Toolbar:
for Part Construction:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Modify Toolbar for Part
Construction” on page 73.
when nesting:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Modify Toolbar for Nesting” on
page 74.
> Snap Toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Snap Toolbar” on page 76.
> Measure Toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Measure Toolbar” on page 77.
> CS (Coordinate System) Toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “CS (Coordinate System) Toolbar”
on page 77.

> Dimension Toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Dimension Toolbar” on page 78.
> Nesting Toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Nesting Toolbar” on page 79.
> Nesting Parameter Toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Nesting Parameter Toolbar” on
page 81.
> Attribute dialog toolbar:
For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Attribute dialog toolbar” on page
81.
> Profiles toolbar:
The Profile bar exist for the Bevel (B-Machine) profile, the Machine profile and the CAD
profile. For the meaning of the individual symbols see chapter “Profile Toolbars” on page
82.
1.7.1 Display of incompletely shown Toolbar

If the individual Toolbars are not completely displayed with the graphic resolution for your
screen, then this will be shown by a small double arrow to the right at the right hand edge
of the toolbar concerned, as in the following example for the Coordinate system toolbar:

By clicking with the mouse at the small downward arrow at the right edge of any toolbar
you like in the same row, you can have the icons displayed, as in the following example for
the Coordinate system toolbar:
1.7.2 Add icons to or remove icons from the Toolbar

In all toolbars icons can be removed or added from other toolbars. On clicking with the
mouse on the small downwards arrow at the right hand edge of a toolbar, the function
“Add or Remove Buttons” appears. After pointing the mouse at this function a sub menu
appears with the names of the toolbars, which appear in the same row. If you move the
mouse onto the name of a toolbar, all the icons of this toolbar and the names of their
functions are displayed, as, for example, for the “Coordinate systems” toolbar. If you click
on an icon it will be removed from the toolbar at once, as will the Checkbox with the tick:
In the same way, i.e. by clicking on a missing function, which can be recognized by the
missing ticked checkbox, you can add back removed icons.

1.7.3 Deactivating and Activating Toolbars with the right
mouse button
Individual toolbars cannot only be deactivated and reactivated with the Toolbar sub menu in
the View menu. This can also be done by clicking with the right mouse button in the area of
the menu and toolbars when the following selection menu, in which the required toolbar
can be deactivated or reactivated:
1.8 Customizing Toolbars and Menus to

suit
Menus and Toolbars can be customized to suit your requirements with the “Customize”
function. Functions and icons can be added to and removed from menus and toolbars.
Further, functions and icons can be moved back and forth or copied between menus and
toolbars.
The “Customize” function can be found in the sub-menu of the function “Add or remove
Buttons” (see chapter “Add icons to or remove icons from the Toolbar” on page 62), which
can be called by clicking the small downwards arrow at the right edge of a toolbar

and in the selection menu which is called by right clicking in the area of the menu and
toolbars (see chapter “Deactivating and Activating Toolbars with the right mouse button” on
page 63):
When the function is called, a dialog opens, which is divided into the areas “Toolbars”,
“Commands” and “Options”.
1.8.1 The Toolbar card in the Customize dialog

Depending upon the operating mode in OmniWin, i.e. design of parts or nesting, only the
corresponding toolbars in the “Toolbars” area can be activated or deactivated.
With the < New... > button you can set up new Toolbars“ with names you choose:
The new toolbar is initially empty
and can be filled with icons using Drag and Drop (see further below).
If the new toolbar is selected amongst toolbars then is can be renamed or deleted using the
buttons < Rename... > and < Delete >:

With the < Reset... > button changes to the menu system and to the toolbars can be
reversed (see in the following chapter “The “Commands” Card in the Customize Dialog” on
page 65).
1.8.2 The “Commands” Card in the Customize Dialog

With the “Command” card you have the possibility to move individual commands from the
various menus by Drag and Drop into any toolbar or menu in which you want it to be:

First select the menu which contains the commands you want to move into a toolbar or
menu under “Menus and Commands”. If you do not know which menu contains the
command you want, then you can also use “All Commands” at the end of the Menus and
Commands. Then click on the function you want and pull it, holding the mouse button
down, into the required toolbar, menu bar or menu. To get into a menu you must first pull
the mouse cursor over the menu name; the menu will then open. Once you have reached
the required destination, release the mouse button and the function or icon appear in the
menu ort he toolbar.
To remove a command from a menu or a toolbar, the Customize dialog must be open. It
does not matter which card (Toolbar, Commands, Options) is active. Click the function to be
removed in the menu or the icon to be removed in the toolbar with the left mouse button
and pull it out of the menu or toolbar with the button still pressed, until a small cross
appears below the mouse cursor. Then you can release the button and the function or icon
has been removed.
What is more, when the Customize dialog is open functions and icons can be directly moved
or copied back and forth between the various menus and toolbars using Drag und Drop. To
copy the left mouse button and the <Ctrl> button must both be pressed and held. When
copying the selected command also remains in its original menu or its original toolbar.
To reverse changes to the menu system and the toolbars, use the < Undo... > button
in the “Toolbar” card. To reverse changes to the menu system, “menu” must first be
selected. To reverse changes to a toolbar, the name of the toolbar concerned must first be
clicked.
When resetting the conditions which applied when the software was installed will be
regenerated.

1.8.3 The “Options” Card in the Customize Dialog
The settings for the display of menus, icons and screen Tips can be modified in the
“Options” card:
Always show full menus: If selected, the complete menus are shown. If deselected, only the
topmost entries in the File, View, Show and Draw menus are displayed. Additional entries
are available only in the extended menu (clicking on the extension arrows).
Show full menus after a short delay: The extended menu is shown automatically after a
moment.
Large icons: Activates the display of large icons in the toolbar.
Show Screen Tips on toolbars: brief explanations will be displayed for the icon when the
mouse cursor is moved onto the icon and paused there.
Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips If a key combination is available for a function, it is shown
in the screen tip as well.
Menu animation: Here, you can set how the menus are formed:
> (System Default): The display of the menus takes place according to the operating system
setting
> Random: The menus will be opened in turn at random in one of the ways listed below
> Unfold: The menus unfold from top left to bottom right
> Slide: The menus unroll from top to bottom
> Fade: The menus fade in evenly
> None: The menus open without animation.

1.9 Toolbars in Detail
The Toolbars listed in the Chapter “Summary of the Toolbars” on page 59 are described in
detail in the chapter which follows.
1.9.1 Main Toolbar

The Main Toolbar contains the most important functions from the menus
> File,
> Edit,
> Window and
> Help.
These include
> Functions for making new drawings, Opening, Saving and Printing of drawings and plans,
> Edit functions for Cutting out, Copying and Pasting,
> Command to undo and Redo the last command,
> Functions for splitting the drawing region into several drawing or plan windows, if several
components are to be edited at once,
> the Options dialog for setting various options for the construction of parts
> the OmniWin Help.
Furthermore the Main Toolbar contains the function “Options ...“ from the View Menu.
The individual functions of the Main Toolbar are:
Function “New Drawing” to create a new drawing
Function “New Nesting Plan” to create a new nesting plan
Function “Open a drawing or nesting plan” to open a drawing/nesting plan available

in the OmniWin format (XML)
Function “Import a drawing” to import parts from other formats (DXF, DWF, DWG or
IGES)
Function “Save” to store a part/nesting plan in the database.
Function “Generate production data”to generate various output formats for a nesting
plan in one step.
Function “Reporting” to print a report for a drawing/nesting plan

Function “Cut” to cut out (delete) selected elements in the drawing and copy them
into the clipboard
Function “Copy” to copy the selected elements in the drawing into the clipboard
Function “Paste” for the insertion of drawing elements, which have previously been
copied onto the clipboard with the ‘Cut’ or ‘Copy’ commands, into the current drawing The
function has no effect for plans.
Function “Undo” for reversing the last 10 commands executed
Function “Redo” for redoing the last 10 Undo commands
Function “Options” for the setting of various options in OmniWin
Function “Help” to show version information for OmniWin
1.9.2 Zoom Toolbar

The Zoom Toolbar contains the Zoom Functions from the View Menu.
The individual functions of the Zoom Toolbar are:
Function “Zoom All” to zoom the entire drawing at the largest scale possible
Function “Zoom In” to magnify the view of the drawing
Function “Zoom Out” to view the drawing at a smaller scale
Function “Zoom Window” to zoom with the aid of a window which is to be formed
Function “Zoom Dynamic” for fast zooming in real time (reducing and enlarging of
the drawing by moving the mouse)
Function “Pan Realtime” for moving the drawing (Panning)
Function “Zoom Center” for moving of an arbitrary point in the drawing window to
be clicked into the middle of the drawing window
Function “Zoom Selected” for zooming of the elements just selected as large as
possible in the middle of the drawing window
Function “Zoom Previous” for reversing all Zoom steps already made, i.e. all previous
zoom steps will be executed in the reverse order

Function “Rotate around center of interest” to activate the Orbit tool The Orbit tool
allows you to rotate the view freely in any direction.
1.9.3 Draw Toolbar for Part Construction

The Draw Toolbar for Part Construction contains the drawing commands from the “Draw”
Menu for Part Construction for the creation of:
> Points
> Lines
> Circles
> Arcs
> Ellipses
> Rectangles
> Texts
The individual functions of the Draw Toolbar for Part Construction are:
Function “Point” for the design of points
Function “Drill Point” for the configuration of drill points
Function “Line” for the construction of individual lines
Function “Multilines” for the construction of a series of lines
Function “Scrap Line” for the generation of a scrap line
Function “Circle: Center, Point” for the construction of a circle with the aid of the
circle center and a point on the circle
Function “Circle: Center, Radius” for the construction of a circle with the aid of the
circle center and the circle radius
Function “Circle: Center, Diameter” for the construction of a circle with the aid of the
circle center and the circle diameter
Function “Circle: 2 Points” for the construction of a circle with the aid of two points
on the circle
Function “Circle: 3 Points” for the construction of a circle with the aid of three points
on the circle

Function “Circle: Tan, Tan, Radius” for the construction of a circle with the aid of two
non-parallel tangents, or a tangent and a tangential circle, or two tangential circles, and the
circle radius
Function “Arc: 3 Points” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid of the start
point, end point and any desired point on the arc
Function “Arc: Start, Center, End” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid of
the start point, center and end point
Function “Arc: Start, Center, Angle” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid
of the start point, center and angle
Function “Arc: Start, End, Radius” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid of
the start point, end point and radius
Function “Arc: Start, End, Angle” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid of
the start point, end point and angle
Function “Rectangle” for the construction of a rectangle with the aid of two
diametrically opposite points
Function “Rounded Rectangle” for the construction of a rectangle with the aid of two
diametrically opposite points and a rounding radius
Function “Ellipse: Center, Point, Angle” for the construction of an ellipse using a center
point, main axis point on the ellipse and an angle
Function “Text” for the generation of a text
Function “View Options Bar“ for toggling the Viewing and Rendering Options bar
1.9.4 Draw Toolbar for Nesting

The Draw Toolbar for Nesting contains the commands from the “Draw” Menu for Nesting.
When nesting, the functions of the drawing toolbar can be used for the
construction of non-rectangular plates. The Functions ‘Point’, ‘Scrap Line’,
‘Ellipse: Center, Point, Angle’ and ‘Single Line Text’ are not used for this so
they are missing in the drawing toolbar for nesting.
The individual functions of the Draw Toolbar for Nesting are:

Function “Auto Remnant Plate” for the automatic creation of remnant plates from a
nesting plan using parameters which can be set
Function “Draw Remnant Plate” for the design of a remnant plate by means of the
Draw functions
Function “Delete Remnant Plate” for removing the remnant plate from the nesting
plan. If the remnant plate has already been stored in the database, it will only be removed
from the nesting plan but remain in the database.
Function “Cut Remnant Plate” for the cut of a defined remnant plate
Function “Change Remnant Cut” for changing the cutting sense for the remnant cut.
Function “Line” for the construction of individual lines
Function “Multilines” for the construction of a series of lines
Function “Circle: Center, Point” for the construction of a circle with the aid of the
circle center and a point on the circle
Function “Circle: Center, Radius” for the construction of a circle with the aid of the
circle center and the circle radius
Function “Circle: Center, Diameter” for the construction of a circle with the aid of the
circle center and the circle diameter
Function “Circle: 2 Points” for the construction of a circle with the aid of two points
on the circle
Function “Circle: 3 Points” for the construction of a circle with the aid of three points
on the circle
Function “Circle: Tan, Tan, Radius” for the construction of a circle with the aid of two
non-parallel tangents, or a tangent and a tangential circle, or two tangential circles, and the
circle radius
Function “Arc: 3 Points” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid of the start
point, end point and any desired point on the arc
Function “Arc: Start, Center, End” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid of
the start point, center and end point
Function “Arc: Start, Center, Angle” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid
of the start point, center and angle

Function “Arc: Start, End, Radius” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid of
the start point, end point and radius
Function “Arc: Start, End, Angle” for the construction of a circular arc with the aid of
the start point, end point and angle
Function “Rectangle” for the construction of a rectangle with the aid of two
diametrically opposite points
Function “Rounded Rectangle” for the construction of a rectangle with the aid of two
diametrically opposite points and a rounding radius
Function “Change Plate Size” for the modification of the size of the plate for a plan
retrospectively.
Function “Trim plate contour” to trim or to delete elements of a plate contour
Function “Rotate Plan” for rotation of a nesting plan with a specified angle
Function “Mirror Plan” for mirroring an empty plan (plate)
Function “View Options Bar“ for toggling the Viewing and Rendering Options bar
1.9.5 Modify Toolbar for Part Construction

The Modify Toolbar for the part construction contains the Modify or Edit commands from
the “Modify” Menu for the part construction.
The individual functions of the Modify Toolbar for the part construction are:
Function “Move” for the moving of drawing elements or drawing objects
Function “Copy” for the copying of drawing elements or drawing objects
Function “Rotate” for the rotation of drawing elements or drawing objects about a
reference point by an angle which can be defined
Function “Erase” to erase elements out of the current drawing
Function “Array” for the (multiple) duplication of drawing elements in the horizontal
direction (X direction) and in the vertical direction (Y direction)
Function “Polar Array” for the (multiple) duplication of drawing elements in a circular
arrangement with the aid of an angle which can be defined

Function “Nest Array” for multiple duplication and insertion of one or more selected
objects into one part or into several parts as an inner contour in the form of a nest pattern
with an offset and angle which can be pre-entered
Function “Trim” for the pruning or trimming and also deletion of elements or objects
Function “Bevel” for placing a chamfer (bevel) on one corner of an object or on all
corners of a connected object
Function “Fillet” for placing a rounding on one corner of an object or on all corners of
a connected object
Function “Extend” for the extension of two elements, until these are closed or
connected to each other
Function “Scale” for the scaling, i.e. enlarging or reducing of objects in the X and Y
directions by the same amount
Function “Mirror” for the mirroring of drawing elements or objects about a mirroring
axis which is to be selected
Function “Join” to merge individual connected objects or elements into one single
object
Function “Explode” to disintegrate a connected object into its individual elements. This
command is the opposite of the Join command
Function “Offset” for the generation of parallel contours with the aid of a defined
offset
Function “Convert Text into closed Contours” to convert a text to a closed contour
(normally for cutting)
Function “Convert Text into simple Contours” to convert a text to a simple contour
(normally for marking)
Function “Bridge” for the construction of a bridge between two contour elements
1.9.6 Modify Toolbar for Nesting

The Modify Toolbar for nesting contains the Modify and Nesting commands from the
“Modify” Menu for nesting.
The individual functions of the Modify Toolbar for nesting are:

Function “Erase” to erase parts on the current nesting plan
Function “Set Rows” for the nesting of parts in row pattern
Function “Matrix” for the nesting of parts in form of a matrix, with a number of
columns and rows which can be defined
Function “Move” for moving parts on the current nesting plan
Function “Copy” for copying parts on the current nesting plan
Function “Collision control” to switch on/off the collision control for nesting
Function “Rotate” for rotation of parts on the current nesting plan about a reference
point by an angle which can be defined
Function “Mirror” for the mirroring of parts on the nesting plan about a mirroring axis
which is to be selected
Function “Bridge” for the definition of bridges between parts
Function “Link” for the definition of linking cuts (chain cutting) between parts
Function “Common Cut 1 Contour” for the creation of a common cut between two
parts. With Common Cut 1 Contour, the common cut creates a single outer contour from
two parts
Function “Common Cut 2 Contours” for the creation of a common cut between two
parts. With Common Cut 2 Contours both parts will, despite the common cut, still be
treated as separate parts. Two outer contours will be created.
Function “Single Stitch” for the definition of individual stitches on the part contour
Function “Multiple Stitches” for the definition of several stitches on the part contour
Function “Multiple Stitches - Use three points” for the definition of several stitches on
a specified contour part
Function “Manual Loop” to add corner loops to parts
Function “Corner loops” to automatically add corner loops to parts
Function “Common Cut 1 Sequence” to permit the sequence of cutting for the part
contour elements in a common cut with 1 contour to be set

Function “Delete Technology” to delete any desired technology object which has been
added (Bridges, Links, Common Cuts, Stitches)
Function “Common Cut Position” permit the relative position of the two parts to each
other along the common cut to be set for any desired common cut.
Function “Set Left” for the automatic movement of parts to the left on the current
nesting plan
Function “Set Right” for the automatic movement of parts to the right on the current
nesting plan
Function “Set Top” for the automatic movement of parts to the top on the current
nesting plan
Function “Set Bottom” for the automatic movement of parts to the bottom on the
current nesting plan
1.9.7 Snap Toolbar

The Snap Toolbar contains all snap commands from the “Snap” Menu.
The individual functions of the Snap Toolbar are:
Function “Snap to grid” to enable/disable the snapping to the grid
Function “Snap to Endpoint” to snap to an end point with the cursor cross-hairs for a
coordinate input
Function “Snap to Middlepoint” to snap to the middle point of lines or arcs as

construction points
Function “Snap to Center” to snap to the centre point of a circles or arcs for a
coordinate input
Function “Snap to Quadrant” to snap to the quadrant point of a circles or arcs for a
coordinate input
Function “Snap to Tangent” to snap to a tangent point on a circle
Function “Snap to Perpendicular” to snap to the perpendicular point on a line, a circle

or a circular arc
Function “Snap to Intersection” to snap to the intersection points of drawing elements

for a coordinate input

Function “Snap to Nearest” to snap the nearest point of a contour
Function “Snap to Ortho” to construct lines in orthogonal mode (0°, 90°, 180° and
270°)
Function “Snap release” to switch on/off all active object snap modes at once
1.9.8 Measure Toolbar

The Measure Toolbar contains all the measurement functions from the “View” Menu.
The functions of the Measure Toolbar are, in detail:
Function “Measure Point” for measuring the coordinates of a point in the drawing
page
Function “Measure Radius” for measuring the radius of a circle or circular arc in the
drawing page
Function “Measure Length” for measuring the distance between two points in the
drawing page. In this way the length of a line can be measured
Function “Measure Angle” for measuring an angle in the drawing page
All measuring functions can also be used on nesting plans.
1.9.9 CS (Coordinate System) Toolbar

The CS (Coordinate System) Toolbar contains the functions for
> the viewing and editing of the current part info
> the management and translation of Layers
> the coordinate system
from the “View” Menu for the part construction.
The individual functions of the CS (Coordinate System) Toolbar are:
Function “View / Edit Current Part Info” for viewing and editing of the administration
data of a part
Function “CAD Options” to define all necessary defaults for part construction
Function “Layer Management” for the management of Layers

Function “Layer Translator” for the translation of Layers
Function “Absolute Ortho CS” for selection of the absolute orthogonal coordinate
system in the drawing
Function “Absolute Polar CS” for selection of the absolute polar coordinate system in
the drawing
Function “Relative Ortho CS” for selection of the relative orthogonal coordinate system
in the drawing
Function “Relative Polar CS” for selection of the relative polar coordinate system in the
drawing
Function “Show absolute CS” to display the zero point of the absolute coordinate
system in the drawing
Function “Show relative CS” to display the point from which the relative coordinate
system is based for the next point input
Function “Autoshift relative CS” to shift the origin for the relative coordinate system
to the current last point input
Function “Align relative CS” rotate and move the relative coordinate system with the
aid of the end point of a line which already exists
Function “Move relative CS” to move the origin of the relative coordinate system
Function “Rotate relative CS” to rotate the relative coordinate system with the aid of
an angle
When nesting the coordinate system toolbar is not needed so it is not visible.
1.9.10 Dimension Toolbar

The Dimension Toolbar contains the dimension commands of the “Dimension” menu.
These include functions for:
> Horizontal, vertical and aligned dimension,
> Dimensioning of angles,
> Dimensioning of radii and diameters,
> Setting of a comment,
> Insertion of a text into a dimension

The individual functions of the Dimension Toolbar are:
Function “Horizontal Linear” for the horizontal linear dimensioning of contour

elements
Function “Vertical Linear” for the vertical linear dimensioning of contour elements
Function “Aligned” for the aligned linear dimensioning of contour elements
Function “Angular” for the dimensioning of angles between two contour elements
Function “Radius” for the dimensioning of the radius of a circle or of an arc
Function “Diameter” for the dimensioning of the diameter of a circle or of an arc
Function “Comment” for setting of a comment to any point of a contour element
Function “Edit Text” for the insertion of a comment into a dimension of a contour
element already set
When nesting the dimension toolbar is not needed, therefore it is not visible.
1.9.11 Nesting Toolbar

The Nesting Toolbar contains all functions of the “Nest” menu, except the “Nest dialog”.
The individual functions of the Nest Toolbar are:
Function “View / Edit Current Plan Info” to display and edit information about the job,
the programmer and the customer, as well as special comments related to a plan
Function “Options” to define all necessary defaults for nesting
Function “Create Combined Part” to create a combined part from selected parts. This
allows you for instance to apply a common cut to a group of two parts. Or, a combined part
can consist of a part with additional technology elements.
Function “Place Lead-in/Lead-out” to set lead-in and lead-out lines at any required
point on the inner and outer contours of parts
Function “Rotate Lead-in/Lead-out” to rotate the lead-in and the lead-out line of a
part, each separately or both together
Function “Delete Lead-in/Lead-out” to delete individual lead-in and lead-out lines on

the inner and outer contours of parts

Function “Cutting Sense” to determine the cutting sense of contours and the tool
offset
Function “Disable/Enable Contour” to disable individual contours in a nested part so

that they are not taken over for cutting or marking
Function “Automatic Sequence” to define an automatic cutting sequence for the parts
Function “Set Part Sequence” for the manual definition of the cutting sequence of
parts in a nested plan
Function “Set Sub-Contour Sequence” for the manual definition of the operating
sequence of the part contours of an individual part in a nested plan
Function “Show Part Names” for the temporary display of the part names in a nested
plan (ESC key to hide them again)
Function “Simulation” for the simulation of the movement of your tool
Function “Show null of coordinate system” for switching on and off the display of the
plate origin
Function “Set null of coordinate system” for plate for setting the plate origin to any
desired place on the plate
Function “Start automatic nesting” for the automatic nesting of parts on a plate.
This icon is only visible, if the option OmniWin-Autonest is enabled on the

OmniWin dongle.
Function “Production Time” for showing the production time in the object
information.
1.9.12 View Options Toolbar

The View Options toolbar contains all viewing and rendering functions. This toolbar is
located directly in the drawing area. It can be switched on/off from the “View” menu or
from the “Draw” toolbar with the icon .
The individual functions are explained in chapter Viewing and Rendering Options on page
126.

1.9.13 Nesting Parameter Toolbar
The nesting parameter toolbar contains three fields for the process, the material and the
thickness of the nesting plan. These parameters are usually set in the dialog “New Nesting
Plan” when you create a new nesting plan, but you can modify them here as well.
1 - M (material) for selecting the material

2 - T(mm) or T(inch) (thickness) for setting the thickness of the plate
3 - P (process) for selecting the process for the nesting plan. The available processes are
defined in the nesting plan options (cards “Machines”/“Process Selection”).
The machine profile and the values set in the process database define, what processes,
materials and thicknesses are available for selection here.
The allowed processes are defined in the nesting plan options under “Process Selection” (for
nesting plans without bevel support). Material and thickness depend on the values available
in the process database. For advanced (bevel) nesting plans, the data are retrieved from the
technology databases, and the thickness is entered manually.
If there are no technology data for a Machine / Material / Thickness combination, that means
no parameters for the collision control, for the lead-in and lead-out line of the inner and
outer contours, and for the sequence, a message will appear.. After confirmation with <OK>
the parameter values for that Machine / Material / Thickness combination are taken as
default values, which has been loaded at last and for which data has been existing. Now you
can make modifications for the parameters in the Nesting Plan Options. If the checkbox
“Save process parameters“ is activated in the “System“ card, the modified data for the new
Machine / Material / Thickness combination will be stored when finishing the Nesting Plan
Options dialog with <OK>.
1.9.14 Attribute dialog toolbar

The Attribute Toolbar contains the Listbox for the selection of the layer, on which the
drawing or parts of the drawing are to be placed:
As default the processes activated in the “On” column of the “Layer Toolbox” card in the
Layer Administration are available,

as in the following example:
The “Color”, the “Line type” and the “Line thickness” of the layer can be set individually for
each process in the Attributes card under Options in the View menu.
If lead-in and lead-out lines should also be designed for a part in OmniWin, then these can
be put on the layer for lead-in and lead-out lines.
1.9.15 Profile Toolbars

Profile toolbars allow quick access to the profiles.
There is a special toolbar for each profile type:
CAD profile:
Machine profile:
Bevel profile:

Show profiles and swap between them
The profile currently in use is shown in the profile toolbar. Use the drop-down list to easily
select another profile:
If you manually change an option that is part of an active profile, the profile name in the
toolbar is marked with an asterisk.
Saving a profile
Use the "Save" button to create a new or update an existing profile.
For further information please refer to „Profiles for saving configuration settings on page
375“ in the chapter „Advanced Functions“.

2 OmniWin - Menus and
Functions
2.1 File Menu
The “File” Menu contains functions to
> Create a new drawing and new nesting plans
> Open, Close and Save Drawings as DXF or DWG files (Import / Export), and Nesting Plans
in XML- or in DIN-format.
> Import parts and plans in DIN- or ESSI code as drawing or as plan
> Extract contours from images
> Create reports for drawings and nesting plans
> Exort data in different formats (Export to CSV, Generate production data)
The individual functions of this Menu are described in the following sub-chapters.
www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Menus and Functions | 84

2.1.1 New Drawing
The function “New Drawing” (Ctrl+N) creates a new drawing in the workspace and an
empty drawing area becomes available.
Command input: NEW
> To switch between several opened drawings, double-click the required drawing in the
workspace.
2.1.2 New Nesting Plan
Use the function New Nesting Plan to create a new nesting plan:
The input dialog allows the input of information about the job, the programmer and the
customer, as well as the input of specific notes.
You can view these information for example in the Plan Info Dialog (e.g. select “View
/ Edit Current Plan Info” from the Nest menu or the Nest Toolbar, or from the context menu
of the nesting plan in the workspace. For further information, please refer to “View / Edit
Current Plan Info” on page 326.
If you want to enter several lines in the Notes field, you have to create a new line by means
of the key combination <Ctrl> <Enter>.
The information about Job, Programmer and Customer can also be included in reports and
thus be printed out (see chapter “Reporting” on page 104).

Advanced (bevel) nesting plan
Use this checkbox to define whether you want to create a simple nesting plan for straight
cutting or an advanced nesting plan with bevel support. This is a basic decision on the
technology data and process that are available for the plan. Furthermore, these two types of
nesting plan have a different scope of features. You'll find a comparison of the available
features in Advanced (bevel) nesting plans on page 416.
Machine (machine or bevel machine profile)

The machine profile contains special settings, such as the definition of which processes are
available, which technology database and postprocessor will be used, and other settings
from the nesting plan options. The selectable profiles and the settings vary, depending on
whether you want to create a simple nesting plan for straight cutting or an advanced nesting
plan with bevel support.
Parameters (Process material, Thickness, Process)

If you have selected a machine profile, you can enter the material and the thickness. Finally,
you select the process. The processes that are available for selection are configured for the
selected combination of material and thickness and enabled for the profile.
Plate
Enter the plate dimensions and the number of nesting plans to be created.
Options
Use the “Options” button to the right to open the nesting plan options dialog. Here, you
can check or modify the properties of the chosen machine profile (see “Nesting Plan Options
(without bevel support)” on page 295 or Nesting plan options for bevel cutting (bevel
profile) on page 434).
2.1.3 Open
The function “Open” (Ctrl+O) opens a part drawing or a nesting plan from the
OmniWin format (XML).
Command input: OPEN
2.1.4 Import
The function “Import” opens drawings from third-party formats and launches the
part import function.
The following formats can be opened in OmniWin:
> DXF
> DWG

> IGES
> DWF
> DSTV (NC, XML)
The part import provides the following functions during the import of external drawings:
> Set part properties (e.g. change part name or define material)
> Add multiple parts in one step
> Easy import by drag and drop
> Preview the part/s before importing
> Use of import profiles to control layer translation and import of administration data
Character support for text import

Generally speaking, you can use all the characters you like in a text in an OmniWin drawing
and are not restricted to the ANSI character set. The text will be saved as a Unicode text in
the DXF format. DXF files with text in Unicode can also be read in into OmniWin.
MTEXT
MTEXT commands can also be read in the DXF-Format.
IGES files
IGES files can only be read in OmniWin. No files in IGES format can be created and stored.
DWF files
In OmniWin also DWF files can be imported. The DWF format is a compressed XML format
from Autodesk.
Special import scenarios are described in Appendix C: Importing third party drawing formats
on page 583.
DSTV support
DSTV files in text format (*.nc) described in DSTV specification version 7/8 and in XML
format described in DSTV specification version 9 can be imported. For further information
please refer to DSTV Import on page 588.

2.1.4.1 Starting the part import
> To import parts, select “Open” from the “File” menu.
> Browse to the directory where the files for import are located, and select the file type.
The window opens in the default path defined in the OmniWin Options on the “Files”
page. If there is no default path set, the window will open in the path from the last part
import.

> Choose an import profile. The import profile contains all the settings from the “Import”
node in the OmniWin Options. You can choose a stored profile, or select “Use current
settings” which will apply the currently configured import options. Please note that the
import profile cannot be changed later on. To create a new import profile, modify the
OmniWin Options (see “OmniWin Options” on page 145.)
> Click to select the file(s) for import. Hold down the Ctrl button while you click, if you want
to select several files, then click “Open”.
> The “Parts Import” dialog opens.
As an alternative to the procedure described here, you can simply drag and drop files from
e.g. the Windows Explorer onto the workspace. When you drag and drop parts, you cannot
select an import profile. The import profile from the last import will be applied in this case.
2.1.4.2 The Parts Import dialog
The Parts Import dialog shows a list of all parts selected for import with some of their
properties, a preview pane and below the import settings for the part selected in the list of
parts.

2.1.4.2.1 List of parts
The list of parts shows all parts selected for import. It allows you to:
> Select a part to show it in the preview pane and change part properties and layer
translation settings (see “Preview pane” on page 91 and “Import options” on page 92).
> Add/remove parts.
> Change settings for individual parts, or propagate settings from one part to all parts
(“Copy to all cells” function).
The cells are editable, you can change e.g. the part name or the material in the table - the
respective field on the “Part Properties” tab is automatically updated accordingly.

If you want to change a field for all parts, use the “Copy to all cells” function in the list. As
an alternative, you can select all parts – the changes in the Part properties tab will then be
applied to all selected parts.
2.1.4.2.2 Preview pane

The preview pane shows an image of the part selected in the list. If multiple parts are
selected, no preview is shown.
Selecting a layer on the layer translation tab will highlight this layer in the preview.
View options
Use the toolbar icons to change the view options and set the start point and the break
points.
Zoom options:
> The Zoom all, Zoom in and Zoom out icons ( ) can be used to change the
preview zoom. Zooming is also possible with the mouse wheel.
Scrolling:
> Hold down the Ctrl key while moving the mouse wheel will result scrolling the preview
vertically.
> Hold down the Shift key while moving the mouse wheel will result scrolling the preview
horizontally.
Toggle dialog layout:
The Toggle preview mode icon ( ) can be used to change the layout of the import dialog.
Focus on editing the list (default) Focus on the preview pane
The background of the preview pane uses the same color as set in the OmniWin options for
the drawing window (here in the example set to “white”).

Break points/Start point:
> The “Toggle break points” icon ( ) allows you to add/remove break points for each
imported file individually.
> The “Start point” icon ( ) allows you to set starting points for each imported file
individually.
> The “Set break point manually” icon ( ) allows you to define break points anywhere
on a contour.
The tabs below (default view) the preview pane contain import settings for individual parts
(“Part properties”, “Layer translation”) or for the entire import process (“Profiles”).
2.1.4.2.3 Import options - Part properties

The Part properties tab allows you to set the properties for the new part. These will be listed
in the Part Info dialog after the import, for example.
Some fields, such as “Part name” or “Quantity” can be edited here, or directly in the import
table grid.
There is no “Nest quantity” (remaining to nest) parameter available here for the import. This
parameter will be set automatically after the import to the value entered in the “Quantity”
field. There is one exception: In case the “nest quantity” parameter is imported as
administration data from an DXF, file it will be used (see ”Importing Administration Data
from a DXF file – Example” on page 164). For basic information on how to import
administration data please refer to „Administration Data“ on page 163.

2.1.4.2.4 Import options - Layer translation
The “Layer translation” tab allows to define layer translations for all layers/colors found in
the selected files.
If you have defined options for automatic layer translation in the import profile (“OmniWin
Options”, “Auto Translation” page), these will be shown in the dialog, if matching
layers/colors are found in the files for import.
If you want to set layer translation options, select the translation mode first:
> Translate by Color and Layer
> Translate by Color
> Translate by Layer
To translate a layer, click the arrow in the process field and select the process for this
layer/color. You can also choose to delete a layer – all items placed on this layer will be
excluded from the import.

The selected layer is highlighted in the preview image, if “Preview selected layers” is
checked.
If “Delete layers that are not translated on import” is selected, all not-translated layers will
be deleted during the import. This option applies to all files in the import list.
“Update auto layer translation table with your choice” will apply the current translations to
the import profile. However, the translation mode is only updated, if “Do not translate” is
chosen in the import profile.

2.1.4.2.5 Import options - Profiles
On the profiles tab, you can see which Import and CAD profiles are applied.
The import profile can only be viewed, changes are not possible here. If you need to select a
different import profile, you need to restart the entire import process and select the import
profile from the file open dialog:

However, the import profile can only be selected upon initial file adding. If you add files later
on to the import list (e.g. by drag and drop or using the “Add” button at the top of the
import dialog), the Import profile cannot be changed either.
2.1.5 Close
The function “Close” closes a drawing, a part or a nesting plan.
Command input: CLOSE
2.1.6 Save
The function “Save” (Ctrl+S) stores the current object in the database.
Command input: SAVE
2.1.7 Export
The function “Export” saves the current part or nesting plan as an external file. The files can
be saved as XML (OmniWin format) or as external formats.
Command input: SAVEAS
The following formats are available:
Nesting plans:
> EIA (CNC code in DIN format for the cutting machine)
> XML (OmniWin format)

Only a nesting plan which has been saved in the XML Format can be opened
again in OmniWin and processed further.
Parts:
> XML (OmniWin format)
> DXF
> DWG
> DWF
Export directory
The export directory defaults to the path set in the OmniWin Options under “Files” (see
chapter “Files” on page 146). If there is no export path set for drawings/plans, the path used
during the last export is preset when you open the dialog.
2.1.8 Export to CSV

The “Export to CSV” function allows you to export information (e.g. part name, number,
delivery date) included in nesting plans to a CSV file. This data can then be further processed
in third-party systems (ERP).
An export template controls which data is exported.
The export to a CSV file can be launched as a separate function or in conjuction with the
generation of further production data (see also “Generate Production Data” on page 99).
2.1.8.1 Export of nesting plan information
> First open or create a nesting plan.

> Select the function “Export to CSV” in the “File” menu.
> Select an export template and enter a target directory for the export.
> Confirm the entries with OK. The current nesting plan will be exported.
The plan name will be used as the file name. The file extension will be defined by the
template.

2.1.8.2 Export templates
The export templates (XSLT) can be found in the program data directory under:
C:\ProgramData\MesserSoft\OmniWin ProcessData 2013\EXP\Plan (default setting).
There is a sub-directory there for each export template. The scope of supply already includes
a template.
Standard export template

The template “Plan Part List” included in the scope of supply generates a CSV file with a
semicolon ; as separator. The basis is the XML file of the nesting plan. All parts included in it
are evaluated a data such as part name, nesting quantity, number, delivery date, total cut
length etc. are written to a CSV file.
Creating your own export template

To create a new export template first make a new directory under “Plan”. The name of the
directory also fixes the name of the export template in the selection dialog. Note that each
directory may contain only one template. It is best to copy the standard template and then
adjust it. To do this you will need knowledge of XML/XSLT.
The file extension for the export file is set in the file name of the xslt file. A template with the
description plan.csv.xslt generates a CSV file, plan.html.xslt generates a file with the
extension HTML. Here not only the file extension is changed however, a text format is also
involved.

2.1.9 Generate Production Data
The Generate production data function generates several output formats in one step.
When you select the menu item, the following outputs are generated, depending on your
configuration:
> Generation of NC code
> Creation of plan XML
> Creation of DXF/DWG files for parts used in the plan
> Reports (PDF or print)
> CSV export of nesting plan data
These can be generated in one step for all opened or for specific nesting plans.
2.1.9.1 Configuration
Before you launch the “Generate production data” function, define which data need to be
generated and whether further actions should be performed after generating.
> Open the OmniWin Options (e.g. by clicking the Options icon in the workspace toolbar).
> On the “Production Data” page, select the items you want to generate.
> If you generate reports, you need to select the required reports.
The files will be created in the output directories set in the machine profile (see “Set path
and file name for the output (machine profile)” on page 101).
2.1.9.1.1 Further post-generation actions

Post actions are executed after the production data have been generated for all selected
plans. The following actions are available:
> Show log
> Open NC code location in Explorer

> Open NC code in Notepad
> Execute external application
Execute external application

Here, any DOS command (e.g. copy) can be used to further process your output. You can for
instance open the generated NC code or other files in a third party application. Make sure
you have included the required items in the process, e.g. you need to have “Generate PDF
reports” enabled for the example below.
> Click the button to select the required executable, or enter the path directly in the
field.
> Clicking the button opens a context menu for selecting tags for the action to be
performed.
When the command line is executed, these tags are replaced with the actual values. Here in
the example, the generated reports will be opened in Adobe Acrobat Reader:
Or, you can copy the generated NC code or XML files or another location for archiving, e.g.:
copy "[xmlfile]" "X:\NC archive\[customer]\[timestamp] [name].xml"
The following tags/menu items are available:
Menu item Tag Meaning

Generated NC code file [ncfile] Complete path to the generated NC code
file
Exported nesting plan XML [xmlfile] Complete path to the exported XML file
file
Generated reports PDF file [pdffile] Complete path to the generated PDF file
NC code location [ncpath] Location configured in the machine profile
Nesting plan XML location [xmlpath] Location configured in the machine profile
Parts DXF location [dxfpath] Location configured in the machine profile
Parts DWG location [dwgpath] Location configured in the machine profile
Nesting plan CSV location [csvpath] Location configured in the machine profile
Reports PDF location [pdfpath] Location configured in the machine profile

Plan name [name] Nesting plan parameter
Machine profile [profile] Nesting plan parameter
Process [process] Nesting plan parameter
Material [material] Nesting plan parameter
Thickness [thickness] Nesting plan parameter
Job [job] Nesting plan parameter
Programmer [programmer] Nesting plan parameter
Customer [customer] Nesting plan parameter
Timestamp [timestamp] Timestamp when the plan was processed
2.1.9.1.2 Set path and file name for the output (machine profile)
The machine profile allows setting the output path and the file names for each generated
object type.
> Click the button to select an output directory for the machine profile.
> Clicking the button opens a context menu for selecting placeholders as part of the
name of the generated file.
2.1.9.2 Generating the production data
When you have configured the function, you can generate the production data for individual
nesting plans, or for all opened nesting plans.
To generate the production data for the current nesting plan:
> Use the icon in the toolbar or the “Generate production data”option from the “File”
menu. These are only available, if a nesting plan is opened.

To generate the production data for all opened nesting plans:
> Use the icon in the workspace toolbar.

Or use the option in the workspace context menu. Depending on the position from where
the context menu is opened, production data for the selected nesting plan, several selected
plans, or all plans in the node are generated.
2.1.9.3 Integrate information into the NC code
You can include information about the nesting plan data in the nc code output as well. This
data can be used for information or for further processing. This function is available for
nesting plans for straight cutting only. The configuration is done in the INI file of the
postprocessor. For further information please refer to Include plan and parts data in the NC
code for straight nesting plans (data log) on page 558.
2.1.10 Import parts and plans in DIN- or ESSI code

Four functions for the importing of parts and plans in DIN or ESSI format as drawings or as
plans are available in the “File” menu:
> Import DIN Code as Drawing...
> Import ESSI Code as Drawing...
> Import DIN Code as Plan...
> Import ESSI Code as Plan...
When a DIN or ESSI code is imported as a Drawing, the contents of the DIN or ESSI file are
available as a drawing in OmniWin and can be processed and stored as a DXF or DWG file.

When a DIN or ESSI code is imported as a Plan the contents of the DIN or ESSI file are
available as a plan in OmniWin. This plan can then be processed further (e.g. draw in the
plate, nest further) and saved as a plan in XML format and/or in NC format.
The settings for the DIN and ESSI import as well as for the recognition of lead-in and lead-
out lines and of contours as parts, and for the taking of parts into the workspace can all be
made in the NC Import card in the OmniWin options.
2.1.11 Find Contours in Image

With the function “Find Contours in Image” in the File menu Image files in the formats
*.png, *.jpg, *.dib, *.png, *.tif and *.pgm can be read in and contours can be transferred
from them into an OmniWin drawing. When the function is called, a dialog in which you can
select an image file. After a file is opened, the following dialog appears,
in which the image file is displayed on the left and the following parameters can be set on
the left:
> Smooth Method: to select a method of smoothing for photos
> Threshold: The color picture will first be changed into gray tones with a 1/3 weighting of
each of the color tones R(ed), G(reen) and B(lue), i.e. each RGB color pixel will be
allocated a gray pixel with the value 1/3 R + 1/3 G + 1/3 B. Each color tone has a value
between 0 and 255, and thus each gray tone value also has a value between 0 (for black)
and 1 (for white).
The input of a threshold value means that all gray tones under this threshold value will be
set to black and all gray tones with a value above this threshold value to white.
> Minimum Size: Objects in the picture with a pixel size less than the value set will not be
shown.

> Approximation Parameter: The larger this value is, the coarser will be the curve
elements which approximate the contour displayed with straight line elements.
> Negative: If "Negative" is activated, then the gray tones are inverted, i.e. through the
input of a threshold value (see above) all gray tones with a value below this threshold will
be displayed in white, and all gray tones above this value in black.
> Scale: The value 1 means that 1 Pixel corresponds to 1 mm or 1 inch. With a value of 10,
10 Pixels represent 1 mm or 1 inch.
The <Apply> button causes contours to be extracted from the image, using the parameters
set, and displayed in the drawing window as in the example below:
The dialog remains open so that you can observe directly in the drawing window the effect
on the contour in the drawing window of varying the individual parameters when you click
again on >Apply>. When you click on <OK> the contours are also extracted, but the dialog
is also ended.
The contours displayed in the drawing window can be edited and saved as a drawing.
2.1.12 Reporting
OmniWin includes an integrated 3rd-party tool FastReport®.Net for creating reports.
FastReport®.Net lets you create your own reports, or you use the reports already included in
OmniWin.
Command input: PRINT

2.1.12.1 Print, View, Save to File
You can easily print out the plan or part reports, or show a print preview.
Reports for parts and plans

> From the “File” menu, select the “Reporting” menu item. The “Print Reports” dialog
opens.
Reports for plates

> Open the “Database” dialog and select the “Plates” tab. Load the plates you want to
include in the report from the database.
> Click the “Print report” icon in the Database dialog toolbar. The “Print Reports” dialog
opens.

Available report templates
Reports are created from report templates that are filled with the respective plan or part
data.
Which report templates are available in the dialog depends on whether you open the dialog
in nesting or drawing mode, or from the plates overview in the database.
The following standard reports are available in OmniWin:
Report Mode Explanation

PlanOverview Nesting plan Plan overview with parts list
below the plan
PlanOverview_PartListRight Nesting plan Plan overview with a parts list
beside to the plan
PlanOverview_with_Parts_Preview Nesting plan Plan overview with a parts list
with thumbnail preview images
Nesting_with_torch_distances Nesting plan Multitorch summary: Torches
and distances at each stop
PartOverview CAD Information related to the part
PlateReport_A4_Grouped Database Plates grouped by material
PlateReport_Grouped_with_Thumbnails Database List of plates grouped by
material with thumbnail images
PlateReport_Summary Database List of all plates
The reports are available each in US Letter and A4 formats, and most in Portrait and
Landscape orientation.
If you have created your own report templates, these will be shown in the list as well.

Dialog configuration
You can change the order of the report templates. This may be useful if you want to view or
print several reports at once:
> Click to select a template in the list and use the “Move Up” or ”Move Down” buttons to
change the order.
Furthermore, you can toggle whether to show the report templates for your language only,
or for all languages:
> Check “Show reports for all languages” to show the report templates for all available
languages.
Preview/Print/Save to file
Check mark the report(s) you want to preview/print and click the “Print” or the “Preview”
button.
> If you print, the “Print” dialog opens: Select the printer for the output and define the
print options (depending on the printer).
> If you show the preview, the FastReport®.Net viewer is opened showing all checked
reports. You can print directly from the viewer, or save the reports to a file. There are
different formats available, including pdf, html, MS Word.
2.1.12.2 Change the logo
You can easily change the logo for all report templates. This allows you to use your own
logo instead of the Messer Cutting Systems logo, that is used per default in the predefined
report templates. The formats bmp, jpg and png are supported.

> In the “Print Reports” dialog, click the “Change logo” button and then browse to your
file. The path and the new logo are shown in the dialog.
Please note that the file is not loaded into OmniWin but linked by this path. If you remove
the logo file from the referenced location, you need to change the logo again and link to
the new location.
> Confirm your changes with “OK”.
> If you want to return to the Messer Cutting Systems logo again, click “Reset”.
2.1.12.3 Edit report templates
If you need modified reports, you can adapt the predefined templates to your needs. You
will use FastReport®.Net designer, which is included in OmniWin, to change report
templates.
> To change a report template, select the template in the „Print Reports“ dialog and click
„Edit Template“. FastReport®.Net designer is opened.
Please refer to the FastReport®.Net documentation for further information on how to
change the templates.
Before you start editing, you may want to make a backup copy of the original template. As
an alternative, you can also create a new template based on an existing report template (see
“Create new report templates” on page 109).
Report templates location

The report templates are located in the following directories:
> <ProgramData>\Reports\Plan folder for nesting plan report templates.
> <ProgramData>\Reports\Part folder for part (drawing) report templates.
> <ProgramData>\Reports\Database folder for plate report templates.

2.1.12.4 Create new report templates
If you need new reports, you can create new templates either from scratch or based on a
template. You will use FastReport®.Net designer, which is included in OmniWin, to
create/change report templates.
Creating new templates from scratch may require some programming skills. Please refer to
the FastReport®.Net documentation.
> To create a report template click the “Add“ button in the “Print Reports“ dialog. The
“Add report template“ dialog opens.
> Enter a name for the new report template.

> Select a base template. If you want to create the new template based on an existing
template, select the base template from the list. If you choose “<New Template>” an
empty template is created.
> Confirm with “OK”.
FastReport®.Net designer (Report Designer) is opened.

2.1.12.5 Report Designer
FastReport®.Net designer is a third-party tool for creating and editing report templates.
This section explains the relevant data structure for OmniWin reports. For information on
how to work with the Report Designer please refer to the FastReport.Net user manual.
Please note that you use the correct OmniWin mode when you open the
“Print Reports” dialog to launch the Report Designer. If you open the reports
from part construction mode (i.e. open drawing), you can only create reports
for parts. And if you open the reports from nesting mode (i.e. open nesting
plan), you can only create reports for plans.
Reports consist mainly of so-called “Business Object” data source fields. These business
objects are OmniWin data related to parts or plans, such as part name, material, quantity,
etc.
> Drag the fields that are required for a report onto the report area and position and format
them accordingly. While you edit the report template, you can always check the preview
(in the toolbar).

2.1.12.5.1 Part parameters (Business Objects)
The Part parameters available for reporting are basically the parameters from the Object Info
dialog for the part:
There are additional parameters: The “Picture” parameter inserts the part drawing, “Date”
and “Time” are the system time and date, i.e. the time when the report is printed/viewed.

2.1.12.5.2 Plan parameters (Business Objects)
The Plan parameters available for reporting are basically the parameters from the Object Info
dialog for the plan:
The parameters in the “Optical List” node can be used to create a list of nested parts in the
plan. The fields are related to the nested parts. E.g. the “Picture” field in the “Optical List”
node will result in a list of sketches of all nested parts, whereas the “Picture” field in the
“Plan” node inserts a sketch of the entire nesting plan.
Some fields are automatically connected to a header text field. When you drag e.g.
[Plan.OpticalList.PartNumber] to the “Data” section, a text field showing “PartNumber” is
created in the “Page Header” section at the same time.

2.1.12.5.3 Plate parameters (Business objects)
The Plate parameters available for reporting are basically the parameters from the Object
Info dialog for the plate:
2.1.12.5.4 Pictures – plans, parts, logo

Pictures can be images of parts or plans, or logo pictures. The images of parts or plans are
located in the tree structure under the corresponding “business object”, whereas the logo
image constitutes a separate object.
The logo picture will always use the logo as defined under “Change the logo” on page 107.
The pictures representing parts or plans can have additional properties which control how
the picture is displayed (e.g. whether you wish to include rapid traverse lines in a plan, or
whether you want to use colors).

The table below describes the functions related to these properties. Some properties are
available for plans only.
Name Available for Description
BoldMultiplier Part and Plan Line thickness multiplier (all line thicknesses used
are multiplied by this value)
FillParts Nesting Plan Indicates that parts on plan should be filled

when drawn.
ScaleAlignment Part and Plan Allows to define the position of the picture
scale. Simply click to select the required position.
“ShowScale” needs to be enabled for this

setting to be applied.
ScaleColor Part and Plan Sets the color of the picture scale.
ScaleFont Part and Plan Sets the font of the picture scale.
ShowColor Part and Plan Indicates that colors should be used to display
the picture (e.g. tool color, plate border color

etc.)
ShowScale Part and Plan Shows the picture scale
ShowToolType Part and Plan Indicates that picture will use tool line style (e.g.
solid line, dotted line, etc., this can be
configured in OmniWin View->Options-
>Attributes).
UseThickness Part and Plan Indicates that picture will use tool line thickness
(this can configured in OmniWin View->Options-
>Attributes)
PartNameAlignm Plan Text alignment of part name .

ent
PartNameColor Plan Text color of part name (used only if ShowColor

is true)
PartNameFont Plan Font to be used to display part names
PartSequenceAli Plan Part sequence text alignment

gnment
PartSequenceCol Plan Part sequence text color (used only if ShowColor

or is true)
PartSequenceFo Plan Font to be used to display part sequence.

nt
ShowPartName Nesting Plan Whether to print name of each part on plan
ShowPartNumbe Nesting plan Whether to print part number for each part
r
ShowPartSequen Nesting plan Indicates that part sequence should be drawn

ce on picture as well.
ShowTraverseLin Nesting plan Indicates that tool traverse line will be drawn on
e picture as well.

2.1.12.5.5 Inserting barcode elements
FastReport®.Net designer can generate barcodes from your data.
This is an example, where the material is given as barcode in the header and the names of
the nested parts are coded as well.
> To add a barcode element, simply select “Barcode” from the “Insert” menu in
FastReport®.Net designer.
> Drag the field onto the report and link a data object (in the “Properties” pane).
> Set properties and apply formats as necessary.

In the “Appearance” section at the top of the “Properties” pane, the barcode type can be
selected. “Code 39” is the standard which is mostly used, but other formats such as QR
code are possible as well.
Please refer to the FastReport®.Net documentation for further information on barcodes.

2.1.13 Recent Files
The menu item “Recent Files” is only visible on first installation. Later the last four drawing
files or nesting plans saved will be shown here.
2.1.14 Exit
The function “Exit” (Alt+F4) closes the OmniWin program. If drawing files or nesting plans
have been changed then you will be asked here whether the changes should be saved.
2.2 Edit Menu

The “Edit” Menu contains for working with a part drawing functions to
> Undo Commands and Redo commands
> Edit drawing elements (Cut / Copy / Paste)
> Separate parts for separating several parts in a drawing into several separate drawings
> Select and deselect drawing elements, Invert a selection
When working with nesting plans, the functions for pasting and and for separating parts are
not available.
When working with nesting plans use the functions “Cut“ and “Copy” to cut out selected
parts from the plan and paste them into a drawing window.

2.2.1 Undo
The function “Undo” (Ctrl+Z) allows the user to take back a previously executed
command (the last 40).
Command input: UNDO
2.2.2 Redo
The function “Redo” (Ctrl+Y) always reverses the last Undo command (up to 40 Undo
commands).
Command input: REDO
2.2.3 Cut
With the function “Cut” (Ctrl+X) selected elements from a drawing are copied to the
Clipboard and deleted from the drawing.
Command input: CUT
2.2.4 Copy
With the function “Copy” (Ctrl+C) selected elements from a drawing are copied to the
Clipboard.
Command input: COPY
2.2.5 Paste
The command “Paste” (Ctrl+V) inserts elements which were previously copied into the
Clipboard with ‘Cut’ or ‘Copy’ into the current drawing, with the drawing being
simultaneously zoomed (Zoom All). The insertion of the element initially occurs at the same
place from which it was cut or copied.
To insert the drawing element at a different position of a drawing, a base point and an
insertion point for a move have to be defined. These points can be defined with the mouse
or by a coordinate input in the command line.

If the elements should only be inserted at the same place in the current drawing, the user
must interrupt the ‘Insert’ function with the ESC key or with the right mouse button.
Command input: PASTE
2.2.6 Separate Parts

Using the function “Separate Parts” in the Edit menu, several outer contours in one drawing
can be split automatically into several separate drawings.
Example: The three outer contours in Drawing1
Are automatically split into the drawings Drawing1, Drawing1_1 and Drawing1_2 when the
“Separate Parts” function is called:

The splitting is done in the order in which the outer contours were designed.
This function is available for parts as well. If the part is split, the first outer contour is taken
for the part, the other contours are transferred to new drawings.
When you use the default settings, these functions are performed automatically when
drawings are stored as parts in the database. This setting can be modified in the CAD
Options (see “Run before store” on page 171).
2.2.7 Select All

The command “Select All” (Ctrl+A) selects all elements of the current drawing or all parts in
the current nesting plan.
Command input: SELECTALL
2.2.8 Unselect All

The function “Unselect All” (Ctrl+U) deselects all elements of the current drawing or all
selected parts on the current nesting plan.
Command input: UNSELECTALL

2.2.9 Invert Selection
With the function “Invert Selection” (Ctrl+I) all elements selected in the current drawing or
all selected parts in the current nesting plan will be deselected and all elements not selected
or all parts not selected in the current plan will be selected.
Command input: SELECTINV
2.3 View Menu

The “View” Menu contains functions to
> Switch on and off of Toolbars and Dialog boxes
> Zooming
> Change the graphic representation (2D, planar/3D, volumetric rendering)
> Define and change the Coordinate System (absolute and relative coordinate system,
aligning, moving and rotating relative coordinates)
> Measuring of points, radii, lengths and angles in the drawing window
> Manage and translate Layers
> View and Edit the current part info
> Customize visible items: Activate or block individual machine profiles, reports or drill data,
as necessary.
> Set several options in OmniWin:
- Taking parts into the workspace for nesting
- Set the sequence for inner and marking contours
- Switch the measurement (Millimeter/Inch)
- Switch the background color of the drawing window and of the nesting plan window
- Set defaults for the input and output directories for DXF files and nesting plans
- Dimension style
- Attributes of drawing layers
- Define short keys for the OmniWin functions
- Changing of the language
- Open texts and save part and plan names
- DIN and ESSI import
- Toolbar and docking pane theme

When nesting, the functions for defining and changing the coordinate systems are not
needed in the “View” menu so they are not visible. In the same way the coordinate Toolbar
is also not visible when nesting.
The individual functions in the “View” Menu are described in the following sub-chapters.

2.3.1 Toolbars
The sub-menu “Toolbars” contains functions to switch on and off the display of the
individual toolbars and dialog boxes.
For the construction of parts the sub-menu Toolbars looks as follows:
Visible toolbars and dialog boxes are marked with a tick. OmniWin saves the last values set
such as the size and position of a toolbar.
2.3.2 Zoom Functions

The following Zoom functions are available:
> Zoom All zooms the entire drawing or the entire nesting plan to the largest display
possible.
Command input: ZOOMALL
> Zoom In magnifies the drawing or the nesting plan by a factor.
Command input: ZOOMIN

> Zoom out reduces the drawing or the nesting plan by a factor.
Command input: ZOOMOUT
> Zoom window zooms with the aid of a window. The window is defined by two
mouse clicks with the left mouse button (the mouse button does not have to be held).
Command input: ZOOMWIN
> Zoom Realtime fast zooming in real time (magnifying or reducing the drawing or
the nesting plan).
After calling the command you must first select the reference point for zooming then you
determine, by moving the mouse, whether the drawing should be made bigger (move
mouse upwards) or smaller (move mouse downwards).
The zoom process can be stopped again with a further click of the left mouse button.
Command input: ZOOMRT
> Pan Realtime Moves the drawing or the nesting plan (Panning).
After calling the function first define the reference point for the move by a mouse click on
the drawing page or the nesting plan. Then you can move the drawing or the nesting
plan in any direction you like by moving the mouse (without holding the button pressed).
A second mouse click stores the drawing or the nesting plan again.
You can use the middle mouse button (wheel) to switch temporarily to Pan mode.
Command input: PAN
> Zoom Center This command does not change the scale of the display but simply
moves an arbitrary point in the drawing window to be clicked into the middle of the
drawing window .
Command input: ZOOMCNT
> Zoom Selected zooms the elements just selected as large as possible in the middle
of the drawing window.
Command input: ZOOMSEL
> Zoom Previous reverses all Zoom steps already made, i.e. all previous zoom steps
will be executed in the reverse order.
Command input: ZOOMPREV

The zoom commands can be used during the execution of a design or edit
command without terminating it. If no function is active then even those
zoom functions which require an input, for example Zoom Window, can be
repeated.
2.3.2.1 Zooming in and out with the Mouse Wheel
By turning the mouse wheel from front to back you can zoom into the drawing window
(Zoom larger), and by turning it from back to front you can zoom out of the drawing
window (Zoom smaller). The center of the zoom is the position of the mouse cross in the
drawing window or the mouse arrow in the program window.
If the drawing window is split into several windows (in the display format with several sub-
windows) or several tab groups (with the display of the sub windows as index cards) the
zoom will be in the active sub-window, which means that the mouse cursor, and thus the
center of zoom, can lie outside the active window.
2.3.2.2 Horizontal and vertical Pan with the Mouse Wheel
You can move the contents of the drawing window from right to left horizontally by turning
the mouse wheel from back to front and pressing the < Shift > key at the same time
(horizontal Pan), regardless of the position of the mouse cursor.
You can move the contents of the drawing window vertically up or down by turning the
mouse wheel back to front or from front to back whilst simultaneously pressing the < Ctrl
> key (Vertical Pan), regardless of the position of the mouse cursor.
2.3.3 Orbit Tool

The Orbit tool allows you to rotate the view freely in any direction.

To enable the Orbit tool, click “Orbit Tool” in the “View” menu or click the icon in the Zoom
toolbar:
Command input: ORBIT

The key combination is: Alt key and left mouse button (clicking and dragging).
When the Orbit tool is enabled, the mouse cursor shows rotating arrows.
Now, simply move the mouse to turn the view.

As you turn the view, the coordinate axes in the lower left corner always show the current
view orientation.
2.3.4 Default Top Down View

Use the “Default Top Down View” item in the “View” menu to bring the view orientation to
its initial top down position. This is helpful if you quickly want to return to the default
position after you have used the Orbit tool to change the orientation.
Command input: TOPVIEW
2.3.5 Viewing and Rendering Options

The submenu under “Viewing and Rendering Options” contains functions for advanced
viewing of parts and nesting plans.

Menu item Function
Orthogonal View View is switched to orthogonal projection
mode.
Perspective View View is switched to perspective projection
mode.
Planar Rendering Mode View is switched to planar rendering mode
(2D view).
Volumetric Rendering Mode View is switched to volumetric rendering
mode (3D view).
Fill Parts and Plate Parts and plates are filled with the color
defined in the “Foreground” tab in
“Options” dialog.
Wireframe Shows the wireframe view.
X-Ray The objects are shown with transparency.
Construction Geometry Shows or hides construction geometry
(original geometry, dimensions etc.)
Animation: Turntable The object is continuously turned around the
center of the view.
Animation: Flyaround Animates the view in a way that gives you
the impression of orbiting around the object.
The individual functions are described in the following topics.

2.3.5.1 Orthogonal/Perspective view
You can switch between orthogonal and perspective view. In the orthogonal view, parallel
lines stay parallel independently of the viewing angle. In perspective view, the parallel lines
are shown in the correct perspective. Orthogonal view is the default.
Perspective Orthogonal
The grid shows the perspective as well.
2.3.5.2 2D/3D view
You can now switch between planar and volumetric rendering mode:
The planar rendering mode is the 2D geometry representation on the XY plane. The
volumetric rendering mode is a new 3D representation taking into account part/plan
thickness.
Planar: Volumetric:
2.3.5.3 Fill Parts and Plate
When this option is turned on, the parts and the plate will be filled with the color defined on
the “Foreground” page in the “OmniWin Options” dialog.
This option mostly makes sense for normal 2D drawings to fill the closed contours.

If you click to enable “Fill Parts and Plate” while you are viewing a part or a nesting plan in
volumetric mode, the viewing mode is automatically switched to planar 2D.
If you switch to volumetric mode while “Fill Parts and Plate” is selected, only the plate is
filled with color.
2.3.5.4 Wireframe
When this option is turned on, wireframe lines are added. The option is only applied in
volumetric mode.
If you click to enable “Wireframe” while you are viewing a part or a nesting plan in planar
mode, the viewing mode is automatically switched to volumetric.
2.3.5.5 X-Ray
When this option is turned on, the object is displayed with transparency. The option is only
applied in volumetric mode.

If you click to enable “X-Ray” while you are viewing a part or a nesting plan in planar mode,
the viewing mode is automatically switched to volumetric.
2.3.5.6 Construction Geometry
When this option is turned on, construction geometries are shown. The option is only
applied in volumetric mode. Showing or hiding construction geometries is useful for parts
with bevels. This allows you to toggle the display of original contours or dimensions.
If you click to enable “Construction Geometry” while you are viewing a part or a nesting
plan in planar mode, the viewing mode is automatically switched to volumetric.
2.3.5.7 Animation: Turntable/Flyaround
You can switch on animated views for parts and plans. There are two animation modes:
> Animation: Turntable: The object is continuously turned around the center of the view.
> Animation: Flyaround: Animates the view in a way that gives you the impression of
orbiting around the object.

2.3.6 The Coordinate System
The following chapter describes the various options for the input of coordinates in OmniWin.
2.3.6.1 Orthogonal/Polar/Absolute/Relative
Orthogonal/Polar
When you create parts, you can use the orthogonal or the polar coordinate system.
The orthogonal (Cartesian) coordinate system defines the coordinates by the X and Y axes.
The polar coordinate system specifies a position by radius (i.e. the distance from the zero
point of the coordinate system) and the angle.
orthogonal polar
Here in the example, the point has the following coordinates:

Orthogonal (absolute): 150 150
Polar (absolute): 212.13 45
Absolute/Relative
The origin of the absolute coordinate system is always located at the same point, whereas
that of the relative coordinate system can be moved. The relative coordinate system can be
used for example, if you want to specify a position based on a previous point (see example
below).
Use the function “Absolute Coordinate System” and “Relative Coordinate System”
in the “View” menu or toolbar to show the origin of the respective coordinate system.
At the start of a new drawing the origin of the relative coordinate system always coincides
with that of the absolute coordinate system. For information on how to move the origin
refer to “Move and rotate the relative coordinate system” on page 133.
absolute relative

Example:
In the following example, the origin of the relative coordinate system was moved to P1 (e.g.
with the function “Move relative CS”). The grid spacing is 50 mm.
You have the following options to set P2:

> Use the relative coordinate system starting from P1. The coordinates are 50 50
(orthogonal) or 70.71 45 (polar).
> The coordinates based on the origin of the absolute coordinate system are 150 150
(orthogonal) or 212.13 45 (polar).
For information on how to choose the required coordinate system refer to “Selecting a
coordinate system” on page 132.
2.3.6.2 Selecting a coordinate system
Use the following functions from the “View” menu or from the Coordinate System toolbar
for selecting a coordinate system for part construction.
Absolute Ortho CS: Function for the selection of the absolute orthogonal coordinate
system.
Absolute Polar CS: Function for the selection of the absolute polar coordinate system.
Relative Ortho CS: Function for the selection of the relative orthogonal coordinate
system.
Relative Polar CS: Function for the selection of the relative polar coordinate system.

Switching between coordinate systems can be done quickly by entering a special prefix
character: The following prefixes can be used:
> Absolute :$
> Ortho :&
> Relativ :@
> Polar :<
The following inputs create the coordinates of point P2 in the above example under
“Orthogonal/Polar/Absolute/Relative” on page 131:
> $150&150 Absolute Ortho: X Y
> @50&50 Relative Ortho: X Y
> $212.13<45 Absolute Polar: R A
> @70.71<45 Relative Polar: R A
The selection of a coordinate system applies to the current part drawing. The
last type of input applies to all following inputs, until another coordinate
system is set.
2.3.6.3 Move and rotate the relative coordinate system
The following functions from the “View” menu are used to move the origin of the relative
coordinate system or to rotate the axes. Show the relative origin of the coordinate system , if
necessary, with the button “Show relative coordinate system” .
Autoshift relative CS: Moves the origin of the relative coordinate system automatically
to the last coordinates entered in the drawing. This means you always start from the last
point when you enter coordinates for a new drawing element.
Command input: AUTOCS
Align relative CS: Use this command to align the origin of the relative coordinate
system to the end point of an existing line.
After selecting the function, you must click on the line required near the desired end point.
The positive X direction always runs along the line in the direction of the other endpoint of
the line.
Command input: CSALIGN
The null point can be aligned in different directions, depending on which line is snapped
upon clicking.

Move relative CS: Use this command to shift the origin of the relative coordinate
system manually. The ‘Autoshift relative CS’ function should be switched off for this,
as otherwise the origin will be moved again on the next point entry.
Command input: CSMOVE
Rotate relative CS: The relative coordinate system can be rotated using this menu item.
After calling the command you have to enter an angle value in the command window. This
angle specifies always - also if an angle had been entered already before - the positive X
direction of the coordinate system.
This command also enables you to return a relative coordinate system which has previously
been rotated with the ‘Align relative CS’ function back to the 0° position.
Command input: CSROTATE
Example:
You would like to set four points with identical distances; the fourth point however should
be placed at an angle of 90°.
You have set P1, P2 and P3 with relative
coordinates and automated CS move (

enabled).
Here in the example this would be:
POINT: 50 50 or 70.71 45 (orthogonal/polar)

When you set P3, you simply change the
orientation of the coordinate system. This
makes a recalculation for P4 unnecessary.
CSROTATE: 90
The rotation angle always refers to the start
point, i.e. if you want to perform another
rotation, you always start from the original
orientation, not from the current one. If you
want to rotate through another 90°, enter the
value of 180.
After the rotation through 90° you use the
same coordinates for P4.
POINT: 50 50 or 70.71 45 (orthogonal/polar)
2.3.7 Measure Point, Radius, Length and Angle
> Measure Point This function allows the coordinates of a point to be displayed.
After calling the function you will be asked to select a point.
Command input: MEASUREP
> Measure Radius This function allows you to measure the radius of an arc or a
circle.
After calling the function you will be asked to select an arc or a circle.
Command input: MEASURER
> Measure Length This function allows you to measure the distance between any
two points you like in the drawing window.
After calling the function you will be asked to select the first point. For this you can enter
the X/Y coordinates of the point in the command input line of the command line dialog
box or define a point with a mouse click.

You go to the second point with the mouse, whereby a rubber band is stretched between
the first point and the current mouse cursor position. At the same time the incremental X
and Y values of the mouse cursor position (dX, dY) with reference to the first point as well
as the length of the rubber band (dL), i.e. the distance from the first point to the current
mouse cursor, are displayed
After the second point has been clicked, the rubber band and the values for dX and dY
vanish and the distance dL between the two points selected is output to the command
line dialog box.
Command input: MEASURE
> Measure Angle This function permits the angle between any two points on a
circular arc to be measured.
After calling the function you will be asked to select the first point. For this you can enter
the X/Y coordinates of the point in the command input line of the command line dialog
box or define a point with a mouse click.
You must give the centre of the circular arc on which the first point and the yet to be
defined second point lie as the next point. The center point can also be defined by an
entry in the command line or with a mouse click. Once the centre point has been defined
and arc will be displayed automatically with the angle between the first point and the
point on the +X axis as a pie slice.
Go with the mouse to the second point on the arc. As you do so the current angle to the
first point will always be displayed. Once the second point has been clicked the „Pie slice“
vanishes and the angle between the two points chosen will be output in the dialogue box
(Angle:).
Command input: ANGLE

The measurement functions are contained in the Measure Bar
which can also be blended in and out in the Toolbar sub-menu.
All measuring functions can also be used on nesting plans.
2.3.8 Layer Management

Layer Administration in the View menu opens the “Auto Translation” page in the OmniWin
options. Here, you can define how to treat the layers during the import of drawings, and
which processes will be assigned (see below).
This function can be called as well using the icon in the coordinate system toolbar.

The OmniWin options include further functions for layer administration. Additional options
for using layers can be set in the CAD options, in the toolbar and in the View menu.
Layer functions overview:
Attribute dialog toolbar: Selection of the active drawing layer (see Attribute Toolbar on
page 81).
Layer translation: Changing several layers in an open drawing, e.g. after importing (see
„Layer translation“ on page 137).
Auto Translation: Automatically convert layers in drawings created by external systems into
OmniWin process layers during the import of the drawing („Auto Translation“ on page 155).
Administration Data: Control options for viewing and saving of administration data (i.e.
part infos on the Administration layer) (see „Administration Data“ on page 163).
Layer Toolbox: Control display options for the process layers (define the layers available in
the dropdown list of the Attribute Dialog toolbar for selecting the active layer, set line
properties of the layers) (see „Layer Toolbox“ on page 173).
Attributes: Control display options for the process and functional layers. (line properties,
such as color, thickness, type) (see „Attributes“ on page 151).
2.3.9 Layer translation

The “Layer Translation” function in the View menu allows you to change the layers in an
open drawing.
The function “Layer Translator” can be called using the icon in the coordinate system
toolbar.
You will need the “Layer Translator” function if you want to read in third party DXF, DWG
or IGES files, which contain different layers to those defined in OmniWin.
If you want to import large amounts of data, or if you import from the same source on a
regular basis, you can automate the layer translation process („Auto Translation“ on page
155).
For a manual translation of layers, open a drawing first.
When the “Layer Translator” function is called, the following dialog will be displayed:

If the “Show only Import” checkbox is selected, then only the drawing layers which are
different from those defined in OmniWin will be shown in the “Translate from” area.
When the “Show only Layer Toolbox” checkbox is selected, only those processes from the
Layer Toolbar of the Layer Administration which are active will be listed and can thus be
found in the Attribute dialog bar, otherwise all processes will be listed:

In the example, the contour to be cut has the color 7 (white) and is on layer 1 or 0. To find
out the layer of the contour Um den Layer of the contour to be cut click, in this example,
one after the other on both the layers 1 and 0 with the color white. If the “Show Selection”
checkbox is activated, the layer clicked will be highlighted in blue in the drawing. In our
example the contour to be cut is on layer 0 with color white:
Now you can click the process 'Cutting' in the “Translate to” list and then click the
<Translate> button:

The layer 0 with the color 7 (white) vanishes from the "Translate from" list and will only be
shown when the "Show only Import" box is deactivated and thus all layers in the drawing –
including those already translated"— are listed.
The part can now be saved again in DXF or DWG format and directly taken over into the
workspace for nesting.
The “Delete” button allows the display of individual layers in the current drawing to be
turned off (if you do not save the drawing anew) or deleted (if you save the drawing anew).
If, for example, you wish to delete all layers except the two shown in the next figure, then
only the cutting contour and the dimensioning would remain of our example drawing:

If the “Preset Translation” checkbox is active for layer translation, then in translating the
marked layers, they would not only be translated (in our example under the layer 0 with the
color 7 into the process “Cutting”), but also added to the list of import layers to be
translated automatically in the “Auto Translation”

Delete untranslated layers
If you want to save an imported drawing with untranslated layers, or if you're about to
generate a part, the Layer Translation dialog is opened automatically.
You can then translate layers (“Translate” button) , delete layers manually (“Delete” button)
or delete layers automatically (“Delete layers that are not translated” checkbox).
If the “Delete layers that are not translated” checkbox is selected, all untranslated layers are
deleted automatically when the drawing is saved to a file or to the database.
2.3.9.1 Options for Checking for Non-translated Layers
OmniWin can prevent saving an imported DXF/DWG file if this contains non-translated
layers.
Saving or exporting a DXF/DWG file from OmniWin marks this as proprietary OmniWin file
and the original layer information will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended to translate all
layers.
When you try to save an imported DXF/DWG file without proper layer translation, the “Layer
Translation” dialog will be shown. Assign the layers or delete layers you don't need and save
the file again.
Options
The CAD Options (Menu “View”/”CAD Options”) dialog allows to set the mode of this
function on the “Storing Option” page:

The setting “Allow saving drawings with non-translated Import layers to a file” is switched
off by default, i.e. when you try to save an imported file, the “Layer Translation” dialog is
opened as described above and you need to assign layers before you can save the file.
If you activate the checkbox, you can save the file. However, the “Layer Translation” dialog
is still opened, but the “Save” button is enabled and you can save the file without
translating the layers. In this case, OmniWin automatically saves to a new copy (name suffix
*_1) and your original file remains unchanged. Saving to the OmniWin database is still not
possible.
2.3.10 Part Info
The function “Document info” in the “View” menu or the corresponding symbol in
the coordinate system toolbar allows you to define the part administration data listed in the
part info dialog window which follows:

Changes to the administration data are stored to the OmniWin database after confirming
the dialog with OK.
The administration data can be included in reports (see “Reporting” on page 104).
And the data are shown when you save the drawing to DXF or DWG format (layer
“Administration”).
The identification texts fort he administration data are output in English as standard, but can
be changed in the “Administration Data” card of the Layer Administration function (see

chapter “Layer Management” on page 136). In the same way, you can set whether all or
only selected administration data should be saved in the DXF or DWG format.
Priority, grain restriction and mirror

The values set for priority, grain restriction and mirroring are used as defaults for automatic
nesting.
The grain restriction limits the rotate function for the part. Values from 0 to 360 can be
entered; 0 allows any rotation, 360 prevents rotation.
2.3.11 OmniWin Options

The OmniWin Options include general system settings for OmniWin, and settings for the
import of data.
To open the OmniWin Options, select „Options...“ from the “View” menu, or click the
icon in the main toolbar.
Here, you can set the following options:
Environment
> Files: Setting defaults for the input and output directories for DXF files and nesting plans
(see chapter “Files” on page 146).
> Units: Selection of the Inch system of measurement (see chapter “Units” on page 147).
> Grid options: Define settings for the grid (see chapter “Grid options” on page 147).
> Workspace: Definition of the background color for the drawing window and the nesting
plan window and settings for the workspace (see chapter “Workspace” on page 147).
> Short Key: Definition of short keys for the OmniWin functions (see chapter “Short Key”
on page 149).
> Language: Changing the language of the user interface (see „Language“ on page 150).

> Attributes: Settings for layer display (see “Attributes” on page 151).
> Foreground: Color settings for displaying parts and plates in the workspace or in a
nesting plan, and in a print output (see „Foreground“ on page 152).
> Program Data Directory: Setting the path for the OmniWin system files (see „Program
Data Directory“ on page 152).
Import
> Auto Translation: Settings for automatic layer recognition (see “Auto Translation” on
page 155).
> Open and Save: Define the font type to be used for texts in imported drawings, and
settings for the part and plan names (see „Open and Save“ on page 157).
> NC Import: Settings for DIN and ESSI Import (see “NC Import” on page 158).
> DWG DXF Import: Settings for measurements for importing special formats (“DWG DXF
Import” on page 161).
> Administration Data: Options for importing administration data (“Administration Data”
on page 163).
> Post Import Actions: Rules that define how to treat files after successful or incorrect
import (see “Post Import Actions” on page 168).
2.3.11.1 Files
The “Files” page enables the pre-setting for the input and output directory for the DXF files
and the nesting plans:
Use the button to select the respective directory.

You can define a separate output directory for the NC code. If no directory is selected here,
then the same path as for output directory of the plans will be selected.

2.3.11.2 Units
On the “Units” page you can determine the dimension unit ‘Millimeters‘ or ‘Inches‘:
The current measurement is shown in the OmniWin status bar, in the lower right corner.
2.3.11.3 Grid options
Here, you set the display and the spacing of the grid.
The “Show grid” checkbox shows or hides the grid.
Under “Spacing” you can set the distance for the grid lines.
As long as the grid is enabled (default), you can use the grid points as snap points. For
further information on the snap function please refer to “Snap Menu” on page 271.
The grid options are stored separately for metric/imperial systems.
2.3.11.4 Workspace
You define the display settings for the Workspace area on the “Workspace” page in the
OmniWin Options. Furthermore, you can set the background color for drawings/parts and
nesting plans.

Drawing Window Background/Plan Window Background sections
You can set the background for the drawing/nesting panes.
Plans section
> Disable complete-nested parts: A part can no longer be nested once its nested quantity
reaches the “Remain to nest” quantity.
> Disable parts with other thickness and material: This prevents nesting of parts with a
material or thickness different form that of the plan.
Workspace pane options

> Show empty group nodes: If selected, nodes for all types of objects are shown in the
workspace pane, even if no such object is loaded.
> Show completely nested plates: If this is selected, plates are only shown in the workspace
in the “Plates” node, if the plate is still available, i.e. the “Remain to nest” quantity is
greater than 0.
> Show completely nested parts: If this is selected, a part is no longer shown in the
workspace in the “Parts” node, the required quantity is nested. Such parts are only
displayed under the plans they’re nested in.
> Group parts by material /thickness: Additional nodes are available for parts that group
them by material/thickness.

2.3.11.5 Short Key
The card Short Key allows the creation of short keys for the listed OmniWin commands:
The short keys are one of different possibilities to execute functions in OmniWin.
The shortkeys defined here are saved to the file KEY.INI in the OmniWin directory. Some
short keys are already defined as default:
b ARC
k CIRCLE
l LINE
c MOVECOPYCOL
o OPEN
p POINT
e SNAPEND
< TOGGLEMR
t TRIM
a ZOOMALL
m ZOOMIN
g ZOOMOUT
w ZOOMWIN
A shortcut key can always be only one letter from the keyboard. Special character or
Functional keys or combinations with the keys <Ctrl> / <Shift> / <Alt> cannot be used.
Generally also the numbers, the brackets and also the „+“ or „-“ sign cannot be used for
short keys.
Please remember that the shortcut key must be allocated unambiguously. The syntax for the
function for the command input line can be found under the function descriptions in the
menu sub-sections.

2.3.11.6 Language
The “Language” page allows to change the language in OmniWin:
When OmniWin is launched for the first time, the language used for the installation process
is used for the user interface initially.
> If you wish to change the language, select the language required in the list of available
languages and confirm with <OK>.
> Restart OmniWin.
The list of available languages includes all the languages supported by the OmniWin
installation.
Additional languages:
The OmniWin product medium includes files for supporting additional languages. These
languages are provided as is and are not released or tested with the product by MesserSoft.
However, you can select any of these languages for the user interface. The localization may
not be complete, e.g. if the last translation update was done a while ago. In this case, new
items in the user interface are displayed in English.
To add the files for additional language support, install OmniWin first.
> Copy the language files from the product medium (Additional Languages\<Language
Code>\OmniWin\Language ) to the OmniWin language directory on your system
(C:\Program Files\MesserSoft\OmniWin\Language ).
These manually added language files will not be removed during uninstallation. To remove
OmniWin completely from your system, you need to delete the language files manually after
uninstalling.

2.3.11.7 Attributes
For the construction of parts, the contour elements, which should be worked with different
processes (for example Oxygen cut, Punch and so on), should be placed on different drawing
layers.
The “Attributes” page in the OmniWin Options allows the setting of attributes for the
selected process layer, on which the drawing is located.
On the “Attributes” page, all processes possible in OmniWin (Cutting, Powder Marking, ....
Lead-out) are preset to the appropriate layers:
In addition the line types, color and thickness for the display of various functions for nesting
are also defined, such as, for example for cutting of remnant plates, for rapid traverse, for
simulation etc.
The line type, the line color and the line thickness for each of the process or function layers
can be changed with the List boxes.
The following Line Types are available:
The box for the Colour contains 256 colours, the same ones as used in AutoCAD.
Three Thicknesses for the lines may be selected:
If you have changed settings and want to reverse this, you can restore the original default
settings with the <Set Default> Button.

The settings made for a drawing will not be saved with the drawing.
2.3.11.8 Foreground
The functions under „Foreground“ allow to mark nested parts and plans with different
colors and a better optical contrast of plates and nested parts is achieved.
The colors can be set individually for the nesting plans in the plan window and the printed
out nesting plans.
2.3.11.9 Program Data Directory
Here, you can change the path to the OmniWin system files (program data), if required.
These files are copied to a program data directory during the installation process.
The defaults for a standard installation are:
> Windows Vista/7/8: C:\ProgramData\MesserSoft\OmniWin ProcessData <Release>
> Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\MesserSoft\OmniWin
ProcessData <Release>
Please note that the ProgramData folder is normally hidden under Windows 7, 8 and Vista.
To get access, you need to open Windows Explorer, click on Organize, then Folder and
Search options. Then you have to check the button that shows the hidden files.
Please note that whatever location is chosen, for a proper operation Read/Write and Change
privileges for OmniWin are required.
The program data directory cannot be changed in normal working mode. To change the
program data directory, OmniWin must run in administrator mode. To launch OmniWin in
administrator mode, right-click the desktop icon or the start menu item and select “Run as
administrator”.

The program data contain internal system information. OmniWin needs these data for
operation, and may change them.
The program data directory contains the following data:

> Configuration settings (e.g. the file Key.ini containing the shortcut keys, or
GuiEnabledItems.xml containing the settings for visible items)
> PP - Postprocessors for bevel plans, straight plans and tube cutting
> Reports -Templates for reports
> IMP (ESSI/DIN import files)
> DB (databases, e.g. PartLib.mdb)
> GeoTech - Macro definitions
> EXP – Templates for exporting nesting plan data
If you change the program data directory, you need to reconfigure the database connection
to „PartLib.mdb“.
> To do this, click the "Edit database connection" button and update the connection data.
2.3.11.10 Selection Tool
The ”Selection Tool” page in the OmniWin Options allows you to enable/disable
manipulators individually in part drawings or nesting plans.
Furthermore, you can set the angle steps for rotation with the cursor keys (see “Key
combinations” on page 188) and set fixed angle steps for the Rotate Manipulator with Shift
key (see “Rotate Manipulator” on page 183).
Independently of the above settings, a restriction of the step angle may also be defined for
individual parts by setting a grain restriction in the part properties.

2.3.11.11 Production Data
On the “Production Data” page you can define which outputs should be generated when
the function “Generate production data” is launched.
The following outputs can be produced:
> Generation of NC code
> Creation of plan XML
> Creation of DXF/DWG files for parts used in the plan
> Reports (PDF or print)
> CSV export of nesting plan data
Additional actions (post-actions) can be executed after the generation.
For further information please refer to “Generate Production Data” on page 99,
“Configuration” on page 99 and “Further post-generation actions” on page 99.

2.3.11.12 Advanced
On the “Advanced” page you can set whether to allow manual speed adjustments for
advanced bevel nesting plans.
The speed values for advanced bevel plans are taken initially from the Technology databases
when a part is added to the plan or a plan is updated with database parameters. The speed
value assigned to a specific contour is visible in the Technology dialog. This value can be
made editable. I. e. you can adjust the speed ad hoc for a specific contour element directly in
the nesting plan without changing your database values.
To change the value you need to make it editable by enabling the option “Allow manual
speed adjustments for advanced (bevel) nesting plans”.
2.3.11.13 Auto Translation
For creating drawings in OmniWin, you would use the predefined process layers. However, if
you import drawings from other systems, the layers used there are probably not identical
with the process layers required for OmniWin.
If you import only few drawings, the best practice is to change the layers using the Layer
Translator function (see „Layer translation“ on page 137).

The Auto Translation converts unknown layers automatically into OmniWin process layers.
This function is suitable for imports on a regular basis.
The Import Layers entered here will be automatically translated into the corresponding
processes with third party drawings, if one of the Translation Options “Translate by Color”,
“Translate by Layer” or “Translate by Layer and Color” is active. You can change the
selected import layer using the edit boxes below the lists for the import layers and import
colors as well as the listbox for the process.
If the checkbox “Change Attributes of non-translated Objects” is not activated, all objects
will be displayed on the layers and in the colors in which they are present in the DWG or DXF
file.
The checkbox “Change Attributes of non-translated Objects” allows all objects in a drawing
which were not translated to be put onto the layer “Import”. As standard, the layer
“Import” is shown as a continuous, dark red line with normal line thickness (see settings in
the “Attributes” card in the OmniWin options). In the following example the layer fort he
part contour is already allocated to the process “Cutting”, all other objects are on the Import
Layer:

2.3.11.14 Open and Save
The page “Open and Save” in the OmniWin Options allows you to set the font to be applied
to text contained in DXF, DWG and IGES files (option “Default font for open text“):

If a part is to be saved under a name different to that automatically given for a new drawing
(for example, Drawing1 for the first new drawing after the start of OmniWin), then this
newly allocated name will also be used after storing the part as the part name in the title line
of OmniWin and in the Part Info, as long as the checkbox “Change part name after export“
is activated.
In the same way the plan name can be set using the checkbox “Change plan name after
export“.
Scale parts from mm/inch and vice versa

By means of the two check boxes
> Scale an input DXF or DWG file from inch to mm.
> Scale an output DXF or DWG file from mm to inch.
it is possible on the one hand to convert the DXF- or AutoCAD drawing-files to be opened
from Inch to mm, and on the other hand to output in Inch the DXF- or AutoCAD drawing
files to be output in OmniWin.
If “Inch“ is set as dimension unit, the corresponding adjusted checkboxes will appear:
> Scale an input DXF or DWG file from mm to inch.
> Scale an output DXF or DWG file from inch to mm.
In the DXF files no information about the dimension system used will be
output.
2.3.11.15 NC Import
The settings for the import of DIN and ESSI (see chapter “Import parts and plans in DIN- or
ESSI code” on page 102) are made in the two INI files DinImp.ini and EssiImp.ini in the
two sub directories \IMP\DIN and \IMP\ESSI of OmniWin. They can be edited in the “NC
Import” page of the OmniWin options in the “DIN Format” and “ESSI Format” sections:

If you wish to, you can create several different configurations by saving them under different
INI files. When importing a DIN or ESSI file, you must then first select the suitable
configuration.
The standard DinImp.ini file supplied has the following appearance:
Each variable is commented on by the line above it. The files are organized into three areas
> [USER_CONFIG] with settings for the units, the metric or inch system, the DIN output, the
coordinate system etc.
> [CUT] with the auxiliary functions for switching a process on and off (cutting process)
> [MARK] with the auxiliary functions for switching a marking process on and off and the T
codes for the various marking processes
> [BEVEL] for read of bevel parameters in the comments (is only used for OmniWin-CAD in
OmniWin Classic, not in OmniWin

The standard ESSIImp.ini file supplied has the following appearance:
Each variable is commented on by the line above it. The files are organized into three areas
> [USER_CONFIG] with settings for the start identification of the program, the units, the
ESSI output, the coordinate system, the commentary auxiliary functions and the kerf
compensation
> [CUT] with the auxiliary functions for switching a process on and off (cutting process)
> [MARK_PUNCH] with the auxiliary functions for switching the punch marker on and off
> [MARK_POWDER] with the auxiliary functions for switching the powder marker on and
off
> [BEVEL] for read of bevel parameters in the comments (is only used for OmniWin-CAD in
OmniWin Classic, not in OmniWin
You can influence the way in which the recognition of lead-in/out lines in the imported DIN
and ESSI files is displayed in the sketch in the “Drawing: Run After Import” section of the NC
Import card under OmniWin options:
> None: The lead-ins/outs will be read in but only displayed as contours. This means that
lead-ins and outs will not be recognized as such

> Lead-in/out: The lead-ins/lead-outs will be read in and displayed on the two layers
"Lead-in line" and "Lead-out line".
> Without Lead-in/out: The lead-ins/outs will not be read in.
You can influence the way in which the recognition of lead-in/out lines in the imported DIN
and ESSI files is displayed in the plan in the “Plan: Run After Import” section of the NC
Import card under OmniWin options:
> None: The lead-ins/outs will be read in but only displayed as contours. In the same way,
no part recognition takes place, i.e. only contours are displayed.
> Lead-in/out: The lead-ins/lead-outs will be read in and displayed on the two layers
"Lead-in line" and "Lead-out line". However, no part recognition takes place.
> Parts: Contours are recognized as parts with lead-in/out lines.
> Parts Into Workspace Contours are recognized as parts with lead-in/out lines, different
parts are taken into the workspace and also appear there with lead-in/out lines.
> Parts Into Workspace Without Lead In/Out: Contours are recognized as parts with
lead-in/out lines, different parts are taken into the workspace and appear there without
lead-in/out lines.
A plate can be drawn around the DIN and ESSI files imported as a plan, by using the
checkbox “Create Plate”. The total minimum and maximum values found for all contours or
parts for the minimum value for the distance in X and Y to the origin is added to the total
maximum value found to give the distance of the plate edges to the plan.
2.3.11.16 DWG DXF Import
The options on the page DWG DXF Import can help to import drawing elements into
OmniWin, that could otherwise not be supported. It is possible here to set options to resolve
the dimensions, of blocks, splines, ellipses etc.
In many CAD drawings, the parts are not drawn in their full length but long straight lines are
displayed as broken lines. Usually the dimension for the total length of the part is then given,
not that for the length actually drawn. If this dimension is on the dimension layer, then
OmniWin normally replaces the dimension value given with the value for the length shown
in the drawing.

You should only use these options is specific cases, as this function may
cause problems in general scenarios.
Explode dimension, leader, tolerance:
With this option it is possible to configure OmniWin such that the given value is retained. If
you activate this option, the dimensions are shown correctly in OmniWin or in AutoCAD as
the case may be.
This option has, however, the following limitations:
> OmniWin cannot check if the dimensions value is identical with the size of the object
> A dimension is no longer an object but is resolved into a set of lines and text.
> Dimensions which were made in OmniWin and saved into the DWG or DXF files will not
be read.
If the “false” length is stored on the text or administration Layer, then OmniWin does not
recalculate the dimension value.
Compound all contours after DXF import

If this box is checked, breakpoints will be removed from contours, i.e. the JOINALL command
is performed during the import. Only translated layers are affected (JOINALL does not work
for non-translated layers).
2.3.11.17 DSTV Import
The OmniWin Options page “DSTV Import” allows you to define properties for the import of
DSTV data.

For further information please refer to the chapter Options for DSTV on page 589. The
chapter DSTV Import on page 588 provides a complete description of the DSTV import.
2.3.11.18 Administration Data
The “Administration Data” page in the OmniWin options defines the way the information
data are read in from the DXF file during file import.
Select which type of administration data should be considered.

> Comment strings (scan for strings with Group Code 999)
> Block attributes (scan for ATTRIB entities)
> Specified layer/color combination:
In this case, use the “Add” button to define layer/color combinations which will be
scanned for administration data.
The translation table on the right can be used to define identification texts for different part
properties (see examples).

2.3.11.18.1 Importing Administration Data from a DXF file – Example
Importing texts on a specific layer/color combination
Here in the example, texts on a specific layer/color combination need to be transferred to
OmniWin during dxf import. The administration data in the dxf file are placed as text objects
on the OWADMIN layer. The color of the layer is set to 200.
The translation table on the right can be used to define identification texts for different part
properties. It is recommended to save this configuration in an import profile.
This configuration will recognize and transfer the following identification texts:
> PART will be recognized as part name
> MAT will be recognized as material
> THICK will be recognized as thickness
> QTY will be recognized as quantity
This should reflect the Single Line Text objects from your DWG file: You need one text object
for each parameter you want to transfer. Use the following format: <OW parameter
identification text > <value>.

Make sure, the text objects are assigned to the defined layer (“OWADMIN” in this example).
> Import the file in OmniWin.
The import dialog shows the administration data that are recognized.
> Switch to the Layer translation tab to make sure that all required layers are translated.
Here in the example, the cutting contour is placed on the layer “0”.
> You can delete the OWADMIN layer, as the administration data were properly recognized.

You can either delete the “OWADMIN” layer manually (right-click and “Delete selected”)
or simply do an import with the “Delete layers that are not translated on import” option
checked, and leave the OWADMIN layer untranslated.
Importing texts using block attributes

The configuration for the import of block attributes in OmniWin is basically the same as for
texts on a specific layer.
In your third-party software, you need to define attributes for each parameter. Use the
identification texts set in the OmniWin Options on the Administration Data page as Attribute
tag and save all objects as block. When you insert the saved block you can define values for
the attributes. These will be included in the OmniWin import.
Import text using comment strings

Comment strings for import need to be added to an entity as group code “999” in the
format:
<OW parameter identification text > <value>
The parameter identification text needs to be configured in the translation table as described
above. The string “MAT” is used for the material here.
For example, the material “ALMG” in a CIRLCE entity can be defined like this:
0
CIRCLE
5

83
330
70
100
AcDbEntity
8
0
100
AcDbCircle
10
70.0
20
70.0
30
0.0
40
50.0
999
MAT ALMG
2.3.11.18.2 Importing values for priority and mirror

To include the values for “Priority” and “Permit Mirror” when you import DXF files, you
need to configure the import as described under “Importing Administration Data from a DXF
file – Example” on page 164.

To make sure the values are interpreted correctly, they must be stored in the DXF file in
accordance with the following rules. The import function accepts a numeric value, an English
string or a translated string. The third possible value is the translated string depending on the
language of the user interface enabled during the import.
Priority:
Accepted values from the DXF Interpretation in OmniWin
0, Low, <translated string> Low
1, Normal, <translated string> Normal
2, High, <translated string> High
Mirror:
Accepted values from the DXF Interpretation in OmniWin
0, No, <translated string> No
1, Yes, <translated string> Yes
2.3.11.19 Post Import Actions
The “Post Import Actions” page in the OmniWin Options allows to define rules how to
handle files after a successful or a failed import.
Here, you can define whether you want to save imported files automatically to the database.
If a part with the same name already exists in the database, a new record will be created.
For imported of failed files you can define further options:
> Keep file: This is the default. No further action is done.
> Delete file: The file is deleted after the import.
> Rename/move file using this template: The file can be renamed or moved. You can define
a handling template with placeholders:

- [name] will be replaced by importing file name (no extension)
- [extension] will be replaced by importing file extension
- [timestamp] will be replaced with current system time.
These placeholders can be entered directly, or you insert them by selecting the values
from the button.
Examples:
> \Imported Files\[name].imported.[extension]
will rename a file and move it to a subfolder “Imported Files”, e.g.: “c:\drawing1.dxf” will
be moved/renamed to: “c:\Imported Files\drawing1.imported.dxf”
> [name]_[timestamp].imported
will rename a file, e.g.: “c:\drawing1.dxf” will be renamed to:
“drawing1_20130212123244.imported”
2.3.12 Document options (CAD Options)

The “Document options” menu item opens the CAD Options (for drawings/parts) or the
Plate Options (for plates/remnant plates). For plates/remnant plates, only the page
“Dimension Style” is available.
2.3.12.1 Storing Options
The “Storing Option” card consists of a dialog for the setting of options which should be
fulfilled when taking the drawing over into the workspace for nesting:
In the two sections "Filter" and "Check" the following options can be set in check boxes:

> Delete double contours: Duplicates, i.e. identical completely superimposed contour
elements will be deleted automatically, before cutting contours are generated.
This verification is limited to 128 contour elements. In drawings with more than 128
contour elements the elements will be combined first, and then duplicates are deleted. In
this case however, certain duplicates may not be removed from the part.
> Combine straight lines: Straight lines hanging together in the same direction in a
polyline will be combined.
> Delete contours with length less than: Contours with a preset length less than a value
x in mm will be deleted automatically. Please note that individual contour elements are
joined first - only after that the length of the joined contour is compared against the given
value.
> Delete loops with precision of crossing: Overlapping contours or contours very close
together are removed, when the part is stored into the database or taken into the
workspace. Enter a value in the field to the right, from which the contours are to be
removed.
> Delete plot info and Delete dimensions: If parts have information on the layer Plotinfo
and/or dimensions and if these should no longer appear during nesting then they can be
deleted when being taken into the workspace by activating the two check boxes “Delete
plot info” and “Delete dimensions”.
> Don’t allow open contours: Drawings, which contain open contours, can be stored as a
DXF file, but cannot be taken into the list for nesting. However, this check ignores open
contours with a defined start point. This allows the construction of special open contours,
such as slots or parting cuts.
> Don’t allow crossing contours: Drawings, which contain crossing contour elements,
can be stored as a DXF file, but cannot be taken into the list for nesting. The crossing
contour elements are represented in blue color.
> Outer contour must exist: A drawing can only be taken into the list for nesting, if it
contains a closed outer contour.
> Don't allow any object inside inner contours: If there are any objects inside the inner
contours of a part drawing, the drawing cannot be taken into the list for nesting.
> Don’t allow mark contours outside the part: If there are any marking contours
outside the part drawing, the drawing cannot be taken into the list for nesting.
If the distance between the end points of two elements is less than the value set for error
tolerance for joining in “Precision for joining objects into contour” [mm] in the section
“Tolerance”, then these elements will be joined at their end points if the functions “Join”
and “Join All” in the “Modify” menu are called. In this way open contours, which have
accidentally occurred through imprecise designing can be closed.
Automatic Text Conversion for cutting and marking
In the section ‘Converting’ you can set how texts in the drawing should be treated:

> Don't convert any text: Texts in a drawing which have not already been converted into
closed contours with the “Convert Texts into closed contours” function and “Convert
texts into simple contours” in the “Edit” menu, will not be taken over with the drawing
into the workspace.
You can use this function to avoid taking over administration data of parts into the
workspace with them.
> Convert text into simple contours: Texts in a drawing which have not yet been
converted into a closed contour (for cutting) using the function “Convert Texts into closed
contours” in the Modify menu, will be automatically converted into simple contours (for
marking) when transferred into the workspace with the drawing.
If you wish to mark texts as simple contours, then you must place them onto a marking
layer (Powder Marking, Punching, Inkjet, Plasma Marking, Laser Marking, Technifor).
> Convert text into outline contours: Texts in a drawing which have not yet been
converted into a simple contour (for marking) using the function “Convert Texts into
simple contours” in the Modify menu, will be automatically converted into closed
contours (for cutting) when transferred into the workspace with the drawing.
Under “Saving” you can set whether OmniWin should allow saving imported DXF/DWG files
if these contain untranslated layers.
> Allow saving drawings with non-translated import layers to a file: This box is unchecked
by default, i.e. when you try to save an imported file, the “Layer Translation” dialog is
opened and you need to assign layers before you can save the file.
If you activate the checkbox, you can save the file. However, the “Layer Translation”
dialog is still opened, but the “Save” button is enabled and you can save the file without
translating the layers. In this case, OmniWin automatically saves to a new copy (name
suffix *_1) and your original file remains unchanged (see also “Options for Checking for
Non-translated Layers” on page 142).
2.3.12.2 Run before store
In the “Run before store” card in the CAD Options, you can define in which sequence the
inner and marking contours are to be output and whether parts with multiple contours
inside each other are to be split before storing.

Part
Parts consisting of several defined contours are usually separated into multiple parts before
they are stored into the database.
If you don't want the part to be split, unselect the checkbox "Separate parts before
saving into the database".
If the Checkbox is activated, the part will only be separated when storing in the database,
not when taking it over into the workspace. (See also ”Separate Parts” on page 119).
Sorting
Under Sorting, you can define the sequence for sorting the inner and marking contours
before saving a part. The sorting is stored in the database together with the part. The order
is maintained for the output of the nesting plan unless you make other adjustments during
the nesting.
The following sorting criteria can be selected:
> None: Sorting is the same as the sequence used to create the part.
> Standard: The inner and marking contours will be output sorted by increasing distance
from the origin of the drawing.
> Minimum Distance: Starting from the origin of the drawing, the inner and marking
contours will be linked in such a way that the shortest path to the next contour will
always be used.
> Minimum X-Distance: Starting from the origin of the drawing, the inner and marking
contours will be linked in such a way that the shortest distance to the next contour in the
X direction will be determined.
The distances will then be added to the Y difference of the vectors between the contours
concerned. This gives a priority to the contours lying in the X direction.
> Minimum Y-Distance: Starting from the origin of the drawing, the inner and marking
contours will be linked in such a way that the shortest distance to the next contour in the
Y direction will be determined.

The distances will then be added to the X difference of the vectors between the contours
concerned. This gives a priority to the contours lying in the Y direction.
> Maximum Distance: Starting from the origin of the drawing, the inner and marking
contours will be linked in such a way that the longest path to the next contour will always
be determined.
For the last four methods the center point of the circumscribed rectangle will be used as the
basis for the distance calculation.
2.3.12.3 Dimension style
In the card Dimension Style some settings for the dimensioning can be applied:
The two extension line spacings of a dimension can be extended beyond the start point of
the arrowhead. The length and the height of the arrowheads (Horizontal arrow size and
Vertical arrow size) can be determined, as well as the height of the dimension text (Vertical
text size) and the number of characters after the decimal point (Decimal precision).
If the Checkbox “Do not scale“ is activated, the size of the dimensions, i.e. the text height,
always stays the same size independent of zooming.
When modifying the dimension style, all existing dimensions will be changed
accordingly. Only the Decimal precision will remain.
2.3.12.4 Layer Toolbox
Use this function to control which process layers should be available in the Attribute Toolbar
in OmniWin.
Note thate the color and line type of the layers cannot be changed here - use the Attributes
page in the OmniWin Options (see “Attributes” on page 151).

You can stipulate which processes should appear in the “Attributes” dialog toolbar in the
“On” column. You should only take those processes into the Attribute dialog toolbar with
which you also wish to work:
For example, with the processes activated in the illustration above, the Attributes dialog
toolbar would look like this:
2.3.12.5 Storing Administration Data
Use the page “Storing Administration Data” in the CAD Options to configure which
administration data (i.e. the part information located on the layer “Administration”) will be
included in an export to DWG or DFX.
To enter the administration data, you use the function “View/Edit Current Part Info...” (see
chapter “Part Info” on page 143).
Use the column "On" to select the administration data which are to be saved together with
the part.

The “Parameter Name” lists the internal OmniWin name of the parameter, the
“Identification Text” is the text that will appear as administration data parameter names in
front of the value. The identification texts can be changed by selecting the parameter line
and clicking the “Change” button.
If the “Hide Administration layer on a drawing” checkbox is selected, the administration
data will be saved to the export file, but will not be shown when the drawing is opened
again.
2.3.13 Customize visible items

Use this function to activate or block the use of individual machine profiles, reports and
drilling data in the individual index cards.
Only the selected elements (e.g. the print templates) are available in the individual dialogs.
Additionally, the print templates can be filtered to show only the templates for the active
language.

Default settings
The region selected during the installation defines, which elements are originally available .
You can see which regional package has been installed in the Info dialog in OmniWin behind
the Build Number. If nothing appears there then the regional settings for Europe have been
installed.
> Click the “Restore defaults” button to restore the settings originally defined by the
installed regional package.
2.4 Show Menu

The “Show” menu contains function to set various view options.
Different functions are available, depending on whether OmniWin operates in drawing or in
nesting mode.
“Show” menu in drawing mode: “Show” menu in nesting mode:

Menu item Function
Grid Function that toggles the grid in the
(drawing/nesting) drawing/nesting pane.
The grid is enabled by default.
Absolute CS Shows the origin of the absolute coordinate
system in the drawing.
(drawing)
Relative CS Shows the point at which the relative
coordinate system is based for the next point
(drawing)
input.
CS Null Shows the plate origin.
(nesting)
Original Contours This function is available in the “Technology”
(nesting) menu for nesting and in the “Technology”
dialog for nesting too.
Shows the original contours of parts with
bevels and added macros (see View
Technocontours - Original Contours on page
425).
Start End Markers Shows the start and end marks of individual
(drawing) contour elements.
Drilling Holes Shows the drilling holes in their actual size.

(drawing/nesting)
Manipulators Showing and hiding the manipulators (see
also “Manipulators for easy copy, move,
(drawing/nesting)
rotate” on page 180).
Increase Manipulator Size Increases the size of the manipulators
(drawing/nesting)
Decrease Manipulator Size Decreases the size of the manipulators
(drawing/nesting)
The individual menu options are described in detail in the following topics.
2.4.1 Grid
Shows or hides the grid in the drawing/nesting plan area.

2.4.2 Absolute CS
Shows the origin of the absolute coordinate system in the drawing with the following
symbol:
This aids the better orientation on the drawing. The zero point display for the absolute
coordinate system applies both for the absolute X/Y coordinate system and for the absolute
polar coordinate system.
Command input: SHOWABSCS
2.4.3 Relative CS
Shows the point at which the relative coordinate system is based for the next point input
(e.g. for a line).
This makes orientation easier for the user. The X direction is shown by a red, solid arrow, the
Y by a red, unfilled arrow:
Command input: SHOWRELCS
2.4.4 CS Null
The display of the plate origin (red cross with a small circle) can be switched on and off with
the “Show Plate Null” function:
Command input: SHOWNULL
2.4.5 Show Start-End Marker for Contour Elements

The start and end marks for the individual contour elements of the drawing can be shown
using the function “Show Start-End Marker”.
When the function is selected the markers appear as small diamonds at the start and end
points of each contour element as in the following example:

When the function is selected once more the display of the start and end points is switched
off again.
2.4.6 Drilling Holes

When setting drill points you can display the actual drilling holes as a circle with the size of
the drilling hole diameter. In this way it is easier to recognize whether drilling holes might
overlap.
For drilling holes with a countersink, a second outer circle shows the countersink diameter.
2.4.7 Manipulators
The “Manipulators” option can be used to show or hide the manipulators.
Manipulators are handles that perform certain actions for the selected objects. If the
manipulators are enabled, a Manipulator Wheel is shown when you select an element such
as a part or a contour (see “Manipulators for easy copy, move, rotate” on page 180).
This menu option will only show the manipulators as enabled in the OmniWin Options. In
nesting mode, they are enabled by default, in drawing mode, they are all disabled.
Use the options “Increase Manipulator Size” and “Decrease Manipulator Size” to adjust the
size of the manipulator wheel.

2.4.8 Manipulators for easy copy, move, rotate
The manipulators can be used in drawing mode and in nesting mode. They can be
customized and switched on or off (see “Manipulators” on page 179 and “Selection Tool”
on page 153).
Please note that the manipulators need to be enabled for the drawing mode,
if required. In nesting mode, they are available by default.
The manipulator wheel contains the following manipulators:
> Translate manipulator (move and copy actions)
> Rotate manipulator
> Pivot point manipulator (moving the pivot point for rotation)
> Snap point manipulator (move/copy/pivot point move actions based on snap points)
Manipulator actions are applied to the selected object(s), this can be e.g. a part, individual
contours in drawing mode (left example), or several parts in nesting mode (right example):
Simple move or copy actions can be performed as well without the manipulator wheel –
simply click a contour and drag and drop it to the new place. You can use key combinations
to add variations to this function (“Key combinations” on page 188).
2.4.8.1 Translate Manipulator
The Translate manipulator can be used to move or copy objects. You can perform a free
movement or a directed movement aligned to the X or Y axis.
2.4.8.1.1 Horizontal/vertical move

> Select an object (e.g. a part in a nesting plan).
The manipulator wheel becomes visible.

> Click and drag the x or y arrow. The object is moved at the same time.
2.4.8.1.2 Free move


> Click and drag the free move zone.
The object is moved at the same time.
2.4.8.1.3 Free copy

> Click and drag the copy zone.

The object is moved and copied at the same time.

2.4.8.2 Rotate Manipulator


> Hover anywhere over the ring. The mouse pointer shows the “rotate” mode.
> Click and drag. The rotation angle is displayed. Release the mouse button at the correct
position.
If you hold down the Shift key while dragging, the rotation is performed in 5° steps. These
increments can be configured in the OmniWin Options (see “Selection Tool” on page 153).
If you have set a grain restriction for a part in the part properties, rotation for this part is
limited anyway. A grain restriction is required where the direction of grain in the material
must be maintained. Values from 0 to 360 can be set; 0 allows any rotation, 360 prevents
rotation.

2.4.8.3 Pivot Point Manipulator
The pivot point marks the center of rotation. When the manipulator wheel is opened, the
pivot point is located in the center of the object, i.e. when rotation is started, the object is
only rotated in itself. You can rotate the object around another point by moving the pivot
point.
> Drag the pivot point from the center of the manipulator wheel to the desired location.
The manipulator wheel is now at the new position.

When you use the Rotate manipulator, the object is rotated around the new pivot point.

2.4.8.4 Snap Point Manipulator
The Snap point manipulator can be used to move/copy objects or to move the pivot point
onto a snap point.
> Enable the relevant snap points in the Snap toolbar. The following snap points can be
used with manipulator functions. End point, middle point, center point, quadrant point.
> Select the object and hover over a snap point – it will be highlighted.
> Depending on the action you want to perform, do any of the following:
- Click: The pivot point is placed onto the snap point.
- Drag: The object can be moved freely.
- Hold down the Shift key and drag: The object can be moved in x or y direction.

- Hold down the Ctrl key and drag: The object is copied (free movement).
- Hold down the Ctrl and the Shift key and drag: The object is copied and the copy is
placed in x or y direction.
2.4.8.5 Key combinations
The actions performed by the manipulators can be combined in most cases. Use the
following keys for this:
Key Action
Ctrl copy
Shift horizontal/vertical move (x/y)
Cursor arrows rotate
E.g. if you use the Copy function of the Translate manipulator in the manipulator
wheel and hold down the Shift key while dragging, the movement to place the object copy
is constrained to the x/y axes.
Or if you use the rotate manipulator and hold down the Ctrl key, a rotated copy of
the object is created.
2.5 Draw Menu for Part Construction

The “Draw” menu for part construction contains the design commands to create:
> Points
> Lines
> Circles
> Arcs
> Ellipses
> Rectangles
> Polygon inscribed in a circle and Polygon circumscribed about a circle
> Texts

The last design (drawing) or change command can be repeated with
<Enter>, i.e. it appears anew in the command line.
The individual functions of this menu are described in the following sub-chapters.
2.5.1 Point
The command “Point” allows points to be constructed. The input can be a coordinate
input in the command line or as a mouse click in Snap mode (Snap to End, Intercept or other
points) in absolute and relative mode.
Command input: POINT

2.5.2 Drill Point
By means of the function “Drill Point” drilling operations can be configured.

For further details please refer to Support of drilling heads on page 465.
Command input: DRILLPOINT
2.5.3 Line Commands

There are three Line commands in the Draw menu:
> Line
> Multilines
> Scrap Line
These are described in the following sub-chapters.
2.5.3.1 Line
The function “Line” allows the construction of a single line by means of the definition
of the coordinates of two points (start and end point).
When you call the function you will first be asked to select the first point. The definition of
the point can be made by coordinate input in the command line, by mouse click and also
with the snap mode (snap to end, intercept or other points). The second point can be
selected with the same possibilities.
For the input of the coordinates in the command line relative or absolute inputs are possible
depending upon the settings in the list box and on the settings for relative coordinates (Auto
shift relative CS ).
Both a comma and a space can be used to separate the coordinate values.
If the first and second points are to be selected in the same coordinate system, then the
input in the command line can be shortened:
After the first point has been requested you can enter the coordinates for the second point
in the same coordinate system immediately after the entry for the first point. In the
coordinate system ‚‘Absolute Ortho‘ the following entry would arise, for example:
LINE: Select first point: 0 0 200 100
a line from point (0/0) to point (200/100).
A further possibility is the construction of a line with a defined length in any desired
direction to be shown by the mouse, for example in the direction of a point to be snapped
to.

Example:
After input of the horizontal and vertical lines, it is desired to construct a line from the origin
in the direction of the end point of the vertical line with a certain length.
To do this, first define the first point of the line as the origin (by entering the coordinates or
by snapping to the end point). To define the second point move the mouse, with ‚snap end
point‘ active, to the upper end point of the vertical line, but do not click it!
Instead, when asked to „select second point“ in the command line, enter the length
required there and confirm it with <Enter>.
If ‘Snap Orthogonal‘ is active, then you can only selected the directions +X, -X, +Y and –Y
for the line with the mouse.
Command input: LINE
2.5.3.2 Multilines
The command “Multilines” allows a series of lines to be constructed.

The command remains active until another design command or modify command (e.g. Trim)
is called.
Transparent commands such as ZOOM or setting a snap mode do not deactivate the design
command.
Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command line, by mouse click or by
snapping to points in the drawing.

The same input possibilities as for a line (see above) apply for the definition of the individual
lines which make up multilines. In particular there is also the possibility here to define a line
with a set length in a direction given with the mouse, for example in the direction of a point
to be snapped to.
Command input: MLINE
2.5.3.3 Scrap Line
The function “Scrap Line” allows the creation of a scrap cutting line. The scrap frame
of inner contours can be split up by setting parting cuts using this function.
When the function is called you will be asked to select the first point and then the second.
You can set both these points on the contour or outside it (as in the example). The points
can be defined with the mouse or with the input of the X/Y coordinates.
Finally you enter the distance which should be between the scrap cut line and the contour.
After this has been confirmed, the scrap cut line will be shown in the inner contour:
Command input: SLINE
Scrap lines are only allowed, if you have allowed open contours and objects
inside inner contours (see chapter “Storing Options” on page 169) in the
Storing options. (It may be appropriate to create a CAD Profile.)
2.5.4 Circle Commands

In the menu “Draw” you can find six functions for the drawing of circles
> Circle: Center, Point
> Circle: Center, Radius
> Circle: Center, Diameter

> Circle: 2 Points
> Circle: 3 Points
> Circle: Tan, Tan, Radius
which are described in the following sub-chapters.
When designing drawings with circle or arc elements it must be remembered that a circle
radius may never be smaller then the kerf width which arises when cutting!
The radii which the machine can travel are limited in size, e.g. to 100 m or 200 m. Circle
radii in the drawings which exceed the maximum radius the machine can travel must be
approximated with straight lines by the user!
2.5.4.1 Circle: Center, Point
“Circle: Center, Point” is a command for the construction of a circle with the aid of the
circle centre and a point on the circle.
The coordinates of the circle center must be defined first after calling the function, and then
the coordinates of a point on the circle. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the
command line, by mouse click or by snapping to points in the drawing.
Command input: CIRCLECP
2.5.4.2 Circle: Center, Radius
“Circle: Center, Radius” is a command for the construction of a circle with the aid of
the circle centre and the circle radius.
The coordinates of the circle centre must be defined first after calling the function, and then
the circle radius. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command line, by mouse
click or by snapping to points in the drawing.
Command input: CIRCLECR
2.5.4.3 Circle: Center, Diameter
“Circle: Center, Diameter” is a command for the construction of a circle with the aid
of the circle centre and the diameter of the circle.
The coordinates of the circle centre must be defined first after calling the function, and then
the circle diameter. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command line, by mouse
click or by snapping to points in the drawing.
Command input: CIRCLECD

2.5.4.4 Circle: 2 Points
“Circle: 2 Points” is a command for the construction of a circle with the aid of two
points on the circle.
After calling the function, the coordinates of two points on the circle are entered in
sequence. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command line, by mouse click or
by snapping to points in the drawing.
Command input: CIRCLE2P
2.5.4.5 Circle: 3 Points
“Circle: 3 Points” is a command for the construction of a circle with the aid of three
points on the circle.
After calling the function, the coordinates of three points on the circle are entered in
sequence. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command line, by mouse click or
by snapping to points in the drawing.
Command input: CIRCLE3P
2.5.4.6 Circle: Tan, Tan, Radius
“Circle: Tan, Tan, Radius” is a command for the construction of a circle with the aid
of two non-parallel tangents, or a tangent and a tangential circle, or two tangential circles,
and the circle radius.
After the function has been called, after the prompts
> ‘Specify first object and side:‘
> ‘Specify second object and side:‘
you have to select the two elements, one after the other, which are to be touched
tangentially by the circle to be constructed. The side must be selected, because in many
cases two possibilities are existing for the construction, for example at two tangential circles.
The two objects could be
> two non parallel lines, or
> one line and a circle, or
> two circles.
Then the circle radius has to be defined.
If a circle cannot be placed against these two objects, for example because the radius is too
small, then the message will appear „Cannot execute the operation.”.
Command input: CIRCLETTR

2.5.5 Arc Commands
In the Draw menu you can find five functions for the drawing of arcs
> Arc: 3 Points
> Arc: Start, Center, End
> Arc: Start, Center, Angle
> Arc: Start, End, Radius
> Arc: Start, End, Angle
Making inputs of radii and angles with the help of the mouse, it could happen, that while
confirming the value by clicking the mouse key the real value does not match the value
which has been displayed before, because possibly the mouse has been moved slowly while
clicking. Inputs of radii therefore should better not be executed with the mouse without
using a snap function. Input of angles should better be performed manually in the
Command line.
When designing drawings with circle or arc elements it must be remembered that a circle
radius may never be smaller then the kerf width which arises when cutting!
The radii which the machine can travel are limited in size, e.g. to 100 m or 200 m. Circle
radii in the drawings which exceed the maximum radius the machine can travel must be
approximated with straight lines by the user!
2.5.5.1 Arc: 3 Points
“Arc: “3 Points is a command to construct a circular arc with the aid of the start point,
the end point and any given point on the arc.
After the function has been called, the coordinates of the start point, any desired point on
the arc and the end point have to be entered. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in
the command line, by mouse click or by snapping to points in the drawing.
Command input: ARC3P
2.5.5.2 Arc: Start, Center, End
“Arc: Start, Center, End” is a command to construct a circular arc with the aid of the
start point, the centre and end point.
After the function has been called, the coordinates of the start point, the centre and the end
point of the arc must be entered. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command
line, by mouse click or by snapping to points in the drawing.
Command input: ARCSCE

2.5.5.3 Arc: Start, Center, Angle
The “Arc: Start, Center, Angle” command can be used to create an arc by entering
the start point, the center and an angle.
After the function has been called, the coordinates of the start point, the centre and the
angle of the arc must be entered. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command
If a positive angle is entered the arc is generated in a counter-clockwise (CCW) direction, for
a negative angle, the arc is generated in a clockwise (CW) direction.
Command input: ARCSCA
2.5.5.4 Arc: Start, End, Radius
The “Arc: Start, End, Radius” command can be used to create an arc by entering the
start point, the end point and the radius.
After the function has been called, the coordinates of the start point, the end point and the
radius of the arc must be entered. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command
The created arc always has a counter clockwise direction.
Command input: ARCSER
2.5.5.5 Arc: Start, End, Angle
The “Arc: Start, End, Angle” command can be used to create an arc by entering the
start point, the end point and the angle.
After the function has been called, the coordinates of the start point, the end point and the
angle of the arc must be entered in sequence. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in
the command line, by mouse click or by snapping to points in the drawing.
The arc is generated in a counter-clockwise (CCW) direction from the start point to the end
point.
Command input: ARCSEA
2.5.6 Ellipse Commands

In the Draw menu you can find four functions for the construction of ellipses
> Ellipse: Center, Point, Angle
> Ellipse: Center, Point, Distance

> Ellipse: Point, Point, Angle
> Ellipse: Point, Point, Distance
The ellipses generated with these functions will be approximated as Polylines. This means
that an ellipse will be described as a polyline in the DXF format and not as an ellipse. On the
other hand, OmniWin DXF formats can read in DXF formats which contain ellipse
descriptions, whereby again polylines will be generated.
If ellipses are to be cut with a Lasermat cutting system, then it is better for the
approximation to be made with arcs rather than with lines. For this you should round the
constructed ellipses with the “Fillet” instruction in the “Modify”.
Only the command “Ellipse: center, point, angle” can be called from the
drawing toolbar with the symbol , the other ellipse commands cannot be
called from the drawing toolbar.
2.5.6.1 Ellipse: Center, Point, Angle
“Ellipse: Center, Point, Angle” is an instruction for the construction of an ellipse using a
center point, main axis point on the ellipse and an angle. If you consider an ellipse as the
intercept of a sloping tube with a plane, then the angle can be regarded as the angle of
inclination of the tube to the plane.
After calling the function, define first the center of the ellipse and then an end point of the
main axis of the ellipse. When entering the rotation angle, remember that the limit angle 0
yields a circle whilst the limit 90 gives no intercept at all with the plane. With a positive
angle, the selected point on the ellipse becomes the end point of the larger main axis of the
ellipse whilst with a negative angle it becomes the end point of the smaller main axis of the
ellipse.
Command input: ELLIPSECPA
2.5.6.2 Ellipse: Center, Point, Distance
“Ellipse: Center, Point, Distance” is an instruction to construct an ellipse using the center, a
main axis end point and half the length of the second main axis.
After calling the function, enter first the center of the ellipse and then an end point of the
main axis of the ellipse and finally half the length of the second main axis.
Command input: ELLIPSECPD

2.5.6.3 Ellipse: Point, Point, Angle
“Ellipse: Point, Point, Angle” is an instruction to construct an ellipse using both the end
points of a main axis and an angle. If you consider an ellipse as the intercept of a sloping
tube with a plane, then the angle can be regarded as the angle of inclination of the tube to
the plane.
After calling the function, first define the two end points of a main axis as the first and
second points. When entering the rotation angle, remember that the limit angle 0 yields a
circle whilst the limit 90 gives no intercept at all with the plane. With a positive angle, the
axis of the ellipse becomes the larger main axis of the ellipse whilst with a negative angle it
becomes the smaller main axis of the ellipse.
Command input: ELLIPSEPPA
2.5.6.4 Ellipse: Point, Point, Distance
“Ellipse: Point, Point, Distance” is an instruction to construct an ellipse using both the end
points of a main axis and half the length of the second main axis.
After calling the function, first define the two end points of a main axis and then half the
length of the second main axis.
Command input: ELLIPSEPPD
2.5.7 Rectangle Commands

In the menu “Draw” you can find two functions for the construction of rectangles
> Rectangle
> Rounded Rectangle
2.5.7.1 Rectangle
The command “Rectangle” allows a rectangle to be generated with two diagonally

opposite points.
After the function has been called, the coordinates of two points have to be entered. Inputs
can be made as coordinate inputs in the command line, by mouse click or by snapping to
points in the drawing.
Command input: RECT

The object generated with the ‘Rectangle’ command consists of connected lines. It can be
broken up into its individual lines with the ‘Explode’ command from the ‘Modify’
Menu (see chapter “Explode” on page 242).
2.5.7.2 Rounded Rectangle
The command “Rounded Rectangle” allows a rectangle with rounded corners to be

generated with two diagonally opposite points.
After the function has been called, the coordinates of two points and then the rounding
radius have to be entered. Inputs can be made as coordinate inputs in the command line, by
mouse click or by snapping to points in the drawing.
Command input: RECTRND
The object generated with the ‘Rectangle’ command consists of connected lines and quarter
circles. It can be broken up into its individual elements with the ‘Explode’ function in
the ‘Modify’ Menu (see chapter “Explode” on page 242).
If the radius entered is greater than the maximum radius which is possible, then the
maximum radius possible will be used.
2.5.8 Polygon Commands

There are two functions in the “Draw” menu for the creation of polygons.
2.5.8.1 Polygon inscribed in circle
When the function “Polygon inscribed in circle” is selected the message will appear
POLYGIN: Define center point:
Whereupon you can define the center point of the circle inside which the Polygon should be
formed. After the following message
{POLYGIN} define Radius [last value selected]:
The radius of the circle can be set, and then after the message
{POLYGIN} define number of sides [last value selected]:
You can set the number of sides of the Polygon.
Command input: POLYGIN

2.5.8.2 Polygon circumscribed about circle
When the function “Polygon circumscribed about circle” is selected the message will appear
POLYGCIR: Define center point:
Whereupon you can define the center point of the circle inside which the Polygon should be
formed. After the following message
{POLYGCIR} define Radius [last value selected]:
The radius of the circle can be set, and then after the message
{POLYGCIR} define number of sides [last value selected]:
You can set the number of sides of the Polygon.
Command input: POLYGCIR
2.5.9 Text
The “Text” function creates a single- or multi-line text.
> Launch the “Text” function ( icon or “Text” from the “Draw” menu), then click to
select the base point for the position of the text. The “Text” dialog opens.
> Select the type from the “Text type” list:
- Normal text: This is the standard and applicable in most cases, unless you want to insert
texts for REA marking. You can insert any number of lines and choose any text size.
- REA 7: This is for REA 7 only. Only one line is possible and a defined set of text sizes.
- REA 16: This is for REA 16 only. Only two lines are possible and a defined set of text
sizes. Two lines are only supported for a text height of up to 27 mm. If bigger
characters are used, the first line is not shown, but it will remain hidden in the text
object.
For further information on REA text markings, please see “Inserting texts for REA
markings” on page 202.
> Enter the text. Use “Enter” to insert a line break where necessary.
> Confirm with “OK”. The “Text” dialog is closed and your mouse pointer can be moved
up or down to specify the text height with a click. As an alternative, enter the height in
the command line and confirm with “Enter”.

> Specify now the text direction, either by moving the mouse or by entering the angle in the
command line.
The text is inserted.
If you want to assign a cutting or marking process to the text, you need to convert it into a
closed or simple contour (function “Convert text into closed contours” or “Convert
text into simple contours” , see chapter “Convert text into closed, simple or continued
contours” on page 239).
Command input: TEXT
Scaling of text
You can enter a scale to adjust subsequently width and tracking of characters. This is
available in the Object Info for parts, in the “Selected Objects” node (when a text object is
selected). The scaling of text is not possible for Inkjet.
Modify parameters
You can use the Object Info dialog to change additional parameters. If you click the “Text”
line, the field expands allowing you to modify your wording. If you want to insert line breaks
here, use Ctrl+Enter.
The length of a text shown in the attributes is correct only for text fonts, in which all
characters have the same width, for example Courier New.

2.5.9.1 Inserting texts for REA markings
When you insert texts for REA 7/REA 16 printing (layer “Inkjet”) certain restrictions need to
be considered.
For information regarding the PP modifications required for REA text refert to Configuration
for REA text marking on page 574.
Font/Scaling/Text size
REA texts will be automatically assigned the font “Isocteur”. I.e. when you assign the layer
“Inkjet”, the supported font is applied and cannot be changed.
Only a defined set of font sizes is allowed. If you choose a font size that does not match any
of the allowed sizes (as specified below) the next bigger value is used later in the nc code.
However, the object info shows the value you choose.
The following font sizes can be applied:
REA 7 REA 16
mm Inch mm Inch
9 0.35
12 0.47 12 0.47
18 0.70 18 0.70
24 0.94 24 0.94
27 1.06 27 1.06
30 1.18
45 1.77
60 2.36
67 2.63
Plate edge distance – forerun and overrun

The REA head needs to be rotated to generate different text heights. If a text is too close to
the plate edge, the inkjet head would need to be positioned outside the plate border to

produce the required text height, which is not possible. The forerun values are the minimum
distances allowed from the plate edge to the text start point. Any text that is closer to the
plate edge will not be included in the nc output. Please consider this when you create parts.
Forerun (1) is the distance from the center of the REA head to the point where the text
starts.
Overrun is the distance that is required after the text.

The allowed overrun and forerun values (in mm) for each font size/REA type are listed in
chapter Default font configuration on page 576. For information regarding the PP
modifications required for REA text refert to Configuration for REA text marking on page
574.
2.5.9.2 Texts for OmniScript2 (Telesis PINSTAMP)

Text marking with OmniScript2 is supported in OmniWin. OmniScript 2 is the product name
used by Messer Cutting Systems for the Telesis® PINSTAMP®, whereas OmniScript is the
term used for the Telesis marking tool which is no longer mounted on new machines but still
supported in OmniWin. Both units are addressed by the “OmniScript” layer.
Use the text type “OmniScript2”. The text will be assigned the process “Mark OmniScript”
and some restrictions apply:
> The text size will be reduced if necessary depending on the text length (see “Text size
adaptation for multi-line text” on page 204).
> Multi-line text up to six lines can be entered.
> Single-line text will be automatically splitted if it exceeds the print area. The print area will
be repositioned and each piece of the text will be printed separately at the correct
position.
Processing on the machine is done according to so called “patterns”. Currently, only F
patterns (i.e. left-aligned text) are supported.
Text marking with OmniScript2 is supported by all current (4.4) PPs for straight cutting and
all current (4.5) PPs for advanced plans.

2.5.9.2.1 Postprocessor configuration
For straight cutting, no further adaptations are necessary.
For advanced plans, make sure “Telesis” is enabled as OmniScript layer interpretation
(Nesting Plan Options, page “System”). In the PP configuration; “Enable OmniScript 2”
needs to be set to “Yes”.
2.5.9.2.2 Text size adaptation for multi-line text

The printable area of the OmniScript2 marking tool is a 4 inch (101.6 mm) circle. Single-line
text will be split to fit into the printable area. For multi-line text, splitting is not possible - the
text length may not exceed a certain number of characters and the text size is limited as
well.
Upon text insertion, text height is reduced depending on the number of characters and lines.
The following chart shows the number of characters and the resulting text height for two-
line text. If you add further lines, the values may slightly vary.
No. of characters Max. text height
21-40 3 mm
15-20 6 mm
12-14 8 mm
10-11 10 mm
8-9 12 mm
6-7 16 mm
5 20 mm
1-4 25 mm

2.6 Draw Menu for Nesting
In the menu “Draw” for nesting the functions of the “Draw” menu can be used to construct
non-rectangular plates. The functions “Point”, “Scrap Line”, all “Ellipse” functions and
“Text” are not required for this and are therefore not available. Correspondingly these
functions are also missing in the Drawing Toolbar.
The menu “Draw” for nesting contains in detail the following functions:
> Automatic creation of remnant plates
> Draw and Cut of remnant plates
> Design commands for the creation of lines, circles, arcs and rectangles
> Change the size of a plate
> Trim of a plate contour
> Rotate and Mirror a Plan

The last design (drawing) or change command can be repeated with <Enter>, i.e. it appears
anew in the command line.
The individual functions of the Menu Draw for Nesting are described in the following sub-
chapters.
2.6.1 Auto Remnant Plate
The function “Auto Remnant Plate” or the corresponding button in the drawing
toolbar when nesting is used for the automatic creation of remnant plates from a nesting
plan using parameters which can be set.
When the function is called the following dialog opens:
Various methods for the automatic generation of the remnant plate can be selected in the
“Type” section.
When the <Apply> button is clicked an automatic remnant plate generation is made for the
selected type for the plan currently displayed in the geometry window. <OK> closes the
dialog and also causes an automatic remnant plate generation for the selected type.
You can set which parameters may be used for the current remnant plate type in the
“Restrictions” section. There are no restrictions for the type “Negative”.
In the example of the following plans

the automatic remnant plate generation with the type “Negative” gives the following result:
All cut contours, without exception, will be shown as remnant plate contours.

1 Line/2 Lines
“1 Line” draws one straight line to define the remnant.
“2 Lines” draws two straight perpendicular lines to cut a rectangle off the remnant, as
pictured below.

Strips
With the type “Strips”, the remnant plate is created by forming strips to the left on the
plate, starting from the right hand edge, with a strip width as defined under “Restrictions”
(= minimum raster width). The strips finish at the part contour when they meet it and so do
not use any possible free areas further to the left. This behavior can be changed by setting
the direction for the remnant plate creation.
It is possible to have the remnant plate(s) cut with the type “Strips” (and also with the types
“Raster” and “Optimized”) by selecting the checkbox “Make remnant cut”.
The following parameters can be entered in the “Restrictions” section (options available
depending on the type):
> the Part Plate distance (in mm)
> the Minimum Area (in m2): It sets the lower limit for how large an area must be for it to
be regarded as a remnant plate.
> Minimum circumscribed rectangle width and Minimum circumscribed rectangle
length (in mm): With these two dimensions for the circumscribed rectangle of a remnant
plate area you can influence the shape of the automatically generated remnant plates.
> Minimum raster width (in mm): This defines the minimum width of the strips.
> Direction: This defines the side where the remnant plate starts (only for “Strips”).
> Use inner area: This option allows to take into account the free areas inside inner
contours (only for “Raster” and “Optimized”).
Using the automatic remnant plate creation with the type “Strips” in the plan above would,
for example, give the following result:

Raster
With the type “Raster” the remnant plate is also generated by forming strips to the left
from the right hand edge of the plate with a strip width (= minimum raster width)which can
be set under “Restrictions”. The strip, however, does not end at when it meets any part
contour but continues to the left of the contour. In this way – by contrast to the type
“Strip” – any free areas which are further to the left are also included.
By activating the additional checkbox “Use inner area” in the “Restrictions section, it is also
possible to take into account the free areas inside inner contours.

Using automatic remnant plate generation with the type “Raster” on our example plan
would give the following result:
Optimized
With the type “Optimized” it is possible in addition to the type “Raster” to use a slide
switch to achieve an optimization between maximizing the area of the remnant plate on the
one hand and minimizing the number of lines which form its edge on the other, still
observing the parameter values entered under “Restrictions”.

If the optimization slider is in the middle between Max Area and Min Lines then the remnant
plate for the plan above would look like this:
If it is optimized to the maximum area (Slider switch fully left), then the following results
comes:
If optimized to the minimum of lines (Slider bar fully right) then the remnant plate is made
up from very few lines, as in the following example:

2.6.2 Draw Remnant Plate
The function “Draw Remnant Plate“ in the Draw menu for nesting or the corresponding
button in the Draw Toolbar for nesting allows to draw a remnant plate.
Use the drawing functions for this, esp. “Multilines” (line sequence) or “Rectangle”. If you
have drawn a closed contour, save this as remnant plate using the context menu for the
nesting plan.

In order to get straight lines, especially on the plate contour, you should use snap functions
as snapping to the grid, Snap to Endpoint, Snap to Ortho etc.
If you save the plan to a file, the remnant plate is saved as an XML file as well in addition to
the nesting plan XML.
Command input: REMNPLATE
2.6.3 Delete Remnant Plate

Use the function “Delete Remnant Plate” from the “Draw” menu or the corresponding icon
button to remove a remnant plate from the nesting plan.

The remnant is only removed from the nesting plan. If the remnant plate has already been
stored in the database, it will only be removed from the nesting plan but remain in the
database.
Command input: DELREMN
2.6.4 Cut Remnant Plate

The function “Cut Remnant Plate” in the Draw menu for Nesting or the corresponding
button in the Draw Toolbar for Nesting enables you to cut a defined remnant plate.
This includes the remnant cut in the NC code, and lead-ins/lead-outs for the remnant cut are
placed.
When you call the function you will be asked
PLANCUT: Specify remnant plate contour:
Now you have to click on that portion of the remnant plate contour which must be cut. If
you click on that portion of the remnant plate which belongs to the plate dimensions (green
lines in the following example), you will get an error message ‘Cannot execute the
operation.’
The remnant plate cut will appear as thick white lines, as in the following example:

The length of the lead-ins/lead-outs for the remant cut are defined by the values set in the
nesting plan options (for straight cutting: see “Remnant Plate Cutting” on page 306, for
bevel cutting: see Remnant Plate Cutting on page 446).
Command input: CUTREMN
The lead-ins and lead-outs (macros StartRemncut/EndRemncut) placed when you use the
function “Cut Remnant Plate” can be viewed and modified in the “Technology” dialog:
2.6.5 Change Remnant Plate Cut
Use this option in the “Draw” menu or the corresponding icon button to change the
cutting sense of the remnant cut. The direction of remnant cuts is originally defined by the
direction of drawing. You can use the option “Change Remnant Plate Cut” to toggle the
cutting direction of all remnant cuts in the nesting plan. Lead-ins and lead-outs are modified
accordingly.

Command input: CHCUTREMN
2.6.6 Line Commands

There are two Line commands in the “Draw” menu for nesting
> Line
> Multilines
which are described in the corresponding sub-chapters for the Draw menu for Part
Construction (see chapter “Line” on page 190 and chapter “Multilines” on page 191).
2.6.7 Circle Commands

In the menu “Draw” for nesting you can find six functions for the drawing of circles
> Circle: Center, Point
> Circle: Center, Radius
> Circle: Center, Diameter
> Circle: 2 Points
> Circle: 3 Points
> Circle: Tan, Tan, Radius
Construction (see chapter “Circle Commands” on page 192).
2.6.8 Arc Commands

In the “Draw” menu for Nesting you can find five functions for the drawing of arcs
> Arc: 3 Points
> Arc: Start, Center, End
> Arc: Start, Center, Angle
> Arc: Start, End, Radius
> Arc: Start, End, Angle

Construction (see chapter “Arc Commands” on page 195).
2.6.9 Rectangle Commands

In the menu “Draw” you can find two functions for the construction of rectangles
> Rectangle
> Rounded Rectangle
Construction (see chapter “Rectangle” on page 198 and chapter “Rounded Rectangle” on
page 199).
2.6.10 Change Plate Size

The function “Change Plate Size” in the “Draw” menu when nesting allows you to change
the size of the plate for a plan retrospectively.
This function is represented by the symbol in the Draw toolbar for Nesting.
When the function is called, the following dialog appears
In it you can set the plate length and width as well as its origin. This will delete the old plate
contour.
2.6.11 Trim plate contour

The function “Trim plate contour” in the “Draw” menu for nesting serves to extend or trim
and also to delete elements of a plate contour and is intended as a construction aid for
drawing your own plates.
This function is represented by the symbol in the Draw toolbar for Nesting.
After the function has been called, the message ‘TRIM: Specify erasing part:’ appears.
You must now select the object you want to trim.

If the element selected is cut or touched by another object, then it will only be deleted,
trimmed or extended to this point.
Free standing objects can also be deleted.
The Zoom command can be used as and when required during trimming.
The Trim plate contour instruction will not function for part contours on the
plate but only for the plate contours themselves.
Command input: TRIM
2.6.12 Rotate Plan

By means of the function “Rotate Plan” in the Draw menu for Nesting or with the
corresponding button in the Draw Toolbar for Nesting you can rotate a nesting plan
through a specified angle. When you call the function you will be asked
PLANROT: Specify rotation angle:[90.00]
After you have entered an angle, the plan will rotate with this angle.
Command input: PLANROT
2.6.13 Mirror Plan

The function “Mirror Plan” in the “Draw” menu for nesting or the corresponding button
in the Draw Toolbar for nesting serves to mirror an empty plan (plate). This function
can especially be useful for self-defined not rectangular remnant plates. Plans already
containing parts cannot be rotated.
When you call the function, the active plate will automatically mirrored at the Y-axis of the
coordinate system.
Command input: PLANMIR
2.7 Dimension Menu

The “Dimension” menu contains functions for adding dimensions to contour elements.
These include functions for:
> Horizontal, vertical and aligned dimension,
> Dimensioning of angles,
> Dimensioning of radii and diameters,

> Setting of a comment,
> Insertion of a text into a dimension
Some of the settings can be preset in the „Dimension Style“ card of the OmniWin options in
the „View“ menu (see chapter “Dimension style” on page 173).
The menu “Dimension” is only available in drawing mode.
The individual functions of the “Dimension” Menu are described in the following sub-
chapters.
2.7.1 Horizontal Linear
The dimensioning command “Horizontal Linear” is used for horizontal dimensioning,

i.e. dimensioning of elements in the X axis direction.
Once the function has been called you must enter the start and end points of the contour
whose horizontal dimension you wish to define, using either coordinate point entry or a
mouse click.
Then the height of the dimensioning is to be fixed by entry of a value or by pulling it up with
the mouse. The height of the dimensioning is the distance of the dimensioning in the Y
direction referred to its starting point (first point).
Once the dimension height has been confirmed the linear dimensioning will be shown (see
example):

Command input: DIMH
2.7.2 Vertical Linear
The dimensioning command “Vertical Linear” is used for vertical dimensioning, i.e.
dimensioning of elements in the Y axis direction.
whose vertical dimension you wish to define, using either coordinate point entry or a mouse
click.
the mouse. The height of the dimensioning is the distance of the dimensioning in the X
direction referred to its starting point (first point).
Once the dimension height has been confirmed the linear dimensioning will be shown (see
example):
Command input: DIMV

2.7.3 Aligned
The dimensioning command “Aligned” is used for the dimensioning of lines which
run neither in the horizontal nor in the vertical direction.
whose aligned dimension you wish to define, using either coordinate point entry or a mouse
click.
the mouse. The height of the dimensioning is the distance of the dimensioning from the line
with reference to its starting point (first point).
Once the dimension height has been confirmed the aligned dimensioning will be shown (see
example):
Command input: DIML
2.7.4 Angle
The dimensioning command “Angular” is used for the dimensioning of the angle
between tow contour elements.
Once the function has been called you must define the two lines, between which you wish
to have the angle dimensioned, with a mouse click.
Then you need only define the position of the angle and the distance of the dimension from
both lines by moving the mouse.
Three angle positions can be set:
> the enclosed angle between the two lines (see example),
> the opposite angle between the two lines, i.e. the angle enclosed between the extensions
of the two lines,
> the angle between one of the lines and the extension of the other line

Once the angle position has been confirmed the angle dimensioning will be shown (see
example):
Command input: DIMA
2.7.5 Radius
The dimensioning command “Radius” is used for the dimensioning of the radius of a
circle or of a circular arc.
Once the function has been called you must first define the circle or circular arc whose radius
you wish to define, with a mouse click.
Then the angular position of the radius dimension is input by entering an angle (referred to
the X axis) or by positioning it with the aid of the mouse.
Once the angle position of the radius dimension has been confirmed, the radius
dimensioning will be shown (see example). The value is preceded by an R:
Command input: DIMR
2.7.6 Diameter
The dimensioning command “Diameter” is used for the dimensioning of the diameter
of a circle or of a circular arc.
Once the function has been called you must first define the circle or circular arc whose
diameter you wish to define, with a mouse click.

Then the angular position of the diameter dimension is input by entering an angle (referred
to the X axis) or by positioning it with the aid of the mouse.
Once the angle position of the diameter dimension has been confirmed, the diameter
dimensioning will be shown (see example). The value is preceded by a diameter sign:
Command input: DIMD
2.7.7 Comment
The dimensioning command “Comment” is used to enter a comment at any desired

point in the drawing window, for example at a point of a contour element.
When the function is called a dialog window for the entry of the text appears, in which you
can also define
> the text font,
> the character style (Bold with the B button, italic with the I button and underlined with
the U button) as well as
> the width/height ratio, i.e. the relationship between width and height of the text
characters
See also Chapter “Text” on page 200.
After the required text has been entered and confirmed with OK or the Enter button, you
have to set as first point the point on the drawing to which the text should refer and as
second point the point where the comment should appear. Both points can be defined by
coordinate input or with a mouse click.
Once the second point has been defined the comment appears with an arrow (see example):

Command input: LDR
2.7.8 Edit Text
The dimensioning command “Edit Text” is used to insert a comment in an existing

dimensioning of a contour element.
A dimensioning object has to be selected before this function is called, i.e. it is clicked with
the mouse. Only then can the ‚Edit Text‘ command be called, when a dialog window for the
input of the text will appear in which you can also define
> the text font,
> the character style (Bold with the B button, italic with the I button and underlined with
the U button) as well as
> the width/height ratio, i.e. the relationship between width and height of the text
characters
See also Chapter “Text” on page 200. The dimension selected is entered in this dialog
window. You can now, for example, amend this with a comment:
After the required text has been entered and confirmed with OK or <Enter> the modified
dimension is displayed:

Command input: DIME
After selection of a dimensioning object, the dimension can only be replaced with the last
comment entered with the DIME command. The dialog window for comment definition is
not called with this command.
2.8 Modify Menu for Part Construction

The “Modify” menu for the construction of parts contains commands to modify or Edit
drawings or drawing elements These include:
> Move, Copy, Rotate, Delete
> Duplicate in columns, rows, in a circular layout, and multiple duplication of objects into a
part
> Trim and Extend Elements, Chamfer and Round Corners
> Scaling of Objects (reduce, enlarge)
> Mirror
> Creation of parallel contours
> Construction of a bridge between two contour elements
> Conversion of a text to a closed or simple contour (for cutting or marking)
> Align a text to a circle or arc
> Showing of start and end marks for the individual contour elements of the drawing
> Display options for drilling holes
> Join (Merge), Explode and Breake contours, Toggle Break
> Conversion of Straight Contours into Arcs (Approximation)

2.8.1 Move
The edit command “Move” is used to move selected drawing elements or drawing
objects.

Once the objects have been selected, the system asks for the reference point for moving.
When this has been entered, the system requests the new position for the object. A
movement vector is formed from the two points.
Command input: MOVE
As an alternative, simply use the mouse to move the selected drawing elements by drag and
drop:
2.8.2 Copy
The “Copy” function is used to copy particular drawing elements.

It works exactly like the “Move” function, only the drawing elements selected remain in their
old position and a copy of the selected elements is created in the new position.
Command input: MOVECOPY
As an alternative, simply use the mouse and the Ctrl key to copy the selected drawing
elements by drag and drop.
2.8.3 Rotate
The function “Rotate” allows selected drawing elements or drawing objects to be

rotated about a reference point by a defined angle.
Select the elements you want to rotate. When the selection is complete, a prompt to enter
the base point is shown in the command line. This can be entered by clicking or input of the
coordinates.
Enter then the rotation angle. This can be done by entering an angle directly in the
command line or using the mouse for the rotation.

If you have set a grain restriction for the part in the part properties, rotation for this part is
rotation.
Command input: ROTATE
2.8.3.1 Minimize the circumscribed rectangle
For the cost calculation for a part, the circumscribed (surrounding) rectangle should be as
small as possible, to minimize the required material included in the calculation.
By entering the command OPTROTATE, the part visible in the geometry window is rotated in
such a way that the area of the circumscribed rectangle parallel to the x and y axes of the
coordinate system is minimized.
This function is only available in the command line, there is no corresponding menu option.
Command input: OPTROTATE
Example before rotation:

Example after rotation:
After rotating, store the part with the new position.
2.8.4 Erase
The command “Erase” erases selected elements from the current drawing.
Once the function has been called, the elements to be erased can be selected after the
message appears "SELECT Specify objects:". When the selection is complete, the message
“{ERASE} To accept click on a selected object:" will appear. All selected elements are deleted
by clicking any one of the elements selected.
The ‘Del’ key can be used instead of the ‘Erase’ command.
Command input: ERASE
2.8.5 Horizontal Array

The function “Horizontal Array” generates duplicates of drawing elements in the horizontal
direction (X direction).
All objects selected will be copied in the horizontal (X) direction once the distance and
number have been entered.
When you enter the quantity, you have to consider, that the selected complex is also
counted. In other words, if you want 2 extra copies of the selected drawing element(s) you
must enter the number “3”.

Command input: ARRAYH
2.8.6 Vertical Array

The function “Vertical Array” generates duplicates of drawing elements in the vertical
direction (Y direction).
All objects selected will be copied in the vertical (Y) direction once the distance and number
have been entered. The distance value entered defines at the same time the direction for
copying (positive of negative value).
When you enter the quantity consider that the selected complex is counted as well. In other
words, if you want 2 extra copies of the selected drawing element(s) you must enter the
number “3”.
Command input: ARRAYV

2.8.7 Array
The function “Array” generates duplicates of drawing elements in the horizontal

direction (X direction) and in the vertical direction (Y direction).
All objects selected will be copied in the horizontal (X) and in the vertical (Y) direction once
the horizontal and vertical distance and the number in horizontal and vertical direction have
been entered.
counted. In other words, if you want 2 extra copies of the selected drawing element(s) in
one direction you must enter the number “3”.
Command input: ARRAY
2.8.8 Polar Array
The function “Polar Array” generates duplicates of drawing elements in a circular

layout.
All objects selected will be copied in a polar (circular) layout once the base point, the angle
and the number have been entered. The objects will be distributed to the included angle.
counted. In other words, if you want 2 extra copies of the selected drawing element(s) you
must enter the number “3”.

The objects are normally rotated during copying. If the selected objects should not be
rotated when they are copied, enter a minus sign before the quantity value:
Command input: ARRAYP
2.8.9 Nest Array
The “Nest Array” function is used for the multiple duplication and insertion of one or
more selected objects into one part or into several parts as an inner contour in the form of a
nest pattern with an offset and angle which can be pre-entered. With the aid of this
function it is possible to insert a number of small inner contours (cut-outs), such as slots, into
a part with values for the offset and angle which can be pre-entered.
Before calling the function, the part or parts, in which the objects are to be inserted, and the
objects themselves to be inserted, have to be provided, such as the circle and the slot in the
following example:

After calling the function, at the inquiry
‘{SELECT} Specify objects:‘
the object (the slot in the example) which is to be inserted into the part (the circle in the
example) as an inner contour must first be selected.
At the inquiry
‘{ARRAYNEST} Specify shift distance:[0.00]‘
the shift of the nested rows, that means the offset of the parts against one another from
row to row, has to be entered.
At the inquiry
‘{ARRAYNEST} Specify rotation angle:[0.00]‘
ithe angle of rotation of the nested objects (45 degrees in the example) has to be entered.
At the inquiry
‘{ARRAYNEST} Stretch parts, ‘1‘ for ‘Yes‘, ‘0‘ for ‘No‘:[0.00]‘
you can determine, whether the nested objects at the edge of the part should be stretched
or compressed, in order to make the most of the place at the edge.
At the inquiry
‘ARRAYNEST: Specify horizontal part-part distance:[10.00]‘
you can determine the distance (that means the gap) between the nested objects in a row.
At the inquiry
‘{ARRAYNEST} Specify vertical part-part distance:[10.00]‘
you can determine the distance (that means the gap) between the nested rows of the
inserted objects.
At the inquiry
‘{ARRAYNEST} Specify part-plate distance:[10.00]‘
you can determine the distance between the inserted objects and the edge of the part.
The nesting leads to the following result in the example, if the stretching and compressing of
the parts has been allowed:

The compressing of the objects in the length at the edge of the part can result in a size, in
which the circumscribing rectangle of the objects is a square. If the compressing would result
in a length of the circumscribing rectangle of the objects smaller than its width, the previous
object will be stretched (see example).
If no stretching and compressing of the objects was allowed, the nesting leads in the
example to the following result (other parameters are the same):
Command input: ARRAYNEST

2.8.10 Trim
The command “Trim” is used to crop or trim and also to delete elements or objects.
After the function has been called, the message ‘TRIM: Specify erasing part:’ appears. You
must now select the object you want to trim.
If the element selected is cut or touched by another object, then it will only be deleted,
trimmed or extended to this point.
The Zoom command can be used as and when required during trimming. Free standing
objects can also be deleted.
Command input: TRIM
2.8.11 Chamfer
The function “Chamfer” places a chamfer (bevel) on one or all corners of an object.
Chamfers can be symmetric or asymmetric and they can be placed on inner or outer corners.
After the command has been called, at the requirements

‘Specify first object and side:‘
‘Specify second object and side:‘

the two lines linked and their sides must be selected. If several lines are linked, the chamfer
can set at the left or right end of a line, so that you have to click near the end where you
want to have the chamfer.
Then the distance for the chamfer (“Specify distance or distances”) can be entered. If only
one value is entered for the distance, the bevel will be symmetric to the corner, that means,
equal on both lines. You also can enter two different values for the bevel on both lines,
separated by a space sign. The first value covers the first line selected, the second value is for
the second line selected.
If an object already consists of linked lines (see above), then the first query only asks for the
object and then the question about the distance at once. Then a chamfer will be placed on
all corners.
Command input:
CHAMFER (for one corner of an object)
CHAMFERPOLYLINE (for all corners of a linked object)
2.8.12 Fillet
The function “Fillet” puts a radius on one corner of two linked lines (the end point of
one line is the start point of the other line) or on all corners of linked lines of an object (an
object created with the “Join” command or, for example, a rectangle created with the
“Rectangle” command).

the two objects linked and their sides must be selected. If several lines are linked, the fillet
can set at the left or right end of a line, so that you have to click near the end where you
want to have the fillet.

Then the radius (“Specify radius”) for the fillet can be given.
If an object already consists of linked lines (see above), then the first query only asks for the
object and then the question about the radius at once. Then a radius will be placed on all
corners.
Command input:
FILLET (for one corner of an object)
FILLETPOLYLINE (for all corners of a linked object)
2.8.13 Extend
The function “Extend” extends two elements until they are closed or joined to each
other. However, it is not possible for elements to be closed to themselves (Part Circle).
the two elements and their sides must be selected. For the selection of a side you have to
click near at the end of the element, whose end should be extended. Then the objects will
be extended and thus joined.
Zoom commands can be executed during the extension.
Command input: EXTEND
2.8.14 Scale
The command “Scale” allows objects to be scaled, i.e. enlarged or reduced in the X
and Y direction to the same amount.
After calling the function you must select the objects to be scaled. Then the basis point for
scaling must be entered followed by the scale factor.
Command input: SCALE
2.8.15 Mirror
The command “Mirror” allows a selected object to be mirrored about a mirror axis
which must be defined.
After the selection of the objects to be mirrored you have to define the mirror axis. The start
and end point of the axis can be picked with the mouse (with or without Snap points) or
entered in the command line. The snap mode “Snap to Ortho” (see chapter “Snap Modes”
on page 272) has no effect here.

Once the mirror axis has been defined, you can decide whether the original object selected
should be retained or not by responding to the query “Delete source objects with “1” for
“Yes” or “0” for “No”:[1.00]”.
Command input: MIRROR
2.8.16 Offset
The command “Offset” generates a parallel contour.

After calling the command the object to be offset must be clicked. Then the side to which
the offset is to occur must be picked. After input of the offset value, the parallel object is
created.
If the object is a joined object (converted into one object with the ‘Join’ command), then a
parallel contour will be generated around the entire object. This parallel contour will have
the defined distance to the original contour at every point.
Command input: OFFSET
2.8.17 Bridge
The command “Bridge” is used to generate a bridge between two contour elements.
This allows you to prevent inner contours dropping out, for example when cutting letters.
When the function is called you will be asked to select the first point and then the second.
You can set both these points on the contour or outside it (as in the example).
The points can be defined with the mouse or with the input of the X/Y coordinates.
Next the bridge width has to be entered in the command line. After the bridge width has
been confirmed, the bridge will be drawn in the inner contour (Example):
Command input: BRIDGE

2.8.18 Convert text into closed, simple or continued
contours
If you want to use a cutting or marking process to add text to a part you need to prepare the
text for the production. To do this, use the functions in the “Modify” menu.
These functions convert a text object into a contour for cutting or marking.
Convert Text into Closed Contours

This function converts text into closed contours (usually for cutting). When the function is
called you will be asked to select the text to be converted. On clicking on text this will be
changed into a contour (example “Text1” below).
Command input: TEXTCONVERT
With some font types, a large number of individual contour elements may be
generated which can lead to problems on the machine. In such cases, you
should use a simple font type.
To cut inner contours correctly, bridges need to be added to certain letters (such as “e”) to
prevent the inner fill areas from dropping out (see also “Bridge” on page 251).
Convert Text into Simple Contours

Use this function to convert texts into simple open contours (normally for marking, see
example “Text2” below).
Command input: TEXTCONVERTSIM

If you wish to mark texts as simple contours, you must place them onto a
marking layer.
Convert Text into Continuous Contour
When texts are converted into continuous contours, the individual contours are linked by
straight lines forming a continuous marking contour. This eliminates all rapid moves between
the individual characters, and the marking process can continue without interruptions
reducing production time drastically for plasma marking.
Command input: TEXTCONVERTCONT
2.8.19 Align Text to Circle

The function “Align Text to Circle” in the Modify menu can be used to align texts to arcs or
circles.
> Insert a text into a drawing with a circle or circular arc using Draw/Text or the symbol
as usual. The text can be positioned anyhow.

> Select the function “Align text on circle” in the “Modify” menu or enter the command
TEXTCIR in the command line.
> Select the text and close the selection with the right mouse button. You can also select
several texts, to do this click them with the Ctrl key pressed one after another and also
close the selection with the right mouse button.
> Then click on the contour, on which the text should be aligned. The request to give the
position entry for the text will appear in the command line. Enter whether the text should
be inside (1) or outside (0) the contour and confirm the instruction with the Enter key.
> Now give the distance between the contour and the text and confirm this instruction with
the Enter key.
The text will be aligned to the circle or arc.

Certain font types could become slightly distorted by this alignment. The most suitable are
simple TrueType fonts such as Courier.
With the alignment the letters are broken into individual elements, this means a realignment
of the total lettering is not possible. If you are not satisfied with the result then undo the
alignment with Ctrl+Z and repeat the process with different parameters.
Command input: TEXTCIR

2.8.20 Join
The command “Join” allows individual elements which are connected (end point of
one element is the start point of the other element) to be joined into an object like a
“Polyline”. In particular a Multiline, i.e. a sequence of lines, can be combined into a Polyline
with the aid of this command.
To join connected elements into one object, the elements must be clicked with the mouse
individually one after the other. After having finished the selection you have to confirm the
execution of the joining by clicking on one of the selected objects.
This combined or joined object can now be processed with the various edit or modify
commands. Such an object can also be selected with one mouse click.
Command input: JOIN
2.8.21 Join All

The command “Join All” allows all connected elements of a drawing to be automatically
combined.
Command input: JOINALL
2.8.22 Explode
The command “Explode” is the opposite of the “Join” command (see chapter “Join”
on page 242). Joined objects can be exploded down into its individual elements with this
command.
First the joined objects, which are to be broken down into its composite elements, must be
selected. After having finished the selection you have to confirm the execution of the
exploding by clicking on one of the selected objects.
Command input: EXPLODE
2.8.23 Explode All

In contrast to the “Explode” command , with the function Explode All in the “Modify” menu
for part construction the connected objects which are to be exploded do not need to be
selected individually. Instead they can all be automatically exploded at once.
Command input: EXPLODEALL

2.8.24 Break
With the command “Break” you can break up one connected object (Polyline) not into its
individual elements (as with the command “Explode”, see chapter “Explode” on page 242),
but into several linked objects (Polylines). This command can also be used on straight lines
and Arcs.
Once you have called the instruction you can define one or more break points. To do this
you must click on or near the point at which the elements are linked and at which you want
to break the Polyline.
The first break point is automatically the start point of the Polyline.
Command input: BREAK
2.8.25 Toggle Break

Using the function “Toggle Break” in the “Modify” menu for part construction it is possible
to set and remove again break points at the start and end points of the individual contour
elements of a coherent object (i.e. one with linked elements). When doing this it is
recommended to activate the display of start and end point markers of the contour elements
using the function “Show Start-End Markers” in the “Modify” menu of part construction
(see chapter “Show Start-End Marker for Contour Elements” on Page 178), to see how the
function will act.
In contrast to this, you can set break points at any point you wish on the contour with the
“Explode” command, but you cannot undo them. This can, however, be done with the new
function “Toggle Break”.
Command input: TOGGLEBREAK

2.8.26 Approximate - Conversion of Straight Contours
into Arcs
Use the “Approximate” option to convert straight lines into arcs.
In this example, an arc consisting of several straight lines needs to be converted into a real
arc contour.
> First, join the individual contour elements (Technology Dialog, function “Join” ).
> To start the function, open the “Modify” menu and choose the “Approximate” option, or
enter the corresponding command in the command line: APPROX
> Then, follow the instructions in the command line:
> Select the contour element you want to convert.

When you have selected all contour elements, specify the parameters for the conversion in
the command line:
> Maximum element size: The maximum length of the straight lines to be approximated.
> Maximum deviation: The maximum distance between the original contour (straight line)
and the arc which replaces the straight lines.
> Maximum radius: The maximum radius of the arc to be created. Entering a maximum
avoids creating arcs that are in fact straight lines.
The function is now carried out. Depending on the parameters, one or several arc elements
are created.

> To view the individual contour elements, break the combined contour (“Technology” tab,
“Break a compound object” symbol ).
Command input: APPROX

2.9 Modify Menu when nesting
The menu “Modify” for nesting contains the following functions:
It looks totally different to the Modify menu for the part construction. Only the functions to
Erase, Move, Rotate and Copy are present in both menus.
Corresponding to the menu the Modify Toolbar consists of the following symbols:
The sequence of the symbols corresponds to the sequence in the menu.

The menu “Modify” contains for nesting command for
> Delete, Move Copy, Rotate and Mirror parts
> Switch on/off the collision control

> Nesting of parts in form of a row pattern and in form of a matrix
> Create and delete technology objects (Bridge, Link, Common Cut, Stitches)
> Set the sequence of cutting for the part contour elements in a common cut with 1
contour
> Set the relative position of the two parts to each other along the common cut for any
desired common cut
> Automatic Move of parts to the left, right, top and bottom
The functions in the menu “Modify” for nesting are described in the following sub-chapters.
As long as you operate in the nest mode, the context menu (right mouse button) contains
the functions of the “Nest” menu. However, if you are holding the Ctrl or Shift key pressed
while opening the context menu, the functions of the “Modify” menu are available in the
context menu.
2.9.1 Erase
The “Erase” function erases a selected part or several selected parts from the current
nesting plan.
Once the function has been called, the parts to be erased can be selected after the message
appears "SELECT Specify objects:". When the selection is complete, the message “{ERASE}
To accept click on a selected object:" will appear. All selected parts are deleted by clicking
any one of the parts selected.
The ‘Del’ key can be used instead of the ‘Erase’ command.
Command input: ERASE
2.9.2 Set Rows
The “Set Rows” function is used to nest parts in a pattern of rows.

Before you call this function, you need to select the parts for nesting in the workspace,
furthermore, a sufficient number of parts must be available for nesting (amount “Remains”).
Once the part has been selected and after the function is called, the command line will ask
for the rotation angle and the starting corner on the plate in the sequence:
‘Specify parts number:’
‘Specify part rotation angle:’
‘Specify start corner:‘0’,‘1’,‘2’,‘3’:’
The starting corner is – with reference to the display on the screen - enter:
0 for the lower left corner of the plate

1 for the upper left corner of the plate
2 for the upper right corner of the plate
3 for the lower right corner of the plate
The nesting is done from left to the right in X-direction, that means in the direction of the
length of the plate, beginning at the plate edge at the bottom. If a row is full, the next row
will be added in the same direction directly above the previous row.
If the “Set Rows” function is called repeatedly in succession then a check will first be made –
before the new part is added onto the end of the last row – whether there is room in the
previous rows and, if possible, it will try to fill them.
In contrast to the matrix function (see chapter “Matrix” on page 249), the part to be nested
does not have to be already on the plate but can only be selected before directly from the
workspace.
Command input: SETROW
2.9.3 Matrix
The “Matrix” function allows the nesting of selected parts in the form of a matrix
with a defined number of rows and columns.
Once the parts have been selected, the program asks for the horizontal number, i.e. the
number of columns, and then for the vertical number, i.e. the number of rows.
When you enter the number, you set at the same time the direction where the part copies
will be placed:
Positive value: nest to the right/to the top
Negative value: nest to the left/to the bottom
Make sure you use the correct direction for the matrix. Parts that would exceed the plate
edge will not be placed.
Command input: MATRCOL
2.9.4 Move
The “Move” function is used to move selected parts.

Once the function has been called, the parts to be moved can be selected after the message
appears "SELECT Specify objects:".
When the selection is complete the message “{MOVECOL} Specify base point:" appears to
ask for the reference point for the move.
When the reference point has been defined, you will be asked to specify the new position
for the selected parts with the message “{MOVECOL} Specify new position:".

Command input: MOVECOL
When the Move function is active, the “< “ key can be used to toggle to the "Rotate"
function and, when “< “ is pressed again, back to the Move function.
The “< “ key is entered in the KEY.INI file as a shortcut for the TOGGLEMR function (for
Toggle Move / Rotate).
2.9.5 Copy
The “Copy” function is used to copy the selected parts.

It works just like the 'Move' function, except that the selected parts remain in their original
position and a copy of the selected parts is created in the new position.
Command input: MOVECOPYCOL
2.9.6 Collision control
The “Collision Control” function is used to switch the collision control on and off
when nesting.
If the collision control is switched on, then the function is marked with a tick in the Modify
menu and the corresponding button in the Toolbar is pressed.
The collision control can be switched on and off with the Spacebar.
2.9.7 Rotate
The “Rotate” function allows selected parts to be rotated by an angle, which can be
set, around a reference point.
Once the parts have been selected, the reference point for rotation is requested. After its
entry comes the request for the angle for the rotation.
Command input: ROTATEC
When the Rotate function is active, the “< “ key can be used to toggle to the "Move"
function and, by pressing “< “ again, back to the Rotate function.
The “< “ key is entered in the KEY.INI file as a shortcut for the TOGGLEMR function (for
Toggle Move / Rotate).
If you have set a grain restriction for the part in the part properties, rotation for this part is
rotation.

2.9.8 Mirror
The command “Mirror” allows a selected parts to be mirrored about a mirror axis
which must be defined.
Once the parts to be mirrored have been selected, you must define the mirroring axis. The
start and end point of the axis can be picked with the mouse (with or without Snap points)
or entered in the command line. The snap mode “Snap to Ortho” (see chapter “Snap
Menu” on page 271) has no effect here.
When the mirroring axis has been defined you can decide with the message "Delete source
objects, "1" for "Yes", "0" for "No":[1.00]" whether the original parts selected should be
retained or not.
Command input: MIRROR
2.9.9 Bridge
You can define bridges between parts using the “Bridge” function in the Modify menu
when nesting or with the symbol in Modify Toolbar for nesting. After calling the
function, when the message appears
BRIDGEP: Select first point:
Define a point on or near the contour of one part, and on seeing the message
{BRIDGEP}: Specify second point:
define a point on or near the contour of the other part.
The parameters which can be set for the bridge can be found under nesting plan options, in
the “Bridge” section of the “Technology” card (see also Chapter “Technology” on page
317):
As well as setting the width of the bridge and the rounding radius for the bridge end points,
you can also chose whether the bridge should be made without crossing (left in the
example) or with a double crossing, i.e. with the cuts crossing at both ends of the bridge,
(right in the example):

Command input: BRIDGEP
2.9.10 Link
You can define linking cuts (chain cutting) between parts using the “Link” function in the
Modify menu when nesting or with the symbol in the Modify Toolbar for nesting. A
linking cut is always made from the end point of the lead-out line of the outer contour of a
part to the start point of the lead-in line of the outer contour of another part.
After calling the function, when the message appears
LINK: Select first point:
Pick the end point of the outer contour of a part. At this moment only such points can be
snapped to. After you have selected this point with a mouse click you will be asked for the
next point:
{LINK}: Specify next point:
now you can either snap to the start point of the lead-in line of an outer contour of another
part or set intermediate points as in the following example:
You can take back linking elements with the right mouse button.

If the linked parts have inner contours then these will be completely cut first before the two
outer contours are cut.
Command input: LINK
2.9.11 Common Cut 1 Contour

With “Common Cut 1 Contour”, the common cut creates a single outer contour from two
parts In doing this all inner contours which may exist are cut first. In general, when cutting
the outer contour, the common cut is done last.
When you call the “Common Cut 1 Contour” function in the “Modify” menu or using the
corresponding symbol in the Modify Toolbar for nesting, you will see the message:
COMCUT: Specify first contour:
First click the common cut contour on the part which is to be moved to the second part. This
part to be moved gets an open contour from the common cut and will be cut as first outer
contour after all inner contours have been cut.
Once the first common cut contour has been selected, you will see the message:
{COMCUT} Specify next contour:
Now define the common cut contour on the second part, which will remain in its position.
The outer contour of the second part will be cut after the outer contour of the part selected
first. The common cut will take place at the end of this contour.
The parameters which can be set for the Common Cut 1 Contour can be found under
nesting plan options, in the “Common Cut 1 Contour” card (see also Chapter “Common
Cut 1 Contour” on page 319):

You can set the values here for the length and angle of the lead-in and lead-out lines. Please
note the special features of the lead-out type “Stitch” (see “Lead-out type “stitch” for
Common Cut 1 Contour” on page 254).
If the Checkbox “Set default length by database outer contour parameters” is active then
values for the lengths of the lead-in and lead-out lines will be taken from the outer contour
parameters of the process database as defaults. You can temporarily modify these values,
however as soon as you start OmniWin anew, the default values from the process database
will be used again. If the Checkbox is deactivated then the last values set remain in force.
No values from the process database will be used for the angles, the last values set always
remain valid.
Command input: COMCUT
2.9.11.1 Lead-out type “stitch” for Common Cut 1 Contour
OmniWin offers a function for ending a Common Cut 1 Contour with a stitch. There are two
ways to prepare the Common Cut 1 Contour Technology to apply a lead-out of type
“Stitch” with a defined length:
> Manually define a negative value for the lead-out length in the Nesting Plan Options.
> Define stitch lead-out in the process database and use it for Common Cut 1 Contour.
2.9.11.1.1 Manually define a negative value for the lead-out length in the
Nesting Plan Options
> Open the “Common Cut 1 Contour” page in the Nesting Plan Options.
> Disable the option “Set default length by database outer contour parameters”.
> Enter a negative value for the lead-out length:

> Combine two parts with a Common Cut 1.
A lead-out of type “stitch” is applied:
2.9.11.1.2 Setting the “stitch” macro in the Process Database

> Start the Process Data Editor and select the material-thickness-process combination you
want to change.
> Open “Outer Contour” tab.
> Set the lead-out type for the range 180 < A < 270 to “Stitch” and define a length. Make
sure you use the correct decimal separator as defined in the regional profile of your
operating system:

> Create a nesting plan and verify that the option “Set default length by database outer
contour parameters” for Common Cut 1 Contour configuration is enabled.
> To set the length, use the negative value of the stitch length defined in the Process Data
Editor:
> Combine two parts with the Common Cut 1 Contour technology.
A lead-out of type “stitch” is applied:

2.9.12 Common Cut 2 Contours
With “Common Cut 2 Contours” both parts will, despite the common cut, still be treated as
separate parts. Two outer contours will be created.
When you call the “Common Cut 2 Contours” function in the “Modify” menu or using the
corresponding symbol in the Modify Toolbar for nesting, you will see the message:
COMCUT2: Specify first contour:
First click the common cut contour on the part which is to be moved to the second part. This
part to be moved gets an open contour from the common cut.
Once the first common cut contour has been selected, you will see the message:
{COMCUT2} Specify next contour:
Now define the common cut contour on the second part, which will remain in its position.
The outer contour of the second part gets the common cut so it is closed by it.
The parameters which can be set for the common cut 2 contours can be found under
nesting plan options, in the “Common Cut2 Contours” section of the “Technology” card
(see also Chapter “Technology” on page 317):
You can set the values here for the length and angle of the lead-in and lead-out lines.
If the Checkbox “Set default length by database outer contour parameters” is active then
values for the lengths of the lead-in and lead-out lines will be taken from the outer contour

parameters of the process database as defaults. You can temporarily modify these values,
however as soon as you start OmniWin anew, the default values from the process database
will be used again. If the Checkbox is deactivated then the last values set remain in force.
remain valid.
Command input: COMCUT2
2.9.13 Stitches: Single Stitch - Multiple Stitches
2.9.13.1 Single Stitch
You can define stitches on the part contour with the Single Stitch function in the Modify
menu when nesting or with the symbol in the Modify toolbar for nesting.
After calling the function, when the message appears
STITCH: Specify stitch position:
appears and you must specify a point on or near the contour of the part at which a stitch
should be created.
The parameters which can be set for the stitches can be found under nesting plan options, in
the “Stitch” section of the “Technology” card (see also chapter “Technology” on page 317):
As well as setting the width of the stitch you can change the length and angle of the lead-in
and lead-out lines at the stitches.
Command input: STITCH

2.9.13.2 Multiple Stitches
This option adds several stitches as defined on the Technology page in the Plan Options(see
also chapter “Technology” on page 317).
> Select the menu option and click on the contour. The stitches are placed on the contour
(default setting: five stitches are placed at even distances on the whole contour).
Command input: MSTITCH
2.9.13.3 Multiple Stitches - Use three points
This option adds several stitches to a defined contour section as set on the “Technology”
page in the Plan Options (see also chapter “Technology” on page 317).
> Select the option and click two points on the contour that limit the contour part you want
to add the stitches to. (You may use a snap mode to help you define the points.)
> With the third click, define the direction for assigning the stitches. The stitches are added
to the contour part that is next to the third click.
Command input: MSTITCHB
Example:
Selecting the two upper corners and clicking next to the upper contour adds the stitches on
this contour part only.

Selecting the two upper corners and clicking next to the lower contour adds the stitches on
three sides of part only.
In both cases, the default setting is used (five stitches are placed at even distances).
2.9.13.4 Remove multiple stitches
Use the “Undo” function to remove all automatically added stitches directly, or you use the
“Delete Technology” option from the “Modify” menu to remove the stitches one by one.
2.9.14 Loops - manual/automatic

Corner loops can be added to nested parts.
You can apply corner loops manually to a specific corner, or automatically to all corners of
the selected contour that meet the configured criteria.
Configuration
Corner loops are configured in the nesting plan options.
> On the Technology page in the nesting plan options, you can set the “Radius” and the
“Minimum angle”.

The “Minimum angle” defines, for which corners the loop will be set when the function for
automatically setting the loops is called.
Select the “Type” of the corner loop (Round or Triangle).
The “Radius” setting will be applied for automatic and manual loops. For round loops, it
does not define the radius of the circular segment of the loop but rather the distance from
the contour corner point to the vertex of the circular segment of the loop:
For triangle loops the parameter is the length of the each of the equal sides of the loop
triangle.

Adding corner loops
From the “Modify” menu in nesting mode, select “Manual Loop” or “Automatic Loop”.
> Manual: Click the corner you want to add the loop to.
> Automatic: Click the contour. Loops will be added to all corners on the selected contour
that meet the configured criteria (min. angle).
Removing corner loops

Use the “Delete Technology” function from the “Modify” menu to remove individual corner
loops.
Combined parts for automatic nesting and for saving parts with
loops
As you apply loops in Nest mode, it is not possible to save a part with loops directly as a CAD
drawing. However, you can save it as a combined part (function “Create Combined Part” in
the “Nest” menu). Simply create a nesting plan with reference objects. When you reopen
the nesting plan, you can then take back the combined parts into the workspace for reuse.
Storing parts with loops as combined parts allows you as well to autonest these parts.
For further information regarding the combined parts please refer to „Create Combined
Part“ on page 275.
2.9.15 Pre-piercing geometries

Pre-piercing is supported for straight cutting. This allows you to:
> add pre-piercing geometries to your lead-ins:
- manually for a specific part
- for all parts in the nesting plan
- automatically during the nesting of parts

> configure standard options and parameters
> show/modify special geometries for individual lead-ins in the Technology Dialog
> configure one-carriage pre-piercing for multitorch
The pre-piercing geometries are considered in the nc output, in the simulation and in XML
export files. Pre-piercing is always done before cutting.
Pre-piercing is supported only in OmniWin Professional.
2.9.15.1 Setting pre-piercing geometries
The “Modify” menu for nesting plans contains two items that allow the placement of pre-
piercing geometries after nesting.
Place single pre-piercing

A pre-piercing geometry can be set on an existing lead-in for a part. Start the function and
select the lead-in where you want to place the geometry. Offset, shape and size of the
geometry depend on the settings defined in the nesting plan options (see “Configuration”
on page 264). These parameters may be changed later in the Technology dialog.
Place pre-piercing on whole plan

Pre-piercing geometries are added to all lead-ins for parts on the nesting plan. Offset, shape
and size of the geometry depend on the settings defined in the nesting plan options (see
“Configuration” on page 264). Any pre-piercing geometries that were existing in the plan
before launching the function will be replaced.
2.9.15.2 Adding pre-piercing geometries when nesting
Enable pre-piercing in the Nesting plan options and select the type and the parameters
before you start nesting. See “Configuration” on page 264. Pre-piercing geometries will be
set when you nest parts manually or when you run automatic nesting.
2.9.15.3 View/Modify Parameters in the Technology Dialog
The Technology Dialog shows the section “Pre-piercing parameters”. Here you can see
whether a pre-piercing geometry is assigned to the lead-in and check/modify the type and/or
the parameters.

Before you can start placing pre-piercing geometries, you need to configure pre-piercing:
> in the Nesting plan options for a specific nesting plan, or
> in the Process Data Editor as default setting for a specific set of process/material/thickness,
and
> in the PP ini file
2.9.15.4.1 INI File

If you want to apply pre-piercing geometries in the NC code, you need to enable pre-
piercing in the INI file for the postprocessor by modifying the following entry:
SET_PREPIERCING=1
If necessary, adapt the tool codes for initialization and deinitialization for your machine.
2.9.15.4.2 Nesting plan options

Pre-piercing can be enabled as required for the current nesting plan (“Nest” menu, “Nesting
plan options”). Or, you enable pre-piercing in general for a specific set of
process/material/thickness in the Process Data Editor (“Nest” menu, “View/Edit Process DB”).

The settings defined in the Process Data Editor are suggested as defaults for new nesting
plans using this set of process/material/thickness.
Enable pre-piercing
If pre-piercing is enabled in the nesting plan options before nesting, the geometries are
automatically placed when you nest parts.
If the checkbox is not selected, you can still apply the geometries manually after the parts
have been nested. Use the functions “Place single pre-piercing” and “Place pre-piercing on
whole plan” (see “Setting pre-piercing geometries” on page 263).
Type of geometry
Select the type of geometry you want to apply and set the parameters.
Parameter
Depending on your selection of the type, different parameters for the definition of the
geometry properties are available. E. g. for a circle, only the radius needs to be defined,
whereas for the rectangle you need to specify length and width.
When you select “Drill Point”, the diameters of the drill tools stored the Drill DB are available
for selection. Please make sure you use a PP that supports drills.
All parameters can be modified for a specific part in the Technology dialog after placing.

Offset
The offset is the distance between the start of the lead-in and the pre-piercing geometry. A
positive offset moves the reference point of the geometry towards the part on the actual
lead-in, a negative value moves the geometry away from the part on a straight line.
Here in the example, you see a “straight” lead-in with a specified length (P1) and a pre-
piercing geometry “Circle and Line” added to it.
Depending on the offset, the geometry is positioned closer to or further away from the part.
No offset Positive offset Negative offset
Scale
Changing the scale (in percent) allows you to modify the size of the original lead-in without
modifying the actual lead-in parameters.

Although the length value (P1) of the lead-in has not been changed, the length is scaled and
the lead-in is shortened to 50 % of the P1 value (3.65 here in the example).
2.9.15.4.3 Process Data Editor

You can configure pre-piercing for a set of process/material/thickness in the Process Data
Editor. The settings defined in the Process Data Editor are suggested as defaults for new
nesting plans using this set of process/material/thickness.
> Launch Process Data Editor (“Nest” menu, “View/Edit Process DB”).
> In the area to the left, select the row (process/material/thickness) you want to configure.
> Enable pre-piercing on the “Process Data” tab and select the type of geometry you want
to apply as default.
> Enter the parameters.

Parameter
geometry properties need to be set:
Type Parameter
Point -
Line Length
Circle Radius
Rectangle Length
Width
Circle and Line Radius
Length
Drill point Diameter

Offset and scale (see “Nesting plan options” on page 264) are always available.
2.9.15.5 Pre-piercing for Multitorch
Pre-piercings can only be produced by a single torch. When you create a nesting plan for
multitorch, enable pre-piercing in the options and in the PP ini file as explained above and
start nesting in multitorch mode. Pre-piercings are assigned to the lead-ins but they are
produced first in single-torch mode. After that, the machine will switch to multitorch mode
and start cutting the parts as configured.
2.9.16 Common Cut 1 Sequence

The function Common Cut 1 Sequence in the Modify menu, or the corresponding symbol
in the Modify Toolbar for nesting permit the sequence of cutting for the part contour
elements in a common cut with 1 contour to be set.
If a Common Cut 1 Contour has been carried out, then, after selecting the “Common Cut 1
Sequence” you must click near the common cut contour when the message
SETCOMCUTSEQ: Define Common Cut Contour:
appears in the command line. Now the cut sequence for the part contours and the common
cut will be shown. This sequence results from the defaults for the Common Cut 1 Contour
type in the “Common Cut 1 Contour“ card under the nesting plan options (see chapter
“Common Cut 1 Contour” on page 319). In the following example the lower contour and
the common cut will be cut first in the clockwise direction, then the remaining contour
elements of the upper part will be cut counter-clockwise:

You can now change the cut sequence displayed in the following way. To do this, when the
message
{SETCOMCUTSEQ} Define first cut:
appears in the command line, click the contour which should be cut first, in our example the
upper part contour. To do this click the 3, so this contour becomes the new 1, recognizable
by the blue background of the sequence number:
When the next message in the command line.

{SETCOMCUTSEQ} Define second cut:
Appears, you have to decide whether the common cut or the lower part contour should be
cut next. If you decide for the lower part contour, then click the old number 1. Then the
common cut will be automatically cut last.
You can view the result by clicking near the common cut when the message
SETCOMCUTSEQ: Define Common Cut Contour:
again appears in the command line. You would then get the following result for this
example:

Command input: SETCOMCUTSEQ
2.9.17 Common Cut Position

The function “Common Cut Position” in the Modify menu, or the corresponding symbol
in the Modify Toolbar for nesting permit the relative position of the two parts to each
other along the common cut to be set for any desired common cut.
If a Common Cut 1 Contour or a Common Cut 2 Contours has been carried out, then you
can select the function “Common Cut Position” and when the message appears
SETCOMCUTPOS: Define Common Cut Contour:
in the command line you can click with the mouse on the part which you wish to slide along
the common cut edge with the other part. When the message appears
{SETCOMCUTPOS} Define Position:
in the command line, the part selected with the mouse can be moved along the common cut
edge.
Command input: SETCOMCUTPOS
2.9.18 Delete Technology
The “Delete Technology” function in the Modify menu when nesting or the symbol in
the Modify Toolbar for nesting allows you to delete any desired technology object which has
been added (Bridges, Links, Common Cuts, Stitches).
After function has been called, the message appears
DELETETECH: Specify contours:

Now click on the contour near the technology object which is to be removed.
Command input: DELETETECH

If you have added a common cut and several linking cuts to a group of parts, then you must
delete the links first as otherwise undefined cutting sequences can occur. If you have defined
one or more stitches on the outer contour of a part and defined links to other parts, then
you must again delete the links first to avoid undefined sequences of cuts. If you have
defined a common cut on two parts with one contour and then added one or more stitches
to this contour then you must delete the stitches first here, too to avoid undefined cutting
sequences arising.
The Undo function in the Edit menu of the corresponding symbol in the Main Toolbar
permit the last technology function done to be undone. In the same way, the Redo function
in the Edit menu or the corresponding symbol in the Main Toolbar allows the
cancellation of the last Undo command.
2.9.19 Set Left, Set Right, Set Top, Set Bottom
The functions “Left” , “Right” , “Up” , “Down” are used for the
automatic movement of one or more selected parts, which have been placed on the plate
already, to the left, right, upwards or downwards, however maximum to the corresponding
plate edge. The movement only goes to the next part lying in the way in the direction of
movement.
These function can also be called with the Cursor Keys <Left Arrow>, <Right Arrow >,
<Upwards Arrow > and <Downwards Arrow >.
2.10 Snap Menu

The “Snap” Menu contains commands for the setting of Grid and Snap options. These
include:
> Setting a grid for the drawing page
> Object Snap Mode for Grid, End Point, Middle, Centre, Quadrant, Tangent, Perpendicular,
Intersection, Nearest Point and Orthogonal
> Cancelling all object snap modes set

You can see from the status of the icons in the Snap Toolbar and in the menu which snap
options are enabled/disabled.
All snap modes are transparent. That means that they can be selected during a coordinate
input without interrupting it.
2.10.1 Grid options

Opens the grid settings in the OmniWin Options for toggling the display of the grid and for
setting the grid spacing.
For further details, please refer to “Grid options” on page 147.
2.10.2 Snap Modes

The “Snap” menu contains functions to set various snap modes. These are snap to end-
point, mid-point, centre, quadrant, tangent, perpendicular, nearest and orthogonal.
Active Snap Functions are identified by a tick in the menu and by a pressed-in button in the
Snap Toolbar. If an active snap mode is reselected then this will deactivate it.
> Snap to grid (Alt+G): If this function is active, then a grid point can be snapped to
for a coordinate input.
Command input: SNAPGRID
> Snap to Endpoint (Alt+E): If this function is active, then an end point can be
snapped to for a coordinate input.

The end point to be selected must be snapped with the cursor.
Command input: SNAPEND
> Snap to Middlepoint (Alt+M): With the ‘Midpoint’ active the middle of lines can
be snapped as construction points.
To select a centre, you have to click near it.
Command input: SNAPMID
> Snap to Center (Alt+C): If this function is active, then the center point of a circle
or arc can be snapped to with the cursor for a coordinate entry.
The center point to be selected must be snapped to with the cursor. To do this you must
click near the center point or the circle contour.
Command input: SNAPCENT
> Snap to Quadrant (Alt+Q): The ‘Quadrant’ snap function allows the quadrant
point of an arc or circle to be “caught” for the input of a coordinate value.
The nearest quadrant point is picked by clicking near a circular contour.
Command input: SNAPQUAD
> Snap to Tangent (Alt+T): This snap mode can be used to catch a tangent point
on a circle or on an arc.
In this way a tangent can be set to an arc or an arc segment point with the help of the
‘Line‘ command. This also applies for two circles or circular arcs, i.e. a line can be defined
which departs tangentially from one circle and runs tangentially into a second.
Command input: SNAPTANG
> Snap to Perpendicular (Alt+P): The ‘Perpendicular’ snap mode allows the
perpendicular to a line, a circle or a circular arc to be formed, i.e. the perpendicular point
is snapped.
Command input: SNAPPERP
> Snap to Intersection (Alt+I): The ‘Intersection’ mode allows the intercept of two
drawing elements to be snapped to.
Command input: SNAPCROSS
> Snap to Nearest: (Alt+N): This snap mode allows to snap that point of a contour ,
which is nearest to the snap square.
Command input: SNAPNEAR

> Snap to Ortho (Alt+O): With the aid of this function lines can be drawn in
orthogonal mode (0°, 90°, 180° and 270°). This is especially helpful when drawing
auxiliary construction lines.
Command input: SNAPORTHO
2.10.3 Snap Release
The function “Snap Release” (Alt+R) allows all active object snap modes to be
switched off at once. However, this does not only simply release all snap modes, but
remembers them. I. e. the first click releases all snaps, the second click restores the snaps as
before releasing.
Command input: SNAPREL
2.11 Nest Menu

The nest menu contains all functions required for generating nesting plans. The following
functions are available in nesting mode:

In drawing mode, only the functions for opening the process and drill databases.
The “Nest” menu contains commands to
> Refresh the lists of parts and plans
> Insert any chosen parts (for example a part group consisting of two parts with a common
cut) into the workspace
> Update nested parts
> Place, rotate and delete lead-in and lead-out lines on the parts
> Define the cuttings sense and the side of the offset of the tool
> Deactivate individual contours in a nested part, so that they are not taken over for cutting
or marking.
> Define an automatic cutting sequence for parts using the defaults for the starting corner,
the method and the strip width
> Define the cutting sequence of parts, contours and sub-contours
> Define a special cutting sequence for inner contours
> Call of a simulation of the way of the tool on the nesting plan
> Show the part names in a nested plan
> Show and set of the Plate Null
> Define the defaults for nesting, for example such as distances between objects, the shape
of lead-ins and lead-outs, parameters for automatic cutting, lists for machines, materials
and thicknesses
> Display and edit of the Plan Info
> Display the production time
> Show and edit the process database, which contains the process data as they are available
in the nesting plan options dialog.
> Show and Edit of the Drill Database, in which you can make adjustments to the drills you
use and the drill macros present on the control.
> Change the view of the Nest dialog
> Start of the dialog for the automatic nesting (Auto nest)
The functions in the Nest menu are described individually in the following sections.
2.11.1 Create Combined Part
The function “Create Combined Part” in the Nest menu allows any desired selection
of parts (for example a group of parts comprising two parts with a common cut) to be added
to the workspace as a combined part.

Combined parts
A combined part consists of one or more parts connected with technologies which have
been added during nesting. These can be combined into one unit, inserted into the
workspace and used again.
In this way you can transfer all changes which you have made in one nesting plan onto a
new nesting plan. The reuse within a plan is also possible.
> Place one or more parts in the nest as usual.

> Carry out the changes which you wish to transfer. These could, for example, be
technology such as stitches, bridges, common cuts, changes to the lead-ins and lead-outs,
direction of cut etc.. In the example here the part has been rotated appropriately for
nesting. The technologies available differ depending upon the type of nesting plan (for
vertical cuts or with bevel support).
> Select the part or parts which you wish to combine, and select in the context menu
“Create Combined Part”.
The part is added to the workspace as a combined part. You can now nest the combined
part in the same or in another plan. The quantity of the combined part nested will be taken
into account for the original part.

Please note that for reusing the part the material/thickness and process have to match. If this
is not the case, a message will inform you of the fact. For example the distance between
parts depends upon the material thickness, the macros for the lead-in and lead-out upon the
process. In any case check the parameters for transferring the part if material/thickness and
process differ.
To save a combined part you can store a nested plan with reference objects, which you then
take back over into the workspace for reuse. Saving in a graphic format or in the database is
not possible.
Also transfer of parts from a plan without bevel support into a plan with bevel support and
vice versa is not possible.
The part name “Combined Part” can be changed in the part info dialog (see chapter “Part
Info” on page 143).
2.11.2 Transfer technology from selected part

You can now simply apply changes which you make to one part in a nesting plan to all
identical parts in the plan. If, for example, you have already nested a part several times and
then add or change technology macros or alter the start point of cutting parameters then
you no longer have to make these changes individually for each part.
> Change one of the parts and select it. (Here in the example, the lead-in was modified.)

> Then in the “Nest” menu select the option “Take over technology of the selected part”.
The changes will be applied to all identical parts in the plan.
2.11.3 Update Plan With Database Parameters

This function is only relevant for nesting plans that use a bevel database (macro and
compensation values) instead of nest.mdb/nesti.mdb.
For further information please refer to Update Nested Parts on page 427.
2.11.4 Update Plan with active workspace part

If you make changes to the graphic file for a part which has already been nested, then you
can take these changes over into the nesting plan in a simple manner.

> Open the modified graphic file in the workspace. You now have still the old version of the
part in the nesting plan, the workspace contains the changes already.
> Select the modified part in the workspace and select in the “nesting” menu the option
“Update plan with active parts from the workspace”. All parts in the plan will be updated.
2.11.4.1 Editing after nesting plan import (DIN or ESSI Code)
An example for using the function “Update Plan With Active Workspace Part” is when you
change individual parts after the import.
By using the function “Update Plan With Active Workspace Part” in the Nest menu, you can
also change retrospectively individual parts in a plan after the import of DIN or ESSI codes as
a Plan and save the plan with the modified parts and output it again as an NC code.
The starting point for this function is the import of DIN or ESSI code as a Plan, whereby the
options in the “NC Import” card of OmniWin options “Plan: Run after Import” the functions
“Parts Into Workspace” or “Parts Into Workspace Without Lead In/Out” have to be set.
Then click on the part in the workspace which you wish to change. It now appears in the
drawing area and can be changed (for example by inserting a text which is to be marked, or
by altering an internal contour). The "Undo" and "Redo" functions can be used for the
changes made here.
Then switch back to the imported plan and activate the changed part in the workspace. If
you now call the function “Update Plan With Active Workspace Part”, all parts which you
have retrospectively modified but which are still shown in their original condition in the plan
will be replaced by the modified part.

2.11.5 Place Lead-in/Lead-out
The “Place Lead-in/Lead-out” function allows you to place the lead-in and lead-out
anywhere you like on the inner and outer contours of parts. After the function has been
called and the 'Specify lead-in position:' message appears you can click any point on or near
the contour with the mouse to position the lead lines there. To snap to the start of cut point
of the contour it is necessary to press the <Shift> key as well. With this it is possible when
one or more of the parameters in the “Outer contour” and “Inner contour” cards under the
nesting plan options to apply the change directly by clicking the current contour point where
the lead-in/out is placed.
The shape of the lead-in and lead-outs is determined by the settings in the ‘Inner Contour’
and ‘Outer Contour’ cards in the nesting plan options (see chapter “Nesting Plan Options”
on page 295). When placing them, the collision check to test distance, angle and radius will
be made to prevent their superimposition or cutting of existing contour elements.
The snap modes set will also be taken into account when placing lead-ins and lead-outs and
shown with the little snap square.
Furthermore it is possible with the “Place Lead-in/Lead-out” function not only to define the
position of the lead lines on the contour, but also to set their length and angle. A mouse
click on any point of the contour where the lead lines are not placed suffices to move their
position to that point. If you now click on the pierce point on the contour the message
{PLACELI}: Specify next point:
appears and the length of the Lead-in line can be set simply by moving the mouse and the
position of the start point of the lead-in line can be defined after a second mouse click. This
process can also be repeated so that multi-element lead-in lines can be generated. The last
element of the lead-in line can be taken back by a right mouse click. To finalize the lead-in
line, end the function with the <ESC> key. The lead-in line will then be displayed in violet.
If a contour already contains break points, the lead-in can be placed only onto a break point.
If there are no break points on the contour, the lead-in can be positioned randomly.
If the Lead-out line is to be modified then the <Ctrl> key has to be held down during the
mouse click on the pierce point on the contour. The <Ctrl> key can be released whilst
moving the mouse. Otherwise the sequence of operations is exactly the same as for the lead-
in line. The lead-in line will be shown in white (with a black window background).
Command input: PLACELI

2.11.6 Rotate Lead-in/Lead-out
By means of the function “Rotate Lead-in/Lead-out” in the Nest menu or the corresponding
button in the Nesting Toolbar you can rotate the lead-in and the lead-out line of a
part, each separately or both together.
When the message appears
ROTATELI: Specify lead-in or lead-out:
You can click on a point of the lead-in or lead-out line or near the lead-in or lead-out line
and, on seeing the message
{ROTATELI} Specify angle:
you can enter a rotation angle or specify it with the mouse. If you click on the common point
of the lead-in and lead-out lines on the contour then you can rotate them both together.
This function is only available for straight cutting.
Command input: ROTATELI
2.11.7 Delete Lead-in/Lead-out
The “Delete Lead-in/Lead-out” function is used to be able to remove individual lead-

ins and lead-outs from the inner and outer contours of parts. The message ‘Specify
contours:’ appears after the function has been called. The Lead-in and lead-out lines can
now be deleted from inner and outer contours simply by clicking any point on the contour or
near to it.
Command input: DELETELI
2.11.8 Cutting Sense
With the function “Cutting Sense” in the Nest menu or the corresponding button in
the Nesting Toolbar you can determine the cutting sense of contours. After starting the
function, you can see the cutting direction (by means of an arrow) and the tool offset (kerf
compensation) (by means of a white point), when moving the cursor on a contour. You can
toggle the sense and change the side of the offset simultaneously, if you click on a contour.
For an open contour, it is not obvious which kerf compensation the contour should have.
If you move the cursor onto an open contour, no offset will be displayed (the white point is
located directly on the contour). If you click on an open contour, only the cutting direction
will be changed.
But if you click on an open contour while pressing the <Ctrl> key, you can modify the kerf
compensation to the left and also to the right! That means, you have three possibilities:

> no offset
> offset to the left
> offset to the right
Further, you can check the cutting direction and the kerf compensation by means of the
“Simulation” function in the Nest menu (see chapter “Simulation” on page 293) or in the
corresponding toolbar!
Command input: SENSE
2.11.9 Disable / Enable Contour

Individual contours in a nested part can be deactivated with the function “Disable / Enable
Contour” in the Nest menu, so that they are not taken over for cutting or marking.
Line color, -type and thickness of the disabled contours can be set in the Attributes card of
the OmniWin options under the process “Disabled”.
Command input: DISABLE
2.11.10 Automatic Sequence
The “Automatic Sequence” function allows you to define an automatic cutting

sequence for parts using the defaults for the starting corner (Left + Bottom, Right + Bottom
...), the method (meander or one direction) and the strip width set in the ‘Sequence’ card in
the nesting plan options (see chapter “Sequence Strategy” on page 298).
After execution of the function the automatically set sequence can be shown with the “Set
Part Sequence” function as in the following example (Defaults Right + Down, and Meander
method):

If no automatic parts sequence is set then the parts will be cut in the sequence in which they
were placed in the plate. This results in incorrect cutting sequences for parts which have
been nested in inner contours.
Command input: AUTOSEQ
2.11.11 Set Contour Sequence
The “Set Contour Sequence” function allows the operating sequence of part contours
of an individual part in a nested plan to be specified manually.
Once the function has been called the part for which the sequence of contours is to be
defined has to be selected. The current sequence of contours for this part will then be
displayed as in the following example:

If no sequence has yet been selected for the contours of the chosen part then the following
sequence will be shown as default:
> First the sequence of the inner contours in the sequence in which they were designed,
> The outer contour as last
Now, on the message ‘Specify next contour:’, the sequence of contours can be defined by
clicking the sequence numbers as has happened in the following example:
After ending the contour selection with the right mouse button you can either set the
sequence of contours for another part or exit the function.
The contour numbers vanish again when the function is ended.
The changes to the sequence with the new rapid traverse paths will then only be visible
again when you call the function again for the modified part:

When defining the sequence of contours the same points have to be remembered as for
defining the sequence of parts (see chapter “Set Part Sequence” on page 290).
Please remember that the inner contours of a part always have to be cut before the outer
contour.
Command input: SETCONTSEQ
At first in plan/At first in part

The manual sequencing of contours takes the sequence option into account as well, as set in
the nesting plan options, on the “Mark and Drill Sequence” page.
Here in the example, the marking processes for laser and plasma have different settings: all
plasma markings are to be produced first for the entire plan, laser markings are to be made
as per part. This setting is also considered when you manually change the sequence.
> Call the function “Contour Sequence” from the toolbar or the “Nest” menu.
> Now, click to select a contour (process) for which you want to modify the sequence.

> All contours for this process are highlighted depending on the sequence setting: either in
the part or in the whole plan.
First in part (Mark: Laser) First in plan (Mark: Plasma)
2.11.12 Set Toolpath Sequence

You can display the cutting sequence and adjust it if necessary for the individual cuts on a
part in a nesting plan. The function is only available for advanced bevel nesting plans. It
is also available in the Technology menu and in the Technology Dialog for advanced nesting
plans.
For further information about this function please refer to View/Change Cutting Sequence
on page 426.
2.11.13 Heat Distribution Sequence
The function “Heat Distribution Sequence” is used to define a special cutting

sequence for inner contours to reduce the heat input, for example in boiler dished ends.
The selected inner contours will be divided into groups using a grid. It is possible to set the
number of inner contours in a group (i.e. in one cell of the grid) which may be cut one
immediately after the other. The cells in the first row will be processed from left to right,
those in the second row from right to left and so on to form a meander.
When the function is called the message appears
{SELECT} specify objects:
First select the inner contours which should have their sequence defined automatically, as in
the following example, all the holes in the circular plate:

When the selection has been completed the start point from which the cutting sequence
should begin must be set on the message
{SETCONTASEQ} Specify start point:
As in the example bottom left (can be identified by the white Cursor cross):

Then when the message comes
{SETCONTASEQ} Specify grid spacing:[100.00]
Set the size of the grid by entering a value (default: 100.00 mm) or using the mouse:
Then comes the message

{SETCONTASEQ} Specify group number and minimum distance:[3.00]
To set the number of inner contours to be cut immediately one after another in one cell
(default: 3) and the minimum distance between the first contour in next group and the last
contour in the previous group.
The word Group means the number of inner contours in one cell of the grid (in the example
this is 16 inner contours).
Once this input is finished the definition for the automatic sequence is complete, and the
selected inner contours will be given the preset color for the simulation.

Use the “Simulation” function in the Nest menu (Symbol in the nesting toolbar) to
check the results of the “Heat Distribution Sequence” function, as in the following example:

Within each cell 3 inner contours will be cut. These inner contours have within one cell in
sequence the largest possible distance to the lower left point of the cell, so they are to the
top right inside the cell. The sequence of processing for the cells takes a meander form, also
starting lower right. This means that the second row of the cells will be processed from right
to left and the third row from left to right.
If the part itself is the plate, i.e. the outer contour of the part may not be cut, then select
<Draw plate> in the dialog “New or existing plan”. Then do not draw any plate but nest the
part directly onto this plan. Then the outer contour must be deactivated with the “Contour
activate / deactivate” function in the Nest menu (symbol in the nesting toolbar).
Command input: SETCONTASEQ
2.11.14 Set Part Sequence
The “Set Part Sequence” function allows the cutting sequence of parts in a nested
plan to be specified manually. If no parts sequence has been set already for this plan, then
the sequence in which the parts were placed on the plate will be the initial sequence
proposed.
When the message “Specify next part:” comes you can click a part to specify the sequence.
When specifying the sequence bear the following points in mind:
If you call the function, the current cutting sequence will be displayed as running numbers
on a field with a green background, as in the following example:

When a number is clicked it turns blue and is given the number 1, the next is given number
2 etc.. These new numbers also show the new cutting sequence of the parts so selected, as
in the following example for the new sequence of the old parts with the part sequence
numbers 12, 11, 10 and 9 (the row in the middle):
As it can be seen, there are now two groups of parts:

> Those which have been taken into the new sequence (running numbers on blue
background in the row in the middle),
> And those which are not yet in it and have kept their old numbers (running numbers on
green background).
If the function is now terminated (with the right mouse key or with the key <ESC>), then the
overall new sequence is defined as follows:
> All parts marked in green from the old sequence which were to be cut before the part
with the blue number 1 will be organized in their old sequence before the blue number 1.
In our example these are the parts with the numbers 1 to 8.
> All parts marked in blue will be introduced in the new blue sequence.
> All green parts still remaining will be added at the end in their old sequence. In our
example these are the parts with the numbers 13 to 20.
In the example this would give the following picture:
Result: In this way the sequence of the parts 9 to 12 has been changed.
The part numbering vanishes again when the function is ended.
If no sequence is defined, i.e. if the function is not called, then the parts will be cut in the
sequence in which they were placed in the plate.
If you want to define a complete, new cutting sequence with this function then you
must click all parts in the sequence required.

If you want to make a part the very first in the cutting sequence for the plan, then
you only have to click the part required so that it gets the blue number 1, and then end the
function immediately.
Command input: SETPARTSEQ
2.11.15 Simulation
With the function “Simulation” in the Nest menu or the corresponding button in the
Nesting Toolbar you can simulate the movement of your tool. Doing so you can check the
cutting direction and the kerf compensation of the parts in your nesting plan.
Calling the function you will get a Simulation toolbar
which contains the following functions:
Back to start point
Start of simulation (play)
Stop simulation
Close simulation (exit)
View in (zoom in) the simulation
View out (zoom out) the simulation
Speed up: simulation runs faster
Speed down: simulation runs slower

In the simulation window of the nesting plan the rapid traverses are displayed by green
dotted lines.
After starting the simulation with the Start button , you can see the cutting direction
(by means of an arrow) and the tool offset (kerf compensation) (by means of a white point).
In most cases you have to diminish the speed of the simulation by means of the Speed down
button and then zoom in the nesting plan with the help of the View in button .
Contours which have been proceeded are shown in violet color.

Command input: SIMULATE
2.11.16 Show Part Names
Using the function “Show Part Names” in the Nest menu or the corresponding symbol
in the Nest Toolbar, it is possible to show briefly the part names in a nested plan as in the
following example:
In the command line the following message will appear:

{PARTNAMES} Press ESC to continue:
The display of the part names will be erased when the <ESC> key is pressed or an editing
function for the plan is selected.
Command input: PARTNAMES

2.11.17 Show Start Points
This option shows the start points of the individual parts.
2.11.18 Set Plate Null
The function “Set Plate Null” in the Nest menu allows the plate origin to be set to any
desired place on the plate. After the function has been called you will see the message
‚Specify new plate null:‘
and can then set the new plate origin by entering coordinates in the command line or with
the mouse. When setting the plate origin you can also use the snap functions to assist you.
To set the origin anew, simply call the function once again.
The plate origin will also be set if the “Show Plate Null” (see chapter “CS Null” on page 178)
function is inactive. To check the plate origin after setting it, it is better to have the “Show
Plate Null” function switched on.
Command input: SETNULL
2.11.19 Nesting Plan Options (without bevel support)
The “Nesting plan options” function in the “Nest” menu allows you to define all
necessary defaults for nesting. The Nesting Plan Options dialog is split into several areas. The
following options are available, if bevel cutting is disabled for the nesting plan.
Machine:
> System
> Sequence – Strategy
> Mark and Drill Sequence
> Process Selection
> Plan check
> Multitorch
> Time Calculation
> Production data locations
Cutting process data:
> Collision control
> Inner Contour
> Outer Contour
> Technology

> Common Cut 1 Contour
> Process
> Reduce Speed Factor
> Machines
> Messer Hole
In an opened nesting plan, you can open the Options dialog from the toolbar. To do this,
click the icon .
2.11.19.1 System
You can set the following parameters in the “System” card:
> In the “Machine Code” and “Postprocessor” sections, it is possible to select the
postprocessor to be used for the generation of the NC code . For further information on
the available postprocessors and the correct settings to be chosen for individual scenarios,
please refer to the Technical Appendix.
- For the selected postprocessor, choose the File Extension for the machine code file.
The Technical Appendix includes information on the selection of file extensions.
- If the checkbox “Show result in Notepad” in the “Machine Code” section is active,
then after a plan has been saved, the CNC code of the plan will be displayed
automatically in the Notepad.
- Click the button “Machine Code Option” to open the INI file related to the selected
postprocessor for editing. You can make a lot of settings in various sections in the INI-
files of the postprocessors: For further details please refer to the Technical Appendix.
- The universal postprocessor is only for use in special scenarios after consultation with
MesserSoft.

> Under “Run before saving” the checkbox ”Automatic sequence” allows the setting of
whether an automatic cutting sequence should be made for the plan when saving it. If
not, then the parts will be cut in the sequence in which they were placed in the plate
unless a cutting sequence function has been used.
> It can be set whether the “User Side” of the parts is on the right or left of the cutting
direction for outer and inner contours:
- If the part side is right, then an outer contour will be cut in the
clockwise direction and an inner contour
counter-clockwise.
- If the part side is left, then an outer contour will be cut in the
counter-clockwise direction and an inner contour
clockwise.
> You can decide in the section “Angle range for lead in and lead out” whether the angle
180 degrees should belong in the angle range for lead-lines of 180 to 270 or in the angle
range 90 to 180.
This makes it possible to define different lead-ins and lead-outs on a circle (angle 180
degrees) than on a right angle between two sides of a part (external angle 270 degrees).
The angle range selected here will also be shown in the sections “Lead-in line” and
“Lead-out line” of the “Inner Contour” and “Outer Contour” cards in the nesting plan
options.
The allocation of the 189 degree angle selected here also applies to the
process database (“View / Edit Process DB” in the Nest menu), although the
column headline here reads 180<=A<=270 in both cases.
> Under “Reduce Speed Factor calculation (for Plasma systems only)” you can specify how
the values on the page “Reduce Speed Factor” are provided (see “Reduce Speed Factor”
on page 321).
- Load Reduce Speed Factor values from the process database:
The speed reduction values from the process database will be used. Manual
adaptations are possible. However, a major drawback here consists in the fact that the
material thickness is ignored which may lead to incorrect values.
- Calculate Reduce Speed Factor values dynamically:
If this option is chosen, the speed reduction values from the process database are
ignored and the values will be calculated dynamically. In this case 20 entries will be
created in the table on the „Reduce Speed Factor“ page below in the „Cutting process
data“ node in the nesting plan options. It is not possible to manually edit the values,
i.e. the buttons for modifying values from the process database are not available in this
case.

The exported nesting plans (XML files) store the method of providing the speed reduction
values for information in the line: “RSPEEDAUTOCALC”=”YES” (calculated) /”NO” (from
process database).
2.11.19.2 Sequence Strategy
The “Sequence Strategy” page in the nesting plan options allows for a detailed
determination of settings for automatic sequencing. These settings are applied if you use the
“Autosequence” function (e.g. from toolbar icon ) (see chapter “Automatic Sequence”
on page 282).
If “Automatic Sequence” is checked in the nesting plan options on the “System” page, the
settings are applied as well if you start a simulation or save the nesting plan.
Automatic part sequence start corner

Here, you can define the start corner on the plate for the automatic determination of the
cutting sequence for the nested parts: The default value here is the plate null point (defined
on the page “System”).
Automatic part sequence Strategy

Meander/One Direction: The definition of the automatic cutting sequence of the parts can
be either Meander or always in One Direction over the plate, with a preset Strip Width.
Messer Process Optimization: If this strategy is selected, the sequence is optimized to
reduce the rapid traverse distances. In addition, the checkboxes for “Collision avoidance”
and “Start point repositioning” become visible to set further optimization options:
Collision avoidance: The torch avoids crossing already cut parts to prevent crashes. This
option becomes necessary as “Messer Process Optimization” strategy allows the cutting
head to stay down where possible to reduce lifter time. Please note that you need a
current postprocessor with support for Messer Process Optimization (see “Collision

avoidance” on page 301 and PP Settings for Collision avoidance and Messer Process
Optimization on page 569).
Start point repositioning: Allows automatic repositioning of the start point. This is
useful for minimizing the rapid traverse distances.
None: No automatic sequencing of parts, but sequencing of inner contours is possible.
Automatic inner contour sequence strategy

The options “Collision avoidance” and “Start point repositioning” mentioned above can be
applied for inner contours as well and can be set separately for cutting and non-cutting
processes. Collision avoidance checks inner contours instead of parts (see also “Collision
avoidance” on page 301 and PP Settings for Collision avoidance and Messer Process
Furthermore, the following options for optimizing inner contours are available:
Rapid traverse distance minimization: The order of the inner contours is changed to
minimize rapid rates.
Separate sequence for Messer Hole Technology: The inner contours that are processed
with the Messer Hole Technology will be sequenced separately.
For further details, please refer to “Examples for inner contour optimization” on page 300.
You should disable this option, if you use the Messer Hole Technology for plasma cutting
and special post processor settings that allow Messer Hole Technology to be applied to any
inner contours.
Rapid traverse lines

The “Rapid traverse lines” section gives you the possibility to have the rapid paths between
parts displayed whenever you call the function Set Part Sequence by clicking the
checkbox ”Show for Parts”.
In the part sequence only the rapid traverse paths from the lead-out of the last cutting
contour of a part to the lead-in line of the first cutting contour of the following part will be
displayed.
If the ”Show for Contours” checkbox is activated, then the rapid traverse paths between the
contours of that one part is shown, which you select during the execution of the function
“Set Contour Sequence” .

Part Number Position
In the section “Part Number Position” you can determine the position of the sequence
numeration, which can be shown with the “Set Part Sequence” function in the Nest menu
or the corresponding icon in the Nest Toolbar. You can set the sequence number “In
the Beginning“ or “In the Center” of the parts.
2.11.19.2.1 Examples for inner contour optimization

No optimization: the original order of
the inner contours is kept.
Optimization of rapid traverse

distances: the sequence of the inner
contours is changed to minimize the
distances

Rapid traverse distance minimization
with start point repositioning: This
combination of settings usually
achieves the shortest traverse
distances.
However, in some cases (e.g. where

cutting quality may be affected), start
points must not be placed anywhere.
Collision avoidance is especially

relevant for parts with many complex
inner contours. The sequence is
optimized to avoid crossing inner
contours that are already cut.
With “Collision avoidance” enabled

the rapid traverse distance may
become longer but the production
time may still be less. Usually,
adjusting the torch height is more
time consuming than a slightly longer
traverse distance.
2.11.19.2.2 Collision avoidance

There are two ways of height adaption for cutting inner contours/parts:
> The torch is lifted after each cut and then lowered back to IHS (initial height sensing)
before continuing. However, this is very time consuming, especially for parts with many
inner contours.
> The Global Control supports rapid traverse movements without height adaption as well,
i.e. the torch is not raised and then lowered back to cut the next contour. This method is
potentially harmful because the torch stays down between cutting contours and therefore
a collision of the torch with already cut parts or material cut from inner contours is not
unlikely.

If the option “Collision avoidance” is enabled, the method of torch movement (with or
without height adaption) is added to the NC code (see PP Settings for Collision avoidance
and Messer Process Optimization on page 569).
OmniWin will calculate this for each movement. E.g. even if “Collision avoidance” is
enabled, already cut contours may still be crossed, if there is no other reasonable path to
continue cutting. In this case, the torch is lifted and then lowered back to IHS before
continuing.
Please note that you need a current Postprocessor with support for Messer Process
Optimization (see Postprocessors supporting process optimization on page 571).
Switching off collision avoidance automatically

In case of too many inner contours the calculation of the optimum sequence may take too
long. Therefore, collision avoidance is ignored. The NC code in this case is created with rapid
traverse optimization.
Collision avoidance will be switched off automatically if:
> the number of mark contours more than 300
> the number of inner cut contours more than 200
> the number of outer cut contours more than 200.
2.11.19.3 Mark and Drill Sequence
Here, you can set the sequence of mark and drill processes.
For complex machines, it is important to consider the sequence of markings and labels. Here,
you can set the sequence and decide, whether the markings should be applied part by part,
or for the whole nesting plan. You can set this for each marking process individually.
> Use the arrow keys or Drag & Drop to move all or the selected process to the correct side:

- At first in plan: These processes are performed in the entire nesting plan in the given
sequence.
- At first in part: These processes are performed per part in the given sequence.
> Use the buttons “Move Up” and “Move Down” to set the sequence.
In the example above, all drills for the entire plan are produced first, and then the markings
are applied part by part in the given sequence.
For setting the marking sequence, all the layers activated in the CAD options can be used
(see Layer Toolbox on page 173).
The differentiation between “At first in plan/At first in part” is relevant for the manual
sequence definition of contours (“Set Contour Sequence” on page 283).
2.11.19.4 Process Selection
Here on the “Process Selection” card, you define which processes are available in a specific
machine profile or nesting plan.
> Open the nesting plan options (e.g. symbol in the nesting mode). If you want to
change the settings for a machine profile, make sure the correct profile is loaded.
> Allocate the permitted processes as appropriate under process selection using the arrow
buttons or Drag & Drop.
> Now save the new allocation either for the plan (“Save”) or generally for the machine
profile (“Save machine profile and process data”).
When you create a new nesting plan, only the processes in the current machine profile are
available for selection.

In opened plans also, only the processes available will be listed in the machine profile bar.
Call the nesting plan options when creating a new plan using the “Options” button. Then
you can take over changes initially for the current plan. The active machine profile will be
marked with a star. In this way you can see that the current settings differ from the profile
settings.
If you want to take the changes into the machine profile then update the profile directly
with the profile bar:

2.11.19.5 Plan check
Use this tab to specify which nesting plan checks should be performed upon saving.
Select the checkbox to enable the respective verification.
When the plan is saved, any error will be identified by an exclamation mark, and a message
will show.
2.11.19.6 Multitorch
Use this tab to define the settings for Multitorch operation.
For further information, please refer to the description of the options (see Multitorch Options
on page 386 in the Multitorch chapter.

2.11.19.7 Time Calculation
Use this tab to define the settings for the calculation of production times. The production
times will be roughly estimated from the values and process data defined here.
To include the piercing time in the calculation, the piecing time must be set in the process
data (nesting plan options, on the Process card and in the Nest menu under View/Edit
Process DB).
For further information on how to view production times for a nesting plan, please refer to
„Production Time“ on page 325.
2.11.19.8 Remnant Plate Cutting
Here, you define the settings for the lead-ins/lead-outs for the remnant cut.

Process
From the “Process” list, select the tool you want to use for the remnant cut. The available
processes are defined in the postprocessor configuration (ini file). The related tool is set in
the PP.
Lead-in parameters
L1 - Length P0-P1,
L2 - Length P1-P2,
d - Distance from point P1 to the plate edge,
A - Angle between L1 and L2 lines. For laser and oxyfuel, the angle can be any value from 0
(default value) to 90 degrees. For plasma, P0 cannot be placed on the line P1-P2 and
therefore the angle can be any value from 10 to 90 degrees.
Depending on the tool type, the points mark different operations, as defined in the related
PP ini:
For laser and oxyfuel:
P0 for tool positioning and switching off height sensing,
P1 for piercing,
P2 for switching on height sensing, setting normal speed.
For plasma:
P0 for tool positioning, piercing and switching off height sensing,
P1 for changing cutting direction,
P2 for switching on height sensing, setting normal speed.
Lead-out parameters
The lead-out has 3 points placed on a straight line perpendicular to the edge border.
L1 Distance from point P0 to the plate edge


Collision control/plan check
To make sure the parameters are properly set, collision control and plan check options are
applied for the lead-ins/lead-outs for remnant cuts as well.
2.11.19.9 Collision Control
You can set the following parameters in the “Collision Control” card:
The “Part – Part Distance” and the “Part – Plate Distance” in millimeters which must be
maintained when nesting with collision control active can be entered under “Collision
Control Distance”.
> In the section “Lead-in/out” you can determine whether you want to rotate the lead-in
and lead-out lines of the parts if the parts are rotated on the nesting plan.
If “Don’t Rotate” is enabled, the lead-in and lead-out lines of the parts will remain in the
position relative to the parts determined by the entry for the lead point in the cards “Inner
Contour” and “Outer Contour” of the nesting plan options, when the parts rotate. If
“Don’t Rotate” is disabled, the lead-in and lead-outlines of the parts will remain fixed to
the point on the contour, when the parts rotate. That means, the lead-in and lead-out
lines will rotate too.
This setting applies to the automatic nesting too (see chapter “Start Auto Nest” on page
336).

2.11.19.10 Inner Contour
The shape of the automatically or manually placed lead-in and lead-out for the inner
contours of the various parts can be set in the “Inner Contour” card in the nesting plan
options. A collision check for distance, angle and radius can also be made when they are set,
to avoid superimposition or cutting of contour elements.
For the Method of choosing lead point (start of cut point) for an inner contour, you have the
selection of (see also “Defining the lead point position” on page 312):
> the apex of a corner whose position can be set under “Lead Point” (bottom left in the
dialog)
> the midpoint of the longest contour element
> the midpoint of the shortest contour element
> the midpoint of contour elements
> predefined start point (keep as defined in CAD)
For the parameters, a global continued cut length can be defined. The continued cut length
defined here is used as default value for all lead-out types except for “Stitch” and
“Continued Cut” (see also Lead-out types “Stitch” and “Continued Cut”). For individual lead-
outs the continued cut length can be modified in the Technology Dialog after nesting. (See
also Customizing lead-in and lead-out lines on page 52)
The shape of the lead line can be set depending upon the angle formed between the first
and last element to be cut at the start point of the inner contour in the two groups “Lead
In” and “Lead Out”.
For each of the following angle ranges
> 0 < A <= 90
> 90 < A < 180
> 180 <= A <= 270
> 270 < A <= 360

you can set one of the following types of lead line:
> none
> straight
> quarter circle
> half circle
> straight fillet
> continued cut (for lead-out only, see also “Lead-out types “Stitch” and “Continued Cut””
on page 314)
> stitch (for lead-out only, see also “Lead-out types “Stitch” and “Continued Cut”” on page
314)
The angle selected is displayed schematically on the right in the two groups “Lead-In” and
“Lead-Out”. The length, the radius and the angle of the lead-line can be determined with
the parameters P1, P2 and P3.
With the “Lead Point” you can determine the position of the lead-in line relative to the part.
You can select whether a collision check should be made regarding the minimum values set
for distance, angle and radius when placing the lead line, in the “Collision Check” group.
This check allows you to avoid superimposed lines and intercept with contour elements:
> The distance check is carried out in two steps:
In the first step a check is made whether the lead-in or run-out lines cut the contour. If
this is the case the length of the line is reduced until it is under the distance entered in
“min. distance” for the minimum distance to the start point of the lead-in or the end
point of the lead-out is achieved to the previous point where the contour was cut. If the
lead-in or lead-out is a semi-circle or a quarter circle and cuts the contour then it will be
changed into a straight line and shortened as described above.
In the second step a special check is made for just the lead-in line as to whether the
distance to the start point to any given point on the inner contour is less than the value
entered under “min. distance”. If a point n the inner contour is found for which the
distance to the start point of the lead-in line is less than the defined value, then a warning
will be output and no further correction made.
> If “Check Angle” is enabled, a check will be made, whether the angle between the lead-
in line or lead-out line and the elements of the inner contour before an after the start
cutting point on the contour is smaller than the value given in “Min. Angle“. If that
happens, the angle of the lead-line will be set automatically to the given value, if possible.
If a correction is not possible in this way, only a message is displayed.
If an attempt is made to place an arc-shaped lead-in line (quarter or half circle) into an
inner contour at a point of the contour where the angle between the previous element
and the next element of the contour is less than 180 degrees then a warning will be
output as this is not possible.

> “Check Radius” is applied, if a quarter- or semi-circle lead-in line or lead-out line is set to
an element of the inner contour in form of a circle or an arc. The difference between the
radius of the contour element and the radius of the lead-line must be greater than the
value given in “Min. Difference“. In the other case, the radius of the lead-line will be
reduced (if possible), in order to avoid a collision or a superposition with the contour.
2.11.19.10.1 Variable lead in lines for small inner contours

When cutting small inner contours, it can happen that the configured length is larger than
the diameter of the contour. Therefore, in certain cases, the lead in line for inner contours is
modified automatically to avoid that contours are damaged by lead-ins.
Requirements:
> the contour is an inner contour
> the option “Check Distance” is activated in the “Inner contour” card of the Nesting plan
options
> the smallest side of the circumscribed rectangle around the contour is smaller than twice
the largest side of the circumscribed rectangle around the lead in
In this case, the lead in will be changed into a straight line whose length is half the smallest
side of the circumscribed rectangle for the contour.
Examples:
Circle or square as inner contour:

In this case the smallest side of the circumscribed rectangle is simply the diameter of the
circle or the length of the side of the square.
If one imagines the origin of an X/Y coordinate system to be in the middle of the circle or the
square and f the lead in line runs along the x or y axis, then the largest side of its
circumscribed rectangle is the length of the lead in line itself.
If now double the length of the lead in line exceeds the diameter of the circle or the side
length of the square, or to put it another way, if the length of the lead in exceeds the radius
of the circle or half the side length of the square, then the length of the lead in line will be
shortened to the value of the radius or half the side length of the square. Also the start point
for the lead in line will be moved to the center of the circle or square.
Ellipse or rectangle as inner contour:

In this case the smaller side of the circumscribed rectangle of the contour is simply the
secondary axis of the ellipse or the smaller side of the rectangle.
If one imagines the origin of an X/Y coordinate system to be in the middle of the ellipse or
the rectangle and f the lead in line runs along the x or y axis, then the largest side of its
circumscribed rectangle is the length of the lead in line itself.
If now double the length of the lead in line exceeds the length of the secondary axis or the
smaller side of the rectangle or, to put it another way, if length of the lead in line exceeds
half the smaller half axis of the ellipse or half the smaller side of the rectangle, then the

length of the lead in will be reduced to the value of half the smaller half axis of the ellipse or
half the smaller side of the rectangle.
2.11.19.10.2 Defining the lead point position

The methods of choosing the lead point are explained in this example for outer contours,
however, the same applies to inner contours.
Choosing the method

First, select a method for determination of the lead point position:
> Vertex of snapped corner (depending on the vector defined):
> Midpoint of the longest element:
> Midpoint of the shortest element:

> Midpoint of the snapped element:
> Predefined start point: the start point set in the part geometry will be kept.
Setting the vector for the lead point

For the methods “Vertex of snapped corner” and “Midpoint of the snapped element”, you
need to specify the direction in which to search for the point or contour element.
Please note that the method “Vertex of snapped corner” does not always select the outer
corner for the part, but the break point, that is nearest to the point where the contour and
the given vector intersect.
The origin of the vector is always the middle of the part.

2.11.19.10.3 Lead-out types “Stitch” and “Continued Cut”
This topic describes the lead-out types “stitch” and “continued cut” for straight cutting.
These can be set either in the nesting plan options on the pages “Outer Contour” and
“Inner Contour” or in the Process Data Editor or in the “Technology” dialog.
For both lead-out types, only P1 (length) is configurable.
Stitch
The cut stops on the contour before the start point. The parameter “P1 (length)” defines the
distance from the point where the cut ends to the start point.
When you manually set a stitch (function “Place Lead-in/Lead-out” on page 280) the
distance to distance to the previous break point is checked to make sure there is sufficient
room on the contour. If the break point is too close, no stitch will be set.
You can apply a lead-in of the type “Stitch” for a “Common Cut 1 Contour” as well. Please
note the configuration settings described under “Lead-out type “stitch” for Common Cut 1
Contour” on page 254.

Continued cut
The cut goes beyond the start point. The parameter “P1 (length)” defines the distance from
the start point to the point where the cut ends. Any value in the field “Continued cut
length” will be ignored - the continued cut length for this lead-in type is set in “P1”.
2.11.19.11 Outer Contour
The shape of the automatically or manually placed lead-in and lead-out for the outer
contours of the various parts can be set in the ”Outer Contour” card in the Nesting plan
options. A collision check for distance, angle and radius can also be made when they are set,
to avoid superimposition or cutting of contour elements.

As method of choosing lead point to determine the start of cut point on the outer contour
the same options as for internal contours can be selected (see also “Defining the lead point
position” on page 312):
dialog)
> the midpoint of the snapped contour element
> predefined start point (keep as defined in CAD)
For the parameters, a global continued cut length can be defined. The continued cut length
defined here is used as default value for all lead-out types except for “Stitch” and
“Continued Cut” (see also Lead-out types “Stitch” and “Continued Cut”). For individual lead-
outs the continued cut length can be modified in the Technology Dialog after nesting. (See
also Customizing lead-in and lead-out lines on page 52)
The shape of the lead line can be set depending upon the angle formed between the first
and last element to be cut at the start point of the outer contour in the two groups “Lead-
in” and “Lead-out”.
For each of the following angle ranges
> 0 < A <= 90
> 90 < A < 180
> 180 <= A <= 270
> 270 < A <= 360
you can set one of the following types of lead line:
> none
> straight
> quarter circle
> half circle
> straight fillet
> continued cut (for lead-out only, see also “Lead-out types “Stitch” and “Continued Cut””
on page 314)
> stitch (for lead-out only, see also “Lead-out types “Stitch” and “Continued Cut”” on page
314)
The angle selected is displayed schematically on the right in the two groups “Lead-In” and
“Lead-Out”. The length, the radius and the angle of the lead-line can be determined with
the parameters P1, P2 and P3.
You can select whether a collision check should be made regarding the minimum values set
for distance, angle and radius when placing the lead line, in the “Collision Check” group.
This check allows you to avoid superimposed lines and intercept with contour elements:

> The distance check is carried out in two steps: In the first step a check is made whether
the lead-in or run-out lines cut the contour. If this is the case the length of the line is
reduced until it is under the distance entered in “min. distance” for the minimum distance
to the start point of the lead-in or the end point of the lead-out is achieved to the
previous point where the contour was cut. If the lead-in or lead-out is a semi-circle or a
quarter circle and cuts the contour then it will be changed into a straight line and
shortened as described above.
In the second step a special check is made for just the lead-in line as to whether the
distance to the start point to any given point on the inner contour is less than the value
entered under “min. distance”. If a point n the inner contour is found for which the
distance to the start point of the lead-in line is less than the defined value, then a warning
will be output and no further correction made.
> Under Check Angle a check will be made, whether the angle between the lead-in line or
lead-out line and the elements of the outer contour before an after the start cutting point
on the contour is smaller than the value given in “Min. Angle“. If that happens, the angle
of the lead-line will be set automatically to the given value, if possible. If a correction is
not possible in this way, only a message is displayed.
> Check Radius is applied, if a quarter- or demi-circle lead-in line or lead-out line is set to an
element of the outer contour in form of a circle or an arc. The difference between the
radius of the lead-line and the radius of the contour element must be greater than the
value given in “Min. Difference“. In the other case, the radius of the lead-line will be
extended (if possible), in order to avoid a collision or a superposition with the contour.
2.11.19.12 Technology
A range of parameters can be defined for the extended technology functions (see chapter
“Bridge” on page 251 and the following chapters) Bridge, Common Cut 2 Contours,
Stitches and Corner loops with the “Technology” card in the Nesting plan options dialog:

The parameters for Bridges allow setting of
> the width of the bridge
> the radius for rounding the bridge corners
> a non-crossing and a double crossing bridge
You can define the following parameters for the corner loops:
> the minimum angle
> the type (Round or Triangle)
> the Radius
Further information about the corner loops and their parameters can be found under “Loops
- manual/automatic” on page 260.
The parameters for the Common Cut 2 Contours allow setting of
> the values for the lengths and angles of the lead-in and lead-out lines
> setting default values for the lengths of lead-in and lea-out lines from the process
database using the checkbox “Set default length by database outer contour parameters”.
You can temporarily modify these values, however as soon as you start OmniWin anew,
the default values from the process database will be used again. If the Checkbox is
deactivated then the last values set remain in force.
remain valid.
You can modify the parameters for the single and multiple stitches.
Single stitches:
> Width in mm (min. 0.1)
> the lengths and angles of the lead-in and lead-out lines
Multiple Stitches:
> By Number: A defined number of stitches is added. The distance is calculated
automatically depending on the length of the selected contour/contour part.
> By distance: The stitches are added at a defined distance. The number of stitches depends
on the length of the selected contour/contour part.
The values for the width of stitches and the length/angle for the lead-in/lead-out defined
for single stitches are applied to multiple stitches as well.

2.11.19.13 Common Cut 1 Contour
The parameters for the Common Cut 1 Contour are managed in the card “Common Cut 1
Contour” for the three possible types of the Common Cut 1 Contour:
If a Common Cut 1 Contour is executed then the cutting sequence of the contour elements
is set according to the type given here. A later change of the cutting sequence is permitted
by the function “Common Cut 1 Sequence“ in the Modify menu (see chapter “Common Cut
1 Sequence” on page 268).
2.11.19.14 Process
In the Nesting plan option’s card “Process“ you can input:

> the Specific Weight of the Material
> the Cutting Speed (in mm/min), the Kerf Width (in mm) and the piercing time of the
Process.

2.11.19.14.1 Process Data and Process Names
The names of the processes in OmniWin reflect qualities and the cutting gas as well, in
addition to the cutting system, the material and amperage.
The following syntax applies:
<System>_<Quality>_<Material>_<Amperage>_<Cutting Gas>
Quality and cutting gas are only mentioned in the names where necessary. A standard
quality would not be included:
HPRXD_FF_MS_130 (Fine Feature Cutting) vs. HPRXD_MS_130 (standard quality)
Quality
Additional processes are available in the nest.mdb for the special Hypertherm and Kjellberg
qualities:
> Fine Feature Cutting (FF) for Hypertherm
> Contour Cut Speed (CCS) for Kjellberg
Whenever more than one process for the same material/thickness and amperage level is
available due to several quality levels, you need to select the process to be applied for the
nesting plan. The same process needs to be selected on the Global Control.
Underwater plasma systems

Process data for underwater cutting for Hypertherm and Kjellberg are available. These use
the abbreviation UWP in their names.

2.11.19.15 Reduce Speed Factor
In the Nesting plan option’s card “Reduce Speed Factor” you can determine the factors for
the speed reduction for the plasma cutting of small inner contours (cut-outs).
The speed reduction is made dependant upon the area of the inner contour. You can apply
different “Reduce Speed Factors” valid for different “Maximum Areas”.
The values for the speed reduction can be loaded from the process database or calculated
dynamically in OmniWin. You define the method to be applied in the nesting plan options
for straight cutting on the “System” page (see “System” on page 296).
> Load Reduce Speed Factor values from the process database:
The speed reduction values from the process database will be used. Manual adaptations
are possible. However, a major drawback here consists in the fact that the material
thickness is ignored which may lead to incorrect values.
> Calculate Reduce Speed Factor values dynamically:
If this option is chosen, the speed reduction values from the process database are ignored
and the values will be calculated dynamically. It is not possible to manually edit the values,
i.e. the buttons for modifying values from the process database are not available in this
case.

Manual adaptation of values
The values can only be manipulated if they are retrieved from the database,, not for dynamic
calculation in OmniWin.
By means of the <Add> button you can enter a new line in the Reduce Speed Factor table:
This list may have a maximum of 20 entries. If this number is reached, the “Add” button is
disabled.

2.11.19.16 Machines
The machines, materials and thickness values which are available in the nesting toolbar
for selection for a nesting plan are stored in the Machines card of the Nesting plan options:
Entries can be added in the boxes for machines, material and thickness with <Add> or they
can be removed with <Delete>.
Changes on an active machine (for example Delete) become first effective, when OmniWin is
finished and started anew.
2.11.19.17 Messer Hole
Here, you can configure the settings for the Messer Hole Technology.

If the Messer Hole technology is to be used, select the checkbox “Use Messer Hole
Technology”.
In the “Range” section, enter the minimum and the maximum diameter for which the
Messer Hole Technology is to be used.
For the Messer Hole Technology, the user can choose between three different lead-ins under
“Lead in type”:
The radius of the semicircle depends upon the hole diameter and half the kerf width. The
quarter circle radius can be set in the “Process parameters” area.
In the area “Process parameters”you enter the values for the cutting speed the half kerf
width, the continued cut length and the quarter circle radius for Hypertherm HXD and
Kjellberg to be used for the Messer Hole Technology.
For further information on process data please refer to „View / Edit Process DB“ on page
327.
For further information on the Messer Hole Technology please refer to Messer Hole
Technology on page 475.
2.11.19.18 Pre-piercing geometries
Use this tab to configure the settings for pre-piercings in the nesting plan. For further
information please refer to “Pre-piercing geometries” on page 262.

Enable pre-piercing
If pre-piercing is enabled in the nesting plan options before nesting, the geometries are
automatically placed when you nest parts.
If the checkbox is not selected, you can still apply the geometries manually after the parts
have been nested. Use the functions “Place single pre-piercing” and “Place pre-piercing on
whole plan” (see “Setting pre-piercing geometries” on page 263).
Type of geometry
Select the type of geometry you want to apply and set the parameters.
Parameters
geometry properties are available. E. g. for a circle, only the radius needs to be defined,
whereas for the rectangle you need to specify length and width.
When you select “Drill Point”, the diameters of the drill tools stored the Drill DB are available
for selection. Please make sure you use a PP that supports drills.
All parameters can be modified for a specific part in the Technology dialog after placing.
Offset
The offset is the distance between the start of the lead-in and the pre-piercing geometry. A
positive offset moves the reference point of the geometry towards the part on the actual
lead-in, a negative value moves the geometry away from the part on a straight line.
For further information please refer to “Pre-piercing geometries” on page 262.
2.11.20 Production Time

OmniWin makes it possible to calculate production times in nesting plans without bevels.
Not only the total production time but also the marking, cutting, rapid travel and activation
times will be individually calculated. The calculation can only be made for a complete nesting
plan or specific parts. The times calculated will be displayed in the object information of the
nesting plan and can be integrated into reports (print-outs).
Display of the production times in the nesting plan

> Select the function “Production Time” in the nesting toolbar or the “Nest” menu.

With this you call the object information with the production times. The object information
contains two branches for the production time:
> Production Statistics: These values were previously arranged under the “Geometry”
branch.
> Production Time: You can find here information about marking, cutting, rapid travel and
activation times as well as the total production time. These values will be calculated from
the new parameters for the time calculations.
This data can be found under the “Plan Info” branch for the entire plan and under “Selected
Objects” for the selected parts only.
The prerequisite for this is that you have defined the parameters for the time calculation in
the Nesting plan options (see “Time Calculation” on page 306).
Printing out the calculated production times/Adjusting the Reports

The default templates for parts and nesting plans included in OmniWin contain production
statistics/times as well. With the reporting tool, you can create customized reports for your
nesting plans and integrate the calculated values into the reports.
2.11.21 View / Edit Current Plan Info

Using the function “View / Edit Current Plan Info” in the Nest menu or the corresponding
button in the Nesting Toolbar you can display and edit information about the job, the
programmer and the customer, as well as specific notes for a plan:

The same information can be edited in the input dialog for a new plan (see chapter “New
Nesting Plan” on page 85).
If you need to enter several lines in the Notes field, you can add a new line using the the key
combination <Ctrl> <Enter>.
Use the “Save to database” button to save the plan directly into the OmniWin database.
This information can also be printed out using the “Reporting” function (see chapter
“Reporting” on page 104).
2.11.22 View / Edit Process DB

The function “View / Edit Process DB” launches the Process Data Editor for the maintenance
of the process database (nest.mdb/nesti.mdb). The clear user interface arranging your
database contents in grid form allows editing of your cutting data for each process.

The Process Data Editor comprises many functions for easy maintenance of your cutting data
for straight cutting. Here, you mainly set the parameters for:
> lead-ins/outs for inner and outer contours
> collision control
> speed reduction
> application of Messer Hole Technology
> further process data, such as cutting speed, kerf width, piercing time and slope-down
time
Use the Process Data Editor to create processes, materials and thicknesses in the database.
The process data from the databases serve as default values for new nesting plans. They can
be modified in the Process Data Editor in general, or in the nesting plan options for
individual nesting plans.
Opening the Process Data Editor

The Process Data Editor is launched from the “Nest” menu:
After opening, the main window consisting of four tabs is shown where you can configure
the respective item:
> Process Data
> Processes
> Material
> Thicknesses
2.11.22.1 Process Data
When you launch the Process Data Editor, the Process Data tab shows all process data rows
from the database. Data can only be viewed, direct editing in the grid is not possible.
Which process data parameters are applied for a special nesting plan depends on the
identifiers Process, Material and Thickness – these are the first items in each row. Use the
horizontal arrows to scroll and view the parameters in the grid for each combination of
process - material – thickness. When you select a row, the parameters are shown in the edit
area on the right.

2.11.22.1.1 Filter
Then, set the filter to display only the required rows and select the rows.

2.11.22.1.2 Changing Process Data
Use the tabs on the right side to edit the parameters of the selected row(s).
Any modification here will be instantly committed to the database. Changed parameters are
marked yellow in the data grid. Direct editing in the grid is not possible.
2.11.22.1.3 Process Data

The “Machine” group comprises the selection parameters for the assignment of process
data for each row.
If you want to use this record for another material, another thickness or process, change the
respective selection parameter.
Under “Collision Control” the default values for the part side and the distances between the
individual parts and the parts to the plate edge) are entered.
Under “Process” the values for the cutting process, such as speed, kerf width, piercing time
and slopedown time are maintained.
Under “Pre-piercing” the geometries for pre-piercings are configured. For further details,
please refer to “Pre-piercing geometries” on page 262.
2.11.22.1.4 Inner Contour/Outer Contour

Select the position of the lead point and the lead-in types, set a continued cut length and
define the parameters for the collision control for inner and outer contours.
For the Method of choosing lead point (start of cut point) for an inner contour, you have the
selection of:

dialog)
> the midpoint of contour elements
> a predefined start point (i.e. the start point set in the part geometry will be kept).
For further information regarding the lead points please refer to „Defining the lead point
position“ on page 312.
For the parameters, a continued cut length can be defined.
The shape of the lead line for lead-ins and lead-outs can be set depending upon the angle
formed between the first and last element to be cut at the start point of the inner contour.
In the area below, select the vector for the lead point. You'll find futher information
regarding this function as well under “Defining the lead point position” on page 312.
On “Collision check” you can define whether collision checks should be performed when
lead-ins/lead-outs are set. For further information on the individual options please refer to
“Inner Contour” on page 309.
2.11.22.1.5 Messer Hole

The “Messer Hole” configuration tab contains the data for the Messer Hole Technology.
When you creat a new nesting plan, these values can be modified in the nesting plan
options.
The settings in the process data are the same as in the nesting plan options. For further
information regarding the settings please refer to „Messer Hole“ on page 323.
2.11.22.1.6 Speed reduction

On the “Speed Reduction” tab you find a table containing the factors for speed reductions
for different areas.
Use the buttons below the table to add or delete entries. The “Copy to” button creates a
copy of the entire table and assigns this to another process data row (process-material-
thickness combination).

When you create a nesting plan, the values defined here are used as defaults for new plans
with matching material, thickness and process; the values are shown in the nesting plan
options and can be modified there. For further information on speed reduction please refer
to “Reduce Speed Factor” on page 321.
2.11.22.1.7 Adding, copying and deleting process data rows

Use the buttons below the grid to add, copy or delete rows.

Add
Use this button to add a completely new process data row to the database.
After adding the row, modify the technology parameters as required.

If you want to add new rows based on similar process data rows, it may be easier to use the
“Copy” function instead.
Copy
Use the “Copy” button to create copies of the selected data rows. During the process, you
need to modify at least one of the row identifiers (Process, Material, Thickness) to avoid
double entries.
Here in the example, new rows for the process CutFire100_MS_100 need to be created for a
new material S235 based on the data for the material S235JR.
> The material needs to be added first (see “Processes, Materials and Thicknesses” on page
334).
> Then, set the filter to display only the required rows and select the rows.
> Click “Copy” and select the checkbox to change the material and choose the new
material from the list.

Delete
Use this button to delete process data from the database.
Select the row(s) you want to delete and click “Delete”.
2.11.22.1.8 Recalculate parameters

When you change certain process data parameters, such as kerf width, cutting speed or
slope down time, other parameters usually need to be adapted as well. OmniWin can
recalculate the lead-ins/lead-outs and part-part /part-plate distances automatically.
> Select the row(s) which should be recalculated and click the “Recalculate” button.
Previous values will be overwritten and the recalculated parameters will be directly
committed to the database. Changed values are marked yellow in the grid.
Please note that this function is available for plasma processes and for
metric data only.
2.11.22.2 Processes, Materials and Thicknesses
Processes, materials and thicknesses available for process data are maintained on the
respective tabs:
Entries can be added, changed, copied or deleted by means of the respective buttons.

2.11.22.2.1 Automatic duplication of process data
When you add a new process, thickness or material by copying an existing entry, the process
data related to the previous entry are assigned to the new process, thickness or material. E.g.
if you copy a material, all process data will be duplicated and assigned to the new material.
2.11.22.2.2 References in process data and nesting plans

When you delete entries that are used in the current process data, these will be deleted as
well. E.g. if you delete a material, all configured process data rows including this material will
be deleted.
If you change entries (e.g. the material name), all references in the process data are updated
as well.
Please be careful when you delete materials, processes or thicknesses, or

change material or process names. Existing nesting plans reference them and
will not be able to load the appropriate process data. Make sure you update
the names in your nesting plans as well, where necessary.
2.11.22.2.3 Changing multiple entries

To change the properties of several materials or processes in one step, select the items and
click the “Change” button.
Values that must be unique to avoid duplicates cannot be changed for several items (e.g. the
material name, process name).

2.11.23 View / Edit Drill DB
The function “View / Edit Drill DB” allows to open the Drill Database MGDrillDB.mdb, in
which you can make adjustments to the drills you use and the drill macros present on the
control. For further details please refer to Support of drilling heads on page 465.
2.11.24 Start Auto Nest

The automatic nesting of parts on a plate can be performed by means of the Auto nest
function. For details see Automatic Nesting on page 349.
The function “Start Auto Nest“ for the automatic nesting and the
corresponding icon in the Nesting Toolbar are only visible, if this
function is enabled on the dongle.
2.12 Help Menu

The Help Menu contains:
> the help for OmniWin, which can also be called by means of the function key <F1>
> the functions for licensing and registration of OmniWin
> the dialog “System Information” showing hardware and software details for your system
> the info dialog “About OmniWin” to show the version number and regional package. If
this dialog does not contain any information regarding the region, the default package for
Europe is installed.

2.12.1 Licensing
The “Licensing” item in the “Help” menu opens the “Licensing” dialog. Here, you can view
information related to your local or network dongle, and modify the settings.
2.12.1.1 Dongle Status
The “Dongle Status” page in the Licensing dialog provides an overview of the licenses
available on the local or network dongle OmniWin is currently connected to. If one or more
dongles (regardless of what type) are locally connected to the PC, all the licenses on these
dongles are displayed. If a network dongle is available as well somewhere in your network,
the remote network dongle will be ignored as long as any dongle is locally connected to the
PC.
Dongle ID/Dongle Type: Shows the unique Dongle ID (serial number) and the type of the
dongle that is currently in use. You need the Dongle ID to manually download license
updates from the MesserSoft web pages.
Update Counter: Shows the current update counter for the selected dongle. You need this
value, if you want to manually download a license update via the MesserSoft web pages.
Connected to: Computer name, where the dongle is plugged in. In case of a network
dongle this will be the server name, for a local dongle this is the name of your PC.
The grid in the middle of the dialog shows the licenses available on the dongle. For network
dongles, you can also see how many users are currently working with OmniWin.
Create C2V: Creates a so-called “C2V file”, which is used to report to MesserSoft which
licenses are currently active on the selected dongle. This function is only needed when the
MesserSoft support requests this file.
Apply V2C: Applies a license update file to your dongle (see “Manual License Update” on
page 340).

Check for license update: Contacts the MesserSoft license server to check if there are any
license updates for your dongle available. This function is performed upon each OmniWin
launch. However, you can use this function to retry the mechanism after resolving potential
network problems.
Use Preliminary License until expired: A Preliminary License allows you to evaluate the
full functionality of all OmniWin features and options. Nevertheless, when you have installed
your purchased final license, your Preliminary License can still be used for the remaining
period. Select this checkbox, if you want to continue using your Preliminary License after the
installation of your final license. This checkbox is only visible, if a Preliminary License is
available on the dongle.
2.12.1.2 Network Dongles
On the “Network Dongles” page, you can change the mode of license acquisition for your
network dongle.
License Server Detection

Set the way OmniWin chooses the server hosting the network licenses in your company.
Normally, this is set to “Automatic”. This is the standard setting, detecting any License
Server that is located on the same subnet as your computer.
If you want to point to a specific server (e.g. if there are several license servers running in
your company network or if your License Server is located on a different subnet), select
“Manual” and enter the name of the server OmniWin contacts for licenses.
Acquisition from License Server

Automatic (default): OmniWin tries to retrieve the highest possible Edition license and all
available options from the License Server, i.e. OmniWin Professional. If this is not available,
OmniWin Enhanced and then OmniWin Standard are acquired.
Selection: Select here, which license should be retrieved from the server. For example, if you
need OmniWin Standard only, you may want not to block a OmniWin Professional license.
Choose the required OmniWin Edition and select the options as necessary.
Acquired Network Licenses

This list shows the network licenses currently used on your computer.

If you apply any changes here, you need to restart OmniWin.
2.12.2 Registration
“Registration” opens the dialog for registering your dongle with MesserSoft. The dongle
needs to be registered once on each computer it is plugged into. The registration dialog is
opened automatically, if the dongle needs to be registered (usually when you launch
OmniWin for the first time), but you can open the registration dialog manually via this menu
item.
If your PC is connected to the Internet, please complete the registration form and submit the
data to MesserSoft. This data will only be used for support purposes.
The registration must be completed before license updates can be downloaded and applied
directly via the Internet from the MesserSoft License Service. The registration needs to be
done once for every PC, i.e. if you plug your dongle into a different machine, your license
will be transferred to that machine, but it needs to be registered again.
2.12.3 Dongles and Licenses in OmniWin

You need a dongle to be able to use OmniWin. There are several types of dongles and pre-
configurations.
2.12.3.1 Single workplace dongles
There are two dongle models available for single workplaces:

> MesserSoft Type E = Sentinel HL Pro (Blue/Purple)

This model is shipped from MesserSoft with the final licenses installed. It just needs to be
plugged to the target PC to be used permanently - there are no further steps necessary.
> MesserSoft Type F = Sentinel HL Time (Black)
Upon delivery, these dongles are pre-configured with a 30-days Preliminary License for
OmniWin Professional. This license provides full functionality of OmniWin 2013
Professional and all standard product options, but will expire after 30 days.
Within these 30 days, a license update with the final license for the purchased product
must be applied to the system. MesserSoft supplies final licenses through the MesserSoft
License Service.
2.12.3.2 How to obtain license updates
OmniWin checks the Internet-based MesserSoft License Service upon every launch of the
software. If a license update is found for the locally plugged dongle, you’ll see a respective
notification. If you already registered you can agree to let OmniWin download the license
update automatically and apply it to your dongle. Otherwise you’ll first have to complete the
registration process (see “Registration” on page 339).
2.12.3.3 Manual License Update
In case your OmniWin system has no Internet access, or if you don’t want to use the
automatic update process, you can download license updates from the MesserSoft web
pages.
> Visit the MesserSoft license web page at http://www.messersoft.com/license from any PC
with Internet access.
> Make sure you have your Dongle ID and the “Update Counter” number at hand when
you visit the website. Both items can be found on the “License” dialog in OmniWin.
Furthermore, you need your contact details and company information for registration.
> When you entered all required details, the web site checks for available license updates.
> If a license update is found, your browser will open a “Save file” window allowing you to
save the license update file (V2C).
> After saving the license update file, the web browser will still show the dialog with all
previously entered data, but the Update Counter increased. If you want to check for more
license update files for your dongle simply click “submit” again.
> Once you have downloaded the license file (V2C) you need to copy it to a location you
can access from your OmniWin PC.
> In OmniWin open the menu “Help/Licensing”. On the page “Dongle Status” click “Apply
V2C”, browse to your downloaded license update file and confirm. The licenses will be
added to the dongle.

You Preliminary License will be deactivated automatically after the download of the
purchased license, even if it has not expired. However, you can reactivate your Preliminary
License if you want to continue evaluating the full set of features for the remaining period.
To do this, select “Use Preliminary License until expired” on the Dongle Status page
(accessed from the menu “Help/Licensing”).
2.12.3.4 Network Dongles
There are two network dongle models available:

> MesserSoft Type G = Sentinel HL Net10 (Red – short)
This model is shipped from MesserSoft with the final licenses installed. No license update
needs to be applied for this model.
> MesserSoft Type H = Sentinel HL NetTime10 (Red – long)
Upon delivery, these dongles are pre-configured for 10 concurrent users with a 30-days
Preliminary License for OmniWin Professional. This license provides full functionality of
OmniWin Professional and all standard product options, but will expire after 30 days.
Within these 30 days, a license update with the final license for the purchased product
must be applied to the system. MesserSoft supplies final licenses through the MesserSoft
License Service.
2.12.3.4.1 User: Retrieving a license from a network dongle

If a new network dongle is available in your network, you don’t need to do anything.
OmniWin will automatically recognize the licenses. Please see “Network Dongles” on page
338 for further configuration options.

2.12.3.4.2 Administrator: Installing/Managing Network Dongles
For managing network dongles, a SafeNet runtime needs to be installed on the dongle
server. This runtime contains:
> the “Sentinel Local License Manager” service, operating in background to let license
clients acquire/release licenses on a network dongle,
> the “Sentinel Admin Control Center”, a web interface for configuring and
troubleshooting the license manager and managing network dongles.
SafeNet provides two alternative runtime installation packages. Any of them can be used on
network license servers. The first package contains a GUI installation, while the second is a
pure command line installation package. Both SafeNet runtime installation packages are
supplied on the OmniWin product medium.
Using the “Sentinel Admin Control Center”

After installing the SafeNet runtime, open a web browser. By default, the service can be
accessed via port 1947 on the local host, i.e. via following URL: http://localhost:1947.
Use the options available here to update/maintain your licenses.
How to download and apply license updates for network dongles

There are basically two ways to apply license updates to your network dongle.
> Automatic update:
You can download and apply license updates within OmniWin form any PC accessing the
network dongle (locally or remotely in the company network) in the same way as if you
were using a single workplace dongle (see above). Any user accessing the network dongle
will get a message as soon as an update license becomes available and can perform the
update. The PC needs Internet access for that.
> Manual update:
Otherwise, you must visit the MesserSoft web pages as described above and download
the V2C file manually. Then use the web browser on your License Server PC and launch
the Sentinel Admin Control Center, or open the licensing dialog in OmniWin. Use
“Update/Attach” to apply the license update file (V2C file) for your network dongle.

3 OmniWin – Advanced
Functions
3.1 Macros
In OmniWin parts can be generation with the aid of parameterized macros.
The Macro dialog can be started by clicking on “View Macro Dialog” in the “Macro” menu
or in the sub-menu Toolbars in the View menu in OmniWin. The Macro dialog window
appears as a docked window on the left of the OmniWin main window when it is first called:
www.messersoft.com OmniWin – Advanced Functions | 343

You can select the macro you want in the Listbox on the left in the Macro window. It then
appears alongside on the right with the parameters which can be selected. Once the
parameters have been entered in the appropriate input fields and the ”New” button is
clicked, the geometric figure which corresponds to the parameterized macro will appear in
the OmniWin drawing window on the right:
A macro can be inserted into a drawing which already exists in the drawing window (which
can also be a macro) by clicking the ”Add” button.
The Macro Toolbar contains the following functions:
> “Back” function: to navigate backwards to the previous page in the history list.
> “Forward” function: to navigate forwards to the next page in the history list.
> “Home” function: to navigate to the Home page.
> “Macro Docking View” function : to toggle the view of the Macro dialog (docked /
free window). The free window can be reduced or enlarged at will and positioned freely
on the screen. If the “Macro Docking View” is clicked again in the free window, the
window is moved back to its previous, docked position at the edge of the screen.
> Function “Change Home Page”... to change the home page: On clicking this
symbol you can chose between different home pages, depending on your setup:

> The homepage HTML1\macrohome.htm is the default homepage. If you have installed
additional functions (e. g. the Option BoilerEnd) or made further adjustments, additional
homepages are available here.
The functions listed for the Toolbar can also be called from the Macro menu (see above).
The “Macro” dialog window contains an additional selection bar between the Macro toolbar
and the dialog area, with the following functions:
> Call of the dialogue for direct parameter input for a macro
selected by number (as before, see above picture)
> Call of the macro selection using the macro pictures. The macro
picture selection contains several pages. Use the left and right arrows above the macro
pictures to leaf backwards and forwards:

> Clicking the macro picture, takes you into the input dialogue for that macro.
> Call of a pocket calculator, with that the input parameters for a
Macro can be calculated from the dimensions of a part drawing:
> Scanning of NC Code in DIN and ESSI Formats

> This function allows the scanning and display of NC code in DIN and ESSI Format, as well
as the display of the corresponding geometries.
> When you click the NC Scan Icon, the following dialog window will open:

When you click the DIN Icon or the ESSI Icon a dialog will
open for the selection of a plan from the OmniWin Plan directory. After you confirm the
plan selected with the < Open > button, the DIN or ESSI code of the plan will be displayed
in the Macro window, and a drawing of the plan will be shown in the drawing window,
as in the following example for an NC code in DIN Format:

To see the contour element which corresponds to a command line in the NC code, either
double-click the command line concerned or once on the command line concerned and
then on the Icon to select a command. The contour element found will be
marked in red.
Conversely, if you want to find the command line in the NC code which corresponds to a
contour element, first click on the Icon to select a contour and then click the
contour element required. The command line found in the NC code will be marked in
beige.
Using the Icon you can run a simulation in the drawing. When you click on
the icon, the simulation toolbox you know from the “Simulation” function (in the Nest
menu or the corresponding Icon in the Nesting toolbar),

with them you can simulate the motion of your tool.
> Import of Lantek geometry files (.mec-files). These contain pure

geometry data without administration data
3.1.1 Modified macros

You can modify the standard macros or create your own. For information on how to create
your own macros refer to Appendix D: Creation of Custom Macros (Drawing Templates) on
page 592.
Any manual changes applied to the default CAD macros in the HTML folder in the program
directory of OmniWin will be removed during an update. Make a copy of your files and re-
apply the changes after updating if necessary.
3.2 Automatic Nesting
The function “Start Auto Nest“ for the automatic nesting and the
corresponding icon in the Nesting Toolbar are only visible, if this
function is enabled on the dongle.
The automatic nesting of parts on a plate can be performed by means of the Auto nest
function. Calling the function “Start Auto Nest”in the “Nest” menu or the corresponding
button in the Nest Toolbar, the following Autonest Option dialog window opens:

The parts available in the workspace will be loaded when the dialog is opened. Depending
on your workspace configuration (“Disable parts with other thickness and material”), only
the parts are loaded whose thickness/material correspond to that of the nesting plan (see
also Workspace on page 147).
Automatic nesting can be launched directly from the Workspace context menu.
Start Corner
Use “Start Corner” to choose the start corner for automatic nesting, where the larger
objects are preferably laid in that corner. The description of the start corner relates to a 90
degree rotated view, i.e. the view of the machine in the direction of the track.
At the same time, this defines the nesting direction X or Y.
The description of the start corner relates to a 90 degree rotated view, i.e. the view of the
machine in the direction of the track:
Example:
Both examples have a left bottom start corner. The left example shows nesting in Y, the
other one in X direction:

Algorithm Option
With the “Optimization Level” slider you can adjust the speed and efficiency of the nesting:
> Setting fully left: low optimization: the nesting is fast but for this the quality of nesting is
low, i.e. the scrap is high
> Setting fully right: high optimization: nesting is not as fast but the quality of nesting is
high, i.e. the scrap is low
Set the slider according to your requirements.
The “Permit Part in Part” checkbox allows the nesting of parts in the inner contours of other
parts.
If the “Prerotate” checkbox is selected, the OPTROTATE command (to minimize the
surrounding rectangle) is carried out, to minimize the space required for nesting (see also
Minimize the surrounding rectangle on page 228).
Plate
In the “Plate” section
you can set the Quantity of plates, which are to be available for nesting.
Parts
In the “Part” section

you can set the Quantity and the Step angle for rotation, for parts which have been
selected by a mouse click in the parts list in the lower part of the Autonest option dialog
(these parts are indicated by a red frame). Several parts can be selected by holding the
<Ctrl> key pressed.
The step angle specifies, in which steps a part rotated to find the optimum position for
nesting with as little space as possible. The smaller the step angle, the longer the nesting will
take.
The grain restriction as defined in the part info is suggested as default here. However, if the
grain restriction is set to 0 in the part info (no restriction), the autonest process uses the step
angle of 90 to optimize the time required for autonesting. This value can be changed again
in the autonest dialog if necessary.
With the “Permit Mirror” checkbox you can also allow the placing of mirrored parts. The
buttons <High>, <Normal> and <Low> allow you to set the priority at which your parts
should be cut. The values from the part info are set as default here too.
The settings in the “Part” section are also shown for the parts in the parts list. You can take
over the settings for all parts in the parts list with the <Set All> button.
The <OK> button starts the nesting run. You can interrupt the nesting run at any time in the
progress display.
If you have nested several plates in one run, then the first nested plate gets the name you
have given. Each additional plan has a number added to the name in the form Name_1,
Name_2, etc.
You can see how many parts have been nested/remain for nesting in the “Nest
Quantity”/“Remains” lines in the parts list of the “Autonest Option” dialog (see example)

and also in the Workspace alongside the nesting plan window.
Multitorch
The “Multitorch” section is available only in Multitorch mode. For further information on
automatic nesting with multitorch, please refer to „Multiple torch operation with automatic
nesting“ on page 398.
3.3 OmniWin-Database (Parts, Plates,

Plans, Profiles)
The OmniWin database includes libraries for maintaining parts, plates, nesting plans and
profiles.
This is the central location where all parts and nesting plans are stored.
3.3.1 Database Dialog Window

The database dialog window contains on the one hand a toolbar with the functions of the
Database menu (see chapter “Menu Database” on page 354) and on the other in start
condition the display of the database fields without any database records.
The database dialog window includes the index tabs for the tables in the database for parts,
plates, plans and profiles:

3.3.2 Menu Database
The Menu Database contains the following functions:

The function “Update All Records” is only available for the Parts table.
The symbols allocated to the individual functions can be found in the same sequence in the
Toolbar of the Database Dialog window (see chapter “Database Dialog Window” on page
353).
The functions are described in detail in the following chapters.
3.3.2.1 View Database Dialog
With the “View Database Dialog” function in the menu Database, it is possible to switch the
database dialog view on and off. If the function is ticked, then the dialog window is
switched on and can normally be seen on the left alongside the drawing window in a group
with the Workspace and the Macro Dialog:
The function “View Database Dialog” is available in the „View“ menu, in „Toolbars...“ too.
3.3.2.2 Search Records in Database
With the Search Records in Database function in the Database Menu or with the symbol
in the Toolbar in the Database Dialog Window, it is possible to search for specific
parts, plates, plans or profiles by specific search criteria.
Go to the respective tab (index card) for parts, plates, plans or profiles and call the function
“Search Records in Database”. A dialog for entering the search criteria opens.

If the Field name is clicked, then a field name can be selected from the list of file names
which opens.
If a field which contains no text is selected, i.e. a field containing values or a date, then the
comparison operator, =, >, <, >=, <= or <> (not equal to), can be selected from a list box
under “Relation”.
Thickness is a text field, therefore no comparison operator can be selected.

Additional fields can be added as additional search criteria using the <Add> button, as in the
following example.
These lines can be linked by selecting AND or OR. The <Delete> button allows the deletion
of individual marked lines.
Once the composition of the search criteria is finished with <OK>, the records found are
listed in the database dialog window as in the following example for a parts search:

The search criteria composed in the Find Dialog and confirmed with <OK> will be offered as
default value when the “Search Records in Database“ function is next called.
The search criteria serve as well as default for the filter function “Filtered by search”
(see “View and filter options” on page 374).
3.3.2.3 Load All Database Records
With the Load All Database Records function in the Database menu or the symbol in
the Database Dialog Toolbar you can view all records of the current library, as e.g. of the
parts library:

3.3.2.4 Show only workspace items
The function “Show only workspace items” lists only the objects loaded in the
workspace.
To view again all objects, click “Load All Database Records” .
3.3.2.5 Print report
Use the “Print report” function to launch the reporting function for plates. This
function is only available, if the “Plates” tab is opened in the “Database” dialog.
For further information please refer to the chapter Reporting on page 104.

3.3.2.6 Add all records to Workspace
The “Add all records to Workspace” function in the Database menu or the symbol in
the Database Dialog Toolbar allows all parts, plates or plans which are listed in the Database
Dialog Window to be loaded into the workspace.
If only one particular part, plate or plan should be loaded, then you have to set a check mark
for this record in the first column. To close the record simply unselect the checkbox.
3.3.2.7 Remove all records from Workspace
The “Remove all records from Workspace” function in the Database menu or the symbol
in the Database Dialog Toolbar allows all parts, plates or plans which are listed in the
Database Dialog Window to be loaded into the workspace.
3.3.2.8 View/Edit Selected Record
The function View/Edit Selected Record (Symbol in the database dialog window
toolbar) opens the Info Dialog for the record marked in the record list. The function can also
be called by double-clicking the required record with the mouse.
Individual data of the record can then be changed in the info dialog. Changes are confirmed
with <OK>.
If the “Part Table” is active, then the familiar part info will open as in the following example:

To open this part info, the selected part must not be displayed in the geometry window. By
contrast to this, the function “View/Edit Current Part Info“ in the “View” menu, or the
symbol in the coordinate system toolbar, opens the part info only for the part
displayed in the geometry window.
If another table is shown, the corresponding plan, part or profile Info will open.
3.3.2.9 Update All Records
The “Update All Records” function in the Database menu or the symbol in the
Database Dialog Toolbar allow all parts which are listed in the Database Dialog and for
which changes have been made to the geometry or to the administration data in part info to
be updated simultaneously.
The function or the corresponding icon is only active if the Parts table is
activated.
3.3.2.10 Save active records
With the “Save Active Records” function in the Database menu or the symbol in the
Database Dialog Toolbar you can save the object currently displayed in the geometry
window, to the respective library. This function is available in the menu only if the Database
dialog is open.

3.3.2.10.1 Parts
For parts, the following Part Info Dialog is called, in which at least the Material and Thickness
must be selected before saving with <OK>:
If the active part is a part from the list displayed in the Database Dialog Window, then this
function is equivalent to updating the part (as described in the Chapter “Update All Records
on page 360), where the crossed out key symbol becomes a key symbol , if the
part has been changed.
If the active part is a part which is not yet present in the Part Library, such as a newly made
drawing or a newly imported DXF file, not only will the new part be saved in the Part Library
but it will also be taken into the Parts List.
Please note that you cannot save imported parts to the database unless all layers are
translated (see also Options for Checking for Non-translated Layers on page 142).
To store a new part, you need to define the material, otherwise the part cannot be stored.

3.3.2.10.2 Plates
The following dialog is shown when you create a new plate:
In the “Properties” section the plate name, the material the thickness, the quantity and
other parameters can be entered. At least the plate name and the material must be defined
before saving with <OK>.
The plate dimensions are taken over from the drawing.
3.3.2.10.3 Plans
When you save a plan with “Save Active Records”, the dialog “Current plan info” is called.
Here, you can add further information about the job, the programmer, the customer and as
special comments for a plan.
The parameters, which can be entered in this dialog, fill the database fields:
> Plan name
> Job
> Programmer
> Customer

> Notes
The entries for the fields:
> Process
> Material
> Thickness
> Plate Length
> Plate Width
Will be taken over from the corresponding entries in the sections “Parameter” and “Plate”
in the “New or existing plan” dialog. The remaining database fields will be calculated from
the nested plan.
Profile
When you save the current profile, the profile information dialog is shown.
The profile type “Machine” is preselected.
3.3.2.11 Delete Selected Records
The function “Delete Selected Records” from the “Database” menu or the icon in the
toolbar in the Database dialog deletes selected objects (parts, nesting plans, plates, profiles)
from the database.
The part/the plate are not only removed from the list, but deleted from the
database.
3.3.2.12 Set Fields
With the “Set Fields” function in the Database menu or with the symbol in the
Database Dialog Toolbar it is possible to show those fields which have been pulled out of the
respective list, whether for grouping in the area between the toolbar and the column titles
or for deletion (see chapter “Working with records and displaying the lists” on page 368), as
in the following example for the fields Material, Thickness and Note for the Part List:

If you click on one of these fields then you can pull them back into the area of the column
headings by holding the mouse button, and set them there by releasing the mouse button
with them in the required position.
If the “Set Fields” function is called without any field having been pulled out of the column
titles of the Part or Plate List, then the “Show Fields” window appears like this:
The “Configuration” function in the Database menu or the symbol in the Database
Window Dialog Toolbar can be used
> to configure the view of the list in the Database Dialog Window
> to configure the link to a database.

Activating the Checkbox “Auto Column Sizing” in the “View” section adjusts the view of
the parts and plates list so that all fields of the Part or Plate Library, regardless of the width
of the Database Dialog Window will be shown together, without the need to scroll the
display. The width of the columns is then dependant upon the current width available for
the Database Dialog Window.
The “Shade Group Headings” checkbox in the “View” section produces a light blue shading
behind the group headings for the Group view of the Parts and Plates List, as in the
following example for a Parts List:

Using the button <Edit Connection> in the “Connection” section puts you into the
Properties of data link dialog, in which you can set up a database connection and edit it.

Before opening the dialog you must delete any Parts and Plates List which may be present in
the Database Dialog Window.
The default is a connection to the Access database PartLib.mdb in the program data
directory of OmniWin (default C:\ProgramData\MesserSoft\OmniWin ProcessData
<Release>).
Generally it is possible to establish a link to another database with the help of this dialog For
example, you could create databases which contain only the parts and plates for individual
customers, by making copies of the original file PartLib.mdb from the OmniWin medium,
e.g. with the names PartLib_ClientXYZ.mdb. Then establish a link to this database
PartLib_ClientXYZ.mdb, delete all previously existing parts and plates in it and then only save
parts and plates for the customerXYZ in this Database.
The <Test Connection> Button allows you to test the connection to the set database, when
the following message should appear:
In the “Provider” card of the Properties of Data Link Dialog you can select the data to which
you want to establish a connection. For the PartLib.mdb the provider “Microsoft Jet 4.0 OLE
DB Provider” must be selected.
In the “Extended” card of the Properties of Data Link Dialog the network settings and access
rights are set.

The “All” card of the Properties of Data Link Dialog allows the initialization properties for the
data type set to be edited.
The <Set Default Connection> Button under “Connection” in the configuration dialog
allows you, if a connection to a database other than the PartLib.mdb exists, to restore the
connection to PartLib.mdb. The function gives no message out. After executing the function
you can check whether the connection to PartLib.mdb exists with the button <Edit Link>.
3.3.3 The Key Symbol in the Part Record

Parts which are displayed in the geometry window are identified, besides the tick in the
checkbox, with a Key Symbol in the key column of the Parts List. The key symbolizes
that the part record corresponds to the drawing and the administration data in the object
info dialog window or in the part info. If the geometry and/or the administration data of a
part are changed, the corresponding part record will be identified with a crossed out key
symbol .
When such a part is updated using one of the two functions “Update All Records” (see
chapter “Update All Records” on page 360) or “Save Active Records” (see chapter “Save
active records” on page 360) then the crossed out key symbol will be replaced by the key
symbol.
3.3.4 Working with records and displaying the lists

Apart from the functions for working in the lists described in chapter “Menu Database” on
page 354, some basic possibilities for display and working in the lists will be explained here.
Transfer into the workspace

If you click to select the checkbox of a record, a check mark is shown and the part, the
nesting plan or the plate is taken over into the workspace. Double-clicking the record opens
the related file in the geometry window and the key symbol is shown. For the meaning of
the key symbol, see chapter “The Key Symbol in the Part Record” on page 368. If a
Checkbox of a record is deactivated, then the corresponding drawing in the geometry
window and in the workspace will vanish, and for part record also the key symbol will
vanish.
ID field
Each record which is stored as new with the “Save Active Record” function in the Database
menu (see chapter “Save active records” on page 360) or with the icon in the
Database Dialog Toolbar is automatically allocated a running ID number. If y record is
deleted, its ID number will not be reused

Change the sequence of the columns
The sequence of the fields, i.e. the columns, can be changed by pulling them with the
mouse. To do this, click on the title of a column and pull it, holding the mouse button down,
to the position where you want it to be (possible positions will be shown with two red
arrows) and then release the mouse button at the desired new position, as shown for the
Thickness column in a Part List in the following example:
Remove columns
To remove a column from the list, click on the column headline and pull it out of its position
with the mouse button pressed until a black cross appears on the column headline, as in the
following example for the “Note“ column in a Part List:

The removed field can be called back into the list with the “Set Fields” function (see chapter
“Set Fields” on page 363).
Change column width

To change the width of a particular column in the part or plate list, move the mouse over the
dividing line with the neighboring column to the right until a small, horizontal double arrow
appears, then press the mouse button and pull the mouse to the left (to make the column
narrower) or to the right (to make the column wider) whilst holding the mouse button down
and simply release the mouse button when the desired column width is reached.
Setting of descending or ascending sorting in a column

If you click on the head of a column then the records are sorted in to ascending or
descending order of this column. An ascending sorting will be indicated by the symbol
on the right alongside the column headline, a descending sorting by the symbol . When
the same column head is clicked again, the sorting is switched.
Grouping according to one or more columns

If a column headline is pulled with a pressed mouse button into the area between the
Toolbar and the column titles, in which is written: “Drag a column header here to group that
column.”, then the display is made in groups for the various values in this column, as in the
following example for the Material in a part list:

The “Show All Records” function (see chapter “Add all records to Workspace” on page 359)
and “Hide All Records” (see chapter “Remove all records from Workspace” on page 359)
only work in this display for the open groups. For example, if the Material group S235JR in a
par list is closed by clicking on the minus sign to the left of the group name and the “Show
All Records” function is called, then only parts from the open Material-group ALMG3 will be
shown in the geometry window:

If a second column header is pulled with the mouse into the area between the Toolbar and
the headers, then a sub-grouping is made within the groups, as in the following example for
Thickness as a sub-group:

The grouping can be cancelled again by pulling the headers back into the title row.

3.3.5 View and filter options
Use the filter icon in the Database toolbar to show only objects that match certain
criteria.
> First, click the „Search records in database“ icon to open the dialog for setting the
search criteria. For further information on the filter criteria please refer to “Search Records
in Database” on page 355.
> Then, click „Filtered by search“ in the menu related to the new filter icon . Only
objects matching your criteria are shown in the Database dialog.
> Click “All records” to cancel the filter.
3.3.6 Multiple records selection

The database dialog allows now to select multiple records. From the context menu (right-
click) you can perform actions for all selected objects:
> Open the selected records.
> Add the selected records to the workspace.
> Save the records to database (e.g. after changing properties).
> Open the Info dialog to change the properties of multiple objects at a time.
> Delete multiple rows at a time.

The functions related to the icon buttons in the Database toolbar affect all selected records.
3.4 Profiles for saving configuration

settings
You can use profiles for saving specific settings in the options dialogs and restore them
quickly if required. This may be helpful when you frequently import CAD drawings with the
same layer matching. Or, you have several cutting machines with different processes. In this
case, you can store the parameters for each machine in a profile, and quickly restore the
correct settings.
Types of profiles
Profiles can be defined for:
> The import of drawings and plans (Profile Type “Import”)
> The creation of own CAD drawings (Profile type “CAD”)
> The machine parameters for the creation of cutting plans for different machines (Profile
type “Machine”)
> The creation of plans with bevels (Profile type “Bevel Machine”, also called bevel profiles)
Profiles are saved in the OmniWin database (Partlib.mdb). (see chapter “OmniWin-Database
(Parts, Plates, Plans, Profiles)” on page 353).
In addition to the settings available in the Options dialogs, the current layout of the
OmniWin user interface, e.g. the arrangement of the windows or the toolbar configuration
is stored in the profile (exception: Import Profile).

3.4.1 Creating a profile
You can save your settings to a profile directly while you're working.
Before you create a special profile, we suggest you create a profile for your
default interface and configuration, as you can only restore these settings
manually.
> Use the Save icon in the Profile bar, as in this example for the CAD profile.
> Or, in the respective Options dialog, click the button for saving the profile.
The „Save <profile type>“ in the Options dialogs saves the profile. If you want to change the
current settings without saving them to a profile, click "Save".
When you save a profile an information dialog appears.
> Enter a name for the Profile, and a comment if required.

> Use the < Save current profile > button to save the input.
The profile type is always preselected.
If a profile has been active before saving, it is updated with the new settings after
confirmation (see also „Changing a profile“ on page 377).

3.4.2 Activate a profile (Load the settings)
The profile bar shows whether a profile is activated:
A Profile bar exists for the CAD profile, the Machine profile and the Bevel (B-Machine)
profile. The Import profile is only available in the open file dialog.
If no profile is shown, or do you want to switch to another profile, selected an existing
profile from the list box in the profile bar.
You can select a machine profile or a bevel profile directly when you create a nesting plan
(see „Load an existing Machine profile“ on page 381 or „Load an existing Bevel profile“ on
page 383).
The only way to deactivate a profile is to load another profile.
toolbar is marked with an asterisk.
3.4.3 Changing a profile

toolbar is marked with an asterisk (*).
If you want to use the changed settings for the profile, proceed as if creating a new profile:
> Use the Save icon in the Profile bar, as in this example for the CAD profile.
> Or, in the respective Options dialog, click the button for saving the profile.
The current profile information are displayed.

> Change the name of the profile and the comment, if necessary.
If you change the name, a new profile will be created. If you keep the name, the profile in
the database will be updated with the new settings.
> Use the < Save current profile > button to save the input.
3.4.4 CAD Profile

In the CAD profile, all settings available in the "CAD Options" dialog are saved, and the
current configuration of the User Interface (display settings of windows and dialogs,
toolbars, etc.).
The CAD Options can be opened by selecting CAD Options in the View menu, or by clicking
in the toolbar.
All the parameters relevant for the creation of part drawings are available here. These
include:
> the activation of layers for the various processes which are needed for the part
> the display of the part dimensions
> the sorting of the inner contours for cutting and the marking contours for marking
> the filtering and check of the part drawing when storing.
All these parameters are included in the CAD profile.

If the support for bevel cutting for OmniWin is activated, then the defined
settings for the various bevels I, VDS, VAS, etc. in the bevel dialog are also
saved with the other settings in the CAD profile.
3.4.5 Import Profile

The Import profile contains all settings in the "OmniWin Options" dialog, under the
"Import" node.
The OmniWin Options can be opened by selecting Options in the View menu, or by clicking
in the toolbar.
All options required for importing drawings and nesting plans from third party formats can
be found here:
> Layer Translation for graphics import
> Adaptation of part and plan names during opening and saving
> Settings for DIN and ESSI import
> Settings for special scenarios for DWG and DXF import
> Import settings for parts information (Layer “Administration”)
The options under "Environment" apply to the entire OmniWin Software and are not stored
within the profiles.
When you open a drawing, select the profile that contains the correct settings for this
graphics.

3.4.6 Machine profile
The Machine profile includes all settings in the “Machine” node of the “Nesting Plan
Options” dialog, and the current configuration of the User Interface (display settings of
windows and dialogs, toolbars, etc.).
The nesting plan options can be opened by selecting Plan Options in the Nest menu, or by
clicking in the toolbar.
The machine profile includes e.g. the post processor selection, settings for the automatic
cutting sequence, options for checking the nesting plan and settings for multitorch usage.

3.4.6.1 Machine profile and process data
If you save data for the machine profile, the process data are stored as well. However, these
are located in the process database (Nest.mdb) whereas the profile data are stored in the
OmniWin database (Partlib.mdb). The process data include the settings in the nodes
"Cutting process data" and Messer Hole". Beim Laden eines Profils werden die Prozessdaten
nicht geladen – die geladenen Prozessdaten richten sich nach den Parametern für Prozess,
Material und Dicke für den Plan im Prozessdaten-Editor (siehe im Schachteln-Menü unter der
Option View / Edit Process DB on page 327).
3.4.6.2 Load an existing Machine profile
Ways to load a machine profile:

> Select the profile in the Machine profile bar, or
.
> select the profile when you create a new nesting plan:

3.4.7 Bevel profile
The bevel profile stores all settings for bevel machines. These are the settings in the “Nesting
plan Options” dialog, under the “Machine” node. In addition, the current configuration of
the User Interface (display settings of windows and dialogs, toolbars, etc.) are saved to the
bevel profile.
The nesting plan options can be opened by selecting Plan Options in the Nest menu, or by
clicking in the toolbar.
For plans with bevel support, only the information in the "Machine" node are available -
only these are stored in the profile.

The bevel profile includes e.g. information on the selected post processor and bevel
database, settings for the automatic cutting sequence and options for checking the nesting
plan.
3.4.7.1 Load an existing Bevel profile
Ways to load a bevel profile:

> Select the profile in the bevel profile toolbar (B-Machine), or
> select the profile when you create a new nesting plan: with bevel support
3.5 MultiTorch operation

The Multitorch functions allow nesting for machines with multiple torches. Configure your
machine easily, define the settings for your current nesting plan with a few clicks and start
nesting.
The key features covered by the OmniWin multitorch support are:
> Support of machines with and without automatic torch carriage positioning
> Adapting the number of carriages
> Changing the spacing between the torches in the same plan
> Parking or deactivating carriages as necessary
> Defining a dedicated carriage for the marking process
> Marking with all carriages or one carriage only

> Automatic nesting with multiple torches
Limitations:
> No drill
> Only one driven carriage
3.5.1 Basic steps for creating a multitorch nesting plan

The basic steps for creating the NC code for a multitorch nesting plan are:
> Create a new nesting plan for straight cutting.
> Set the Multitorch Options (see “Multitorch Options Dialog” on page 386).
> Select the appropriate postprocessor (see Postprocessor for Multitorch Operation on page
560 in the Technical Appendix).
> Adapt the torch settings for the current nesting plan (distances, park, activate, deactivate
torches, see “The Multitorch Dialog – Setting the Carriages” on page 390).
> Nest the parts.
> Adapt the torch spacing of nested parts, if necessary (see example “Step 6 - Changing the
torch spacing of nested parts” on page 397).
> Save the plan to create the NC code.
The chapter “Standard scenario example – Multitorch machine with 3 carriages” on page
392 explains all these steps in detail describing a basic sample scenario.
3.5.2 The Multitorch Menu

The functions for Multitorch support are located in the “Multitorch” menu:
View Multitorch Dialog

The function “View Multitorch Dialog” opens the Multitorch dialog. This contains all the
features you need for multitorch nesting and the configuration of it.

The Multitorch dialog contains a toolbar and a section for the carriage adjustment.
For further details, please refer to “The Multitorch Dialog – Setting the Carriages” on page
390.
Read Multitorch
The “Read Multitorch” function in the Multitorch menu or in the Multitorch dialog (symbol
) allows you to read the multitorch configuration for nested parts, i.e. the status of the
torches and the distance between them will be displayed in the Multitorch dialog.
> Select the parts and click “Read Multitorch” . The Multitorch dialog shows the
multitorch values for the selected parts.
Write Multitorch
With the “Write Multitorch” function in the Multitorch menu or in the Multitorch dialog, or
with the corresponding symbol in the toolbar of the Multitorch dialog, it is possible to
apply changed multitorch settings in the Multitorch dialog to already nested parts (see an
example procedure in “Step 6 - Changing the torch spacing of nested parts” on page 397).
Options
Opens the Multitorch Options dialog . This allows setting the default options for
multitorch operation (see “Multitorch Options Dialog” on page 386).

MultiTorch docked view
The “Multitorch docking view” function in the Multitorch menu or in the Multitorch dialog,
or the corresponding symbol in toolbar of the Multitorch display is used to switch the
view of the Multitorch dialog window (docked / free window).
The free window can be reduced or enlarged at will and positioned freely on the screen.
When the function “Multitorch Docking View” is clicked again the window is moved back to
its previous, docked position at the edge of the screen.
3.5.3 Multitorch Options Dialog

In the Multitorch Options dialog, it is possible to set defaults for:
> The automatic positioning
> The number of carriages
> The park position (left or right)
> The driven carriage
> The minimum distance between the individual carriages
> The processes allocated to the carriages
These settings usually reflect the machine configuration and they can be stored in the
machine profile. You can change the settings for individual nestings (i.e. if you don’t need all
available torches) in the Multitorch dialog (see “The Multitorch Dialog – Setting the
Carriages” on page 390).
The Multitorch Options dialog an be accessed directly from the Multitorch dialog with the
corresponding symbol in the toolbar. It is also available in the Nesting Plan Options
(“Multitorch” page).

> Select the number of carriages for cutting. Carriages that support only marking processes
are not counted in here. The carriages are instantly added to the grid below and can be
modified there.
> Select the driven carriage from the “Driven carriage” list. For “Automatic” carriage
positioning only the first or last carriage can be selected. This selection is equal to the
check box in the “Driven” column.
> “Carriage positioning” can be either “Automatic” (allows selecting only first or last
carriage as driven) or “Manual”. Select “Manual”, if your machine does not support
automatic carriage positioning.
> “Park position” is automatically set to right or left depending on whether the first or the
last carriage is defined as driven carriage. The park position can be changed manually,
only if any carriage except the first or last is selected as driven carriage (manual carriage
positioning).
> “Global Control side” is set to the side opposite to the park position. This can be changed
for non-standard applications (see “Definition of GC position (left/right)” on page 388).
3.5.3.1 Options in the grid
The grid shows the current Multitorch configuration and allows you to map the carriage
address, set the minimum distance between the carriages and assign processes to the
carriages.
“Carriage” defines the Multitorch carriage number. This field is read-only.
“Carriage address” allows to define the physical carriage address, which will be used in the
CNC code. When you start editing this field a “++” button appears which allows you to
populate all following carriage addresses automatically.

The “Driven” column shows the currenly selected driven carriage and allows you to change
it by selecting the checkbox in the respective cell
“Min distance to next carriage” allows you to set the distances between the carriages. When
you start editing this field, a copy button appears allowing you to apply the current value for
all carriages:
“Supported processes” defines which processes are supported by each carriage. Click the
“…” button in the cell to select the processes from the list:
“Cut” is always enabled. Drilling is not supported during Multitorch operation. Drill holes
included in the nested parts will be ignored in the NC output.
For information on how to configure marking refer to “Configuration of carriages for
marking” on page 389.
3.5.4 Definition of GC position (left/right)

The option “Global Control side” for selecting left or right position of the GC is available in
the Multitorch Options dialog. This setting will be applied automatically depending on the
“Park position”, but can be changed for special cases. The default settings for the options
“Park position” and “Global Control side” are opposing:
Park position: Left – Global Control side: Right
Park position: Right – Global Control side: Left
The default settings can be changed, but are only supported with a custom multitorch
postprocessor.

3.5.5 Configuration of carriages for marking
The way the processes are assigned to the carriages defines how the markings in the nesting
plan will be applied:
Case 1
> All carriages support the current marking process. In this case, all activated carriages will
be used for marking (i.e. multitorch marking).
Case 2
> If at least one contour exists with a process that is not supported by all activated carriages,
only one carriage will be used for this process. The first carriage with support of the
required process will be used in this case.
This means, if markings for an entire plan are made with the same number of carriages that
are used for cutting, then multiple torches will be used for the markings. Otherwise, the
markings will be applied by only one carriage.
Case 3
> You use a dedicated carriage for marking, that does not support cutting. Please refer to
“Configuration of one carriage for marking” on page 389 for information on how to
configure this scenario.
3.5.6 Configuration of one carriage for marking

When you operate a machine with multiple torches, you can define one carriage for the
marking process.
This example shows a machine with 4 carriages.
H1 – Plasma Marker – Carriage address 1 – this is used for plasma marking only
H2 – Alfa - Carriage address 2 – this is the driven carriage, this is used for cutting.
H3/H4 – Alfa - Carriage addresses 3/4 – these are used for cutting.
This scenario requires a special configuration step. The nesting can then be performed as you
would for 3 torches.
Configuration:
The carriage for marking can be almost ignored during the configuration, as the GC
recognizes the code for marking (T22) and activates the correct carriage automatically. This
means, you configure 3 carriages. The only thing you then need to do is to simply add the

“plasma marking” process to the driven carriage in the Multitorch configuration dialog, and
to map the carriage addresses correctly:
3.5.7 The Multitorch Dialog – Setting the Carriages

The Multitorch dialog consists of a toolbar, a section for carriage adjustment, and it shows
the individual torches with their statuses and the distances between them.
Toolbar
The Toolbar contains icons which correspond to the functions in the Multitorch menu:
: Read Multitorch
: Write Multitorch
: Options
: Multitorch docked view
Carriage settings
In the “Carriages Adjusting” section you can set the number of torches with which you
wish to cut simultaneously and the distance between these torches. The number of torches
configured here for this nesting plan must not exceed the number of torches in the nesting
plan options, which reflect the number of carriages installed on the machine.
The torch with the driven carriage is shown here in red/yellow.
If the “Set” button is clicked, the distance which was entered in the input field “Distance
between torches” will be set for the number of torches entered in “Number of torches”.

These torches will be displayed as “Active”, as in the following example for 4 torches with a
spacing of 300 mm between the torches.
If, for example, the number of torches is set to 2 and the “Set Max” button is clicked the
two torches will be parked automatically and the maximum distance of half the plate width
will be set as the distance between the active torches (1000 mm in the following example).
Each torch with the exception of the torch on the driven carriage can be parked or activated
with the left mouse button.
If there are more parked torches between the one you wish to activate and the torch on the
driven carriage, then these will automatically be activated as well. If there are further
activated torches besides the active torch which you wish to park with an even greater
distance to torch on the driven carriage, then these will also be parked automatically.

Any active torch can be deactivated with the right mouse button, and any deactivated torch
reactivated.
3.5.8 Standard scenario example – Multitorch machine

with 3 carriages
This describes how to configure a machine with 3 carriages and perform the nesting.
Carriage H1 is driven, the Global Control is left and the park position is right (standard
situation).
3.5.8.1 Step 1 - Creating a nesting plan
Create a new nesting plan for straight cutting (see New Nesting Plan on page 85).
3.5.8.2 Step 2 - Setting the Multitorch Options
> Open the Multitorch Options dialog (e.g. by clicking the Options icon in the Multitorch
dialog).

> In the Multitorch Options dialog, set automatic carriage positioning (default) and select
the driven carriage (No. 1). This setting will automatically define a left hand Global
Control position and a right hand park position.
> Enter the minimum distances between the torches and confirm the options by clicking
OK.
3.5.8.3 Step 3 - Selecting the postprocessor
> Open the nesting plan options.

> Select the appropriate postprocessor. All postprocessors with multitorch support have
MTORCH as part of their name. (Customers in the USA should use the GC_US_MTORCH
postprocessor.)

It is recommended to store the multitorch options and the postprocessor selection in a
specific machine profile.
Please refer to the Technical Appendix under Postprocessor for Multitorch operation on
page 560 for further information on the post processors for multitorch usage.
3.5.8.4 Step 4 - Preparing the nesting (setting the distances –

manually/automatically)
Set the torch spacing before nesting in the Multitorch dialog. This will define the torch
distance that is actually used for the current nesting plan, whereas the setting in the nesting
plan options defines the minimum distance that is supported by the machine. If the torch
distance set here must not fall below the minimum torch space defined in the nesting plan
options.
The distance can be set individually for each space between torches, or OmniWin sets the
distances automatically depending on the plate width and the number of torches.
Manually:
> Enter the number of torches to activate. (In this example, the value doesn’t need to be
edited, as all torches configured for this machine will be used.)
> Click the “Set” button. All torches will be activated and the minimum distance set in the
“Multitorch Options” dialog will be applied for all spaces between torches.
> Modify the distances below each torch as required. Here in the example, the default
distance is used between torches 1 and 2, whereas a manually set distance is used
between torches 2 and 3.

Automatically:
> Enter the number of torches to activate. (In this example, the value doesn’t need to be
edited, as all torches configured for this machine will be used.)
> Click “Set maximum distance”. This function divides the plate into equally sized stripes
according to the amount of torches activated.
Setting a minimum distance is not possible before nesting, as the minimum distance is
calculated based on the nested parts (see “Step 6 - Changing the torch spacing of nested
parts” on page 397).

3.5.8.5 Step 5 - Nesting
> Now drag the parts from the workspace onto the nesting plan. OmniWin will nest one
part for each activated torch, i.e. if you have 3 torches, 3 parts will be added
simultaneously to the nesting plan at the defined torch distances.

3.5.8.6 Step 6 - Changing the torch spacing of nested parts
You can modify the torch spacing after nesting. This may be necessary in case of colliding
parts, or if the automatic positioning before nesting consumes too much plate space, as in
this example.
The distances can be set manually for each space between torches, or OmniWin can
calculate the minimum distance automatically depending on the area required for the nested
parts.
Automatically:
> Select the nested parts.
> In the Multitorch dialog, click “Set minimum distance”. The distances in the Multitorch
dialog are recalculated. This function will consider the dimensions of the parts and the
settings for collision control in the nesting plan options (see Collision control on page
308).
> Click the “Write multitorch” icon from the toolbar of the Multitorch dialog.
The nested parts will be repositioned accordingly.

3.5.9 Multiple torch operation with automatic nesting
In the “Auto nest option” dialog for automatic nesting it is possible with the function “Start
auto nest” in the “Nest” menu to configure automatic nesting with multiple torches under
various conditions in the “Multitorch” dialog:
The number of torches and the distances set between the individual torches are the defaults
from the Multitorch options dialog. Depending on the mode option you’ve chosen, these
values can be changed manually, or the fields are locked, if the values are determined
automatically:
The mode “Full Auto” can be used for machines with automatic carriage positioning. An
attempt will be made to nest with the maximum number of torches in use at once and the
number of troches used simultaneously will be successively reduced depending upon the
quantities of the parts available. The distance between the carriages will be automatically
optimized.
In the “Fixed Numbers” mode it is possible, in contrast to the “Full Auto” mode, to set how
many torches may be used as maximum and with which number of torches the remaining
parts, which could not be nested with the set maximum number of torches, should be
successively cut.
In the following example cutting will initially be made with three torches simultaneously and
then the remaining quantities will be cut with one torch:

In the “Fixed Numbers and Distances” mode in contrast to the “Fixed Numbers” mode, the
preset distances between the torches will be used and not automatically optimized.
The “Manually Set Positions” mode applies the carriage settings and positioning as defined
in the Multitorch dialog.
3.6 Bevel Functions

OmniWin offers extensice support for bevel cutting:
> Create parts with bevels/Add bevels to parts
> Create nesting plans for bevel support (advanced nesting plans)
> Import/Export parts and nesting plans with bevel support (drawings in DXF or DWG
format, or DIN or ESSI code for nesting plans) (see “Importing/Exporting of parts and
nesting plans with bevel support” on page 449)
You need an additional OmniBevel license for nesting parts with bevel
information.
3.6.1 Bevel types, cuts and parameters

OmniWin supports all standard bevel types.
The following two sections give an overview of the bevel types, their parameters and the
individual cuts that are required for producing them.

3.6.1.1 Bevel types and parameters
The following table shows the bevel types and their parameters:
Bevel Graphics Description and parameters
I Vertical cut (1 cut)
VDS V cut “This Side” (1 cut)

DS = Flank angle in degrees to the vertical
VAS V cut “Other Side” (1 cut)

AS = Flank angle in degrees to the vertical
YDS Y cut “This Side” (2 cuts)

DS = Flank angle in degrees to the vertical
S = Land height
YAS Y cut “Other Side” (2 cuts)

AS = Flank angle in degrees to the vertical
S = Land height
X X cut (2 cuts)
DS = Flank angle in degrees to the vertical on the top side
AS = Flank angle to the vertical on the bottom side
D = Distance to top surface of plate
K K cut (3 cuts)
DS = Flank angle in degrees to the vertical on the top side
AS = Flank angle to the vertical on the bottom side
S = Land height
D = Distance of land to top surface of plate
Nomenclature
AS: Other side (German: Andere Seite)
DS: This side (German: Diese Seite)
VAS: V cut, “Andere Seite”
VDS: V cut, “Diese Seite”

3.6.1.2 Bevel cuts
The following table shows which cuts are necessary for each bevel type:
I bevel: I cut
K bevel: A cut
K bevel: D cut
K bevel: I cut
VAS bevel: A cut
VDS bevel: D cut
X bevel: A cut

X bevel: D cut
YAS bevel: A cut
YAS bevel: I cut
YDS bevel: D cut
YDS bevel: I cut
3.6.2 Constructing parts with bevels

This chapter describes in general the procedure for placing bevels on contour elements and
all bevel functions relevant for the construction of parts.
For further information on how to nest bevel parts, please refer to „Advanced (bevel) nesting
plans“ on page 416.
3.6.2.1 How to place bevels - overview
> If necessary, define the display settings for the different types of bevels first, this includes
the colors and line types to be used for each bevel types (see “Setting the display options
for each bevel type” on page 404).
> Create a new part drawing, or open an existing one.

> Open the Technology Dialog (option “View Technology Dialog” in the “Technology”
menu). This contains the functions for creating and modifying bevels.
> In the Technology Dialog, enter the part thickness in the “Thickness” field.
> Then, define points in the drawing, between that a certain bevel can be placed (break
points).

- It is recommended to enable the display of start and end markers of the contour
elements (with the icon in the Technology Dialog or function “Show Start-End
Marker” in the “Modify” menu).
- Explode or break the contour as required or set additional break points or join existing
contour elements that will be assigned the same bevel properties (see “Defining
sections of contour” on page 405).
> Set the bevels for the contour elements: Select the required contour elements. Then you
define the part thickness, the bevel type and the necessary bevel parameters in the
Technology Dialog (see chapter “Main area - Bevel types, Parameters and Options” on
page 413).
> Finally, check the start point of the contour (function “View/Change Start Point”). The
start point of a bevel part should be set finally, because when setting break points or
generally when working on contours, the start point can be removed (see “View/Change
Start Point” on page 408).
> Display bevel comments (icons and in the Technology Dialog). This will insert
information about the bevel type and the parameters into the drawing. This information
will be stored with the drawing when you save (e.g. as DXF/DWG/XML) and will be
included in the bevel plan when you nest. For further details, please refer to “Bevel
comments” on page 409.
3.6.2.2 Setting the display options for each bevel type
To display different bevels in a drawing, it is possible to allocate different line types, line
colors and line thicknesses in the OmniWin Options dialog (“View” menu, “Options”) on the
“Attributes” card:

3.6.2.3 Defining sections of contour
Use the functions in the Technology Dialog toolbar to divide contours into the sections
required for placing bevels.
For example, you want to apply bevels to opposite sides of a closed rectangle. This is only
possible, if these contour elements can be separately selected. To do this, explode the
contour first.
> Show the markers (icon ). This shows the start points and break points. In the
example here, only two start points are visible, as the outer and the inner contour consist
only of one contour element each.
> Explode the contours: You can either explode all contours in a graphics or individual
contours only (“Explode all contours” on page 405 or “Explode individual contours” on
page 406).
The explode function applies always to individual contour elements (e.g. straight lines or
quarter-circles). If you want to set freely positioned bevel transitions, use the Break function
(see “Break contours” on page 406).
3.6.2.3.1 Explode all contours
> Choose the “Explode All” function to explode all contours in a graphics. The
explode function applies always to individual contour elements (e.g. straight lines or
quarter-circles).

If you have already set any break points manually (“Break” function ), these will
remain, even if the elements were joined with or into a closed contour in the
meantime.
Command input: EXPLODEALL
3.6.2.3.2 Explode individual contours

You can also split individual contours into their elements.
> Choose the “Explode” function and left-click to select the contour. If you need to
explode several contours, keep the Ctrl button pressed while clicking the respective
contours one by one.
> Confirm your selection by right-clicking on a contour and conclude the function with
another left-click on the contour.
Command input: EXPLODE
3.6.2.3.3 Break contours

Breaking a contour means you can freely define sections on a contour.
> Choose the “Break” function and click the contour consecutively at the positions
where you want to set your break points.

Command input: BREAK
3.6.2.3.4 Join contours
Use the functions “Join” or “Join All” to connect exploded or broken contours
again.
If you already have placed bevels, join only contour elements that have
identical bevels - otherwise bevel information will be lost.
Command input: JOIN or JOINALL
3.6.2.4 Technology Menu for Bevels for Part Construction
There are two variants of the Technology menu: One for part construction (when a drawing
is open) and one for nesting (when a nesting plan is opened in the current window, see
“Technology Menu when nesting” on page 430).
The following functions are available for part construction:

> View Technology Dialog: Shows the Technology Dialog for setting and displaying bevels
and bevel parameters.
> Technology Docking View: Toogles between floating and docked view (see Adjusting
Dialog Windows on page 32).
> Run PerfectCut Editor Launches PerfectCut Editor for editing bevel databases for
advanced nesting plans (see “Customize Technology Databases - the PerfectCut Editor”
on page 451).
The following functions are included in the Technology Dialog Toolbar as well:
> View/Change Start Point (see “View/Change Start Point” on page 408)
> Draw bevel comment: (see “Bevel comment” on page 409)
> Draw All bevel comments: (see “Draw all ” on page 410)
3.6.2.4.1 View/Change Start Point

Using the function “View/Change Start Point” in the Technology menu or using the symbol
in the Technology dialog toolbar, you can display and change the start point of a part
contour:

When the function is called, the current start point is marked by a large diamond. When the
message
„Specify Start point:“
Appears in the command line, you can set the required the start point on the contour with
the mouse. When doing so only the end points of contour elements can be chosen with a
snap square.
The start point of a bevel part must be set finally, because when setting
break points or generally when working on contours, the start point can be
removed.
Command input: SETSTP
3.6.2.4.2 Bevel comments

Draw Bevel Comment
The function “Draw Bevel Comment” in the Technology menu and the symbol in the
Technology dialog toolbar allow you to see the bevel parameters for a selected contour
element in the form of a comment.
After calling the function, when the message
“LDRB: Specify first point:”
appears in the command line you must set the first point near the contour element to which
the bevel comment should relate, and when the message
“{LDRB} Specify second point:”
enter as second point the point where the bevel comment should appear, as in the following
example:

The “Draw Bevel Comment” command works like the dimensioning command “Comment”
in the dimensioning menu to set a comment at any point required in the drawing window
(see Comment on page 223).
Command input: LDRB
Draw all Bevel comments

The “Draw all Bevel Comments” function in the Technology menu for the part construction,
or the symbol in the Technology dialog toolbar for the part construction allow you to
show automatically the bevel parameters for all contours which have a bevel set as
comments. The arrows of the bevel comment begin at the midpoint of the contour elements
as in the following example:
Command input: LDRBALL
Delete bevel comment

The bevel comments can be removed again with the <Delete> key or using the “delete”
function in the Modify menu.
Bevel comment settings

The length and the height of the arrowhead, the text height and the zoom behavior can be
set in the CAD Options dialog in the “Dimension Style” card (see Run before saving on page
171). Comments and bevel comments use the same settings.

3.6.2.5 Technology Dialog for Bevels for Part Construction
The Technology Dialog for part construction holds all functions for placing bevels and setting
the bevel parameters.
The Technology Dialog is made up of the following areas:
> Toolbar with functions

- to show the start-end marker,
- to connect, explode and break contours, and set break points,
- to view/change start point of a contour
- to display bevel comments on the contour elements (see chapter “Bevel comment” on
page 409 and “Draw all ” on page 410).
The toolbar is described in the following chapter “The Toolbar in the Technology Dialog
(Parts)” on page 412.

> Main area including a 3D bevel view of the selected object (see chapter “3D Image of
bevels” on page 413), options for setting the part thickness, the bevel type and the bevel
parameters (see chapter “Main area - Bevel ” on page 413), a quality attribute, and other
options.
> Area for viewing which process is assigned to the quality (see “Quality Mapping” on page
416).
The Technology Dialog can also be activated and deactivated in the Toolbars sub-menu of
the View menu.
3.6.2.5.1 The Toolbar in the Technology Dialog (Parts)

The toolbar in the Technology Dialog for part construction contains some functions from the
Modify menu that are required when bevels are placed, and other special technological
functions:
Function “Show Start-End Marker” to display the start and end marker for the
individual contour elements in the drawings
Function “Join” to merge individual connected objects or elements into one single
object
Function “Join All” for the automatic joining of all connected objects or elements of a
drawing
Function “Explode” to break down connected objects into their individual elements,
as the opposite of the Join command
Function “Explode All” for the automatic breaking of all connected objects
Function “Break” to break one connected object (Polyline) into several connected
objects (Polylines)
Function “Toggle Break” for setting and removing break points at the start and end
points of the individual contour elements of one connected object
Function “View/Change Start Point” to display and change the start point of a part
contour (see chapter “View/Change Start Point” on page 408)

Function “Draw Bevel Comment” to display the bevel parameters of a selected object
(see chapter “Bevel comment” on page 409),
Function “Draw all Bevel Comments” for the automatic display of the bevel
parameters of all objects to which a bevel has been allocated (see chapter “Draw all ” on
page 410)
3.6.2.5.2 3D Image of bevels

In the Technology dialog for the part construction the bevel of a selected and read object
will be displayed in a 3D view, as in the following example for a YDS bevel:
Changing the view

> Rotate: In the 3D view, keep the left mouse button pressed and move the mouse in any
direction.
> Zooming: In the 3D view, keep the right mouse button pressed and move the mouse up
or down. The view is zoomed in or out.
> Move: In the 3D view, keep the left mouse button and the <Shift> key pressed. The view
can be moved in any direction.
3.6.2.5.3 Main area - Bevel types, Parameters and Options

In the main area of the Technology Dialog, you set the bevels with the required parameters
and set additional options for each bevel.

Thickness
Enter the thickness of the part here. This is saved in the administration data for the part and
will be taken over into the OmniWin database, if available.
Bevel
Here, the type of the bevel is shown (default: I bevel). Use this option to select the bevel type
of the marked contour element.
Parameters - Start and End Parameters

By entering the parameters you set the exact bevel dimensions. To identify which dimensions
are defined by each parameter DS, AS, S or D and what parameters are required for each
bevel type, refer to the summary under “Bevel types, cuts and parameters” on page 399.
For constant bevels, the start and end parameters are identical. If you configure a variable
bevel, enter an end parameter. In this example, a YDS bevel with a land height declining
from 12 to 5 needs to be produced.

Enter the start parameter always first. On the input of the start parameter, the end
parameter will be set automatically to the same value. Change this value as required. If you
modify the start parameter subsequently, the end parameter will be reset automatically to
the value of the start parameter.
The default values for the Start parameter depend upon the thickness set.
Parameters - Quality
You can assign a quality value (from 0 to 15) to the contour elements. Simply enter the value
in the “Quality” field.
The quality value can be used for information and it will be included in the DXF when you
save the drawing
For advanced bevel nesting plans it is possible to use the quality value to assign different
processes to individual contour elements. The mapping of the quality values to the available
processes is done in the bevel profile, in the nesting plan options (see “Nesting plan options
for bevel cutting (bevel profile)” on page 434). When you assign the qualities to the bevel
contours, please make sure the related process supports bevel cutting. To see which quality
value is related to a process in a bevel profile, check the lower area in the Technology Dialog
(see “Quality Mapping” on page 416).
The quality information will be shown on importing DXF files, if it is present as a comment
(see Import of Quality Information on page 584).
Always read/Always set
Always read/Read: If the “Always read” checkbox is selected, the bevel information will be
shown directly when you click a bevel contour. The type of bevel, the parameters and the 3D
view of the current bevel are shown directly in the Technology Dialog. If the “Always read”
checkbox is not selected, you need to click the “Read” button to display the bevel
information for the selected contour in the dialog.
Always set/Set: If the Always set checkbox is selected, the bevel is set directly when you
modify the bevel type or the parameters. If the “Always set” checkbox is not selected, you
need to click the “Set” button to apply the new settings to the bevel.

3.6.2.5.4 Quality Mapping
In this area you can see which process is associated to the quality value for each bevel
profile.
> Select the bevel profile for which you would like to check the mapping of quality and
process.
The mapping for the bevel profiles is done in the nesting plan options (see “Quality-Process
Mapping” on page 444).
3.6.3 Advanced (bevel) nesting plans

In OmniWin, you can create two types of nesting plans: Simple nesting plans (straight plans)
and advanced nesting plans with bevel support.
You need an OmniBevel license in addition to your OmniWin license for

nesting parts with bevel information (advanced nesting plans). If you open an
advanced nesting plan on a system without an OmniBevel license, then the
plan will be converted into a nesting plan without bevel support. Specialized
macros will be removed from the nesting plan.
Advanced (bevel) nesting plans:
> Support of bevel cutting, the NC code for nesting plans with bevel parts will be directly
generated from OmniWin.

> Use of OmniBevel program data in OmniWin – the corresponding postprocessors and
process data (technology databases) from OmniBevel are now included in the OmniWin
installation package (see “Customize Technology Databases - the PerfectCut Editor” on
page 451).
> Combine parts for vertical and bevel cuts in one nesting plan, use of the same
postprocessors and process data for parts with and without bevels.
> Nest the bevel parts with collision control (manually or automatically); the necessary
macros for lead-in and lead-out lines (Start, End) and the bevel transitions (Join) are added
here.
> Output of ESSI-Code for OmniBevel or DIN machine code for Global Control - Select the
output format and the postprocessors in the nesting plan options (see “System” on page
434)
> Change of the process within the part contour – allocation of a process for each individual
cut is possible. This function also supports combined Plasma/Laser machines.
> Setting the cutting sequence for individual cuts in a part; with this you can define exactly
the sequence of processing, especially for bevel cuts (see “View/Change Cutting
Sequence” on page 426).
Simple nesting plans (straight cutting only):

> Nesting of parts without bevels
> Multiple torch support
> Functions for the calculation of production times
> Database: nest.mdb/nesti.mdb (seeView / Edit Process DB on page 327)
Due to the different concepts of function the nesting plan options for simple and advanced
nesting plans differ too. Certain information that can be set in the nesting plan options (and
therefore in the machine profile) for simple plans, are defined in the process databases for
the advanced bevel plans. This applies to the configuration of the angle range for Lead
ins/outs, or to the process selection for example. For simple nesting plans, all processes are
stored within one database and you can set in the machine profile, which processes should
be selectable, whereas for advanced nesting plans, only the required processes are available
in each database.
This chapter only describes advanced nesting plans with bevel support. For information
related to simple nesting plans please refer to Nest Menu on page 274 and Nesting plan
options (without bevel cutting) on page 295.
3.6.3.1 Creating an advanced (bevel) nesting plan
Before you create a nesting plan, adjust your bevel database and the nesting plan options
(for the bevel profile, where required). Use PerfectCut Editor to modify the bevel database
(“Customize Technology Databases - the PerfectCut Editor” on page 451).
> Click on the icon in the toolbar to create a nesting plan.

The dialog for creating the plan is opened.
> Enter a name for the nesting plan.
> Select the “Advanced (bevel) nesting plan” checkbox. This makes the new nesting plan an
advanced nesting plan.
> Select a bevel machine profile (“Machine” field) to load the settings for a specific
machine.
> Click the “Options” button to check and adjust directly these settings for the nesting
plan. Make sure you check the setting for the ESSI output under “System” (see “System”
on page 434).
The available settings are described under “Nesting plan options for bevel cutting (bevel
profile)” on page 434. You can also change the default settings for the bevel profile. For
information on profiles please refer to Profiles for saving configuration settings on page
375.
> Select the material, thickness and the process for the nesting plan.
> Enter the plate dimensions.
> Enter further information as necessary: The fields “Programmer”, “Job”, “Customer” and
“Comment” are for information only.
> Confirm your input with OK.
If the technology database configured in the bevel profile is not found, a

message will inform you of the fact.
3.6.3.2 Nesting of parts
If you have checked all the settings, start to nest the parts.
> Open the parts to nest in the workspace.
> Drag the parts from the workspace onto the plate, or use the auto nest functions.

The cuts with the bevels and the start, end and join macros generated will be shown in
OmniWin in the nested plan.
OmniWin automatically places the macros using the macro data which is defined in the bevel
database. If you change macro data later on in PerfectCut Editor, you can use the function
“Update Plan With Database Parameters” in the “Nest” menu to transfer the modifications
to the nested parts (see “Update Nested Parts” on page 427).
3.6.3.3 Missing configuration settings
A message will be shown if configuration settings are missing for nesting. Mostly, these
messages are related to missing compensation values or macro parameters.
In case of missing plate information, the current combination of material and thickness is not
available in the database.
> Check the nesting plan options to make sure you use the correct database and adjust the
values in PerfectCut Editor (see “Customize Technology Databases - the PerfectCut
Editor” on page 451).
If macro parameters are missing, the part can still be nested - instead of the macro a
placeholder (diamond) is used. This is an example for a placeholder and a macro that is
correctly displayed:
Wrong Process: If you select a process that does not support bevel cutting, a message will be
shown upon nesting.
> Select the correct process, remove the part, if already nested, and nest it again.

3.6.3.4 Modify parts in the nesting plan
After nesting, you can apply further modifications to the parts:

> Display, modify, add or remove macros for leadins/leadouts or joins
> Change the cutting sequence (including for the individual cuts of a bevel)
> Apply changes to nested parts:
- Transfer changes applied to the part drawing after nesting to the nested parts
- Transfer technology from a nested part to identical parts (copy technology)
- Transfer changes in the database (compensation values or macro data) to nested parts
To modify the nested parts, use the functions in the Technology dialog or menu and in the
Nest menu.
3.6.3.5 View and ChangeTechnocontours
What are Technocontours?

Technology contours (or: technocontours) are:
> Cutting contours
> Start macros for lead-ins
> Join macros for joins
> End macros for lead-outs
The functions for selecting and modifying the technocontours can be used to show and
configure in detail the parameters for leadins and leadouts, joins and cutting contours with
bevel information.

3.6.3.5.1 View Technocontours - All Technocontours
The function “View Technocontour” in the “Technology” menu (see chapter “Technology
Menu when nesting” on page 430) or the corresponding symbol in the toolbar in the
Technology dialog when nesting (see chapter “Toolbar in Technology dialog when nesting”
on page 432) allow the display of the bevel parameters and macro parameters for the start,
join and end macros in a part with bevels and placed macros.
When the function is selected you can click a technology contour with the mouse when the
message appears
“SELECTBTECH: Select Technocontour:“
The technology contour selected will be displayed in red and the corresponding parameters
will be shown in the Bevel dialog window.
In the following example the bevel parameters of the cutting contour shown in red are
displayed. They are organized into the parameters of the start bevel and the end bevel, i.e.
the bevel parameters at the start and end points of the bevel contour:
Command input: SELECTBTECH

3.6.3.5.2 View Technocontours - Leadins
The function View/Change Lead In allows the macro parameters for the start macros
of parts with bevels and positioned macros to be displayed.
message appears
“SELECTBLI: select contour:
appears, you can click anywhere you like on a techno contour with the mouse. The start
macro found for the part will be shown in red and the corresponding macro parameters will
be shown in the Technology dialog window, as in the following example:
If the “Next Bevel” section is opened the bevel information for the following contour will
be listed.
Command input: SELECTBLI

3.6.3.5.3 View Technocontours - Leadouts
The function “View Lead out” in the Technology menu (see chapter “Technology Menu
when nesting” on page 430) or the corresponding symbol in the View Techno contour
toolbar in the Technology dialog (see chapter “Toolbar in Technology dialog when nesting”
on page 432) allow the macro parameters for the end macros of parts with bevels and
positioned macros to be displayed.
message appears
“SELECTBLO: select contour:
appears, you can click anywhere you like on a techno contour with the mouse. The end
macro found for the part will be shown in red and the corresponding macro parameters will
be shown in the Technology dialog window, as in the following example:
If the “Previous Bevel” section is opened the bevel information for the previous contour will
be listed.
Command input: SELECTBLO
3.6.3.5.4 View Technocontours - Joins

The function “View Join” in the Technology menu (see chapter “Technology Menu when
nesting” on page 430) or the corresponding symbol in the toolbar for the “View
Techno Contour” function in the Technology dialog when nesting (see chapter “Toolbar in
Technology dialog when nesting” on page 432) allow the macro parameters for selected
Join macros of parts with bevels and positioned macros to be displayed.
message appears
“SELECTBJN: select join:

appears, you can click on a join macro on a part with the mouse. The join macro selected
will be shown in red and the corresponding macro parameters will be shown in the
Technology dialog window, as in the following example:
If the “Previous Bevel” section and “Next Bevel” section is opened the bevel information
for the previous and following contours will be listed.
Command input: SELECTBJN
3.6.3.5.5 View Technocontours - Cutting Contours

The function “View Cutting Contour” in the Technology menu (see chapter “Technology
Menu when nesting” on page 430) or the corresponding symbol in the toolbar for
the “View Techno Contour” function in the Technology dialog when nesting (see chapter
“Toolbar in Technology dialog when nesting” on page 432) allow the macro parameters for
selected cutting contours of parts with bevels and positioned macros to be displayed.
message appears
“SELECTCNT: select contour:
appears, you can click on the cutting contour of a part. The cutting contour selected will be
displayed in red and the corresponding bevel parameters will be shown in the Technology
dialog window in the two sections “Start bevel” and “End bevel”, as in the following
example:

Command input: SELECTCNT
3.6.3.5.6 View Technocontours - Original Contours

The function “Show Original Contours” in the Technology menu (see chapter “Technology
Menu when nesting” on page 430) or the corresponding symbol in the toolbar for the
“View Techno Contour” function in the Technology dialog when nesting (see chapter
“Toolbar in Technology dialog when nesting” on page 432) allow the original contours to be
shown in addition to the technology contours in the parts with bevels, as in the following
example:
Original contours are the contours of a part without any bevels.

The lines indicating the original contours are only visible, if the parts are displayed without
filling color. Otherwise, the original contours are marked by the boundary of the filling color.
When the function is called again the original contours are removed again.
The display can be adjusted in the OmniWin options (in the “View” Menu under “Options”):
> Filling color of parts: “Foreground”/“Parts” in the “Plan window” section
> Display of the lines: “Attributes”/process “Bevel Geometry”
3.6.3.5.7 View Help Picture of Macro

The function “View Help picture of the macro” in the Technology menu when nesting (see
chapter “Technology Menu when nesting” on page 430) or the corresponding symbol
in the toolbar for the “View Techno Contour” function in the Technology dialog when
nesting (see chapter “Toolbar in Technology dialog when nesting” on page 432) allows the
macro sketch of a Start, Join or End macro in a part with bevels to be displayed in the Bevel
dialog window, which can be selected with the functions “View Techno contour”, “View
Lead In ”,“View Lead Out” or “View Join” in the Bevel menu when nesting, as in the
following example for the Join macro at the lower left of the rectangle:
When the function is called a second time the macro help picture is removed again.
3.6.3.6 View/Change Cutting Sequence
You can display the cutting sequence and adjust it if necessary for the individual cuts on a
part in a nesting plan.
Display of the sequence
> Select the option “View/Change Toolpath Sequence” in the “Technology” menu or
dialog or enter the command SETBEVSEQ.

> Then, click the contour of a part. The sequence of cuts and the bevel type will be shown
in the graphics.
Changing the sequence

> To change the sequence click on the green labels in the desired sequence. The newly
ordered labeling will initially be given a blue background.
> Close the procedure with ESC.
3.6.3.7 Update Nested Parts
The “Nest” menu has functions for simplified updating of parts in nesting plans:
> Update plan with active parts from the workspace (see “Updating of parts after changes
in the CAD drawing” on page 428)
> Transfer technology from selected part (see “Updating of identical parts after modifying a
part in the nesting plan” on page 428)
> Update plan with database parameters (see “Updating of nested parts after changing of
compensation or macro data” on page 429)

3.6.3.7.1 Updating of parts after changes in the CAD drawing
If you make changes to the graphic file for a part which has already been nested, then you
can take these changes over into the nesting plan in a simple manner.
> Open a modified graphic file. You now have still the old version of the part in the nesting
plan, the workspace contains the changes already.
> Select the modified part in the workspace and select in the “nesting” menu the option
“Update plan with active parts from the workspace”. All parts in the plan will be updated.
3.6.3.7.2 Updating of identical parts after modifying a part in the nesting

plan
You can now simply apply changes which you make to one part in a nesting plan to all
identical parts in the plan. If, for example, you have already nested a part several times and
then add or change technology macros or alter the start point of cutting parameters then
you no longer have to make these changes individually for each part.
> Change one of the parts and select it.

> Then in the “Nest” menu select the option “Take over technology of the selected part”.
The changes will be applied to all identical parts in the plan.
3.6.3.7.3 Updating of nested parts after changing of compensation or

macro data
If you change compensation values or macro data, you can update parts in an existing
nesting plan with the new values.
> Update the compensation or macro data with the PerfectCut Editor (see “Customize
Technology Databases - the PerfectCut Editor” on page 451).
> After the update, open the nesting plan and select the option “Update plan with
database parameters” in the “Nest” menu.

3.6.3.8 Menus and Dialogs for Bevels when nesting - Overview
3.6.3.8.1 Technology Menu when nesting

In the Technology menu when nesting
You can find functions to

> Call the Technology dialog which as standard forms one group with the Object Info dialog
and the Nest dialog. The Technology Dialog can also be activated and deactivated in the
Toolbars sub-menu of the View menu. The Technology dialog for nesting is described in
the Chapter “Technology dialog when nesting in summary” on page 431.
> Technology Docking View function to toggle the view of the Macro dialog (docked /
free window).
> Display
- Techno contours (see chapter “View and Change” on page 420).
- Lead-ins (see chapter “View Technocontours - Leadin” on page 422),
- Lead-outs (see chapter “View Technocontours - Leadout” on page 423),
- Joins (see chapter “View Technocontours - Join” on page 423),
- Cutting contours (see chapter “View Technocontours - Cutting Contour” on page 424)
> Change the toolpath sequence, i.e. the sequence of subcontours and cuts (see chapter
“View/Change Cutting Sequence” on page 426)
> Display sketches of selected macros (see chapter “View Help Picture of Macro” on page
426)

> Show and modify the bevel macros and compensation data in the database (see
„Customize Technology Databases - the PerfectCut Editor“ on page 451)
Most of these functions can also be found in the Technology dialog (see chapter “Toolbar in
Technology dialog when nesting” on page 432):
3.6.3.8.2 Technology dialog when nesting in summary

The Technology dialog when nesting contains
> A toolbar with functions for the display of techno contours, original contours and
sketches of macros (see chapter “Toolbar in Technology dialog when nesting” on page
432)
> a “General” section with various entries for a plan with support of bevel cutting
The “General” section contains the following entries:

> the database currently used,
> the postprocessor
> The material group, to which the material selected in the “New or existing plan” dialog
belongs,

> The material group, the thickness and the thickness range of the plate in the macro
data, which belongs to material and thickness selected in “New or existing plan” dialog.
> The material group, the thickness and the thickness range of the plate in the
compensation values, which belongs to material and thickness selected in “New or
existing plan” dialog.
> Settings from the nesting plan options: the distance values for collision control, the
angle limits of the break points and options for setting break points. Some of these
values are loaded from the database first and can then be changed here or in the nesting
plan options (see also “Nesting plan options for bevel cutting (bevel profile)” on page
434).
In addition when nesting bevel parameters and macro parameters are listed in the
Technology dialog which can be displayed by calling the functions “View techno contour”
(see chapter “View and ChangeTechnocontours” on page 420),- “View Lead ins” (see
chapter “View Technocontours - Leadin” on page 422), “View lead outs” (see chapter
“View Technocontours - Leadout” on page 423), “View joins” (see chapter “View
Technocontours - Join” on page 423) and “View cutting contours” (see chapter “View
Technocontours - Cutting Contour” on page 424).
3.6.3.8.3 Toolbar in Technology dialog when nesting

The toolbar in the Technology dialog when nesting contains the following functions:
Function “View/Change Technocontour” to display the bevel information for a cutting

contour with bevels as well as the macro parameter for Lead-in, Join and End macros (see
also Chapter “View and Change” on page 420)
Function “Add macro” for adding macros
Function “Delete macro” for deleting macros
Function “Toolpath sequence” to view and change the cutting order of the individual
contours or cuts (cuts only with advanced nesting plans).
Function “View Original contours” to display the original contours (see chapter “View
Technocontours - Original Contours” on page 425),
Function “View Help picture of macro” to display the macro sketch of a selected Start,
Join or End macro in the Technology dialog window (see chapter “View Help Picture of
Macro” on page 426)
Function “Run PerfectCut Editor” to launch PerfectCut Editor to edit technology

databases for bevel plans (see “Customize Technology Databases - the PerfectCut Editor” on
page 451).

View specific technocontours
The sub-menu of the “View Technoncontour” function contains more icons for displaying
the different types of technocontours:
again the function “View Techno contour” as above,
Function “View Lead in” to display the macro parameters of the lead in macro (see
also chapter “View Technocontours - Leadin” on page 422),
Function “View Lead out” to display the macro parameters of the lead out macro (see
also chapter “View Technocontours - Leadout” on page 423),
Function “View Join” to display the macro parameters of a selected join macro (see
also chapter “View Technocontours - Join” on page 423),
Function “View cutting contour” to display the bevel parameters of a selected cutting
contour (see also chapter “View Technocontours - Cutting Contour” on page 424).
All functions can also be found in the Technology menu when nesting (see chapter
“Technology Menu when nesting” on page 430).
Adding macros
The sub-menu of the “Add macro” function contains more icons for adding different types
of macros:
again the function “Add macro” as above
function “Add leadin macro” - here only the leadin macros (Start) are available for
selection
function “Add leadout macro” - here only the leadout macros (End) are available for
selection
function “Add join macro” - here only the join macros (Join) are available for selection
You'll find a detailed description of the available macros and the respective macro
parameters in the OmniBevel Manual.

3.6.3.8.4 Menus “Modify” and “Nest” when nesting with support for
bevel cutting
If a nesting plan has been created with support for bevel cutting active, then because of the
bevels on the contours and the start, join and end macros placed on them, the technology
functions Mirror, Bridge, Link, Common cut and Stitch cannot be used and are
correspondingly grayed out in the “Modify” menu when nesting and in the related toolbar.
The same applies to the function „Cut remnant plate“ in the Draw menu when nesting and
in the related toolbar.
3.6.3.9 Nesting plan options for bevel cutting (bevel profile)
The nesting plan options keep all important settings for your nesting plan with bevel
support. Changes can be applied to the current nesting plan (Save) or to the profile (Save
Bevel profile).
For information on how to work with profiles please refer to Profiles for saving configuration
settings on page 375.
3.6.3.9.1 System
Here, you define all basic settings for the nesting plan.
> Database
- Select the bevel database you would like to use. The “Run PerfectCut Editor” button
allows you to modify the selected database, see “Customize Technology Databases -
the PerfectCut Editor” on page 451)
> Postprocessor
- Select the postprocessor. Depending on whether you create a plan with ESSI or DIN
output the appropriate postprocessors are available for selection. The postprocessors
must be stored in the program data directory under PP/Bevel. For further information

on the available postprocessors and the correct settings to be chosen for individual
scenarios, please refer to the Technical Appendix.
- The universal postprocessor is only for use in special scenarios after consultation with
MesserSoft.
> Run before saving
- Plan check: The verifications defined on the “Plan check” card are performed when
the plan is saved. This option is always selected.
- Automatic Sequence: Define here, whether the cutting sequence should be set
automatically when the plan is saved. The sequence will be set based on the criteria
defined on the cards “Sequence” and “Mark and Drill Sequence”. If you do not use
automatic sequencing, the parts are cut in a sequence that is manually set or the order,
in which they were placed in the plate.
> Machine Code
- ESSI-Code for OmniBevel: Here you can set whether you generate DIN or ESSI code.
This defines, if you generate a nesting plan for export to OmniBevel or directly for the
Global Control.
DIN code is required e.g. for a cutting machine with Global Control system and a DAFL
unit for oxyfuel bevel cutting or a Skew Rotator for plasma bevel cutting, or for a Laser
cutting machine LaserMat with bevel head.
If you generate ESSI code for further editing in OmniBevel, special postprocessors are
used. To generate the NC code in DIN format with bevel information, the plan needs to
be imported into OmniBevel. Once all necessary Start, End and Join macros have been
placed onto the contour, then the NC code for the bevel cutting machine can be
generated from OmniBevel. Please refer to the OmniBevel user manual for information
on how to process the plans in OmniBevel.
- Show Result in Notepad: When the plan is saved, the generated NC code will be
displayed automatically in Notepad.
- Machine Code Options: Use this button to change the settings of the postprocessor.
For ESSI postprocessors, the related INI file is opened in Notepad and can be adapted.
For the postprocessors for DIN code, an edit window opens, the settings are stored in
the related XML file. For further details please refer to the Technical Appendix.
> Part side: Choose one of the options “Right” or “Left” to set the cutting sense for outer
and inner contours:
- If the part side is right, the outer contour will be cut in clockwise sense and the inner
contour counter-clockwise.
- If the part side is left, the outer contour will be cut in counter-clockwise sense and the
inner contour clockwise.
> OmniScript layer interpretation: Here, you define which tool is associated with the
OmniScript layer (Technifor or Telesis).

3.6.3.9.2 Technology
Here, you define the options for corner rounding and for inner subcontours.
Rounding corners
For the Skew process, bevel corners need to be rounded, if the tool has a rotating C-axis,
and no Join macros are used.
> Enable the rounding for an inner and/or outer edge and set the minimum angle (A). This
can be in the range of 0˚ to 180˚.
The settings can be stored in a bevel machine profile. By default, corner rounding is turned
off.
To be rounded, the contours need to fulfill the following criteria:
> Outer contours
The derived cutting contour is outside the part. This applies to bevel types where the
calculated cutting contour is outside the part, or to straight cuts with positive lateral
compensation (i.e. > 0).

(1) Bevel I-cut - positive lateral compensation in database
(2) Bevel AS-cut as part of a YAS-cut - calculated lateral offset is outside the part
(3) Bevel I-cut as part of a YAS-cut - positive lateral compensation in database
> Inner contours
The derived cutting contour is inside the part. This applies to bevel types where the
calculated cutting contour is inside the part, or to straight cuts with negative lateral
compensation where the cutting contour is therefore inside the part.
(4) VAS-Cut - calculated lateral offset is inside the part
Join inner sub-contours

The function under “Expanded possibility to join contours” allows you to join the cuts of
inner sub-contours (for YDS, YAS, X and K cuts).
If this option is enabled for a nesting plan, Join macros will be applied in a closed inner
contour with several sub-contours. This means that instead of placing lead-ins and lead-outs
for each cut, the individual bevel cuts can be produced in one step.

Without this option enabled, an End macro is placed at the start point of the first sub-
contour and then another Start macro is placed for the second sub-contour to produce the
transition between the cuts.
Expanded possibility to join contours: Expanded possibility to join contours:
Disabled Enabled
Limitations:
> only applied to interior profiles
> only applied to the process GC-Skew and Laser (Fanuc and GC Laser)
> the contour has no additional break points (only a start point)

3.6.3.9.3 Break points
You can now set whether breakpoints in a nesting plan with bevel support should be taken
over from the part drawing or set automatically.
> Take break points from CAD: The break points are taken over from the part drawing.
> Set break points automatically: The break points will be set automatically according to
the angle limit given under Parameters of autosetting break points.
If both options are selected, then the breakpoints from the drawing will be taken over and
possibly additional ones will be added.
The settings generally apply for the entire plan from the moment that the part is inserted,
and are stored in the bevel profile as well. They can also be displayed, and adjusted if
necessary, in the Technology dialog.

3.6.3.9.4 Cut Order
In the “Cut order” card with support for bevel cutting activated the sequence of cuts for the
bevel cuts with multiple cut paths can be set.
The Set Default button restores the original default values for the cutting sequence. Any
changes applied here can be stored in the bevel profile and thus become available for all
nesting plans created with this bevel profile.
For advanced cutting plans, the order of the individual cuts can be manually changed for
each part in the nesting plan (see “View/Change Cutting Sequence” on page 426).
3.6.3.9.5 Sequence – Strategy

Here you can define the rules for automatically defining the sequence of the parts. These
settings are applicable for the function “Automatic Sequence” (see Automatic
Sequence on page 282).

In addtion to the sequnece of parts, you can also define the sequence of cuts (Cut order)
(see “Cut Order” on page 440).
If “Automatic Sequence” is checked in the nesting plan options on the “System” page, the
settings are applied as well if you start a simulation or save the nesting plan.
Automatic part sequence start corner

Here, you can define the start corner on the plate for the automatic determination of the
cutting sequence for the nested parts:
Automatic part sequence Strategy

Meander/One Direction: The definition of the automatic cutting sequence of the parts can
be either Meander or always in One Direction over the plate, with a preset Strip Width.
Messer Process Optimization: If this strategy is selected, the sequence is optimized to
reduce the rapid traverse distances. In addition, the checkboxes for “Collision avoidance”
and “Start point repositioning” become visible to set further optimization options:
Collision avoidance: The torch avoids crossing already cut parts to prevent crashes. This
option becomes necessary as “Messer Process Optimization” strategy allows the cutting
head to stay down where possible to reduce lifter time. Please note that you need a
current postprocessor with support for Messer Process Optimization (see also Collision
avoidance on page 301 and PP Settings for Collision avoidance and Messer Process
Start point repositioning: Allows automatic repositioning of the start point. This is
useful for minimizing the rapid traverse distances.
None: No automatic sequencing of parts, but sequencing of inner contours is possible.

Automatic inner contour sequence strategy
The options described above apply for inner contours for non-cut processes as well.
Collision avoidance checks inner contours instead of parts (see also Collision avoidance
on page 301 and PP Settings for Collision avoidance and Messer Process Optimization on
page 569). For further information please refer to Examples for inner contour optimization
on page 300.
Another option for optimization is the Rapid traverse distance minimization: The order
of the inner contours is changed to minimize rapid rates for non-cut processes.
Rapid traverse lines

The rapid traverse lines section gives you the possibility to have the rapid paths between
parts displayed whenever you call the function Set Part Sequence by clicking the
checkbox ”Show for Parts”.
In the part sequence only the rapid traverse paths from the lead-out of the last cutting
contour of a part to the lead-in line of the first cutting contour of the following part will be
displayed.
If the ”Show for Contours” checkbox is activated, then the rapid traverse paths between the
contours of that one part is shown, which you select during the execution of the function
“Set Contour Sequence” .
Part Number Position

In the section “Part Number Position” you can determine the position of the sequence
numeration, which can be shown with the “Set Part Sequence” function in the Nest menu
or the corresponding icon in the Nest Toolbar. You can set the sequence number “In
the Beginning“ or “In the Center” of the parts.

3.6.3.9.6 Mark and Drill Sequence
Here, you can set the sequence of mark and drill processes.
For complex machines, it is important to consider the sequence of markings and labels. Here,
you can set the sequence and decide, whether the markings should be applied part by part,
or for the whole nesting plan. You can set this for each marking process individually.
> Use the arrow keys or Drag & Drop to move all or the selected process to the correct side:
- At first in plan: These processes are performed in the entire nesting plan in the given
sequence.
- At first in part: These processes are performed per part in the given sequence.
> Use the buttons “Move Up” and “Move Down” to set the sequence.
In the example above, all drills for the entire plan are produced first, and then the markings
are applied part by part in the given sequence.
For setting the marking sequence, all the layers activated in the CAD options can be used
(see Layer Toolbox on page 173).

3.6.3.9.7 Plan check
Here, you define which checks should be performed when a nesting plan is stored.
When the plan is saved, any error will be identified by an exclamation mark, and a message
will show.
3.6.3.9.8 Quality-Process Mapping

For advanced bevel nesting plans it is possible to use different processes for individual
contours and sub-contours. To use this function, you need to assign a quality attribute in the
part drawing to a contour or a sub-contour (see “Quality Mapping” on page 416).
The allocation of the quality attributes to the available processes is then made here in the
bevel profile (nesting plan options).

The processes used must all be stored in the same technology database. When adding a new
allocation all processes in the current database are available for selection. For Laser processes
a differentiation by contour size is also made. The selection of the contour size (Large/Small)
is also made with the quality attribute.
3.6.3.9.9 Drill Parameters

On this page, you define the settings for drills in the nesting plan. If you want to nest parts
with drill holes, adjust the drill database first. The drills for the material to be used must be
configured in the drill database (see “Adjusting the Drill Database MGDrillDB.mdb” on page
470 or Material mapping for advanced bevel nesting plans with drill holes on page 473).
> Select the “Enable drill” checkbox for the nesting plan to support drills. In general,
through, blind and sink holes are supported. Threads are supported for some regions or
special configurations (see “Adjustments for drilling tapped holes” on page 474).
> Select the “Drill unit type”. The list contains all drill unit types configured in the drill
database (MGDrillDB.mdb). The drill unit type is needed to differentiate between the drill
units on individual machines. The drill data are configured in the database always for a
defined drill unit type .
> Enter additional data, such as the number of slots on the unit or if you want to use
threads (if supported).
Parameters:
> Marking depth: Enter the depth for all markings in the nesting plan.
> Maximum drill depth: Enter the maximum depth the drill unit can produce. This value is
especially relevant for very thick plates.
> Min. and max. drill diameter: Enter the range of diameters that can be produced with this
nesting plan.

> Max. relation length to diameter: The relation of legth to diamteter for each drill tool is
set in the database (RatioLengthToDiameter). Enter a maximum value for the nesting plan.
3.6.3.9.10 Remnant Plate Cutting

Here, you define the settings for the lead-ins/lead-outs for the remnant cut.
Process
From the “Process” list, select the tool you want to use for the remnant cut. The available
processes are defined in the postprocessor configuration (xsl file). The tools are defined by
the xsl file of the postprocessor and the technology database. Only processes with lead-
ins/outs defined in the technology database can be selected here.
Lead-in parameters
L1 - Length P0-P1,
L2 - Length P1-P2,
d - Distance from point P1 to the plate edge,
A - Angle between L1 and L2 lines. For laser and oxyfuel, the angle can be any value from 0
(default value) to 90 degrees. For plasma, P0 cannot be placed on the line P1-P2 and
therefore the angle can be any value from 10 to 90 degrees.
Lead-out parameters
The lead-out has 3 points placed on a straight line perpendicular to the edge border.

Collision control/plan check

To make sure the parameters are properly set, collision control and plan check options are
applied for the lead-ins/lead-outs for remnant cuts as well.
3.6.3.9.11 Messer Hole

Messer Hole Technology can be applied automatically. You can configure this in the Nesting
plan options for advanced plans. Enable “Use Messer Hole Technology” on the page
“Messer Hole”.
If this box is selected, Messer Hole Technology will be applied automatically if plate thickness
and hole diameter correspond to the “Range” parameters.
When a part is nested, the process “Messer Hole” is assigned to the hole contour and the
appropriate macros are applied.

Quality-Process mapping and Messer Hole Technology
If Quality-Process mapping is configured for the plan, the process selection may conflict with
the process for Messer Hole Technology. In this case, the Quality-Process mapping as defined
in the Nesting plan options will be applied and automatic Messer Hole detection will be
ignored.
3.6.3.9.12 Collision control

The values for the collision control will be initially read from the database, when a new
nesting plan with bevel support is created. A value defined in the database will be applied
depending on material and thickness.
The value can be changed here in the nesting plan options for individual nesting plans with
bevel support. If you want to change the value in general, use PerfectCut Editor (menu
“Technology/Run PerfectCut Editor”) to adjust the defaults in the compensation values in
the database (see “Compensation values” on page 461).
The original values stored in the database are visible here as well and can be reapplied if
necessary (see below).

If you change the bevel profile or the thickness or material for a nesting plan
(also for package nesting), then the corresponding default values will be read
in new from the database. This will overwrite adjusted values.
You may also change the values directly in the Technology Dialog, the values are always the
same as in the nesting plan options and are valid for the currently opened nesting plan.
Re-apply values from the database

The values stored in the database are shown here next to the values currently applied to the
nesting plan. If you have manually changed the values for the nesting plan you can compare
your values with the original values and re-apply the database values if necessary. Or, you
may have changed the defaults in the Technology database and want to apply the new
default values to a nesting plan.
> Click the “Use” button, to reapply the database values
3.6.4 Importing/Exporting of parts and nesting plans

with bevel support
3.6.4.1 Importing/Exporting of parts with bevels
The parameters of the bevels placed in OmniWin are saved in the DXF or the DWG part file
and can also be read in from the DXF or DWG files. The bevel parameters can be imported
based on the layer name, if the syntax is correct, and then be mapped to a layer for the
cutting process with the layer translation function.

3.6.4.1.1 Bevel parameters in layer names
The bevel parameters are stored in Layer names. The format of the Layer names might, for
example, look like this:
> VDS D30 or VDS D30.55 or VDS D30D20 or VDS30 or VDS30D20
> VAS A30 or VAS A30.55 or VAS A30A20 or VAS30 or VAS30A20
> YDS D30S5 or YDS D30.55 S5.5 or YDSD30D20S5S4
> YAS A30S5 or YAS A30.55 S5.5 or YASA30A20S5S4
> X D30A20L5 or X D30.55 A20.33 L5.5 or XD30D20A20A10L5L4
> K D30A20S3L5 or K D30.55 A20.33 S3.3 L5.5 or K D30D20A20A10S3S2L5L4
The sequence of the parameters D (for DS), A (for AS), S (for S) und L (for D) has no effect.
For further information on the parameters please refer to „Bevel types and parameters“ on
page 400.
3.6.4.1.2 Automatic allocation of the cutting process to a bevel layer

When you import DXF/DWG files from third-party systems, you can assign automatically the
layer holding the bevel information to the cutting process.
> In the “View” menu, select “Layer Management” or click the icon in the CS Toolbar.
> The dialog for the automatic layer translation from the OmniWin options is shown.
> Select the “Set Cut Process to Bevel Layer” checkbox.
During the import, the layer will now be automatically assigned to the cutting process, if the
layer name uses the syntax described above (see “Bevel parameters in layer names” on page
450).
If the checkbox is deactivated you can edit the layer with the bevel information using the
“Layer Translator” function in the “View” menu (see Layer Translation on page 137).

3.6.4.2 Import of DIN and ESSI code with bevel parameters as
comments
If a DIN or ESSI code, which is being imported using the “Import DIN code as sketch” or
“Import ESSI code as sketch” functions in the File menu, contains bevel information in
defined commentary formats, then these can be interpreted in OmniWin, if the parameter
READ_BEVEL_ON=1 is set in the [BEVEL] section at the end of the file in the configuration
file DinImp.ini or EssiImp.ini (in this example for DinImp.ini):
For the ESSI code, the auxiliary function for the start and end of comments must also be set
in the configuration file EssiImp.ini. As standard, these are the auxiliary functions 3 and 4.
The configuration files DinImp.ini and EssiImp.ini can be viewed or edited in the OmniWin
Options dialog under the “NC Import” import card.
The bevel information for the different types of bevel must be there in the commentary
format given (with sample values).
3.7 Customize Technology Databases -

the PerfectCut Editor
The technolgy of the bevel cuts is stored in Access databases (*.mdb). These contain:
> the materials and plate types (material group/thickness),
> the allocations of bevel transitions to particular Start, Join and End macros. This allocation
applies each time to a particular process and with a specific material in a defined thickness
range.
> Compensation values and cutting speeds (depending on the bevel properties).

Databases with standard settings for some machines are included in the OmniWin
installation package. These are installed into the program data directory
(C:\ProgrammData\MesserSoft\ProcessData<Release>\DB\Bevel, for a standard setup). Please
verify in advance that the technology data provided in the database are applicable for your
purpose, and modify them where necessary. Use PerfectCut Editor for checking/modifying
the database.
Launch PerfectCut Editor - Select a database

The PerfectCut Editor is part of OmniBevel and OmniWin. It is called by a separate link on
the Desktop or from OmniWin using the “Run PerfectCut Editor...” option from the
“Technology” menu.
> First, select the database and the unit system (metric, inch, Gage) and enter login data, if
necessary. (The unit system can be switched later on as well.)
3.7.1 Material and Material Groups

The materials for bevel plans are created for each database in PerfectCut Editor. Each
material is assigned to a material group. The materials defined in PerfectCut Editor are
available for selection when you create a nesting plan, and in the nesting plan itself.
The macro parameters are always defined for a material group and a thickness (plate type).
A summary of the materials existing in the database can be viewed with “Material” in the
menu bar.

3.7.1.1 Add material group
Define your material groups before adding materials and plates. Most of the databases
already contain the material groups MILD STEEL and STAINLESS STEEL, but you can add
further groups if necessary.
> To create a new material group, click on the insert symbol in the “Plate” area and from
the context menu select the option “Add new material group”. Here, it doesn't matter
whether you call the function from the “Macro parameters” or the “Compensation
values” tab.
> In the following dialog, enter the name for the material group and click OK, to confirm
your input.
3.7.1.2 Add/modify material
> To create a new material click on the insert symbol and select in the context menu the
option “Add new material”. Here, it doesn't matter whether you call the function from
the “Macro parameters” or the “Compensation values” tab.

> Or click in the menu bar on “Material” and then in the insert symbol in the dialog.
In both cases the “New Material” dialog will appear.

> Select the material group and enter the reference for the material and its specific weight.
> Confirm your input with “OK”.
3.7.1.3 Add/modify a plate (material group/thickness)
A plate defines the material group, the plate thickness and a plate thickness range, for which
the same macro or the same compensation values apply. Before you add a plate, create a
material group first.
> To create a new plate click on the insert symbol and from the context menu, select the
option “Add new plate”.
> Select the material group, enter a thickness and a thickness range.

> Confirm your input with “OK”. The new plate is available for defining the macros.
To modify the thickness or thickness range of an existing plate, double-click the line or use
the “Edit selected plate” icon.
You need to create seprate plates for defining macro parameters and for compensation
values.
3.7.2 Macro parameters

The PerfectCut Editor starts with an index card “Macro parameters”. This tab offers the
following features:
> Add or modify material and material groups
> Define plates (material group/thickness) for macro selection
> Define selection criteria for the macros (e.g. the plate thickness or a thickness range, for
which the same macro should be used for a particular linking cut between two bevels).
> Define the macro properties (geometry parameters and offset values for height sensing)

3.7.2.1 Applying macros
The configured macros are applied automatically during the nesting. Which macro is applied
depends on the bevel (or the cut type) and the plate type (material group and thickness). To
define which macros are to be applied for a certain plate type and bevel cut type, proceed as
follows:
> First, check the settings for the unit system in the top of the dialog and select the process
for which you want to change the settings.
> Under “Plate” you define the material group, the plate thickness and a plate thickness
range, for which the same macro applies.

> In the lower section, select the macro type.
> Select the macro type (Start/End/Join) and then the type of cut in the “Previous bevel”
and “Next bevel” areas. These types of cut represent the criteria for selecting a defined
macro for the nesting.
For the Start macros at the start of cut point for the contour, only cut types in the “Next
bevel” area are available, as no previous contour can exist in this case. In the same way,
for End macros at the lead-out of the contour only cut types in the “Previous bevel” area
are available, as there can be no following contour cut. Only for linking macros (Join
macros) is it possible for a previous and a following cut to exist at the break point.
You can change the size of the dialog with the handle right bottom.
> When you have selected the cut type of the bevels, you can see which macro types are
available and you can select the required macro.

This example shows two macros that can be used for a join between an I bevel and the A cut
of a YAS bevel. Join001 or Join011 willl be placed, depending on the angle.
Please refer to the OmniBevel user manual for a detailed description of the macro types and
their geometry parameters (chapter “Description of the Macro types”).
When a macro is marked the current geometry parameters are displayed in the “Current
macro parameters” area, and under that the offset values for the height sensing:
The two offset parameters “Pre-point offset” and “Post-point offset” identify the distance to
the break point on the previous contour section at which the height sensing should be
switched off, and the distance to the break point on the following contour section at which
the height sensing should be switched on again.
With a Start macro only the „Post-point offset“ is available and for an End macro only the
„Pre-point offset“.

3.7.2.2 Add or edit a macro
If there is no macro configured for a special bevel or a bevel transition, you can add a macro.
This procedure applies as well when you modify a macro (e.g. macro parameters or the
angle range where this macro should be placed).
> Select the plate type (material/thickness), the macro type (Start, Join or End) and the bevel
for which this macro applies. (see above).
> Then, click the “Add new macro” button below. If you want to modify an existing
macro, use the next button “Edit selected macro” or double-click the macro name.
The dialog for entering the macro properties appears.

> Select the macro type from the list. For each macro type, there are various sorts of macros
available. Please refer to the OmniBevel user manual for a detailed description of the
macro types and their geometry parameters.
The “Element angle” is the angle between contour segments, where the angle is always
taken to be the one inside the part. With the values for the “Element angle range –
minimum” and “Element angle range – maximum” you can set the element angle range
for which the given geometry parameters (e.g. length 1 and length 2) and the offset
parameters should apply. In the example below, different macros should be placed for
different angle ranges between the contour sections.
> Confirm your input with OK. Your changes will be applied.

> You can delete the macro line selected with the button.
3.7.2.3 Add or edit a cut type
In the areas “Previous bevel” and “Next bevel”, you can adapt the types of cuts. You can
change the parameters of existing entries or add new types of cuts.
> Click the “Add new bevel” button. If you want to modify an existing entry, use the
next button “Edit selected bevel” or double-click the line.

> You must not only set the Bevel type (cut) but also the Contour type ‘Large’ or ‘Small’, the
bevel angle and a bevel angle range as well as a land height range (S height) and a land
distance range (D height), if the bevel type requires it.
The locked fields (<>) do not require any parameters for the selected cut. However,
you can lock or unlock the fields with the or buttons.
You'll find an overview of the bevel types, the cuts and their parameters under “Bevel types,
cuts and parameters” on page 399.
3.7.3 Compensation values

The “Compensation values” tab offers the following features:
> Add or modify material and material groups
> Define plates (material group/thickness) for setting the compensation values
> Define the default values for collision control for each plate type
> Define the macro properties (geometry parameters and offset values for height sensing)

3.7.3.1 Lateral and Angle Compensation for Bevel Cuts
The plasma beam normally deviates a little from the vertical. The inclination of the plasma
beam is about 1 to 3 degrees. To compensate for the deviation of the beam from the ideal
vertical plasma cut corrections are needed for the lateral and angular adjustment of the
bevel head (Plasma Skew-Rotator) when cutting bevels with Plasma machines, and possibly
also with Laser machines.
These compensation values are set for each bevel database in PerfectCut Editor on the
“Compensation values” tab.
3.7.3.2 Applying compensation values
The values for the lateral and angle compensation depends on the bevel (or the cut type)
and the plate type (material group and thickness). Normally, the compensation values are
pre-configured in the databases for each machine. To adjust these values, proceed as
follows:

> First, check the settings for the unit system in the top of the dialog and select the process
for which you want to change the settings.
> Select the “Compensation values” tab.

> Under “Plate” you define the material group, the plate thickness, a plate thickness range
and the distance between parts and plate edge for which the compensation values should
apply.
> Under “Bevel”, select the type of cut.
Add additional types of cut, or plates. This procedure is mostly the same aswhen you add
types of cut or plates on the “Macro parameters” tab (see “Add/modify a plate (material
group/thickness)” on page 454 and “Add or edit a cut type” on page 460). In addition,
the plate types for the compensation data include default values for collision control as
well.
> Select the “Activate compensation values for machine” check box. Now, you can define
the compensation values for the lateral and angle adjustment of the Plasma bevel head
for the plate and the selected type of cut in the input fields
- Compensation lateral
- Compensation angle
These compensation values are applied directly to the geometries.
> In addition, you can enter the Cutting speed.
Additional Options:
> For the Alan Bradley Control, additional fields are available for entering voltage and
current.
> If the process “Plasma: Messer Hole” is selected, you can set a maximum and a minimum
cutting speed for Messer Hole, instead of the common cutting speed (see “Additional
cutting speed for Messer Hole processes” on page 477).

3.7.3.3 Default values for the collision control
The default values for the collision control (distance between the parts and the plate edge)
are stored in the bevel database with the plate data. Depending on material and thickness
defined for the nesting plan, the configured distances are applied for the nesting.
> In PerfectCut Editor, on the “Compensation values” tab, under “Plate”, click the
button, and select “Add new plate” from the shortcut menu. If you want to modify an
existing entry, use the next button “Edit selected pate” or double-click the line.
> Select the material group and enter the value for the thickness and the range.
> Enter the minimum distances between the parts and the plate edge, or modify the
existing values.
The values for the collision control are available only on the “Compensation values” tab, not
for the plates for the macro parameters.
The defined values are used as default for new nesting plans based on this database, and
they are entered in the nesting plan options and technology data. There, they can be
adjusted for individual nesting plans.

3.7.4 Save changes in PerfectCut Editor
All changes done in PerfectCut Editor are directly applied to database and are immediately
available in OmniWin and OmniBevel. For this reason no additional confirmation is necessary
when ending PerfectCut Editor.
> Simply quit the PerfectCut Editor with the menu “Exit” or the “Close” button in the
title bar of the window.
3.8 Support of drilling heads

For drilling operations in OmniWin, you can use the function “Drill Point” in the Drawing
menu (see chapter “Function “Drill Point” in the Drawing menu” on page 466).
In the Attribute dialog the process “Drilling“ can be selected, and the characteristics for the
drilling operations for the process “Drilling” can be seen in the Object Info dialog box (see
chapter “Object Info Dialog Box for the Process “Drill”” on Page 469).
A drill database, MGDrillDB.mdb which contains the drills used on the machine and the drill
macros used must be set up for drilling in OmniWin (see chapter “Adjusting the Drill
Database MGDrillDB.mdb” on page 470).
Special postprocessors which support the drilling process exist for the Global Control (see
Postprocessors for Global Control with Drill support on page 561 and Postprocessor for the
ATC drill unit with automated tool changer on page 563).
If you import drawings from third-party systems that are available in DXF format, you can
include drill points and their parameters in the import for OmniWin (see Import of DXF
drawings with drill holes on page 584).

3.8.1 Function “Drill Point” in the Drawing menu
Drilling operations can be configured using the function “Drill Point” in the Drawing menu
of OmniWin
or with the symbol in the Drawing toolbar.

As standard on the first call after starting OmniWin the drill process “Hole” with a hole
diameter of 10 mm is set as default. The parameter “Hole attribute” is not yet implemented
in this version.

Depending upon the type of drill process, various parameters for the drill have to be set. If
you attempt to complete the drill properties dialog with <OK> without having entered all
parameter values, a corresponding error message appears.
Parameters which result from values already entered for other parameters are calculated and
entered automatically, for example the countersink depth for a hole with countersink, if the
diameter of countersink and the angle are entered, as in the following example:
Exiting the Drill properties dialog with <OK> automatically causes the process “Drill” to be
set in the attribute dialog:
The process “Drill“ is activated as standard in the Layer bar of the Layer Administration:

Setting of Drill points is done with the “Point” function in the Drawing menu, or with the
symbol in the Drawing toolbar. Points set with this function always have the
parameter values set in the drill properties dialog.
If point processing is not set to “no”, then a drill point is always set with the normal point
function.
The points are shown differently for the different drilling processes:
No (Drilling)
Marking drill
Through hole
Drilled hole with countersink
Tapped Hole
Tapped hole with countersink
Blind Hole
Blind hole with countersink

In the “Modify” menu, activate the „Show drilling hole“ function. This function displays the
drilling holes as a circle with the actual size of the drilling hole diameter. In this way it is
easier to recognize whether drilling holes might overlap.
For drilling holes with a countersink, a second circle shows the countersink diameter.

3.8.2 Object Info Dialog Box for the Process “Drill”
The process “Drill” is shown in the Object Info dialog box for a drill point and the drilling
process under the parameter “Drilling operation”, as well as the parameters associated with
the drill operation displayed and their values, as in the following example for a drilled hole
with countersink:
It is also possible to change a normal point into a drilling point afterwards, if “Drill” is
selected as process for the point.
The values for the drill parameters can also be changed here retrospectively, and by opening
the Listbox for the drill process it is also possible to select another drill process:

If a drill process for which parameters are still missing is selected, then a message will point
this out and then the drill properties dialog will open automatically, so you can complete the
missing values.
3.8.3 Adjusting the Drill Database MGDrillDB.mdb

The drill database MGDrillDB.mdb has to be set with the function “View / Edit Drill DB...”
in the Nest menu or with the program DBDrill.exe in the OmniWin directory (normally
c:\ProgramFiles\Messersoft\OmniWin ) to the drills you use and the drill macros present on
the control.
In a multi-user system always work with one common database

MGDrillDB.mdb on the server. Otherwise you will get problems when calling
old plans again.
This database should only be maintained and updated by one user!
If the database is not located in the same path as DBDrill.exe, then the first
time you call DBDrill.exe you must open it with File/Open.
When calling the function “View / Edit Drill DB...” in the Nest menu or the program
DBDrill.exe in the OmniWin directory, the window Drill Data Base opens with the drill
database:
The drill database consists of several tables. When the function “View / Edit Drill DB...” or
the program DBDrill.exe is called, the drill database appears with the Table “Drill”.
Each line in this table “Drill” contains a drill tool which is uniquely determined by an ID
number.
The drill parameter names and their values in the individual lines of the different tables are
listed below each other in the right hand area of the Drill Data Base window and can be

edited there. The parameters are either shown sorted either by category (for the Drill table
these are Size, Identification and Type) or alphabetically. When a parameter is clicked on, a
commentary to this parameter appears bottom right in the Drill Data Base window.
The tables can also be displayed sorted by a column which can be selected, and it is also
possible to change the sequence of the columns, by clicking on the head of a column with
the mouse and then moving it to a new position holding the mouse button down.
As well as the drill tables, the following tables also exist:
> Material: contains for each material the name of the material used in the CNC tables for
drilling, the user name of the material used in the CNC tables for drilling and a comment,
if required
> Drill Unit Types: contains the names and the user names of drills to differentiate
between the different types on different machines, and a comment if required
> Unit Types: contains the types of units mm (=1) and inch (=2)

> Thread Types: contains the names and user names for the types of thread (tapped hole)
> Tool Usages: contains the identifications for the tool usages (D - Drill hole, S -
Countersink and G - Thread), whereby the usage “Hole” includes both full penetration
holes and blind holes.

> TechDB Material Mapping: contains alignments of the material names from the
technology databases to the material names from the drill database. This allows you to
keep different material names and simply associate them, instead of renaming the
materials in the drill database. This table is only relevant for nesting plans with bevel
support (see also “Material mapping for advanced bevel nesting plans with drill holes” on
page 473).
The “File” menu contains the functions to open the database files for printing the individual
tables and to end the program.
You can edit the tables in the “Edit” menu, i.e. create new records or cut, copy, insert and
delete records.
The “Tables” menu lets you select the various tables. However, these can also be selected
directly in the table toolbar.
The Toolbar below the menu system contains symbols for opening and printing as well as
for adding, removing, cutting, copying and inserting records.
3.8.3.1 Material mapping for advanced bevel nesting plans with drill
holes
The materials defined in the drill database must match the material names in the technology
database. Otherwise OmniWin will not be able to identify the correct drills for creating the
NC code for advanced bevel plans with drill holes. If the material names differ, you can map
the material names from the drill database to the materials in the technology database.
Use the table “TechDB Material Mapping” for this. Simply add new entries for each material
you need to map.
OmniWin will apply the mapped material, if the material used in the nesting plan (originally
defined in the technology database) cannot be matched directly to a material in the drill
database.

3.8.4 Adjustments for drilling tapped holes
To create tapped holes, special adaptations need to be applied to the drill database
MGDrillDB.mdb, and a specific postprocessor is required. Please note the general
descriptions on how to modify the database (see “Adjusting the Drill Database
MGDrillDB.mdb” on page 470).
Tapping is implemented for the regional packages for the American and
Asian markets.
The following needs to be defined in the database, before you can start creating tapped
holes:
> Definition of drill tools:
- for drilling tapped holes and
- for predrilling.
> Correct definition of the parameter “PreDrillDiameter1”: For the tab, this parameter must
include the diameter of the drill tool for the predrilling.
If these settings are applied, a predrilling is made with the specified tool, after this, the tool
is changed and the thread is cut.
If you did not apply these settings, an error message occurs when you try to save the nesting
plan.
Postprocessor
Postprocessors for tapping must support an additional tool change (T54 for tapping). This
function is included in the following postprocessors:

> GC_CN_PLASMA_DRILL
> GC_US_PLASMA_DRILL
> GC_US_OXYFUEL_DRILL
3.9 Messer Hole Technology

The Messer Hole Technology increases the quality of small holes for plasma and laser cutting.
And it allows to support the True Hole Technology from Hypertherm (HPRXD) and Contour
Cut from Kjellberg.
The Messer Hole Technology operates with special lead-in and lead-out techniques, current
levels, cutting speeds when cutting inner contours. The cutting speed is the most important
factor for obtaining a high quality for circular inner contours. The optimum speed value
depends on the thickness/diameter relation and on the amperage (see “Additional cutting
speed for Messer Hole processes” on page 477).
For the Messer Hole Technology, the postprocessor of OmniWin generates and M06 in the
NC code for the Global Control at the end of the contour before the lead out line (see
chapter “Using the Messer Hole Technology” on page 476).
Hypertherm (HPRXD) support

The True Hole technology from Hypertherm (HPRXD) is used for the material range from 3 to
25 mm.
The main features of this technology are:
> Hole piercing in the center of the hole allowing for the kerf offset
> Lead-in line for optimum start of cut
> Selection of the optimum cutting speed for small holes
> Switching the plasma power source off at full cutting speed to cut over the nose at the
end of the contour, which is generated by the start of cut
> Additional cut continuation for the duration of the plasma power source slope-down
> Switching to an O2/O2 process for mild steel and holes whose diameter is the same as the
material thickness
Other controls
The Messer Hole technology also gives older controls and non-Hypertherm plasma the
possibility of the three “new lead-in shapes” for full circle inner contours in an extended
material thickness range.
Small holes with the following material thickness / diameter ratios can be cut with the
Messer Hole technology:

Material thickness Material Thickness / Material Thickness /
Diameter Mild Steel Diameter Aluminum/S
tainless
5 – 15 mm 1:1 1:2
15 – 35 mm 1:2 1:2
> 35 mm 1:1 1:1
3.9.1 Using the Messer Hole Technology

To use Messer Hole Technology, do the following:
> Select the “Use Messer Hole technology” checkbox in the “Messer Hole configuration”
card of the nesting plan options (straight nesting plans)
> Select lead in type with set range for material thickness and the thickness/diameter ratio
> Select process (Hypertherm or Kjellberg)
> Created a nested plan. In doing so OmniWin will place the lead in line selected by the user
on all full circle inner contours which are recognized as “Messer Hole” full circles.
> Select the correct postprocessor (with TRUEHOLE support and with adaptations for
HPRXD, see Technical Appendix on page 548).
> Save the nested plan. The postprocessor will create the NC output.
For information regarding the automatic application of the Messer Hole Technology to
advanced (bevel) nesting plans please refer to “Messer Hole” on page 447.
3.9.2 Configuration and Process database

The Messer Hole technology can be configured in the “Messer Hole” card of the cutting
plan options dialog (see Nesting Plan Options on page 323).
The options set there are retrieved from the process database, and can be edited using the
function “View / Edit process DB” in the “Nest” menu (see Process database on page 327)
These default values can be changed in the nesting plan options, if necessary, and they can
be stored to the process database in turn.
For advanced (bevel) plans, this information in stored in the technology databases
(PerfectCut Editor).
The process data must be appropriately prepared for the Messer Hole Technology.

3.9.2.1 Additional cutting speed for Messer Hole processes
The cutting speed is the most important factor for obtaining a high quality for circular inner
contours. The optimum speed value depends on the thickness/diameter relation and on the
amperage.
The databases support the use of different cutting speeds for circular inner contours for the
process Plasma:Messer Hole for Hypertherm and Kjellberg.
> For a relation greater than 1:2 the maximum cutting speed value will be used.
> For a relation of less than 1:1 the minimum cutting speed value will be used.
> For a relation between 1:1 and 1:2 the cutting speed will be calculated by linear
interpolation.
3.9.2.1.1 Configuration for advanced (bevel) nesting plans

The cutting speeds are set in PerfectCut Editor in the compensation values.
If the process “Plasma: Messer Hole” is selected, you can set a maximum and a minimum
cutting speed for Messer Hole. For other processes, only one speed value can be entered.

The use of two cutting speeds (additional database field) is enabled in the following
databases:
For Hypertherm:
> HPRXD_Perfect_Cut_MS_50-400A_20110928.mdb
> HPRXD_MS_130A_20110930.mdb
> HPRXD_MS_260A_20110930.mdb
> HPRXD_MS_400A_20110930.mdb
For Kjellberg:
> HiFocus_PC_MS_060A_20110930.mdb
> HiFocus_PC_MS_090A_20110930.mdb
> HiFocus_PC_MS_130A_*
> HiFocus_PC_MS_160_*
The following postprocessors support the functionality:
> GC_SKEW_3.01.XSL
> PerfectCut_3.01.XSL
The speed values set in the database are used as default values which can be adapted n the
nesting plan options for individual nesting plans.
Adding the additional speed value to legacy databases

To use two different cutting speeds, an additional database field is required. Most of the
existing databases contain only one speed field, these values will be used as minimum
cutting speed.
You can update your databases in PerfectCut Editor where you can generate the new field
for the maximum speed:
> Run PerfectCut Editor and select the corresponding database.
> Select the process “Plasma: Messer Hole” and select the “Compensation values” tab.
> Click the “Create Messer Hole cutting speed max” button.

The field for entering the maximum cutting speed is generated and displayed in place of the
button. If you do not enter a value here, the minimum cutting speed is always used.
3.9.2.1.2 Configuration for straight nesting plans

The second speed is available in the databases nest.mdb/mesti.mdb as an additional field.
Process Data
The speed values are stored with the process data (“Nest” menu, “View/Edit Process DB”).

If the maximum speed is not given in the database (i.e. set to 0), the minimum speed is used
in all cases.
Nesting plan options

The additional cutting speed is available in the nesting plan options too (see Messer Hole on
page 323).
3.10 Tubes and tube connections (Option

Tube)
The Option Tube is not included in the product standard and must be
enabled on your dongle as a separate option.
When cutting tubes one can differentiate between two applications:
Cuts without rotary axis:

Cuts made with a fixed tube rotation axis, i.e. the clamped tube is not rotated. The torch
moves freely in the X and Y directions:

In this manner a projection cut is made, i.e. a cut which results from the projection of a
surface onto the tube:
The cut surface on tube B will be created as a projection of the surface A onto the tube B.
All lengths will be projected.
Projection cutting is only possible for laser machines and round tubes (see
chapter “Function New” on page 485).
Cuts with rotation axis:
Cuts which are carried out with the tube axis activated, i.e. the clamped tube is rotated and
the torch moves only in the direction of the axis of rotation:
In this manner, a Surface cut, takes place, i.e. all lengths are developed onto the surface of
the tube B:

3.10.1 Functions for the cutting of tubes
The Tube dialog can be called with the “View Tube Dialog” function in the “Tube” menu
or call it with the Toolbars sub menu in the View menu:

The tube dialog window appears the first time it is called as a docked window on the right
of the main OmniWin window:

The toolbar in the Tube dialog contains the following functions:
Function “New”: to create a new tube (see chapter “Function New” on page 485)
Function “Update”: for updating the 3D picture of the current drawing (see chapter
“Update Function” on page 489)
Function “Demo”: for automatic rotation of the 3D picture of the current object (see
chapter “Demo Function” on page 490)
Function “Options”: to open the options dialog of OmniWin Tube (see

chapter“Function Options” on page 490)
Function “Machine Code Export”: to produce the machine code (DIN format) for the
active drawing (see chapter “Function Machine Code Export” on page 498)
Function “Machine Data Export”: to create the machine data (machine independent
data format) (see chapter “Function Machine Data Export” on page 498)
Function “3D Object Export”: for saving the surface of the 3D objects as DXF format
(see chapter “Function 3D Object Export” on page 499)
Function “3D Lines Export”: for saving the surface of the 3D objects as DXF format
(see chapter “Function 3D Lines Export” on page 500)
Function “Tube Docking View” : to switch the view of the Tube window (docked / free
window) (see chapter “Function OmniWin Tube docked view” on page 501)
The individual functions can also be called with the Tube menu:

The functions are described in detail in the following sub-chapters.
3.10.1.1 Function New
The function “New” is used for the creation of a new tube.

When the “New” function is called the Parameter Dialog for selection of the tube type and
its parameters appears:

In the Parameter area the parameters for the tube type selected can be defined.
The following tube types can be selected:
Circle:
Round tube with a circular cross-section.
Parameters which can be defined are the length and the radius (outer radius) of the tube.
Rounded Rectangle:
Rectangular tube with rounded corners.
Parameters which can be defined are the length, the radius (rounding radius), width and
height of the tube.
The radius of the rounding may not be less than a minimum value of 0.1 mm.
Rounded Right Poly:

Tube with a polygonal cross section and rounded corners.
Parameters which can be defined are the length, the inner radius, the number of corners or
sides , outer radius of the tube. The inner radius describes the distance of the center of one

side (outer wall) to the center of the tube. The outer radius is the rounding radius of the
corners.
n = Number of sides. A maximum of 12 sides is possible. All sides

have the same length.
r = Radius of the rounding (outer radius). This may not have a value of less than a
minimum of 0.1 mm.
R = Inner circle (inner radius)
For viewing it is also possible to enter the thickness in mm in the OmniWin Tube settings (see
chapter “Function Options” on page 490).
After selecting a tube type and its parameters, the tube will be displayed as a 3D object in
the OmniWin Tube window. The developed tube appears in the drawing window at the
same time:

With the development of a Rounded Rectangle tube the weld seam is in middle of the
width.
For the manipulation of the view of the 3D object display see chapter “Manipulation of the
view of a 3D object” on page 502.
For the representation of the auxiliary lines in the developed tube drawing see chapter
“Function Options” on page 490.
The developed tube drawing in the drawing window can now be worked on further. Using
the design commands it is possible, for example, to add further contours (closed and open)
or texts in the tube drawing, as, for example:

If the inserted contour should be executed as a Projection cut or as a
Projection marking, i.e. without axis rotation, then the layer “Cut inner
projection”, the layer “Mark inner projection” or the layer “Cut outer
projection” should be selected in the Attribute dialog box for the layer for
this contour.
Details about cutting with or without the rotary axis can be found in the chapter “Cut
selection with / without axis rotation” on page 503.
The layers “Cut outer” and “Cut outer projection” were introduced for the cutting of
letters.
After creating a text using the drawing function single line text the text must be
converted using the modify function Convert text into a cutting contour, if it is to be
cut.
If you want to see the new 3D object after changing the original tube development you
must call the Update function in the tube dialog (see chapter “Update Function” on
page 489).
For the developed tube pieces the drawing data with the development information, which
can be recognized lower left under the drawing,
> Save as a DXF file with the “Save” function,
> save in the OmniWin database with the “Save part in database” function.
To create the machine code (DIN format) of the developed tube part, use the Machine
Code Export function (see chapter “Function Machine Code Export” on page 498).
The current system parameters will be saved when a tube application is closed and are kept
even if the program is ended. The saved parameters act as defaults for a new start.
Existing tube applications will be opened with the last valid system parameters for them.
3.10.1.2 Update Function
The function “Update” is used to update the 3D picture of the active drawing.
If changes are made to the developed tube drawing in the drawing window then these
changes only become visible in the 3D picture when the “Update” function has been
executed.
If a tube development is loaded from the OmniWin database, then the “Update” function
must also be called to display the 3D picture of this development.

3.10.1.3 Demo Function
The “Demo” function is used for the automatic rotation of the 3D image of the
current object.
When this function is called, the 3D image of the current object rotates automatically,
without the rotation being able to be influenced. You can stop the rotation, by calling the
function again or clicking with the mouse in the OmniWin Tube window.
3.10.1.4 Function Options
The “Options” function is used to open the options dialog of OmniWin Tube:
You can influence in “View”:

> the Perspective: You can activate or deactivate the perspective view of the 3D picture
with the “Perspective” checkbox.
> the Thickness (mm): The thickness given in the “Thickness” field is taken into account in
the 3D view and is also taken over into the DXF format, the machine code and the
machine data for the active drawing.

> the Material: The material description can be entered in the “Material”, which is also
taken over into the DXF format, the machine code and the machine data for the active
drawing.
> the Number Help Lines for Pipe 1: Using the Listbox “Help Lines for pipe 1” you can
define the number of help lines for round tubes, which should also be displayed in the
drawing of the tube development. Other contours to be inserted can be more easily
positioned using these help lines.
> Help Lines for Pipe 2 and Help Lines for Pipe 3: Using the checkboxes “Help Lines Pipe
2” and “Help Lines Pipe 3” you can define whether help lines should be shown at the
position of the roundings in Rounded Rectangle and Rounded Right Poly tubes.
The changes to the number of help lines for Pipe 1 and the setting of the
display of help lines for Pipes 2 and 3 will not be taken over for the current
drawing when the OmniWin Tube pre-settings are closed, but only for the
next new drawing.
For the display of help lines on the screen the automatically calculated distances between
them in mm (right of the drawing) and in degrees (left of the drawing) will be output:

> Show unfold contour for projection cut: With this option you can show the
development of the projected contour for a projection cut in addition to the designed
contour in the development.
If, for example, a circle is inserted into a developed tube drawing the in the tube dialog a
tube with the cut-out is created:

The following comparison shows the circle without and with the option “Show unfold
contour for projection cut” activated:
In the “3D Image” section, you can

> set the Background Color of the 3D window using the “Change” button,
> Select the Front (outside surface) of the 3D object shown from a Listbox,
> Select the Back(inside surface) of the 3D object shown from a Listbox,
> Have the 3D object completely displayed in the tube dialog with the checkbox “Full
Render”. The 3D object may take some time to form the image with this method of
display if there are many holes in it.
> With the checkbox “Tube and Cut Contour” activated, have the 3D object displayed
simplified in the tube dialog with only the tube and cutting contour shown. This method
of display works fast, even with many holes. The tube appears transparently. The lead-in
and lead-out cuts are also visible.
The following comparison between full render and display with just tube and cutting
contour makes the difference clear:

In the “Cutting” section you can set many parameters for the tube cutting.
> In the Listbox “Side Cutting” you can select whether you wish to cut no ends, only the
start of the tube (front parting cut), only the end of the tube (back parting cut) or both
ends of the tube.
The cuts will be carried out in the sequence
1. Inner contours
2. Front parting cut
3. Rear parting cut
as a firm principle.
If there are more than one inner contours on the tube, then generally the inner contours
will be cut from the end of the tube in the direction towards the chuck. I.E. the contour at
the greatest distance from the chuck will be cut first. I.e. the contour with the largest

distance from the chuck is cut first.
> In the “Zero Position” checkbox you can set the coordinate system:
Depending upon the mechanical layout of the machine four different coordinate systems
can be used. The system can be configured for each coordinate system. The orientation of
the axes is the same in all cases. The differences come from the interaction of the rotation
axis with the X or Y axis. The NC code will be generated accordingly.
Coordinate System +X / BY:
Coordinate System -X / BY:
Coordinate System +Y / BX:

Coordinate System -Y / BX:
> In the “Max. angle projection cut” entry field you define the limiting angle, up to which
the machine should execute a cut with no rotation axis, i.e. a projection cut. The default
value for the limiting angle is 30 degrees. If a contour exceeds this limit angle the system
automatically generates a cut with axis rotation.
> In the “Small contour area limit” input field you can set the limit value for the area that
defines which contour type is used for cutting the contour on machines with Fanuc
controls. If the contour area exceeds this limit area, then type A1 will be used. Below the
limit value type A2 is used. 100 (in mm²) is offered as a default value.
> In the “Small contour length limit” input field you can set the limit value for contour
lengths of open contours that determines, which contour type is used for cutting the
open contour. If the contour length exceeds the limit value, type A1 will be used. Below
the limit value type A2 is used. 50 (in mm) is offered as a default value.
> In the “Strip Distance (mm)” input box the width of strips before and after the corners for
rectangular and polygonal tubes with rounded corners. The default is 5 mm.
You can set parameters for the lead-in lines. for the inner contours to be cut in the tube
development in the “Lead-in Line” section.
> In the “Set Lead-in Line” list box you can select from the following types of lead-in line:
– On the contour: The start of cut takes place directly on the contour.
– Perpendicular: The cut initiation takes place as a straight line perpendicular to the
contour with

an adjustable line length (see further below).
– X coord. Shift: The tube rotates and the torch remains

stationary. This means that the start of cut takes place in the direction of the rotation.
– Perpendicular rounding: the start of cut will be made

as a straight line perpendicular to the contour with an adjustable lead length (see
further below),
with the transition into the contour made as a quarter circle
with adjustable radius (see further below).
– Rounding X coord. Shift: The start of cut will be made

as for the type X coord. Shift, however the transition
into the contour will be made as a quarter circle
with adjustable radius (see further below).
The lead-in type listed here will only be set if the angle at the lead-in line corner is less
than 180 degrees. With corners over 180 degrees, the angle bisector will always be used.
For outer contours the angle bisector will, in general, always be set as the lead-in.
> You can enter the length of the lead-in line in the field “Length (mm)”.
> You can set the minimum distance between the start of cut point and all other contour
points in the “Minimum Distance” field.
The distance of the start point must be smaller than the given lead-in length as otherwise
the message “Lead-in smaller than minimum distance” and no lead-in is generated. To
get a lead-in in such cases you have to change the length of the lead-in or the minimum
distance in such a way that the lead-in line length is more than the minimum distance.
> The radius of the quarter circle for the lead-in types with roundings can be entered in the
field “Fillet Radius (mm)”.

The “OK” button in the OmniWin Tube Options dialog means that all values entered are
taken over, the “Cancel” button means that the values will not be taken over.
3.10.1.5 Function Machine Code Export
The “Machine Code Export” function is used to create the machine code (DIN format)
for the active drawing.
When the function is called you can define the directory in which the machine code file is to
be saved, the name for the Machine code file and the file type:
The Machine code file normally has the file type .txt.
Clicking on the “Save” button will store the machine code of the active drawing under the
name entered in the directory shown under “Save in:“.
3.10.1.6 Function Machine Data Export
The “Machine Data Export” function is used to generate the machine data (machine
independent data format) for the active drawing.
When the function has been called you can set the directory in which the machine data is to
be stored, the name for the machine data file and the file type:

The machine data file normally has the file type .dat.
Clicking on the “Save” button will store the machine data of the active drawing under the
name entered in the directory shown under “Save in:“.
The machine data is not currently needed. It can serve as a basis for the
output for other control types.
3.10.1.7 Function 3D Object Export
The “3D Object Export” function is used to save the surface of the 3D object as a DXF
format.
When the function has been called you can set the directory in which the DXF format of the
surface of the current 3D object is to be stored, the name for the DXF format and the file
type:

The DXF file for the surface of the 3D object usually has the file type .dxf.
Clicking on the “Save” button stores the DXF file of the surface of the current 3D object
under the name entered in the directory shown against “Save in”.
The DXF format of the surface of a 3D object is normally not needed. It can
be used for in-depth analysis.
3.10.1.8 Function 3D Lines Export
The “3D Lines Export” function is used to store the 3D cut contour as a DXF format.
When the function is called you can define the directory in which the DXF format of the cut
contour for the current 3D objects is to be stored, the name for the DXF format and the file
type:

The DXF file for the cut contour of a 3D object usually has the file type .dxf.
Clicking on the “Save” button stores the DXF file of the cut contour of the current 3D object
under the name entered in the directory shown against “Save in”.
The DXF format of the cut contour of a 3D object is normally not needed. It
can be used for in-depth analysis.
3.10.1.9 Function OmniWin Tube docked view
The function “OmniWin Tube docked view” is used to switch the view of the tube
dialog (docked/free window).
The free window can be reduced or enlarged at will and positioned freely on the screen.

If the function “OmniWin Tube docked view” is clicked again in a free window, then the
window will be returned to the previous docked position at the edge of the picture.
3.10.2 Manipulation of the view of a 3D object

The view of a 3D object in the Tube dialog can be influenced in the following ways:
> Update the 3D image of the current drawing with the function “Update” (see also
chapter “Update Function” on page 489):
If changes are made to the developed tube drawing in the drawing window then these
changes only become visible in the 3D picture when the “Update” function has been
executed.
> Automatic rotation of the 3D image of the current object with the “Demo” function
(see also chapter “Demo Function” on page 490):
When this function is called, the 3D image of the current object rotates automatically,
without the rotation being able to be influenced. You can stop the rotation, by calling the
function again or clicking with the mouse in the OmniWin Tube window.
> Manual Rotation the 3D image of the current object:
The 3D object can be turned as much as you like manually, by moving the mouse in the
OmniWin Tube window while holding down the left mouse button. The rotation always
takes place relatively to the centre point of the 3D object.
> Zooming the 3D image of the current object:
The 3D object can be magnified or reduced at will by moving the mouse in the OmniWin
Tube window while holding down the right mouse button. By moving the mouse in
opposite directions the image will be zoomed larger or smaller.
> Moving the 3D image of the current object:
The 3D object can be moved at will by moving the mouse in the OmniWin Tube window
whilst holding down the Shift Key on the keyboard and simultaneously holding down the
left mouse button.
> Perspective of the 3D image:
In the OmniWin Tube adjustments, which are called with the “Options” function
(see chapter “Function Options” on page 490) you can activate or deactivate the
perspective of a 3D image in the “View” section.
> Thickness of the tube in the 3Dimage:
In the OmniWin Tube adjustments, which are called with the “Options” function
(see chapter “Function Options” on page 490) you can enter the thickness of the tube in
the “View” section. This thickness will be taken into account in the view of the 3D image.
> Colors for the Background, the front (outside) and the back (inside) surfaces of the 3D
object:
In the OmniWin-Tube options which are called with the “Options”

function (see chapter “Function Options” on page 490) you can set in the “3D Image”
section
- The background color of the OmniWin Tube window,
- the color of the front (outside) of the 3D object, and
- the color of the back (inside) of the 3D object
- full display of the 3D object
- simplified display of the 3D object with tube and cutting contour
3.10.3 Cut selection with / without axis rotation

A cut can be carried out either as a “Cut with axis rotation (Surface cut)” or as a “Cut
without axis rotation (Projection cut)”. The user can select the type by placing the contour to
be cut on the layer “Cut Inner” or the layer “Cut Outer” for the surface cut or on the layer
“Cut Inner Projection” or the layer “Cut Outer Projection” for the projection cuts.
In the following example the left circle is to be executed as a projection cut, i.e. without axis
rotation, on the layer “Cut Inner Projection” and the right circle as a surface cut, i.e. with
axis rotation, on the layer “Cut Inner”. On the screen the projection cut is shown in violet
and the surface cut in black, or white on a black background. If the option “Show unfold
contour for projection cut” is active, then for the projection cut in addition to the designed
circle, the development of the projected circle will be shown in red.
The displays only appear after clicking the function “Update” .
A cut without axis rotation can only be carried out on the machine up to a certain limit
angle, which can be set in the OmniWin Tube options with the “Options” function
(see chapter “Function Options” on page 490).

The default value for this limit angle is 30 degrees. If a contour exceeds this limit angle the
system automatically generates a cut with axis rotation.
If the radius of an inserted circle with a projection cut (cutting without axis rotation) is larger
than the radius of the tube then – as the limit angle will be exceeded – a surface cut to the
edge of the tube will be made:
Cuts without axis rotation (projection cuts) are only possible on round tubes.
3.10.4 Functions for tube joints

The functions for tube joints are used for tube joints such as nodes, for example. Further you
can display tube joints created under Macros 3D in the OmniWin Macro program using
these.

The tube joints dialog can be called with the function “View Joint Dialog” in the “Tube
joints” menu.
or call it with the Toolbars sub menu in the View menu:
The Tube Joint dialog appears as a docked window on the right hand side of the main
window when called for the first time:

The toolbar in the tube joint dialog contains the following functions:
> Function “Show Project Editor”: to call the Tube Tree dialog window, in which
tube combinations can be created (see chapter “Function Show Project Editor” on page
507)
> Function “Perspective”: for switching the perspective view of the tube combination
displayed on and off (see chapter “Function Perspective” on page 516)
> Function “Front View”: to switch on the front view of the tube combination
displayed, i.e. the viewing point will be set to the front (see chapter “Function Front
View” on page 516)
> Function “Top View”: to switch to the top view of the tube combination displayed,
i.e. the viewing point will be set on top (see chapter “Function Top View” on page 516)
> Function “Right View”: to switch to the view from the right of the tube
combination displayed, i.e. the viewing point will be set to the right (see chapter
“Function Right View” on page 516)
> Function “Options”...: to open the Options dialog for Tube Joints (see chapter
“Function Options” on page 518)
> Function “Grid”: to switch the grid in the active view of the displayed tube
combination on and off (see chapter “Function Grid” on page 516)

> Function “Show Part”: to display a constructed part of the displayed tube
combination (see chapter “Function Show Part” on page 517)
> Function “Print Image 3D”: to print out the 3D image displayed (see chapter
“Function Print Image 3D” on page 520)
> Function Joint Docking View”: to switch the tube joint window (docked / free
window) (see chapter “Function Joint Docking View” on page 521)
The individual functions can also be called from the “Joint” toolbar:
These functions are described in detail in the following sections.
3.10.4.1 Function Show Project Editor
The “Show Project Editor” function is used to call the Tube Tree dialog window, in which
tube combinations can be created as multiple joints:

The buttons for the individual functions allocated to the Tube Tree
dialog window are explained in the following sections.
3.10.4.1.1 New
To create a new project click on the “New” button. The first time the Tube Tree dialog
window is called this is not necessary, you can start at once to construct the combination.
First define the Parameters of the Main Tube. To do this, open the main tube with a
double click on the main tube line in the parameter area or click on the + sign in front of the
main tube symbol:

The tube shape can be selected as a round tube (Round, see above), a rectangular tube
(Rectangle)
or as a Rounder Right Poly (Poly):
The meaning of the parameters is given in the Comment column, on the lower right in the
Tube Tree dialog window you will find the parameters reproduced as a schematic sketch:
To change a parameter value click on the corresponding line in the value column.

3.10.4.1.2 Add
To create a Tube Branch on the main tube click o the main tube and then on the “Add”
button. The first branch tube will be called Tube_1, all further branch tubes created will be
called Tube_2, Tube_3 etc.
To define the parameters of the branch tube you must open these again with a double click
on the Tube_1 line in the parameter column or by clicking on the tube symbol for Tube_1:
With the “Connect” parameter you can define how the intercept between a tube and the
branch tube should look.
The branches can be constructed not only on the main tube but also on tubes already set
onto the main tube, as in the following example:

If the “Add” function is executed with no tube selected, a message will appear. First select a
tube for which the branch is to be created.
3.10.4.1.3 Delete
With the “Delete” button you can delete a branch tube complete with all branches which
may be coming from it. The branch tube to be deleted must first be clicked in the parameter
column of the Tube Tree dialog.
3.10.4.1.4 Show All

Using the “Show All” button you can have the tube combination you have created displayed
as a 3D object.
Example: Tube combination with two branch tubes (Tube_1 and Tube_2) on the main tube
as well as a further branch tube, Tube_5, on Tube_1:

With the Show All display the entire tube combination is shown as a 3D object:

3.10.4.1.5 Hide
As the Tube Tree dialog window is relatively large and mostly covers the view of the window
for tube combinations, the Tube Tree dialog window can be screened out with the “Hide”
button. The current project will not be closed by this. If you click on the symbol in the
toolbar for tube connections, then the running project appears again.
3.10.4.1.6 Show Node

In contrast to the “Show All” function, which shows the entire tube combination (see
chapter “Show All” on page 511), with the “Show Node” function you can display
individual nodes in the tube combination.
Example: Tube combination with two branch tubes (Tube_1 and Tube_2) on the main tube
as well as a further branch tube, Tube_5, on Tube_1:
If one activates Tube_1, then in the Show Node display only the main tube (MainTube) and
the first branch tube (Tube_1) will be shown, the branches Tube_2 and Tube_5 will not be
displayed. In the following illustrations you can see the entire tube combination as well as
the view of the combination of MainTube and Tube_1 for comparison:

3.10.4.1.7 Unfold
With the “Unfold” button the developments of the entire tube combination will be
generated. This can take a little time with many tube branches. The last development
generated is then visible in the drawing window.
If you also call the OmniWin Tube dialog, you can use the “Show Part” function (see
chapter “Function Show Part” on page 517) individual parts of the tube combination as a
development in the drawing window and simultaneously as a 3D object in the OmniWin
Tube window, as in the following example:
3.10.4.1.8 Save As
You can use the Save As” button to save a new project under a specific name. You can
define the directory and the file name under which the project is to be saved as an XML file
in a dialog. The default directory offered will be the one set as input and output directory in
the Options (see chapter “Function Options” on page 518):

3.10.4.1.9 Save
To save an already stored project again, it is enough just to click the “Save” button. The file
will then be saved afresh under the name already allocated to it.
3.10.4.1.10 Open
The “Open” button allows you to reopen an already closed and saved project. The default
directory offered will be the one set as input and output directory in the Options (see
chapter “Function Options” on page 518):

3.10.4.2 Function Perspective
The function “Perspective” is used to switch on and off the perspective view of the
tube combination displayed.
On calling the function a perspective view of the currently displayed tube combination will
be switched on or off. The current view is retained for the following tube combinations
when they are displayed.
3.10.4.3 Function Front View
The function “Front View” is used to switch on the front view of the tube
combination on display, i.e. the viewing point will be set to the front.
When the function is called the front view of the tube combination on display will be shown.
The front view is then retained for following tube combinations.
3.10.4.4 Function Top View
The function “Top View” is used to switch on the top view (view from above) of the
tube combination on display, i.e. the viewing point will be set to be from on top.
When the function is called the top view of the tube combination on display will be shown.
The top view is then retained for following tube combinations.
3.10.4.5 Function Right View
The function “Right View” is used to switch on the right view of the tube
combination on display, i.e. the viewing point is set to the right.
When the function is called the right view of the tube combination on display will be shown.
The right view is then retained for following tube combinations.
3.10.4.6 Function Grid
The function “Grid” is used to switch the grid in the active view of the tube
combination on display on and off.
When the function is called the grid in the display of the currently shown tube combination
will be switched on if it is off, and off if it is on. The status of the grid remains valid for
following new tube combinations when they are displayed.

3.10.4.7 Function Show Part
The function “Show Part” is used to display one component of the tube combination
on display.
When a tube combination is developed, several developments are generated. To be able to
display one specific development, you call the “Show Part” function and then click in the 3D
view on the tube part whose development you wish to see.
If two tubes are linked to each other, then there will be two developments:
> One for the clamped tube with the penetration (example):
> and one for the branch, i.e. the tube mounted onto it (example):
To then see another part development you must call the “Show Part” function once again.
The part development shown in the drawing window can also be shown simultaneously in
OmniWin Tube (example):

3.10.4.8 Function Options
The function “Options” is used to open the Options dialog for tube connections:
In the “Drawing” section you can set whether the developed tube in the 2D display should
have the name of the original tube (as in the following example)

or the parameters of the original tube (as in the following example) as a comment.
The form of the dimensioning and the size of the letters can be set in the CAD Options in
the View menu in the “Dimension Style” card.
In the “3D Image” section, you can:
> set the Background Color of the 3D window using the “Change” button,
> select the color of the Front (outside surface) of the 3D tube combination on display from
a Listbox,
> select the color of the Back (inside surface) of the 3D tube combination on display from a
Listbox.
> use the “Trim connected tubes” checkbox to delete the tube sections of the branch tubes
which lie inside the main tube:

untrimmed tube trimmed tube
The parameter d (Position distance = distance from the start of the tube axis of the branch
tube to the tube axis of the main tube) determines for a branch tube how deep it
penetrates into the main tube. Normally d = 0. This gives a penetration as in the above
left picture.
After activating the trimming this will only be carried out for the newly created tube
branch.
> In the “Grid Step (mm)” field you can enter a spacing in mm for the grid lines, which can
be switched on with the “Grid” function (see chapter “Function Grid” on page
516). The default value suggested is 100 mm.
In the “Input and Output” section you can specify a directory for the projects to be opened
or saved. This directory must exist, i.e. it will not be created automatically.
If you press the “OK” button in the Joint options dialog the values entered will be taken
over, with the “Cancel” button the changes to the defaults will be discarded.
3.10.4.9 Function Print Image 3D
The function “Print Image 3D” is used to print out the display of the 3D tube
combination.
When the function is called, the usual Windows printer dialog is first shown. After
confirmation with “OK“ the 3D image of the tube combination currently displayed will be
printed on the selected printer.

3.10.4.9.1 Function Joint Docking View
The function “Joint Docking View” is used to switch the view of the tube Joint
window (docked / free window)
The free window can, as with OmniWin Tube (see chapter “Function OmniWin Tube docked
view” on page 501) – be enlarged or reduced as much as you like and positioned freely on
the screen.
If the “Joint Docking View” function is clicked again in a free window, the window will be
moved back into its previous docked position at the edge of the screen.
3.11 Boiler End for bevel cutting of formed

ends (Option)
With the Boiler End option you can calculate geometric cylindrical penetrations of formed
ends and output the NC code to cut them with the plasma Skew Rotator from Messer
Cutting Systems. The option Boiler End supports only dished ends to DIN 28011 and domed
ends to DIN 28013.
Boiler End is an option that is not included in the OmniWin standard product
scope.
3.11.1 Technical Requirements
3.11.1.1 What is a formed end?
“Formed ends” are usually defined as connection elements of mainly cylindrical pressure
vessels or similar containers. OmniWin supports dished ends formed to DIN standard
(DIN 28011) and domed ends to (DIN 28013).
Through their flattened semi-spherical shape they occupy less space than the hemispherical
form which is ideal for pressure vessels – with only a slightly greater wall thickness. A dished
end is made up of a central spherical cap (r1), the outer bend (r2) as well as the short
cylindrical part extending from it, which is know as the “Board” (h).

The greatest loads arising from the inner pressure are in the area of the outer bend. So
notches and other deformations are to be avoided there. Pipe penetrations are also not
permitted in this area – this will be checked by OmniWin during the design.
The following values apply for formed ends:
- D = Da and r1
- R2 = D x 0,1 (Dished ends to DIN 28011)
- R2 = D x 0,154 (domed ends to DIN 28013)
The domed end to DIN 28013 is somewhat more formed than the dished end.
Other standards apply, especially for the non-European regions. These are, for example in
America the elliptical end 2:1 according to ASME VIII Div. 1, which is closest to the domed
end.
3.11.1.2 Technical restrictions
The option Boiler End is only authorized for dished ends to DIN 28011 and domed ends to
DIN 28013.
Only pipe penetrations for pipes with a round section are supported, no rectangular pipes.
3.11.1.3 Machine processes supported
Plasma cutting with the Skew-Rotator
3.11.1.4 Principle of function
To enable processing with the Skew-Rotator, the 3D contour is projected into 2D in

OmniWin.

In the above illustration an elliptical 2D cutting contour arises from the 3D pipe penetration.
The elliptical cutting contour is broken down technologically into contour paths in OmniWin.
The individual contour paths each contain the bevel information and bevel angle which
applies to them and which is necessary to be able to generate the cutting contour with the
Skew-Rotator.
The Z axis is controlled by the height sensing. Therefore it is not necessary to program the Z
axis.
The valid area for cutting is restricted to be within the diameter = 0,8 x D, so that cutting
does not occur in the area of the outer bend.
3.11.1.5 Possible shapes of pipe penetrations and weld seam

preparations
With OmniWin you can design axial (parallel to the pipe axis) and radial pipe penetrations
with or without weld seam preparations.
Axial pipe penetrations without weld seam preparations:

Axial pipe preparations with VDS weld preparation:
Radial pipe penetrations without weld seam preparations:
Radial pipe preparations with VDS weld preparation:
With an axial pipe penetration the angel a = 0

The pipe penetration with VDS weld seam preparation is controlled via the bevel angel c.

Information about the configuration of the angle can be found under “Parameters for the
pipe penetration” on page 532.
Depending upon the application, OmniWin allocates the contours of the pipe penetrations
to the appropriate process:
> Axial pipe penetrations with or without weld preparations: Process “Plasma GC-SKEW”
> Radial pipe penetrations without weld preparations: Process “Plasma GC-Skew Radial OF”
> Radial pipe penetrations with weld preparations: Process “Plasma GC-Skew Radial MF”
3.11.1.6 Angle adjustment of the A axis of the Skew Rotator
The angle adjustment of the A axis is up to 45° to the left or to the right.
Because of the restriction of the angle adjustment of the A axis, there is also a limit on the
angle for the weld preparation, when a tube penetrates the formed end.

If a tube is inserted at an angle of 27.7° into the formed end then only 17.3° remains for the
additional VDS weld preparation.
3.11.1.7 Dimensional accuracy of the penetration
The dimensional accuracy has to be limited as both the formed end and the tube have
tolerances. The dimensional accuracy can be improved through compensation parameters in
the database for cutting formed ends (see “Setting the compensation values in the
technology databases” on page 544).
As the pipes are welded, it is better to program the penetration a little larger than the actual
pipe diameter. Thus the actual penetration will be, e.g. some 1 – 3 mm larger. This tolerance
is absolutely adequate for the practical application in pressure vessel construction.
3.11.1.8 Referencing the formed end
The reference point for all cutting geometries on formed ends is the theoretical center point
of the end.
There are various methods to determine the approximate center point. A laser pointer is
mounted on the machine as standard. The machine operator must reference the machine to
three points on the formed end. The Global Control can then calculate the approximate
center point.
Alternatively you can also mark the center point.

3.11.2 Installation of the option Boiler End
The option Boiler End is available as a separate package – the files it contains must be
installed manually. The package contains the program files for the functions as well as a
specially adjusted database and a postprocessor for the Skew Rotator.
Procedure:
The option Boiler End can only be installed after the installation of OmniWin. You need
administrative privileges to do so.
> Close OmniWin.
> Copy the file “HTML-BoilerEnd” contained in the package into the installation directory
for OmniWin (normally C:\Programme\MesserSoft\OmniWin<Release>).
> Copy all files from the directory “Language” contained in the package into the
“Language” directory in the installation directory of OmniWin.
> Copy all directories from the folder "ProgramData" provided with this package to the
OmniWin program data directory, e.g. z.B. c:\ProgramData\MesserSoft\OmniWin
ProcessData <Release> . This directory contains the postprocessor and the database for
Boiler End. Make sure to maintain the folder structure.
The data contained in the directory “GC” must be installed onto the Global Control as
necessary (see also “Requirements for the Global Control” on page 546).
After the data has been copied, load the option Boiler End in the user interface of OmniWin:
> Start OmniWin. Ensure that the Macro dialog is in foreground. Click on the symbol
“Change the start page” in the macro dialog.

The dialog for selecting the home page appears.
> Chose the option “HTML-BoilerEnd\macrohome.htm” in the selection list and confirm the
selection with “OK”.
The Macro dialog shows now the Boiler End interface.
If you want to return to the original Macro dialog, choose “HTML1\macrohome.htm” after
clicking the “Changes the home page” toolbar icon.
To work with Boiler End in OmniWin you need to enable the function in the
OmniWin dongle. Otherwise, no bevel information will be saved in the
geometry „Boiler“.
3.11.3 Procedure for generating the cutting geometry

> Generate the geometry
> Create the nesting plan
> If necessary adjust the lead-ins
> Generate the NC code

Checking settings:
You can define in the “Options” section whether the data for the pipe penetrations should
be entered in a orthogonal or polar coordinate system (see “Changing the coordinate
system” on page 529).
If “Output Info” is activated then the data of the inserted inner contours will be output as
comments. The info will also be saved with the plan, but it will not be output with the NC
code.
3.11.3.1 Changing the coordinate system
You can switch between coordinate systems during working - OmniWin will convert the
coordinates already entered into the other coordinate system.
For example, enter the coordinates of the center point of a pipe penetration in orthogonal
coordinates at first.
Orthogonal coordinate system (Example pipe penetration with coordinates X = 200, Y =
200)

Polar coordinate system (with conversion of the values given above when changing systems)
3.11.3.2 Create the geometry of the formed end
> First select the DIN standard in the Macro dialog (DIN 28011 or DIN 28013). Thus you
determine whether you are creating a dished end or a domed end.
> Enter the outer diameter D and the material thickness.
Define the 2D geometry of the formed end with the following parameters:
- D = Outer diameter
- t = Material thickness

- D = Da and r1
- R2 = D x 0,1 (DIN 28011)
- R2 = D x 0,154 (DIN 28013)
The definition of the outer diameter defines the geometry of the formed end.
The valid cutting zone is restricted to 0,8 * Da, so that no cut is made in the area of the
outer bend.
> Click on “New”.
The circular contour of the formed end will be displayed in the geometry window.
You have now defined the geometry of the formed end in the first step and have thus
entered the parameters for calculating the pipe penetrations.
3.11.3.3 Pipe penetration, create
Enter the parameters for the pipe to be inserted under “pipe penetration”:
> The pipe diameter d
> The position in X and Y on the formed end:

- X = X coordinate in the orthogonal coordinate system or the radius in the polar
coordinate system
- Y = Y coordinate in the orthogonal coordinate system or the angle in the polar
coordinate system
> a = Angle of inclination of the pipe to the vertical axis (see “Angle a – angle of
inclination” on page 532).
> b = Change of direction of the angle of inclination a (see “Angle b – change of direction”
on page 533).
> c = Additional VDS bevel angle for weld preparation (see “Bevel angle c – weld
preparation” on page 535).
After clicking “Insert inner contour” the pipe penetration will be displayed on the formed
end:
The following values will be checked by the software automatically:

The inner contour must lie within the valid cutting area 0,8 x D, so that no cut is made in the
area of the outer curve.
The sum of angle “a” and bevel angle “c” may not exceed 45° (see also “Angle adjustment
of the A axis of the Skew Rotator” on page 525).
3.11.3.4 Parameters for the pipe penetration
3.11.3.4.1 Angle a – angle of inclination

The angle “a” describes the inclination of the center axis of the pipe to the vertical axis Z.

If the angle a = 30°, then the pipe hits the formed end at the X,Y coordinates of the
theoretical pipe center axis at the angle a relative to the vertical Z.
If the angle a = 0°, then the pipe meets the formed end vertically.
3.11.3.4.2 Angle b – change of direction

You set the direction of the inclination with the angle b.
The angle b is thus directly related to the Y axis or the angle in the polar coordinate system.

Example:
You want to create a pipe penetration which is at the 90° position on the formed end. The
angle of inclination is 30°. This inclination should, however, point towards the center point
of the end. You achieve this by adjusting angle b.
Coordinate system in the example = polar

X coordinate or Radius = 100
Y coordinate or angle = 90
Angle a = 30°; the pipe is inclined at 30°
Angle b = 90°, the 30° inclination is rotated by 90° so that the inclination points towards the
formed end center.

3.11.3.4.3 Bevel angle c – weld preparation
You can program an additional VDS weld preparation for an axial or radial pipe penetration
with the angle c.
Because of the angular setting restrictions of the A axis of the Skew Rotators (max. 45°)
there is an angle restriction for the weld preparation. The sum of angle “a” and the bevel
angle “c” may not exceed 45°.
In this example there is already an angle a of 27.7° resulting from the pipe penetration. Thus
the bevel angle c for the VDS weld preparation has only a maximum possible angle of 17.3°.
3.11.3.5 Create nesting plan
Once all inner contours have been created, you can generate the nesting plan.
> Click on “Create nesting plan” in the Macro dialog“.

The dialog for creation of a new nesting plan will be opened.
> First activate “Extended nesting plan (bevel)” (see also Chapter “Creating an advanced
(bevel) nesting plan” on page 417) and enter a name for the plan.
Before setting the material and thickness you must first define the technology database, as
the technology database determines the material available for selection.
The process will be determined by the System according to the application –

do not, under any circumstances, change the process.

Define technology database and postprocessor:
Open the nesting plan options with the “Options” button and select the database and
postprocessor for Boiler End on the “System” card.
It is recommeded to save these settings as a new bevel machine profile (see “Profiles for
saving configuration settings” on page 375).
Common Boiler End scenarios are already prepared in the technology database – however
you should check the technology data (especially the compensation values) for your scenario.
To do this, start the PerfectCut Editor (Button “Start PerfectCut Editor”).
Further information about the compensation data for Boiler End can be found under
“Setting the compensation values in the technology databases” on page 544.
Using the < Machine Code Options > button you can display the configuration of the Boiler
End postprocessor and adjust it if necessary.
Select material/thickness:
Once you have defined the technology database and the postprocessor, enter the material
and thickness.
> Select a material. The technology database for Boiler End has default entries for MILD
STEEL and STAINLESS STEEL.
> Enter the material thickness.
The thickness must be entered manually as the value from the Boiler End
dialog will not be taken over automatically.
> Confirm the dialog “New or existing plan” with OK.
A new plan will be created and the geometry “Boiler” will be added to the workspace as
new drawing:

3.11.3.6 Editing the nesting plan and generating the NC code
When making a nesting plan the lead-ins and outs will be added automatically according to
the information macros stored in the technology database.
You can adjust these manually. The following section “Automatic creation of the lead-ins
and lead-outs” describes first how OmniWin places the macros for lead-ins and lead-outs
automatically. You can find how to adjust these macros in the section “Adjusting the lead-
ins and lead-outs” on page 539.

3.11.3.7 Automatic creation of the lead-ins and lead-outs
Lead-in
To make the lead-in an arc is formed starting from the center of the formed end and placed
onto the inner contour of the pipe penetration. This procedure ensures that the lead-in line
always runs along the same height, namely along a height line around the center of the
formed end.
As soon as 2/3 of the lead-in has been cut the height sensing goes into automatic height
control and the height adjustment of the Z axis is controlled automatically.
The macro Start042 is used for the lead-in.
Lead-out
The lead-out is implemented as a continuation cut on the contour. Shortly before crossing
the cutting kerf of the lead-in line, the automatic height sensing is switched off.
The macro End002 is used for the lead-out.
3.11.3.8 Adjusting the lead-ins and lead-outs
The adjustment of the lead-ins and lead-outs is made in the technology dialog.

3.11.3.8.1 Calling the technology dialog
Open the technology dialog with a click in the “Functions” area of the technology index
card. If this index card is not available there, then activate the dialog in the menu
“View/Toolbars/Technology dialog”.
You will first see the general settings for the nesting plan, such as database, postprocessor
or the material group, here.
You can find further information about the general functions of the technology dialog under
“Technology dialog when nesting in summary” on page 431.
3.11.3.8.2 Editing pipe penetrations in the technology dialog

Each pipe penetration created is made up of the following elements whose characteristics
can be displayed individually in the technology dialog:
> Technology contour elements: Small elements with bevel information. These
technology contours are calculated separately by OmniWin for each pipe penetration and
cannot then be altered. However you can display the characteristics of the technology
contours.
> Lead-in: lead-in contour which is defined by a macro (see also “Adjust lead-in” on
page 541).
> Lead-out: lead-out contour which is defined by a macro (see also “Adjust lead-out”
on page 542).

> Join: connects the individual technology contours with a macro.
> Entire cutting contour: You will get here the general settings which were used to
create the technology.
You can change the position and size of the lead-ins a well as the size of the lead-outs in the
nesting plan.
3.11.3.8.3 Display all technology contours

You can display the characteristics of the technology contours in the technology dialog.
> Click on the “Show technology contour” button in the technology dialog and then on a
contour of the pipe penetration.
You will then see, amongst other things, the following information about the technology
contour selected:
Process: This will be allocated automatically by OmniWin according to the application and
should not be changed manually (see also “Which process for which application?” on page
544).
Contour size: This will be set automatically by OmniWin and should not be changed.
The bevel type and the bevel angle, which are calculated automatically, are examples which
have grey backgrounds, meaning that they cannot be changed.
Further important information includes, for example, the compensation angle and the speed
which come from the technology database.
3.11.3.8.4 Adjust lead-in

> Click on the “show lead-in” button in the technology dialog and then on the lead-in of
the pipe penetration. The characteristics of the lead-in will now be displayed in the
technology dialog. The macro Start042 will be used for the lead-in.

The lead-in is decisive for the initial height sensing and the quality of the cut. The lead-in
must be long enough for the machine to reach the speed necessary for the automatic height
control to start working.
The lead-in should run into the cutting contour on a radius to avoid damage at this point.
You can alter the following parameters:
> Length of the lead-in
> Radius of the lead-in
The default values for the length and the radius come from the technology database. This
can also be adjusted (see “Customize Technology Databases - the PerfectCut Editor” on
page 451).
3.11.3.8.5 Adjust lead-out

> Click on the “Show lead-out” button in the technology dialog and then on the lead-out
of the pipe penetration. The characteristics of the lead-out will now be displayed in the
technology dialog. The macro End002 will be used for the lead-out.

The parameters “Offset in front” (lead offset), “Angle” and “Radius” are important for the
quality of the lead-out.
The Offset controls from which point the height control is to be frozen, in order for the torch
not to drop during the continuation cut as it passes over the existing cut kerf.
The angle and the radius control the quality of the continuation cut and thus the quality of
the pipe penetration.
You can alter the following parameters:
> Offset in front (Lead offset)
> Angle
> Radius
3.11.3.8.6 Modify position of the lead-in/lead-out

You can change the position of the lead-in if the automatically set lead-out is not good at
this position.
Click the button “Set Lead-ins and outs” in the toolbar or in the “Nesting” menu and then
click on the position on the contour of the pipe penetration where the leads should be
placed. The lead-in and lead-out will be repositioned.
3.11.3.9 Generating the NC program
> Click in the “File” menu on the “Save” button. The nesting plan with be stored as an
XML plan and as an NC code. If you have activated the nesting option “Show results in
the Notepad”, then the NC code will be displayed directly in Editor.

3.11.4 Configuration
3.11.4.1 Setting the compensation values in the technology databases
It is necessary for the quality of the cut to set the compensation values and the value for the
lateral offset correctly in the technology database.
3.11.4.1.1 What is lateral offset?

A lateral offset (or “sideways offset”) arises whenever the torch unit is not perpendicular to
the part, but is at an angle. Because of the setting angle the width of kerf changes through
the lateral offset.
3.11.4.1.2 What are compensation values?

To be able to achieve really vertical cuts with plasma, it is necessary to incline the torch
slightly. This inclination angle is called compensation. To create a bevel angle which has the
desired number of degrees, a compensation angle is also necessary. Without a compensation
angle, the angle of the cut edge would deviate from the desired result.
You change the compensation angle in the Perfect Cut Editor (see “Compensation values”
on page 461.
3.11.4.1.3 Which process for which application?

To make the right compensation values available for processing a formed end, it is necessary
to differentiate between three application cases for the creation of pipe penetrations (see

also “Possible shapes of pipe penetrations and weld seam preparations” on page 523).
According to the application, OmniWin allocates the appropriate process:
> Axial pipe penetrations with or without weld preparations: Process “Plasma GC-SKEW”
> Radial pipe penetrations without weld preparations: Process “Plasma GC-Skew Radial OF”
> Radial pipe penetrations with weld preparations: Process “Plasma GC-Skew Radial MF”
For these processes the compensation values are recorded separately.
3.11.4.2 Setting the postprocessor
You can set in the configuration of the postprocessor for Boiler End whether for the speed
the value from the technology database or from the Global Control database should be
used.
It is possible that you could use one database on the Global Control which works with
different speed factors for formed ends. The postprocessor should then output an M93
function so that the speed control of the database on the Global Control is used.
Open the postprocessor configuration (nesting plan options, index card “System”, button
“machine code options”).
Set under “Code generation” the line “”Speed value from the Global Control database” to
“Yes”.

3.11.4.3 Requirements for the Global Control
Macros must be present on the control which can be called from the postprocessor
dependant upon the material and the material thickness.
These macros contain commands for the control which influence the behavior of the height
sensing and the initial height sensing. The macros for the control are contained in the
installation package in the file “GC”. Check whether the macros are present on the GC.
Currently macros are available for the control for Steel (Mild Steel), Stainless Steel and Nickel
for various material thicknesses and current strengths.

4 Technical Appendix
4.1 Appendix A: Postprocessors (PPs)
Postprocessors are necessary to generate the NC code for the machine. They convert your
nested plans into DIN and ESSI code or other formats. The NC output used depends upon
the machine control. All new machines from MCS are always supplied with Global Control
and work with DIN code.
The selection of a postprocessor depends upon the machine type and the processes and
technology to be used for cutting.
Postprocessors consist of a logic file itself (DLL) and an INI file. The INI file contains important
settings and must be adjusted to suit your machine.
Postprocessors with bevel support are a special case: There are postprocessors for DIN code
output (XSL) and postprocessors for ESSI-Code for OmniBevel (DLL/INI).
4.1.1 Installation
The postprocessors (PPs) are installed to the program data directory during the OmniWin
setup (default: C:\ProgramData\MesserSoft\OmniWin ProcessData <Release>\PP\). This
includes a directory of the PP types concerned.
Straight: Standard-PPs for vertical cutting
Bevel: Postprocessors for the output of nesting plans with bevel information
Tube: PPs for the cutting of pipes
The functions for Tube (pipe cutting) and Bevel (bevel cutting) are only available if the
Options are enabled on the dongle/if a license for OmniBevel is available. The corresponding
PPs will, however, always be installed.
Updating the Postprocessors

During an update of your version of OmniWin, you can migrate your postprocessors and
other data that are your system (and probably modified to fit your needs). This migration
copies available postprocessors from OmniWin 2011 Release 1 and 2 into the current
program data directory. Your current working configuration is retained. However, if you use
an old PP, your modifications are kept, but new functions will not be fully supported.
The current postprocessors installed during an update will have a new version number. If you
want to use the latest standard PPs you need to manually switch to the new PPs. When you
have updated from an earlier version of OmniWin before OmniWin 2011, copy the PPs
manually into the program data directory.
www.messersoft.com Technical Appendix | 547

4.1.2 Which Postprocessor should I use?
The selection of a postprocessor depends upon the machine type and the processes and
technology to be used for cutting.
The various application possibilities are mirrored in the naming of the postprocessors:
Type of control:
GC: Global Control, this postprocessor can only be used for machined with Global Control
MCS: Machines with other controls
Cutting processes:
LASER: Laser
OXY: oxyfuel
PLASMA: Plasma
Functions:
DRILL: PP with support for drilling heads
DRILL_ATC: PP with support for special drill units with automatic riding drill changer
MTORCH: PP for multiple torch operation. PPs without this part of the name can only be
used for single torch operation.
TRUEHOLE: Support of the Messer Hole Technology
ESSI: PPs in ESSI-Format (e.g. for output for OmniBevel)
TUBE: support for a pipe rotation axis
Settings for individual regions:

CN, US: PPs with specific settings for individual countries (e.g. for China, or the US)

The plans with bevel support use the postprocessors in the program data directory under
„PP\Bevel“ (e.g. C:\ProgramData\MesserSoft\OmniWin ProcessData <Release>\PP\Bevel).
There are postprocessors for DIN code output and postprocessors for ESSI-Code for
OmniBevel (DLL/INI).
DIN: These PPs use an XSL file. The settings are not stored in a separate INI fle, but in the
XSL file itself. Modifications can be done in an edit dialog.
ESSI: These PPs consist of a logic file (DLL) and an INI file. The ESSI output will not be
transferred for direct processing on the machine but will be imported into OmniBevel. The
machine code will be generated after further processing OmniBevel.

4.1.2.1 Postprocessors for machines with Global Control (Straight
Cutting)
All postprocessors for machines with Global Control (GC) use the DIN format.
PPs for Laser:

Machine Equipment/Function Postprocessor
FiberBlade GC_LASER
Details for modifying the settings of this postprocessor may be found under “Postprocessor
for FiberBlade Laser cutting machines” on page 564.
PPs for Oxyfuel:

Oxyfuel cutting Without drill GC_OXY
machine with single
With drill GC_OXY_DRILL
torch operation
Oxyfuel cutting Without drill GC_OXY_MTORCH
machine with multiple
In multiple torch -
torch operation
operation drilling will
not be supported
PPs for Plasma:

Single torch with Without drill GC_PLASMA_
Hypertherm HPRXD TRUEHOLE
plasma power sources
With drill GC_PLASMA_DRILL_
TRUEHOLE
Multiple torch Without drill GC_PLASMA_MTORC
operation with H_TRUEHOLE
Hypertherm HPRXD
In multiple torch -
plasma power sources
not be supported
All other plasma single Without drill GC_PLASMA_
torch machines with
With drill GC_PLASMA_DRILL
GC
All other plasma Without drill GC_PLASMA_MTORC
multiple torch H
machines with GC
In multiple torch -
not be supported

4.1.2.2 Postprocessor for older controls
For machines with older controls (not Global Control) use the postprocessor:
MCS_ESSI
The file extension is LOS.
PP_MgEssi
Use this PP for older machines (with DNC/OmniCard) where the sequence of the header data
needs to be observed - the plan name is always in the third line here.
4.1.2.3 Postprocessors for Advanced (Bevel) Nesting Plans
Postprocessors for DIN and ESSI output with and without drill support are available for
nesting plans with bevels.
PPs for bevel cutting with ESSI output

Output of nesting Without drill MCS_OB_ESSI
plans with bevel
With drill MCS_OB_ESSI_DRILL
information for
OmniBevel
The file extension is LOS. This cannot be input for nesting files with bevel support, the code
will be automatically saved as a LOS file.
The output will not be transmitted for direct processing on the machine but will be imported
into and can be processed further with OmniBevel. The machine code will then be generated
in OmniBevel.
PPs for bevel cutting with DIN output

Laser with Fanuc FA_LASER
control
oxyfuel, with Global Triple bevel head D/AFL GC_DAFL
Control (with drill support)
oxyfuel, with Global Triple bevel head D/KS GC_DKS
Control (with drill support)
plasma, with Global Skew Rotator (with drill GC_SKEW
Control support)
plasma, with Global Skew Rotator (with drill GC_US_SKEW_DRILL
Control support)

4.1.2.4 Postprocessor for pipe cutting
For the cutting of pipe on machines with a pipe rotation axis use:
GC_TUBE
You can find further information about this postprocessor under “Postprocessor for pipe
cutting (Tube)” on page 566.
4.1.3 Allocation of the postprocessor to the plan

Standard-PPs:
In the “Nesting Plan Options” on the “System” card you can set the PP for the generation of
the NC code for the current nesting plan. In principle, this selection remains until you change
it again.
By creating a machine profile you can however also define the PP setting as well as other
settings and save these and recall them quickly. Further information may be found in the
chapter about profiles.

PPs for bevel support (advanced nesting plans):
Set a PP for the generation of the NC code for the plan concerned with bevel support in the
“System” card of the Nesting Plan Options.
You can select the appropriate postprocessor, depending on whether you generate ESSI
code for further processing in OmniBevel, or DIN code for direct processing for the Global
Control.
By saving a bevel profile you can save and quickly recall the PP selection together with other
settings. Further information may be found in the chapter about Profiles on page 375.
In addition, you can store the settings for the PP configuration (see “Saving the
Configuration for XSL PPs” on page 554). The selected configuration is saved to the profile
as well.

PP for pipe cutting:
The PP for pipe cutting (Option OmniWin Tube) is defined and adjusted as necessary in the
Tube Options.
4.1.4 Modifying the PP settings

To adapt the settings for the postprocessors, use the “Machine Code Options” button in the
nesting plan or tube options dialogs (see “Allocation of the postprocessor to the plan” on
page 551).
If you modify the INI file of a postprocessor , this INI file is opened directly in Notepad (see
“Summary of the PP settings in the INI files” on page 555).
For XSL postprocessors, an edit dialog is opened for modifying the values.

4.1.5 Saving the Configuration for XSL PPs
When you select an XSL postprocessor, you can store individual settings for each
postprocessor. Use the selection list “Configuration” for this.
First, there is only the option <unnamed> available which includes the standard
configuration.

Saving the configuration settings:
> Select the postprocessor you want to modify.
> Change the settings for the postprocessor. The changed configuration is marked by an
asterisk.
> Click the “Save” icon to store the settings.
> In the following dialog, enter the name for the configuration settings and click OK, to
confirm your input.
4.1.6 Summary of the PP settings in the INI files

A number of adjustments can be made in various sections of the INI files of the
postprocessors.
You can call the INI file of the postprocessor to be adjusted with the “Machine Code
Option” button in the Nesting plan Options or the Tube Options.
Section [USER_CONFIG]
UNIT_INCH – the units set in the NC code in mm or inch
SPEED_OUTPUT_IN - the units for the output of the cutting speed
REDUCED_SPEED – support for the reduced speed
SAMPLING_SUPPORT – supports the height sensing
DBL_PREC – units for the ESSI output or the number of decimal places, with which the
output for DIN will be calculated
KERF_WIDTH – support of the kerf width
KERF_OUTPUT_PRECISION – units for the kerf width output

CONTOUR_APPROXIMATION_ON - approximation of small lines by circular arcs
CUT_TYPE - Name of the tool (Tool)-section for the cutting layer for the definition of the
type of cut (values: CUT_PLASMA or CUT_OXY)
Section [USER_CONFIG] – additional for postprocessors with DIN output

CODE_LINE_NO – line numbering in DIN code
REF_CALC – Absolute coordinates or relative coordinates
Section [FILE_SECTION]
FILE_SECTION – start and end recognition of the file
Section [PLAN_HEADER]
PLAN_HEADER – Output of comments in the header line of the code output (name and
version of the postprocessor DLL file, the postprocessor INI file and the name of the nesting
plan file)
Section [PLAN_FOOTER]
COMMAND_STRING – Output of an additional command before the end of the plan
FOOTER_RAPIDTRAV_ON – Rapid traverse to the zero point at the end of the plan
Values: 0 – no rapid traverse, 1 – only in X coordinate, 2 - in X- and Y coordinates
Section [PLAN_CONFIG]
Comment for output of the machine used, the material and the thickness
Settings of the auxiliary functions used for:
> Comment
> Kerf width
> Cutting speed and reduced speed
> Sampling (height sensing) on / off
> Format for output cutting a line
> Format for output cutting a circular arc in clockwise direction
> Format for output cutting a circular arc in counter-clockwise direction
> Cutting kerf offset off, left, right
additionally for postprocessors with DIN output with further settings specially for output for
the Global Control:
> Unit metric or inch
> Relative or absolute coordinates for the center point of a circular arc
> Absolute or relative coordinate system
> Display of the absolute or relative coordinate system
> Shifting of the absolute or relative coordinate system

> Format for tool positioning with rotation of the angle of the coordinate system
> Format for line numbering in DIN code
Under TOOLS:
Section [LEADIN_LEADOUT]
Adding custom code to lead ins/outs, that is included in the postprocessor output. With this
it is possible, for example, to integrate speed data or commands for switching the height
sensing on or off flexibly in the code. This section is commented out in the standard
configuration.
Section [CUT_PLASMA] und [CUT_OXY]

Auxiliary functions used for
> first call after tool change
> process on
> process off
> 3 points for plate edge start of cut
> 3 points for plate edge run-out of cut
additionally for postprocessors with DIN output with further settings specially for output for
the Global Control:
> T code of the process
> Tool initialization
> Tool de-initialization
Section [MARK_PLASMA], [MARK_POWDER], [MARK_PUNCH] and [MARK_REA]

Auxiliary functions used for plasma marking/powder marking/punch marking/REA inkjet
marking.
> Offset on
> Marking on
> Marking off
> Offset off
OmniWin provides comprehensive support for the REA Inkjet in all postprocessors. For
further information regarding the configuration options for REA text output please refer to
Configuration for REA text marking on page 574

4.1.7 PP settings in den INI files for specific scenarios
4.1.7.1 Line numbering in the NC-Code
You can now configure the postprocessors in such a way that line numbers are inserted into
the NC code. This function is used to support particular machines from third party suppliers.
The line numbering only functions with the current postprocessors.
To control the line numbering adjust the ini file of the postprocessor required. You can insert
the following entries:
Section [USER_CONFIG]
CODE_LINE_NO=0
Activates line numbering if the value exceeds 0. The increment is set by the value: 1-
consecutive numbering, 2-steps of 2, 10–steps of 10 etc.
PROCESS_START_CODE_LINE_NO=1
1 – Activates the numbering only for each process start (previous behavior)
0 - Activates the numbering for every line
Section [PLAN_CONFIG]
SET_CODE_LINE_NR=N%i
Enter the format for the line numbering. %i stands for the line number (in this example thus:
N plus line number). You can also define a fixed number of places, N%05i means that by
adding a corresponding number of leading zeros a five digit number always results.
4.1.7.2 Include plan and parts data in the NC code for straight
nesting plans (data log)
You can include information about the nesting plan data in the nc code output. This data
can be used for information or for further processing.
The following information can be added to the NC code:
> name of the nesting plan
> name of the machine
> material, thickness, length and width of the plan
> weight of the plan and the parts
> list of all parts
> total cutting time
> total marking length
> total rapid move length

> total amount of piercings
> remnant cuts
For each part in the nc output the following parameters can be included in the nc output:
> part name
> cutting length
> marking length
> weight
> quantity (multitorch quantity)
The plan information will be output on top of the nc code, right below the PP version
information. The information for each part are output near the section of each part.
Remnant cuts will be considered as parts, i.e. the information will be output in the section
where the remnant cut is produced.
Part quantity is relevant for multitorch mode – this documents how many parts are cut
concurrently.
Configuration
If you want to include data logging into your nc code, enable the following entry:
SET_DLOG_ON=1
In some PP ini files, this may be already set by default. Direclty below this entry, you find the
settings for configuring the output format for each type of information. Depending on your
region, an info format or a format for PLC output is preconfigured. Change this as required.
Example for plan name “NestPlan1”:
Configuration in ini Output in NC code
SET_DLOG_PLANFILE=#MSG SYN_ACK #MSG SYN_ACK
PLC["LOGC=(PlanFile=%s)"]\n PLC["LOGC=(PlanFile=NestPlan1)"]
SET_DLOG_PLANFILE=(%%%%INFO (%%%%INFO PlanFile=NestPlan1)
PlanFile=%s)\n
Use “;” to put unnecessary lines in comment. These will not appear in the output.
Related functions
To extract data for analysis, consider also the OmniWin functions “Export to CSV” or the
reporting function. Both outputs can be generated manually as required. Alternatively, you
can use “Generate production data” and configure the function to generate these outputs
when you create the NC code.
For further information please refer to Generate Production Data on page 99.

4.1.7.3 Postprocessor for MultiTorch Operation
To generate the NC code for cutting with a multiple torch machine with a Global Control,
there are two postprocessors available for oxyfuel cutting and for plasma cutting: All PPs
with MultiTorch support have „_MTORCH_“ as part of their name:
GC_<Process>_MTORCH <version>
Adjustments to these postprocessors can be made in the corresponding INI files which you
can edit using the < Machine Code Options > button.
In the TOOLS section of the INI files you will find the two sections [MULTITORCH] and
[MULTITORCH_INFOFILE]:
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[MULTITORCH] ;Start of carriage positioning
CARR_POS_BEGIN=M154\n#MCS ON\nM155\nM94\nG90 G1 Y0
F6000\nM156\n
;Carriages clamped together
CARR_CLAMP =M157 H%s\n
;Set the carriage positions
CARR_POS=G91 G00 Y%s\n
;End of carriage positioning
CARR_POS_END=M93\n#MCS OFF\nM159\nG90\n
; M function for process on with carriage activation
CARR_PROC_ON=M07%s\n
; M function for process off with carriage activation
CARR_PROC_OFF=M08%s\n
;Carriage activation
CARR_ACTIVATE=H%s
;Main comment string
CARR_COMM_MAIN=(CARRIAGE:%s)\n
;Text for activated carriage in comment string
CARR_COMM_ACT=+%sACT%s
; Text for deactivated carriage in comment string
CARR_COMM_DISACT=+%sDACT%s
; Text for activated driven carriage in comment string
CARR_COMM_DRVACT=+%sAACT%s
; Text for deactivated driven carriage in comment string
CARR_COMM_DRVDISACT=+%sADACT%s
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[MULTITORCH_INFOFILE]
;creates a file with carriage positioning data
CREATE_INF_FILE=1
;Header of Info file
CAPTION=Carriage adjustment data\n
;Parameter Title

PARAM_TITLE= Nr-Stop X Y Position active carriage at
next STOP\n
; File name of nesting plan
PLAN_NAME=PLAN FILE= %s\n
; Comment for machine used
SET_MACHINE=MACHINE= %s\n
; Comment for material used
SET_MATERIAL=MATERIAL= %s\n
; Comment for thickness used
SET_THICKNESS=THICKNESS= %s\n
;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.7.4 Postprocessors for Global Control with Drill support
Special postprocessors are available that support the drill process on machines with Global
Control. These can be selected from the list of postprocessors in the "System" card of the
Nesting plan options. All PPs with drill support have „_DRILL_“ as part of their name:
GC_<Process>_DRILL<Version>
GC_US_OXYFUEL_SIMPLE_DRILL_<Version> is a special PP for simple pneumatic drill units.
Adjustments to the drill settings can be made in the corresponding PP INI files which you can
edit using the < Machine Code Options > button. The drill parameters can be set under
TOOLS in the [DRILL] section:
[DRILL]
; T code for Drilling
TOOL_ID=46
; format for first start after changing tool
FIRST_START=M70 M72 M74\nG04 X0.1\nV.G.NP[1].V.X =
V.A.ABS.X\nV.G.NP[1].V.Y = V.A.ABS.Y\nV.G.NP[1].V.Ya
= V.A.ABS.Y\n#CS ON
[0,0,0,0,0,V.E.ROTATION]\nG54\nG00 X0.00
Y0.00\nM190\nM66\nG04 X0.1\n#SET DEC LR
SOLL\n#MCS ON\nG00 Ya=V.A.ABS.Y + 300.00\n#MCS
OFF\nM67\nM75 H1\nG04 X0.1\n
; initialization of tool
TOOL_INIT=M64\nT46\nM65\n
; M function for Process On
PROC_ON=M18\n
; M function for Process Off
PROC_OFF=
; deinitialisation of tool
TOOL_DEINIT=(%%MACRO Parken_Ya)\n
; drill unit type
DRILL_UNIT_TYPE=Messer-Standard

; drill type
; 0-manual pneumatic without changer and without CNC feed
; 1-manual without changer and with CNC feed
; 2-With changer and with CNC feed
DRILL_TYPE=2
;number of compartments
DRILL_NUM_COMPART=12
;stop for manual change
;0-No
;1-Yes
DRILL_STOP_CHANGE=0
;threads allowed
;0-No
;1-Yes
DRILL_THREAD_ALLOWED=1
;marking depth in mm (point as delimiter)
DRILL_MARK_DEPTH=0.5
;minimal drill diameter in mm (point as delimiter)
DRILL_MIN_DIAM=5.0
;maximal drill diameter in mm (point as delimiter)
DRILL_MAX_DIAM=20.0
;maximal relation length to diameter (integer)
DRILL_MAX_LTOD=12
;maximal drill depth in mm (point as delimiter)
DRILL_MAX_DEPTH=100.0
;NC code to set current drill depth
DRILL_THICKNESS=#MSG SYN PLC [\"DRL: DrillDepth=%s\"]\n#MSG
SYN PLC [\"DRL: OverShoot=%s\"]\n
;nc-code to feed process on Global Control
process database
DRILL_FEED_DB=(%%MACRO %s)\n
;NC code to load a current drill
DRILL_LOAD_TOOL=V.E.ToolNum = %i\n(%%MACRO Changedrill)\n
;format for changer placement information
DRILL_COMMENT=( POSITION %s: DIAMETER: %s
TOOLNAME: %s RATIO: %s USAGE: %s )\n
;possible problems
ERR_CANT_OPEN_DB=Cannot open drill database.
ERR_NO_DRILL_FOUND=One or more drills are not
found.
ERR_TO_MUCH_DRILLS_FOR_CHANGER=Too many drills for
changer.
ERR_NO_ALLOWED_DRILL_FOUND=Unallowed drill is found.
ERR_DRILL_TO_SHORT=Existing drill is too short for the work.

ERR_INVALID_WORK_FOR_TYPE_OF_DRILL=Invalid work for
this type of drill.
4.1.7.5 Postprocessor for the ATC drill unit with automated tool
changer
The postprocessors for the riding drill unit with automated tool changer (ATC) include
specific options in addition to the general drilling settings. This unit is currently available for
the European market only, support is available in the following postprocessors:
> GC_OXY_DRILL_ATC
> GC_PLASMA_DRILL_ATC
> GC_PLASMA_DRILL_TRUEHOLE_ATC
The drill tools available in the changer unit and other machine configurations are set by the
PLC macros “Parkdrill”, “Holderposition” and “Toolchange”.
Support for multi-axis machines is enabled by default in the ATC ini files (MULTI_AXIS=1 in
the section [USER_CONFIG] and CARRIAGE_INDEX=x for each related process under
TOOLS).
4.1.7.6 Postprocessors for Messer Hole Technology support
Special postprocessors are available that support the Messer Hole Technology. These can be
selected from the list of postprocessors in the “System” card of the Nesting plan options. All
PPs with Messer Hole Technology support have „_TRUEHOLE_“ as part of their name:
GC_PLASMA_TRUEHOLE<Version>
The postprocessor for Messer Hole Technology must, for the NC output,
> Control that the process gas changes to O2/O2 for Messer Hole inner contours with a
command in the NC code
> Switch off the plasma power source before the cut continuation with a command in the
NC code
> Place the Messer Hole inner contours before the normal inner contours of a part.
For the Messer Hole technology support, the following parameters in the INI files of the
GC_PLASMA postprocessors are decisive:
At the end of the [USER_CONFIG] section:
; Support of Messer Hole technology MSS_HOLE_SUPPORT = 1
This parameter switches on the support of the O2/O2 processes in the NC code.
Further technology requirements are supported by the following parameters in the
[CUT_PLASMA] section:

; M function for the end of the contour PROC_LEADOUT=M06\n .......
.......
; T-Code for process (small inner contours)
TOOL_ID_SC=23
; Tool initialization (small inner contours)
TOOL_INIT_SC=T23\n
as well as by the following parameters in the [PLAN_CONFIG] section:
; M function for sampling (height sensing) on
SET_SAMPLING_ON=M51\n
; M function for sampling (height sensing) off
SET_SAMPLING_OFF=M50\n
4.1.7.7 Point marking - Settings in the PPs
For point marking the following settings must exist in the Global Control Postprocessors:
section at the end of the [PLAN_CONFIG] section:
;Marking/Drilling of a point PROC_POINT=M18\n
T-code for powder marking in the section [MARK_POWDER]:
; T-code for powder marking TOOL_ID=43
T-code for punch marking in the section [MARK_PUNCH]:
; T-code for punch TOOL_ID=42
4.1.7.8 Postprocessor for FiberBlade Laser cutting machines
For the generation of NC code for the Fiberblade laser cutting machine there is a
postprocessor GC_LASER available. The section responsible for laser cutting looks like this:
[CUT_LASER]
; T code for process (large or outer contours)
TOOL_ID=31
; T code for process (small or inner contours)
TOOL_ID_SC=
; Format for first start after tool change
FIRST_START=
; Tool initialization (large or outer contours)
TOOL_INIT=T31\nM112 H1\n#FLUSH WAIT\nG261\n
; Tool initialization (small or inner contours)
TOOL_INIT_SC=T31\nM112 H2\n#FLUSH WAIT\nG261\n
; M function for process on
PROC_ON=M07\n
; M function for process off
PROC_OFF=M08\n
; Tool de-initialization

TOOL_DEINIT=G260\n
;Limit value in mm between thickness ranges 1 and 2
THICKNESS_SC1=5
;Limit value in mm between thickness ranges 2 and 3
THICKNESS_SC2=11
;Value for the maximum size of the rectangle circumscribed around the contour
;in the units set, above which the contour is classified as large (Thickness range
;1, max. 8 ranges)
;if there is only 1 field, then THRESHOLD_SC1 or THRESHOLD_SC
THRESHOLD_SC1=16
;2)
THRESHOLD_SC2=75
;3)
THRESHOLD_SC3=200
; 3 Points for Plate edge cutting lead in LEAD_IN_P0= LEAD_IN_P1=T21\nM112 H1\n #FLUSH
WAIT\n LEAD_IN_P2=M24\n
; 3 Points for Plate edge cutting lead
out LEAD_OUT_P0=M50\n LEAD_OUT_P1= LEAD_OUT_P2=M08\nM51\nM64\nT0\nM65\n
As well as the T code cutting outer contours and large inner contours, an additional T code
for the cutting of small inner contours can also be set.
Further three thickness ranges can be defined by defining two limit values between ranges 1
and 2 and between 2 and 3.
For each of these three thickness ranges the maximum size of the rectangle circumscribed
around the contour is given above which the contour is classified as large.
4.1.7.9 Pre-Piercing
With pre-piercing all starts are pierced first and then the contours are cut afterwards. This is
used, for example, when another process is used for piercing (e.g. pulsing instead of
continuous laser power.
Pre-piercings must be activated in the .ini file for the postprocessor. Set the value “1” for the
following entries.
[CUT_<Process>]
SET_PREPIERCING=1
Use the applicable Init and Deinit codes for your machine which have to be inserted before
and after the pre-piercing block and adjust SET_PREPIERCING_INIT= accordingly.

Certain cut starts require a movement in the direction of the lead-in line to the contour. You
can define the length with the following entry:
SET_PREPIERCING_DIST=1
Pre-piercing can be enabled in all current postprocessors except in the PPs for multitorch
cutting (MTORCH).
4.1.7.10 Postprocessor for pipe cutting (Tube)
The postprocessors for pipe cutting are only available for editing in the Tube Options dialog.
These PP are always installed, however, the Tube functions are only available if they have
been unlocked.
In the INI files of the postprocessors, the output of T codes can be adapted in particular.
It is possible in the INI file to adjust the T codes for cutting and marking, the commands for
the tool initialization and tool de-initialization and the M functions for switching the
processes on and off.
Example: Postprocessor GC_TUBE
4.1.7.11 Inserting NC Code to Lead-ins and Lead-outs (Straight

Cutting)
The postprocessors can output customer specific code as well. This code can be inserted for
vertical cutting in the ini files for the postprocessor concerned. With this it is possible, for
example, to integrate speed data or commands for switching the height sensing on or off
flexibly in the code.

In all standard postprocessors there is a section [LEADIN_LEADOUT configuration]. This
section is commented out in the standard configuration by a semicolon.
;----------------------------------------------------------------
;
; LEADIN_LEADOUT configuration
;
;----------------------------------------------------------------
[LEADIN_LEADOUT]
; string for start of Lead in
;START_LEADIN=(Lead In start)\n
; string for end of Lead in
;END_LEADIN=(Lead In End)\n
; string for start of Lead out
;START_LEADOUT=(Lead out start)\n
; string for start of Lead in
;END_LEADOUT=(Lead out end)\n
;---------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.7.12 Switching between tactile and swing-arm sensing
In some cases, a Skew Rotator is used for straight cutting that supports tactile and swing-
arm sensing.
A swing arm is used to prevent distortion of thin sheets, where tactile sensing should
therefore not be used. For the current machines, the sensing mode is associated with a tool
code (T code) that represents a separate process. Therefore, different T codes must be
generated for straight cutting - depending on whether swing-arm or tactile sensing is used.
A parameter allowing to switch between the two sensing modes is available in postprocessor
CD_PLASMA.
The section is:

;minimum thickness for tactile measurement
MIN_TACTILE_THICKNESS=0
;T-code for swing-arm
TOOL_ID_SWINGARM=22
;initialisation for tool of swing-arm
TOOL_INIT_SWINGARM=T22\n

If MIN_TACTILE_THICKNESS = 0 , the T code entered in Tool_ID and Tool_init in the
Cut_Plasma section is used in the output.
If MIN_TACTILE_THICKNESS is bigger than 0 and if the nesting plan thickness is less than
the value defined here, the T code for swing-arm is used.
4.1.7.13 Vaporization of plastic protection film during Fiberlaser

cutting
Customers with laser machines usually cut high precision objects. In some cases, the plate is
covered with a plastic protection film. This film can remain on the plate during the cutting
process – the film will be vaporized before laser cutting/marking only on the contours, and
the cut parts will still be protected by the film.
For this, the cutting process needs to be adapted to take into account the vaporization
which is done with a special speed and process.
Enabling vaporization
Vaporization can be switched on/off for entire plan in the postprocessor. This function is
included in the following standard postprocessors:
> GC_Laser_<version>.ini
> GC_US_laser_<version>.ini
To enable vaporization, set the value of the parameter in the VAPORIZATION section in the
INI file.
> “SET_VAPORIZATION = 1” – enabled
> “SET_VAPORIZATION = 0” – disabled
If vaporization is enabled, the part contour will be output twice: Once with the vaporization
tool code (H4) and then again with the tool codes for cutting and marking (M112 H1, H2 or
H3) for the part contour.
Vaporization is not taken into account for the calculation of production times.
The following processes are excluded from the vaporization:
> Drilling and tapping
> Rea Inkjet
> All marking processes except laser marking.
No support for pre-piercings

Vaporization is not supported for pre-piercings. If pre-piercing and vaporization are enabled
at the same time, pre-piercing will be ignored. Vaporization of the lead-ins is done when the
part is processed.

Sequence of vaporization, marking and cutting
Vaporization will be applied for markings and cuts, normally part by part. Vaporization for
remnant cuts will always be done last. If laser marking is done first for the entire plan
(setting in the nesting plan options), the vaporization of the markings will be done first for
the entire plan as well.
4.1.7.14 Switching height sensing when technology elements are

crossed
When cutting kerfs are crossed, height sensing can be switched off automatically. depending
on the parameters defined in the postprocessor ini files This function is available for plasma
cutting.
In the ini files for the plasma PPs the following parameters can be set:
SUPPORT_CROSS_CUT=0
If the value is set =1, switching the height sensing is enabled.
FACTOR_DIST_CROSS_CUT=1
This defines the distance (offset) from the kerf, where height sensing is frozen.
The offset is the kerf width multiplied by the factor entered here.
FACTOR_SPEED_CROSS_CUT=0.5
This parameter defines the speed reduction. The value entered here is multiplied by the
cutting speed, i.e. you would normally set a value smaller than 1.
If the parameters are set, OmniWin switches off/on the height sensing with M50 and M51
when cutting kerfs are crossed. This applies to the following crossings:
> lead-out/lead-in
> loop/cutting kerf
> bridge/cutting kerf
> common cut/cutting kerf
> links/other technology elements
4.1.7.15 Collision avoidance and Messer Process Optimization
The PP supports two methods for process optimization, which can be set in the ini file of the
PP:
;IHS optimization
;0 - disable any method
;1 - enable method 1
;2 - enable method 2
IHS_METHOD =1

Method 1 (IHS_METHOD = 1)
After completing a cut, the torch is set back to ignition height and remains there during the
movement to the next piercing. This is potentially hazardous as the torch moves close to the
plate close in a low position. This method is very quick as the torch doesn't need to be
adjusted.
This method requires Messer Process Optimization and Collision avoidance to be enabled in
the nesting plan options - but you don't need to run the Autosequence function in any case.
The information, whether a rapid traverse is safe, is passed on to the PP only if Collision
avoidance is selected, and the PP can generate an appropriate output. For further
information please refer to the chapter Collision avoidance on page 301.
Method 2 (IHS_METHOD = 2)
After the cut the torch is raised to a higher position, but the result of the last height sensing
is stored. On the way to the next contour, there is no need to pay attention to obstacles. For
the next piercing, the torch lowers to the stored height and is ignited.
This method works irrespective of the Messer Process Optimization.
Further settings (MAX_PIERCE_POINTS, MAX_DISTANCE)

For both methods, further settings are possible:
[IHS_METHOD_1]
;The method consists of the following actions:
;after the cut, move the torch from cut to ignition height and forget IHS when starting the
next cut
;
; M function for switch On
SWITCH_ON=M153\n
; M function for switch Off
SWITCH_OFF=M152\n
;maximum number of pierce points from the beginning
MAX_PIERCE_POINTS=5
;maximum distance from the beginning
MAX_DISTANCE=500
[IHS_METHOD_2]
;The method consists of the following actions:
;after the cut, lift up as usual, but remember the last cut height.
;With the next cut, move down directly to IHS height, then proceed as usual
;

; M function for switch On
SWITCH_ON=M150\n
; M function for switch Off
SWITCH_OFF=M151\n
;maximum number of pierce points from the beginning
MAX_PIERCE_POINTS=5
;maximum distance from the beginning
MAX_DISTANCE=650
MAX_PIERCE_POINTS sets the number of piercings that can be done consecutively before a
new height sensing must take place.
This setting is important as a plate may not always be completely plain, or it can become
deformed from the heat input.
This is similar for MAX_DISTANCE. This sets the maximum distance allowed between the
torch and the position where the function was switched. If the torch moves outside this
radius, a completely new piercing sequence with a new height sensing must be initiated.
4.1.7.15.1 Postprocessors supporting process optimization

The following postprocessors in the current version support the settings for the process
optimization:
> GC_LASER_x.x.ini
> GC_CN_LASER_x.x.ini
> GC_US_LASER_x.x.ini
> GC_PLASMA_x.x.ini
> GC_US_PLASMA_x.x.ini
> GC_PLASMA_DRILL_x.x.ini
> GC_PLASMA_TRUEHOLE_x.x.ini
> GC_CN_PLASMA_DRILL_x.x.ini
> GC_US_PLASMA_DRILL_x.x.ini
> GC_PLASMA_DRILL_TRUEHOLE_x.x.ini
4.1.7.16 Custom code for micro stitches (Laser)
When you include micro stitches in your nesting plan, special code may be required for
processing them on the machine. This individual code can be added to the PP and will be
included in the NC code output.

Micro stitches are lead-outs of the type “stitch” whose length (P1) does not exceed a
defined value:
This feature can be configured in the current laser postprocessor ini file
(GC_LASER_XX_4.3.ini, or newer).
In the section [MICRO_STITCH] the following parameters can be set:
> MAX_STITCH_SIZE = maximum length (P1) of the stitch to be handled as a micro stitch
> OFFSET_LENGTH = Offset length, this value defines the distance from the contour end
where the special code is to be inserted. After the special code, the contour cut will
continue unto the end of the contour.
> OFFSET_COM = Offset code; this is the code which will be inserted at the offset distance.
Here in the example, the dummy text was used. Replace the default dummy text with the
required code in the ini file.
> END_COM = End point code, this is the code which will be inserted at the end of the
contour. Replace the default dummy text with the required code.

4.1.7.17 Contour smoothing configurable per process
Contour smoothing can be switched on/off for each process by editing the postprocessor ini
file.
The following setting available in each process section can be used for this:
;Use contour smoothing
USE_SMOOTHING=1
The start/stop strings for the machine code (default G261/G260) can be adapted as well, in
the upper section of the ini file:
; G function for Contour Smoothing On
SET_SMOOTHING_ON=G261\n
; G function for Contour Smoothing Off
SET_SMOOTHING_OFF=G260\n
This is available in the following PPs:
GC_LASER
GC_OXY
GC_OXY_DRILL
GC_OXY_MTORCH
GC_PLASMA_MTORCH
GC_PLASMA_DRILL
GC_PLASMA_DRILL_TRUEHOLE
GC_PLASMA_MTORCH
GC_PLASMA_MTORCH_TRUEHOLE
GC_PLASMA_ TRUEHOLE
If smoothing is enabled for a process, it will be switched on right after the process is
activated, before the first contour element, and it will be switched off again right after the
last contour, before the process is turned off.
4.1.8 NC output of code on every launch of a

process
The PP configuration files for straight nesting plans (*.ini) contain a setting that allows you to
enter code that will be included in the generated NC code upon each process start.
This setting is available in the TOOLS section for each process:
EVERY_START=

This is similar to the FIRST_START= code, which is executed only when a process is launched
for the first time, whereas EVERY_START= will be executed upon each start of the respective
process.
This setting allows you to have different processes installed on different driven carriages.
Example
You may use oxyfuel for cutting and plasma for marking and have the tools installed on two
separate driven carriages that are launched several times in turn for one nesting plan. Before
one process is launched, the other unit needs to be moved to park position to avoid
collisions. This can be achieved by entering the respective parking code for the unit in the
EVERY_START line. Instead of parking, other action codes may be required, depending on
your scenario (e.g. for docking the carriages).
Multi-axis machines
If you want to use EVERY_START= on a multi axis machine, the text for a process should only
be output if the process resides on a different driven carriage to avoid unnecessary parking
of carriages.
For this, you can assign a carriage index for every process by modifying the following entry in
the section of the respective process:
CARRIAGE_INDEX=1
And, enable the entry for the multi-axis mode in the [USER_CONFIG] section:
MULTI_AXIS=1
If multi-axis mode is enabled, the text entered for EVERY_START is only included in the
output when the carriage changes, i.e. a process with a different carriage index is activated.
4.1.9 Configuration for REA text marking

During the REA configuration the following restrictions for text marking need to be
observed:
> One font type and only specific font sizes are supported, see “Default font configuration”
on page 576.
> Smaller text sizes are achieved by turning the REA head - this needs to be considered for
the following tasks:
- when you place the texts on the part, see Inserting texts for REA markings on page 202
- when you nest , see “Plate edge distance – forerun and overrun” on page 575 and
“Verify the actual text length on the plate” on page 576.
- in the NC code: “Shift of coordinates in the NC code” on page 575
For information about the resultant configuration options refer to: “PP settings for REA (INI
and XSLT)” on page 577.

4.1.9.1 Plate edge distance – forerun and overrun
The REA head needs to be rotated to generate different text heights. If a text is too close to
the plate edge, the inkjet head would need to be positioned outside the plate border to
produce the required text height, which is not possible. The forerun values are the minimum
distances allowed from the plate edge to the text start point. Any text that is closer to the
plate edge will not be included in the nc output. Please consider this when you create parts.
Forerun (1) is the distance from the center of the REA head to the point where the text
starts.
Overrun is the distance that is required after the text.

The allowed overrun and forerun values (in mm) for each font size/REA type are listed in
chapter “Default font configuration” on page 576.
4.1.9.2 Shift of coordinates in the NC code
The representation of the text in OmniWin is a rough estimate only – the final font
parameters are set when you create the nc code based on the font parameters defined in
the PP configuration. If your text is close to the part or plate edge, you should calculate the
correct position to make sure your text will fit.
Position of text start:

In the nesting plan, the text starts at the point where the printed text will start to appear on
the plate. However, the NC code created by OmniWin contains coordinates that are adjusted
to reflect the REA movement (i.e.the forerun is taken into account on the x axis and the
rotation angle on the y axis).
When you compare the x position of the text start point , you’ll notice the difference,which
is the defined forerun (default: 35 mm for REA 16, 13.5 mm for REA 7).
Here in the example, the text start point is located at X4556.17 and Y2507.09, the code
gives the corrected x value:

The y value is adapted to reflect the REA angle for this font size.
The text start point is only visible in the nesting plan, if the grid view is enabled.
4.1.9.3 Verify the actual text length on the plate
To check the correct position and length, you should calculate the text length that will later
appear on the part before you create the nc code and start cutting.
Count the number of characters and blanks included in your text, and the number of
character spaces (usually one less than the number of characters). The “Sample text REA
Inkjet 18 mm” counts 28 characters and 27 character spaces. Character width for 18 mm
REA 16 is 6 and the spacing is 2.5. The overall length for this text is 235,5. You may need to
add the overrun (+25). The overrun is the space required after the text for the movement of
the REA head. This space must not exceed the plate edge.
4.1.9.4 Default font configuration
The character and forerun/overrun configurations are set in the PP settings (see below). The
default values (in mm) are as follows:
REA 7:
text height character distance forerun overrun
width between
characters
9 13.5 13
12 7 4 13.5 12.5
18 6 2.5 13.5 10.5
24 9.5 6.5 13.5 6.5
27 11.5 8 13.5 0

REA 16:
text height character distance forerun overrun
width between
characters
12 7 4 35 30
18 6 2.5 35 25
24 9.5 6.5 35 15
27 11.5 8 35 0
30 13 4 35 60
45 10.5 4 35 50
60 18 7.5 35 30
67 23 9 35 0
4.1.9.5 PP settings for REA (INI and XSLT)
The PPs allow the configuration of several settings. If you apply REA markings, in any case
you need to:
> enable the process in the PP
> set the REA type and the rotation axis
Further options are:
> REA rotation controlled by the OmniWin NC code or by the PLC
> Configuration of text parameters (character width/distance, forerun/overrun)
The following paragraphs explain how to apply these settings for straight and bevel plans.
4.1.9.5.1 Enable REA marking/set REA type

Check whether REA marking is enabled and define the REA type (“Type of REA tool” for
advanced plans).

The corresponding entry in the PP ini file for straight plans is:
REA_16PIN = x
(x=0 for 7-pin, x=1 for 16-pin head)
4.1.9.5.2 Define rotation axis

You need to specify in the PP configuration the rotation axis assigned to the REA Inkjet on
your machine.
For straight cutting, the following entry in the [PLAN_CONFIG] section needs to be adjusted:
; format for tool positioning with rotation the angle of coordinate system
SET_S_POSITION_CSANGLE=G00 X%s Y%s Ca=%s\n
For advanced bevel plans, select the appropriate value from the “Code to define angle of
REA rotation” field (default Ca=).

4.1.9.5.3 Include/Exclude code output for REA rotation in NC code
The machine code for the REA rotation control can be included in the OmniWin nc output,
or it can be calculated by the Global Control (PLC). The calculated value is stored in the PLC
variable “V.E.PRINTHEAD_DIR”.
For advanced bevel plans, select “PLC angle calculation” from the “Type of angle calculation
for REA rotation” field in the xslt configuration file.
For straight plans, this is set in the PP ini by adjusting the following entry:
; Correction angle calculated by PLC
PLC_ANGLE_CORRECTION=0
If you have PLC output enabled (=1), you need to set the code for the REA axis index for the
angle correction (default “Ca”) but other values are possible depending on your machine.
In the ini file for straight cutting, the corresponding entry is:
; tool rotation for PLC angle correction
PLC_ANGLE_ROT=G00 Ca=V.E.PRINTHEAD_DIR\n
These are two examples of the generated nc code where angle correction is included in the
NC output (left) and where angle correction will be done by the PLC (right).
The variable “V.E.Textformat” contains the text parameters (font type, text height,
forward/backward printing). For the PLC output a fourth value sets the text rotation (here in
the example “0”).
For advanced bevel plans, select the value from the “Code to define angle of REA rotation”
field (default Ca=).

4.1.9.5.4 Font types and parameters
For Rea, the font “Isocteur” is used. This is installed together with OmniWin. Three font
types (1,2 and 3) are supported:
> Font type 1 is applied for REA 7.
> Font type 2 is applied for REA 16 up to size 27 mm (1.06 inches)
> Font type 3 is applied for REA 16 from 30 mm (1.18 inches).
The values for the appearance (character width/spacing) can be adjusted for each supported
REA type and font size. The adjustment of the font has an effect on the text length – i.e.
adjusting may be necessary if you want to make longer texts fit.
To print Font type 2, REA only uses 8 pins (for line 2), for bigger character sizes all 16 pins
are used for printing.
4.1.9.5.5 Adjustment of character width/spacing

Nesting plans for straight cutting:
Use the entries in the PP ini files, for example:
REA16_FONT_PARAMS_12=7,4,30
The values are:
REA<REA type>_FONT_PARAMS_<font size>=character width, distance between characters,
overrun
Both mm and inch values are supported.

For advanvced nesting plans, this is defined in the C# section of the XSLT PP.
Changes in the C# section of the XSLT PPs may only be performed by trained
staff.
You find the values in the section under:
if (ToolType == "1")
{
if (ysize<18.00)
{
xsize = 7.00 + 4.00; ysize = 12.00; flength = 35.00; blength = 30.00 - 4.00;
}
etc.
The values for REA 7 are located directly under “if “(ToolType == "1")””, the values for
REA 16 can be changed further down under “ else”.

In the above examples, the values are as follows:
if (ysize<18.00) shows the font height
xsize = 7.00 + 4.00 is the chacacter width plus the space between characters. These values
can be modified here in the code.
ysize = 12.00 is the height, this should not be changed here
flength = 35.00 is the forerun, this should not be changed here
blength = 30.00 - 4.00 is the overrun (minus character width), in this line, only the character
width should be changed, if the value in the “xsize” part changes.
Example: If you want to reduce the space between characters for REA 16 font size 45 only,
find under “else” the section:
if (ysize>=45.00 && ysize<60.00)
{
xsize = 10.50 + 4.00; ysize = 45.00; flength = 35.00; blength = 50.00 - 4.00;
wlength = 0.5 * ysize;
Replace the space value “4.00” by the required space.
Overrun and forerun should not be changed – these distances need to be kept to allow
enough room for the REA head.
4.1.10 Current Postprocessors and PPs from previous

versions
The postprocessors (OmniWin 2011, and higher) have new names (including the version
number) and some of the old PPs were combined. During an update with data migration,
the existing postprocessors are kept under their previous name, i.e. each postprocessor will
be available in the system with the old and the new name. Copy the old PPs manually into
the current program data directory.
New Postprocessor Previous Functions

postprocessor
MCS_OB_ESSI PP_ObevelEssi Output for OmniBevel with drill
Drill
MCS_ESSI PP_MgEssi Standard:
GC_LASER PP_GCLaserDin Global Control, Laser
GC_OXY PP_GCOxyDin Global Control, oxyfuel cutting
GC_OXY PP_GCOxyDinMTorch Global Control, oxyfuel cutting,
multitorch
GC_OXY_DRILL PP_GCOxyDrillDin Global Control, oxyfuel cutting,
with drill

GC_OXY_DRILL PP_GCOxyDrillPneuma Global Control, oxyfuel cutting,
Din with drill
GC_PLASMA_MTORC PP_GCPlasmaDin Global Control, plasma cutting
H
GC_PLASMA_MTORC PP_GCPlasmaDinMTor Global Control, plasma cutting,
H ch multitorch
GC_PLASMA_DRILL PP_GCPlasmaDrillDin Global Control, plasma cutting,
with drill
GC_PLASMA_DRILL PP_GCPlasmaDrillPneu Global Control, plasma cutting,
maDin with drill
GC_TUBE PP_GCTubeLaserDin pipe rotation axis
GC_TUBE PP_GCTubeOxyDin pipe rotation axis
GC_TUBE PP_GCTubePlasmaDin pipe rotation axis
4.2 Appendix B: The Files NEST.MDB and

NESTI.MDB
The databases NEST.MDB and NESTI.MDB contain process data, i.e. parameters for all
material and thickness combinations, that a possible for a machine. OmniWin includes
preconfigured process data for machine support.
The process databases are installed in the directory C:\ProgramData\MesserSoft\OmniWin
ProcessData <Release>\DB\Straight. If you work in the metric measure system, the file
NEST.MDB is used, if you work with Inches, the file NESTI.MDB is required.
There are different ways to adapt the process data:
> external editing of the database files NEST.MDB and NESTI.MDB in Microsoft Access
> internal editing in OmniWin with the function View / Edit Process DB on page 327
The databases NEST.MDB and NESTI.MDB contain the process data for straight cutting -
process data for advanced nesting plans with bevel support are stored in separate
technology databases (C:\ProgramData\MesserSoft\OmniWin Process Data\DB\Bevel).

4.3 Appendix C: Importing third party
drawing formats
OmniWin permits parts in DXF and DWG format from AutoCAD, and in IGES format to be
imported and exported to the DXG or DWG format.
Thus OmniWin allows the import of parts which were created with the help of another CAD
system and were stored in DXF format. In particular, this applies to parts which are available
in AutoCAD DWG drawing format. The AutoCAD compatibility is ensured up version
AutoCAD 2013.
Files that may contain simple errors that can be corrected upon saving The following errors
in part drawings can be corrected:
> Automatic deletion of duplicate contours,
> Deletion of contours with length less than a defined value
> Trimming of overlapping contours,
> Automatic closing of open contours, which lie within an error window.
You can configure some import settings (e.g. assign the layers in the drawing to the
OmniWin process layers) in the OmniWin Options (see Layer Translation on page 137 and
Import on page 86 ). If you frequently import files from the same source, you should
consider to create an import profile. This allows you to load the correct settings from the
OmniWin Options for the file during the import:
For basic information regarding the import of external drawings please refer to Import on
page 86. The following topics describe special scenarios.

4.3.1 Import of Quality information
The quality attribute can also be imported with graphics from a third party system: there are
two possibilities for this:
> The quality information is present as a comment (Code 999) in the form MSQU=Value.
Example:
999
MSQU=3
> The Layer descriptions correspond to a specified pattern: The layer name must start with I,
VDS, VAS, YDS, YAS ,X or K and contain a Q followed by the quality value.
Example:
IQ3
If a quality value is defined both by the layer description and with a comment, then the layer
description will be used.
Further information regarding the use of the quality attribute can be found under Quality
Mapping on page 416 and Quality-Process Mapping on page 444.
4.3.2 Import of DXF drawings with drill holes

When you import drawings, you can take over drill points and the drill process information in
OmniWin too. The DRILL parameters in the DXF files need to be prepared correctly for this.
4.3.2.1 File preparation - how to store DRILL parameters in the DXF

file
When you create a drill point (POINT object/entity) in a DXF file you can add a Layer attribute
(group code: 8). This must have a defined syntax to be recognized by OmniWin.
Example
0
POINT
8
DRILL_T D10 H10 T'M10' L'NO'
...
Layer attribute syntax

The Layer attribute containing the drill points must start with DRILL (This regognition is case-
sensitive, but leading spaces are ignored.) The type of the drill hole and the parameters are
coded in the Layer attribute and must have the following syntax:
> DRILL_<Type> [<params>]

The placeholders <Type> and <params> can have the following values:
<Type> is a drill work type; the following values are supported:
> ‘M’: Marking drill
> ‘HS’: Drilled hole with countersink
> ‘H’: Hole
> ‘TS’: Tapped hole with countersink
> ‘T’: Tapped Hole
> ‘BS’: Blind Hole_Countersink
> ‘B’: Blind Hole
[<params>] are a space/underscore separated list of parameters depending on the drill work
type:
> Marking drill
- None
> Drilled hole with countersink
- ‘D’ – Hole diameter (format D<value>; example: D10.0)
- ‘S’ – Countersink diameter (format S<value>; example: S10.0)
- ‘I’ – Countersink depth (format I<value>; example: I10.0)
- ‘A’ – Countersink angle (format A<value>; (example: A90)
> Hole
- ‘D’ – Hole diameter (format D<value>; example: D10.0)
- ‘Q’ – Drill attributes (format: Q’[<+/->D] [<+/->C] [<+/->P]’)
‘D’ – force drill (+D) / do not allow drill (-D)
‘C’ – force cut (+C) / do not allow cut (-C)
‘P’ – force punch (+P) / do not allow punch (-P)
Example: Q’+D+C-P’- force drill and cut / punch not allowed
By default, i.e. if the respective parameter is not set, all processes are set to „not
allowed“. If a process is not possible, a mark or a center drill mark may be applied
instead.
> Tapped hole with countersink
- ‘D’ – Tapped Hole diameter (format D<value>; example: D10.0)
- ‘H’ – Tapped Hole depth (format H<value>; example: H10.0)
- ‘T’ – Tapped Hole type (format T’<value>’; example: T’M10’)
- ‘L’ – Left Turn Thread; “Yes” if Left hole turning/”No” if Right hole turning (format
L’<YES/NO>’; format example: L’YES’)

- ‘A’ – Countersink angle (format A<value>; example: A90)
> Tapped Hole
- ‘D’ – Tapped Hole diameter (format D<value>; example: D10.0)
- ‘H’ – Tapped Hole depth (format H<value>; example: H10.0)
- ‘T’ – Tapped Hole type (format T’<value>’; example: T’M10’)
- ‘L’ – Left Turn Thread; “Yes” if Left hole turning/”No” if Right hole turning (format
L’<YES/NO>’; format example: L’YES’)
> Blind Hole_Countersink

- ‘D’ – Blind Hole diameter (format D<value>; example: D10.0)
- ‘H’ – Blind Hole depth (format H<value>; example: H10.0)
- ‘A’ – Countersink angle (format A<value>; example: A90)
> Blind Hole
- ‘D’ – Blind Hole diameter (format D<value>; example: D10.0)
- ‘H’ – Blind Hole depth (format H<value>; example: H10.0)
Examples
DRILL H D10 Q'-D+C-P'
A drill hole with diameter 10. Only CUT attribute allowed (if possible from diameter cut, else
mark or make center drill mark).
DRILL_BS_D10_H25_S15_I18_11_A45
A drill blind hole with countersink with blind hole diameter = 10, blind hole depth=25,
countersink diameter=15, countersink depth=18.11 and a countersink angle of 45 degrees.
Syntax variations
OmniWin allows certain variations from the syntax (as in the second of the above examples).
> Underscores (_) will be replaced with a space or dot by OmniWin during the import:
- Dot: If both the previous and the next characters are digits, a dot (.) will be used, e.g.
“1_2” will be replaced by “1.2”.
- Space: in all other cases, a space character will be used, e.g. “D10_H10” will be
replaced by “D10 H10”
> All leading spaces are ignored, e.g. “ DRILL” -> “DRILL”
> The next symbol after “DRILL” is ignored so you may add e.g. underscore ‘_’
Please make sure the word “DRILL” is spelled correctly and in capital letters.

4.3.3 Import of MI files from ME10 using a converter
To import any drawing format directly supported in OmniWin (such as DXF or DWG) simply
use the menu option “File - Open”.
With the use of specific registry entries for OmniWin it is possible to offer drawings from
ME10 (MI files) in the Open file dialog.
For that, you need a suitable converter that supports batch mode operation.
The conversion of MI files into DXF files can, for example, be made with the program
DXFDWG.EXE, CoCreate/Interface for MI to DWG/DXF from Parametric Technology GmbH.
The file DXFDWG.CON is used for the configuration of this program.
The connections in the OmniWin Registry for the import of MI files in ME10 format could
then look like this:
Save under
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\MesserSoft\OmniWin\OCad\OpenFileFormat0
the following parameters (strings)
Name
Extension
Command
and allocate the following values to them:
Name ME10
Extension mi
Command C:\Programme\MesserSoft\OmniWin\ME10\dxfdwg.exe -o –e
C:\Programm files\MesserSoft\OmniWin\ME10\dxfdwg.con -f %s %s
These extension parameters define, which file extensions are available in the Open File
dialog. By applying the settings above, the Open File dialog will show MI files too. The
command format (%s %s for source and target file names) serves to start the conversion of
the MI files into the DXF format, which is then read in to OmniWin.

For further converter definitions, you can create the keys OpenFileFormat1,
OpenFileFormat2, etc..
If a third party conversion program, which is linked in the above command format in the
OmniWin Registry should not convert any files, then check if the path for the source and
target files contains spaces. It is possible that third party conversion programs cannot
interpret blank spaces in the path!
4.3.3.1 Splitting the output file (multiple import)
The functionality of the import of third-party formats supports a scenario where a single
import file is split into several output files. Each of these output files contains one drawing in
the target format.
Example:
Tool 1 converts a file with the extension MI into a DXF file (see “Import of MI files from
ME10 using a converter” on page 587).
Tool 2 splits the output from Tool 1 into several separate DXF files.
The use of both tools in sequence can be achieved by using a batch file which is called from
OmniWin. If the user selects an MI file in OmniWin, then the Batch file is executed and
various DXF files are opened in sequence in OmniWin, where each contains one drawing and
is contained in a temporary file. The user can now change all files individually and, for
example, save them in the database.
If the Registry key OpenFileFormat has a DWORD value named MultiFile the value of which is
not equal to 0, then OmniWin can read in multiple files after conversion. OmniWin writes
two text parameters (2 variables % in the text with the names “Command”) in the
Converter command line. The first is the complete name of the open file, the second is the
complete name of the temporary file. The Converter takes the second parameter and adds
numbers to the end of the name for additional files, e.g. ...\Tmp .dxf, ...\Tmp1 .dxf, ...\Tmp2
.dxf.
OmniWin reads each file in its own drawing window with the following window names
“OpenFileName”, ”OpenFileName_1”, ” OpenFileName_2”. After reading in, the file in the
TEMP directory are deleted.
4.3.4 DSTV Import

OmniWin supports the import of DSTV files.
4.3.4.1 Supported types/elements
DSTV files in text format (*.nc) described in DSTV specification version 7/8 and in XML
format described in DSTV specification version 9 can be imported.

The following DSTV elements are supported:
> Inner and outer contours including bevel information (blocks AK and IK / XML node “ol”)
> Marking contours (blocks KO and PU / XML node “pm”)
> Drill holes (block BO / XML node “hl”)
> Text marking (block SI / XML node “si”)
> Cut data (block SC / XML node “mi”)
Only the “B” profile (DSTV line 8) and only the Front and Behind web views are supported.
Please refer to the DSTV specification for more information on this.
4.3.4.2 Header information
> Order ID (DSTV line 1 / XML “order” attribute)

> Drawing ID (DSTV line 2 / XML “drawing” attribute)
> Phase ID (DSTV line 3 / XML “part-number” attribute)
> Piece ID (DSTV line 4 / XML “position” attribute)
> Material (DSTV line 5 / XML “material” attribute)
> Quantity (DSTV line 6 / XML “count” attribute)
> Thickness (DSTV line 13 / XML “plate/thickness” attribute)
Material/Quantity/Thickness are imported directly as part properties. Order ID /Drawing
ID/Phase ID and Piece ID can be used to generate the name of the imported drawing.
Futhermore, they can be imported as a comment in the part properties.
4.3.4.3 Options for DSTV
The OmniWin Options page “DSTV Import” allows you to define properties for the import.

Marking contours
Select the processes to be assigned to the imported marking contours and texts.
Bevel
Enable/disable the import of bevel data and set bevel restrictions.
A - max. bevel angle

S - min. land height
OmniWin calculates the resulting land height for YAS, YDS and K bevels from the bevel
parameters given in the DSTV file. If the maximum bevel angle is exceeded, no bevel
imformation will be imported and an I cut will be applied. If the resulting minimum land
height is below the limit, a YAS, YDS or K bevel is turned into as VAS, VDS or X bevel.
Drilling holes
Define whether to import drill holes as drill point or as marking. For markings, select the
marking process and a symbol. The marking crosses can be assigned a size.
Cut hole if diameter is above

Enter the maximum drill hole diameter. All holes up to this value will be imported as drill
holes, all above will be imported as inner contours (circle).
Import strategy
Here you can define the DSTV views (front/rear) for the import. You can import only one
view, or both views into one drawing or into separate drawings.

Name template
DSTV header data can be used to set the part name, or they can be imported into the part
info fields “Customer” and “Comment”.
Part name composition:
Here, you can enter text and placeholders for the composition of the name of the imported
part. DSTV file header information (line 1-4, or the respective xml attributes) and the name
of the import file or the DSTV view are available as placeholders.
Customer/Comment:
Here in the example, an order id was imported into the “Customer” field and the DSTV view
id (H=rear view) is set as comment.
4.3.4.4 DSTV import in inch mode
According to the DSTV specification, all values in DSTV files are stored in the Metric unit
system. To automatically convert all values to the Imperial unit system, make sure you have
enabled the “Scale an output DXF, DWG or DSTV file from mm to inch” box on the “Units”
page in the OmniWin Options, before launching the import.

4.4 Appendix D: Creation of Custom
Macros (Drawing Templates)
This chapter explains how to create customized drawing templates (macros) and how to add
them to the Macro dialog. Creating macros requires a basic working knowledge of the
scripting language VBScript.
A macro consists of:
> an image file for showing the picture in the Macro dialog and
> an HTML file (HTML script) including the macro parameters (e.g. for a rectangle with the
sides A and B)

These macro files are located in the directory “C:\Program Files\MesserSoft\OmniWin
2013\HTML1\Mac2D”.
To create a new, parameterized macro, perform the following steps:
> Create the macro drawing in OmniWin.
> Create an image file for showing the picture.
> Create the HTML file for the new macro.
> Add the new macro to the list of available macros.
4.4.1 Creation of the macro drawing in OmniWin

The macro drawing is the basis for the image file and for determining the construction steps
which will be coded in the script later on.
First, identify the construction steps for your drawing and the related parameters. You'll
need these parameters later for coding.
Create the required drawing in OmniWin. Use common default values for the parameters.
Use the command line or the menu or icon bars to call the individual functions. It is
recommended to enter the coordinates for the construction points the command line, not by
clicking. This mode of construction may require the calculation of auxiliary points/lines -
depending on the complexity of the drawing. During construction, take a note of each
construction or edit command (e.g. LINE, CIRCLE, TRIM, CHAMFER, etc.) , the detailed
coordinates entered and calculation steps for intermediate values.
Pay attention to the syntax and the order of parameters for all commands. A list of all
available CAD commands can be found under “Commands for macro construction” on page
599.
These construction and modify commands, the coordinates and intermediate calculations
will be required later on for the HTML script for the new macro (see “Creation of the HTML
script file for the new macro” on page 594).
4.4.2 Creation of the image for the macro drawing

When you finished your macro drawing, you should still add dimensions for the parameters.
Use the OmniWin Dimension functions for this, as shown in the following example for
Macro 0001:

> Assign the layers appropriately to achieve the desired colors. Here in the example, a
marking layer was used for the drawing elements.
> Use a common image editing program such as Microsoft Paint to create a bitmap image
of you macro drawing. The recommended resolution of the image is 200 x 290 pixels.
> Copy the image file named e.g. Mymacro.jpg into the OmniWin program directory
(normally C:\Program Files\MesserSoft\OmniWin 2013\HTML1\Mac2D\graphics).
4.4.3 Creation of the HTML script file for the new macro
Create a copy of an HTML file related to an existing macro and rename it to e.g.
Mymacro.htm. Use a text editor to modify the new HTML file.
4.4.3.1 Structure of an HTML script file
The HTML script files are composed as follows (example: macro 001). The lines shown in
bold text may need to be adapted:
<html>
<head>
<title>Macro</title>
<link rel="stylesheet" href="messer_macro.css" type="text/css">
<base target="_self">
</head>
<SCRIPT LANGUAGE = "VBScript">
Sub MyParam( NumPar, ParName, ParDefVal, ParType, Picture, MacroName )
' TODO: add parameter description here
NumPar = 3
ParName(0) = "a"

ParDefVal(0) = "75"
ParType(0) = 1
ParName(1) = "RA"
ParDefVal(1) = "250"
ParType(1) = 0
ParName(2) = "RB"
ParDefVal(2) = "150"
ParType(2) = 0
Picture = "graphics/mac0001.jpg"
MacroName = "Macro 0001"
End Sub
Sub MyFunc( Par )
' TODO: rename parameters here for understandable code
W = Par(0)
R1 = Par(1)
R2 = Par(2)
Dim RMax,RMin
If R1 >= R2 Then
RMax = R1
RMin = R2
Else
RMax = R2
RMin = R1
End If
call window.external.Command( 2, "ARCSCA", R1, 0., 0., 0., W )
call window.external.Command( 2, "ARCSCA", R2, 0., 0., 0., W )
call window.external.Command( 2, "ARCSEA", RMin, 0., RMax, 0., 180. )
call window.external.Command( 2, "ARCSEA", RMax, W, RMin, W, 180. )
End Sub
</SCRIPT>
<script LANGUAGE= "VBScript" SRC="body1.vb"></script>
<BODY class="messer_macro" style="background-color: #ECE9D8"><DIV
id="xslTarget"></DIV></BODY>
</html>

4.4.3.2 Which changes need to be applied?
4.4.3.2.1 Header data

The top area is the HTML header. No changes are required here.
4.4.3.2.2 Sub MyParam

The Sub MyParam subroutine defines your parameters, their default values and the image
file for the new macro. Replace the texts shown in italic.
NumPar = number of parameters
ParName(0) = 1. Parameter
ParDefVal(0) = default value for 1. Parameters
ParType(0) = parameter type of 1. Parameters
etc.
Picture = "graphics/my_macro_1.jpg"
Explanation
ParName will be displayed on the macro HTML page as a field name.
ParDefVal is the default value, which can be modified before the macro is applied.
ParType specifies the parameter type. Applicable values are:
0 – specifies a length
1 – specifies an angle
2 – specifies a number of elements (e. g. for macros 0124 and 0125)
4.4.3.2.3 Sub MyFunc

The Sub MyFunc subroutine defines the script code for your macro drawing.
Define your own parameter names in the first section and associate them to the hard-coded
default names.
W = Par(0)
R1 = Par(1)
R2 = Par(2)

etc.
Then, use the Dim function to specify which variables are required for your calculations.
After that, the actual calculations are entered. These calculations convert the macro
parameters entered by the end user into the input values for the OmniWin commands.
Replace the following section with your own calculations.
Dim RMax,Rmin
If R1 >= R2 Then
RMax = R1
RMin = R2
Else
RMax = R2
RMin = R1
End If
Then, you define the individual OmniWin commands with their parameters for the creation
of the drawing.
call window.external.Command( iCoordinateSystem, czCommand1, dPar1, dPar2, ....)
etc.
Explanation
window.external.Command is the scripting command for the OmniWin command line.
iCoordinateSystem defines the coordinate system used for each command:
0 – sets the absolute orthogonal coordinate system
1 – sets the absolute polar coordinate system
2 – sets the relative orthogonal coordinate system
3 – sets the relative polar coordinate system
Replace czCommand with the appropriate OmniWin command, dPar1, dPar2, etc. are the
parameters related to that command. When you replace czCommand with the appropriate
OmniWin command, you need to put it in quotation marks (see above example).
For a complete list of allowed OmniWin commands, please refer to “Commands for macro
construction” on page 599.

4.4.4 Adding the new macro to the list of available
macros
If you want to add your macro to the list of available macros, you need to modify
macro_menu.htm from the macro directory in OmniWin.
Edit the file Macro_menu.htm and enter the file name and the name if the new macro to the
list:
<option value="macro_1028.htm"> 1028
<option value="macro_1029.htm"> 1029
<option value="Mymacro.htm"> Mymac
</select>
The name of the new macro should not be longer than 6 characters, otherwise it will not fit
completely into the list.
Creating a dedicated page for the macro

If you don't want to include your new macros in the list of OmniWin standard macros, you
can open the macro from a separate page. Create a new macro homepage for this. This
homepage should contain links to your previous homepage with all the standard macros and
to all custom macros.
To create such as homepage, proceed as follows:
Rename the file “macrocome.htm” in the HTML subdirectory (C:\Program
Files\MesserSoft\OmniWin 2013\HTML1) to “macrohome_default.htm”.
Create a new file named “macrohome.htm“ and insert the following text:
<html>
<body>
<p><a href="Mac2D/mymacro.htm">My Macro</a></p>
<p><a href="macrohome_default.htm">Default Macros</a></p>
</body>
</html>
This creates a simple page without any formatting. If you have sufficient knowledge of
HTML, you can create and assign a new HTML homepage for the Macro dialog (see also
Macros on page 343).

4.4.5 Commands for macro construction
When you create the script in the HTML file, you use the following function:
call window.external.Command( iCoordinateSystem, czCommand, dPar1, dPar2, ....)
czCommand is to be replaced by the command for launching the respective OmniWin
function, dPar1, dPar2, etc. are the parameters of the command. For furthr information
regarding the CAD functions refer to the chapter OmniWin - Menus and Functions on page
84.
The following CAD functions of OmniWin are available:
4.4.5.1 "CSALIGN", X, Y
Aligns the origin of the coordinate system

Parameters:
X,Y – point for seleting a line
4.4.5.2 "CSMOVE", X, Y
Moves the coordinate system

Parameters:
X,Y – point for setting the new origin of the coordinate system
4.4.5.3 "CSROTATE", A
Rotates the coordinate system

Parameters:
A – rotation angle
4.4.5.4 "ZOOMALL"
Function “Zoom All”, shows the entire drawing

Parameters:
none

4.4.5.5 "ZOOMSEL"
Function “Zoom Selected”, shows the selected elements

Parameters:
none
4.4.5.6 "ZOOMIN"
Function “Zoom In”

Parameters:
none
4.4.5.7 "ZOOMOUT"
Function “Zoom Out”

Parameters:
none
4.4.5.8 "ZOOMWIN",X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Function “Zoom Window”

Parameters:
X1,Y1,X2,Y2 – zwei Punkte für Zoom-Fenster.
4.4.5.9 "PAN",X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Moves the view position

Parameters:
X1,Y1,X2,Y2 – two points for moving the view (reference point and target point)
4.4.5.10 "ZOOMRT",X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Sets the center of the view and enlarges or reduces the view.
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – center of the view
X2,Y2 – second point for zooming in or out

4.4.5.11 "POINT",X,Y
Draws a point
Parameters:
X,Y – coordinates of the point
4.4.5.12 "LINE", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Draws a line
Parameters:
X1,Y1,X2,Y2 – coordinates of the line
4.4.5.13 "SLINE", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Draws a scrap line

Parameters:
X1,Y1,X2,Y2 – coordinates of the scrap line
4.4.5.14 "CIRCLE", X,Y,R
Draws a circle (same function as CIRCLER)

Parameters:
X,Y- center
R – radius
4.4.5.15 "CIRCLECR", X,Y,R
Draws a circle (same function as CIRCLE)

Parameters:
X,Y- center
R – radius

4.4.5.16 "CIRCLECP", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Draws a circle
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – center
X2,Y2 – point on the circle
4.4.5.17 "CIRCLECD", X,Y,D
Draws a circle
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – center
D – diameter
4.4.5.18 "CIRCLE2P", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Draws a circle
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – first circle point
X2,Y2 – second circle point
4.4.5.19 "CIRCLE3P", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,X3,Y3
Draws a circle
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – first circle point
X2,Y2 – second circle point
X3,Y3 – third circle point
4.4.5.20 "CIRCLETTR", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,X3,Y3
Draws a circle
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – point for determination of the first object and the side
X2,Y2 – point for determination of the second object and the side
R – radius

4.4.5.21 "ARC", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,X3,Y3
Draws an arc
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – start point
X2,Y2 – point on the arc
X3,Y3 – end point
4.4.5.22 "ARC3P", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,X3,Y3
Draws an arc
Parameters:
X2,Y2 – point on the arc
X3,Y3 – end point
4.4.5.23 "ARCSCE", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,X3,Y3
Draws an arc
Parameters:
X2,Y2 – center point
X3,Y3 – end point
4.4.5.24 "ARCSCA", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,A
Draws an arc
Parameters:
X2,Y2 – center point
A – angle

4.4.5.25 "ARCSER", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,R
Draws an arc
Parameters:
X2,Y2 – end point
R – radius
4.4.5.26 "ARCSEA", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,A
Draws an arc
Parameters:
X2,Y2 – end point
A – angle
4.4.5.27 "RECT", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Draws a rectangle
Parameters:
X2,Y2 – end point
4.4.5.28 "RECTRND", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,R
Draws a rounded rectangle

Parameters:
X2,Y2 – end point
R – radius

4.4.5.29 "ELLIPSE", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,A
Draws an ellipse
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – first point
X2,Y2 – second point
A – angle
4.4.5.30 "TRIM", X,Y
Trims an element
Parameters:
X,Y – point defining the section of the element to be deleted
4.4.5.31 "CHAMFER", X1,Y1, X2,Y2,D1,D2
Generates a chamfer between two elements

Parameters:
D1 – first distance
D2 – second distance
4.4.5.32 "FILLET", X1,Y1, X2,Y2,R
Generates a fillet between two elements

Parameters:
R – radius

4.4.5.33 "CHAMFERPOLYLINE", X,Y, D
Generates chamfers for all elements of a polyline

Parameters:
X,Y – point for defining the object
D – distance
4.4.5.34 "FILLETPOLYLINE", X,Y,R
Generates fillets for all elements of a polyline

Parameters:
X,Y – point for defining the object
R – radius
4.4.5.35 "EXTEND", X1,Y1, X2,Y2
Extends two elements

Parameters:
4.4.5.36 "JOINALL"
Joins all elements

Parameters:
none
4.4.5.37 "OFFSET", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,D
Moves elements
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – point for defining the object
X2,Y2 – point for defining the side
D – distance

4.4.5.38 "BRIDGE", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,D
Generates a bridge
Parameters:
X1,Y1 – point for defining the object
X2,Y2 – point for defining the side
D – width
4.4.5.39 "BREAK", X,Y
Sets a break point

Parameters:
X,Y – break point
4.4.5.40 "PLACELI", X,Y
Sets a lead-in
Parameters:
X,Y – position
4.4.5.41 "DELETELI", X,Y
Deletes a lead-in
Parameters:
X,Y – position
4.4.5.42 "DIMH", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,H
Draws a horizontal dimensioning

Parameters:
H – height

4.4.5.43 "DIMV", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,H
Draws a vertical dimensioning

Parameters:
H – height
4.4.5.44 "DIML", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,H
Draws an aligned dimensioning

Parameters:
H – height
4.4.5.45 "DIMA", X1,Y1,X2,Y2,X3,Y3
Draws the dimensioning for an angle

Parameters:
X1,Y1 – point for defining the first line
X2,Y2 – point for defining the second line
X3,Y3 – point for defining the position
4.4.5.46 "DIMR", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Draws the dimensioning for a radius

Parameters:
X1,Y1 – point for defining the arc or circle

4.4.5.47 "DIMD", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Draws the dimensioning for a diameter

Parameters:
X1,Y1 – point for defining the arc or circle
4.4.5.48 "SELECTALL"
Selects all elements

Parameters:
none
4.4.5.49 "SELECTLAST", N
Selects the last N elements

Parameters:
N – number of last elements
4.4.5.50 "SELECT", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Selects an element defined by a point (x1 = x2,y1 = y2) or a rectangle

Parameters:
X1,Y1,X2,Y2 – points for the definition of a selected element
4.4.5.51 "MOVE", X1,Y1,X2,Y2
Moves selected elements

Parameters:
X2,Y2 – end point

4.4.5.52 "ROTATE", X,Y,A
Rotates selected elements

Parameters:
X,Y – rotation point
A – rotation angle
4.4.5.53 "ARRAY", D1,D2,N1,N2
Generates an array of duplicates of the selected objects in horizontal and vertical direction
Parameters:
D1 – horizontal distance
D2 – vertical distance
N1 – number of copies in horizontal direction
N2 – number of copies in vertical direction
4.4.5.54 "ARRAYP", X,Y,A,N
Generates a circular array of the selected objects

Parameters:
X,Y – rotation point
A – angle to fill
N – number of objects, use '-' if objects should not be rotated themselves
4.4.5.55 "SCALE", F
Scales the selected objects

Parameters:
F – scale factor

4.4.5.56 "MIRROR",X1,Y1,X2,Y2,iDelete
Mirrors the selected objects

Parameters:
X1,Y1 – start point of mirror axis
X2,Y2 – end point of mirror axis
iDelete – delete original object, '1' for 'Yes', '0' for 'No'
4.4.5.57 "JOIN "
Joins the selected objects

Parameters:
none
4.4.5.58 "TEXTCONVERT"
Converts selected text objects

Parameters:
none

Index
DXF import 164
3 OmniWin Options 164
3D cut contours saved saved as DXF 494, 509 Administration data, card in Layer
Administration 175
3D Image of bevels 422
Align relative CS 133
3D image printing
Align relative CS, function 78
tube combination 529
Aligned dimension function 223
3D Lines Export 494, 509
Aligned Function 79
3D object export 494, 508
All non-cutting at first 306
3D picture
All, card in Data Link dialog 376
automatic rotation 493, 499, 511
Always read
manual rotation 511
Technology Dialog 424
moving 511
Always set
perspective 511
stop rotation 499
AND combination for search criteria 364
update 493, 499, 511
Angle
zooming 511
coordinate system 131
Angle 180 degrees in two different angle
A ranges for lead lines 301
A4 format Angle a
reports 177 pipe penetration 541
About OmniWin 69, 341 Angle b
Absolute pipe penetration 542
coordinate system 131 Angle c
Absolute CS 179 pipe penetration 544
Absolute Ortho CS, function 78 Angle compensation
Absolute Polar CS, function 78 bevel cut 471
Access rights for database connection 375 Angle limit
Activate compensation values for machine 472 for break points 448
Activation time Angle of view 128
calculation for plan 330 Angular dimension function 223
Active part in Plan Info dialog 25 Angular function 79
Add Animation
speed reduction 327 Flyaround 130
Add button in OmniWin Macro 350 Turntable 130
Add or Remove Buttons 62 Application
Adding parts to the workspace during Boiler End 554
import 162 Application data 152
Administration data APPROX 247
display in drawing 144, 175 Approximate 246
edit for part 143 Approximation parameter for curve
mirror, priority 168 elements 104
Administration Data Arc
www.messersoft.com Index | 612

align text 243 Run before saving 301
create from straight line 246 settings for bevel plans 449
Diameter Dimension 225 Automatic Sequence function 80
draw 219 Automatic sequence method 302, 450
Radius Dimension 224 Automatic sequence, function 286
Arc Commands 196, 219 Automatic Text Conversion for cutting
Arc: 3 Points 196 and marking 171
Autonest Option 341
Arc: 3 Points function 71
Arc: Start, Center, Arc function 71, 197 Autonest Option dialog 356
Arc: Start, Center, End function 71, 72, 197 Autonest start
from workspace 43
Arc: Start, End, Angle function 71, 73, 197
Arc: Start, End, Radius function 71, 73, 197 Autoshift relative CS 133
Arcs Autoshift relative CS, function 78

Autotranslate in Layer Administration 141
break 246
Arcs, construct 70, 189 Axial pipe penetration
ARRAY 234 Boiler End 554

axis
Array function 73, 233
ARRAYH 232 name for REA Inkjet 587
ARRAYP 235
ARRAYV 233 B
ATC 570 B profile
ATTRIB entity DSTV 598
DXF import 164 Back color of the 3D object 502
Attribute dialog toolbar 61, 81, 175 Back function 350
Attributes and values of drawing objects, Background
show 18 for drawings 148
Attributes of drawing layers 121 for nesting plans 148
Attributes of process layers 151 Background color
Auto Column Sizing 373 drawing area 147
Auto nest 356 nesting plan 147
Auto Nest 341, 356 Background color of the 3D window 502
Auto Remnant Plate, function 72, 207 Background color of the drawing window 121
Auto Translation, checkbox 141 Background color of the nesting plan
AutoCAD window 121
DWG import 591 Barcode
DXF import 591 in Reports 115
AutoCAD compatibility 592 Base point
AUTOCS 133 of coordinate system 131, 133
Automatic nesting Bevel
from workspace 43 3D Image 422
icon80 declining 424
Automatic nesting in multitorch operation 406 directory 556
Automatic positioning display color 413
multitorch 394 gradient 424
Automatic sequence line style to display 413
bevel plans 444 view 413

Bevel angle c installation 536
pipe penetration 544 installation directories 536
Bevel comment start 536
delete 419 Branch tube deleting 520
Do not scale 419 Break
Bevel cuts function 421
lateral and angle compensation 470, 471 Break contours 228
select postprocessor 443 Break function 246
sequence 449 Break points
technology data 461 from CAD 448
technology database 443 on Part import 92
Bevel cutting remove 246
dished ends 530 set at start and end points 246
domed ends 530 set automatically 448
nesting plan 427 set lead-in 284
Bevel function 74 Break points, set/remove 246
Bevel Functions 408 Break polyline into several polylines 246
Bevel information, import DIN and ESSI Bridge
Code 460 double crossing 254
Bevel menu 416
Parameters 254
Bevel parameters 408, 458 without crossing 254
display and set 419 Bridge between contour elements 73, 227
Bevel profile 390
Bridge function 241, 254
select 391 Bridge Function 74, 75
Bevel transition Bridge Parameters 322
define 468
Bridges in inner contours 241
Bevel transitions 461 Build number
Bevel types 408 OmniWin 341
line style, color and thickness 413
nomenclature 409
C
Bevels
C2V
3D view of parts 126
license information 342
compensation values 470
CAD drawings with broken lines 162
DSTV 599
CAD Profile 386
set 413
Calculate
Bitmap
process data 339
import 103
Calculation in the coordinate input 18
Blind hole 477
Calculator in OmniWin Macro 352
Blind hole with countersink 477
Carriage
Block attributes
mark processes 397
ATTRIB entity 164
park during process change 582
Blocks
various processes 582
DSTV 598
Carriage index 582
Boiler End 530
carriage setting for multitorch usage 399
Geometry 546
CARRIAGE_INDEX 572
Global Control 555
Carriages

multitorch 394 Circle: 3 Points function 70, 72, 195
Cartesian coordinate system 131 Circle: Center, Diameter function 70, 72, 194
Case of application Circle: Center, Point function 70, 72, 194
Processes 554 Circle: Center, Radius function 70, 72, 194
CCS Circle: Tan, Tan, Radius function 71, 72, 195
Contour Cut Speed 325 Circles, construct 70, 189
Center of rotation Close 96
change 186 drawing 40
Chain cutting 255 nesting plan 40
Chamfer (bevel) dialog 440 objects in the workspace 40
Chamfer (bevel) function 238 part 40
Chamfer corners 73, 227 Close drawings 84
Change angle of lead lines 284 Coating
Change Attributes of Non-Translated vaporize 577
Objects, checkbox 157 Code
Change language 121 view NC code (bevel plans) 444
Change length of lead lines 284
Collision avoidance 302, 450
Change part name after save 159 autom. deactivation 306
Change part name after saving 159 overview 305
Change plan name after save 159
too many contours 306
Change plan name after saving 159 Collision check
Change plate origin for a plan 220 for inner contours 314
Change Plate Size
for outer contours 321
dialog 220 Collision check of the lead-in and
function 73, 219 lead-out line 284
Change the size of a plate 206 Collision control
Changed parts default values 473
Import DIN/ESSI code 283 Switching on and off 74
Changes in the 3D image, updating 511 Collision Control 312
Character spacing Collision Control Distance 312
REA 589 Collision control function for nesting 75
Character width Collision Control function for nesting 253
REA 589 Colored display of nested parts and plates 152
CHCUTREMN 218 Columns in database
Check Angle 315, 322 change the sequence 377
Check Distance 314, 321 hide 377
Check for license update 343 Combine straight lines 171
Check Radius 315, 322 Combined part
Checkbox to Display the Parts or Plates 376 icon 79
Circle Combined Part 280
align text 243 Command line 17
Diameter Dimension 225 Command Line Dialog 17
Manipulator functions 181 Commands, list previous 17
Radius Dimension 224 Comment function 79
Circle Commands 193, 219 Comment, add to dimension 226
Circle: 2 Points function 70, 72, 195 Comments

Group Code 999 164 Continued Cut
Common cut lead-out 319
stitch 257 Continuous marking 243
Common Cut 1 Contour Contour Cut
Parameter 256 Kjellberg 484
Set parameters for 3 types 323 Contour Cut Speed
set sequence 271 process data 325
types 323 Contour element
Common Cut 1 Contour function 75, 256 speed 155
Common Cut 1 Sequence, function 271 Contour elements, dimensions 221
Common Cut 2 Contours Contour type A1 505
Parameter 260 Contour type A2 505
Common Cut 2 Contours function 75, 260 Contour type for cutting the contour 505
Common Cut 2 Contours parameter 323 Contours
Common Cut Position function 273 automatically close if open 592
Common Cut Position, function 76 crossing, do not allow 171
Company logo delete double 171, 592
in Reports 107 delete overlapping 171
Compatibility to AutoCAD 592 delete short 171
Compensation angle 472 do not allow open 171
Compensation data 471 split several outer contours 118
Compensation lateral 472 texts as closed contours 242
Compensation values trim overlapping 592
definition 553 Contours added to tube developments 497
PerfectCut Editor 470 Convert text in contour 227
Compound all contours after DXF import 163 Convert Text into Closed Contours 242
Configuration Convert Text Into closed contours function 74
Postprocessor 562, 563 Convert Text into Continuous Contour 243
Configuration dialog for database 372 Convert text into cutting contour 498
Configuration, function in database 372 Convert text into outline contours 172
Configure Convert text into simple contours 172
Program window 16 Convert Text into Simple Contours 242
Connect contours 228 Convert Text Into Simple Contours function 74
Connected objects Converter, third-party 596
explode all 245 Converting texts 171
Connection to database, test 375 Coordinate input with calculations 18
Construct ellipses 198 Coordinate system
Construction Geometry 130 +X / BY 504
Construction mode 38 +Y / BX 504
Context menu absolute 120, 131
for nesting 251 Boiler End 538
Modify 251 move 120
Nest 251 origin 133
Continued cut 54 orthogonal 131
global 313, 321 polar 131
length 313, 321 relative 120, 131

set and change 120 Cut function 69, 117
turn 120 Cut inner projection 498
-X / BY 504 Cut order for bevel cutting 449
-Y / BX 505 Cut outer projection 498
zero point 131 Cut Remnant Plate 72
Coordinate System Cut Remnant Plate, function 217
set 504 Cut remnant plates 71, 206
Coordinate System Functions 77 Cuts
Copy 183 bevel cuts 409
objects 181 join 445
Copy drawing elements 68, 73, 227 Sequence 449
Copy function 69, 118 Cuts with rotation axis 490, 512
Copy function for nesting 75, 253 Cuts without rotary axis 489, 512
Copy function for Part Construction 229 Cutting Contours, view 433
Copy parts on a plan 74 Cutting kerf
Copy Toolbar for Part Construction 73 height sensing 578
Corner loop 75 Cutting of letters 498
round 264 Cutting of open contours 505
triangle 264 Cutting of tubes 489
Corner loops 263, 323 Cutting plan
Corners Check when saving 308, 453
rounding 445 Cutting sense
Create a new Drawing and new Plans 68 part side 444
Create Boiler End 539 remnant plate 218
Create C2V 342 Cutting sense for open contours 285
Create Combined Part 279 Cutting sense function 80
Create drawing 84 Cutting sense, function 285
Create nesting plan Cutting sequence
Boiler End 544 automatic determination 286
Create nesting plans 84 reduce the heat input 290
Create Plate on import 162 set manually 294
Create plates on import 162 Cutting small holes 484
Creating new projects 517 Cutting speed 324
CS (Coordinate System) Toolbar 60, 77 Boiler End 554
CSALIGN 133 compensation values 472
CSMOVE 134 Messer Hole 486
CSROTATE 134 set manually 155
Current Plan Info 331 Cutting time
Customer, Plan Info 48, 85, 331 calculation for plan 330
Customize dialog 64 Cutting time for a plan 23
commands 65 Cutting zone
options 67 Boiler End 539
toolbars 64
Customize function 63 D
Customize visible items 176 Data base grid for lead in and lead out 301
Cut drawing elements 68 Data Link dialog 374

Data lists Delete untranslated layers 142
nesting plan 105 DELREMN 216
Data log 568 Demo function 511
Data sources Demo Function 493, 499
reports 110 Development information in drawing 498
Data structure Development of a tube combination, displaying526
reports 110 Developments saved as DXF file 498
Database Developments, saving in the database 498
bevel cuts 461 Dialog boxes
Dialog Window 360 Anchor 16
Dialog Window toggle 362 move 16
find Record 363 position within drawing window 16
load all records 365 Switch on and off 16
Menu 361 Dialog window
select for bevels 443 show edge as icon 34
show in nesting plan 440 switch between window and docking
Database connection, set and edit 374 position 33
Database Dialog Dialog Window
context menu 382 docking with marks 32

Dialog windows
Database Dialog function 362
Databases group 33
where stored 152 separate 34

Dialogs boxes
DBDrill.exe 479
Decimal precision of dimension value 174 Switching on and off 120
Declining bevel 424 Diameter dimension function 225

Diameter function 79
Default font for input text 158
Default length from database 257, 323 Dimension
Default view 126 aligned 223

Angular 223
Defaults of OmniWin Tube 499
Define short keys for the OmniWin functions 121 Diameter 225
Delete contours with length less than 171 equal text height for zooming 174
Leader 225
Delete dimensions 171
Delete dimensions for nesting 171 Radius 224
Delete double contours 171, 592 Dimension functions 78, 221

Dimension Menu 221
Delete drawing elements 73, 227
Delete Function 73 Dimension style 121, 174
Delete layers that are not translated on import 94 Do not scale 174
Dimension Toolbar 61, 78
Delete Lead-in/Lead-out function 80
Delete Lead-in/Lead-out, function 285 Dimension, comment later on 226
Delete parallel contours closer than, option 171 Dimensioning

Horizontal Linear 222
Delete parts on a plan 74
Delete plot info 171 Vertical Linear 222
Delete plot infos for nesting 171 Dimensioning of contour elements 221
Dimensions, correct display 163
Delete search criteria 364
Delete Selected Records, function 371 DIN 28011
Delete Technology function 76, 273 boiler ends 530

DIN 28013 Draw All Bevel Comments
boiler ends 530 function 419, 422
DIN code Draw Bevel Comment
bevel plans 444 function 418, 421
import as drawing or plan 102 Draw commands 70
DIN format repeat 18, 36, 190, 207
text output with REA Inkjet 586 Draw Menu 189
DIN Format 51 Draw Menu for Nesting 206
DIN Format, scan 353 Draw Remnant Plate, function 72, 216
DIN import Draw remnant plates 71, 206
settings 159 Draw Toolbar 59, 70
DinImp.ini with DIN import settings 159 Draw Toolbar for Nesting 71
Direction Drawing
Angle for pipe penetration 542 close 96
Disable / Enable Contour create 85
function 286 import 68, 87, 596
Icon 80 move in any direction 124
Disabled, process 286 open 39, 87
Dished ends print 105
bevel cutting 530 save 96
Display save as 96
of parts and nesting plans 126 Drawing area
Do not Rotate Lead-in/Lead-out 312 background color 147
Do not scale for dimension 174 Drawing data with development
Dock Dialog Windows 33 information 498
Drawing elements
Docking marks 32
Domed ends copy 116
bevel cutting 530 cut 116

paste 116
Don’t allow any object inside inner contours 171
Don’t allow crossing contours 171 select 116
Don’t allow open contours 171 Show attributes and values 18

Drawing files
Dongle
black 345 Show latest 116
blue 344 Drawings

edit several at the same time 68
registration 344
show number 342 Drill
single workplace 344 nesting plan 454

process first 306, 451
Dongle ID
serial number 342 Process in OmniWin 476
Dongle Status 342 process sequence 306, 451

support in OmniWin 474
Don't allow mark contours outside the part 171
double crossing bridge 323 DRILL
Down function 274 layer syntax for import 593

Drill attributes dialog 476
Drag a column header here to group by
that column 378 Drill data
Drag bar for moving 16 activate/lock 176

regional package 177 DWG, convert inch to mm 159
Drill Data Base window 479 DWG, output in inches 159
Drill database MGDrillDB.mdb 341, 479 DXF
Drill hole import drill holes 593
import 593 DXF administration data
Drill parameter names 479 mirror, priority 168
Drill parameters DXF export
nesting plan options 454 production data 99
Drill point, function 70, 191, 475 DXF file, save 498
Drill points DXF files
import from DXF 593 bevel information 459
import syntax 593 DXF files import 137
set 477 DXF files, import/export directories 121
Show different processes 477 DXF format of the cut contour of a 3D
Drill process 478 object 509
Drill support DXF format of the surface of a 3D object 508

DXF format, import from AutoCAD 591
PP for machines with Global Control 570
Drill Table 479 DXF Import
Drill unit type quality information 424

DXF, convert inch to mm 159
nesting plan options 454
Drill unit types 480 DXF, output in inches 159
Drill Unit Types table in the drill database 480

Drilled hole with countersink 477 E
Drilling Edge of the tube with surface cut 513
in the Object Info Dialog 478 Edit commands 73
Drilling hole diameter, graphical display 180, 477 Edit drawing elements 116
Drilling holes Edit drawings 227
DSTV 599 Edit macro
Driven carriage parameters 468
multitorch 394 Edit Menu 116
DSTV 597 Edit text dimension function 226
import options 163 Edit Text function 79
Inches 600 Edit thickness and thickness range, dialog 461
DSTV format 87 Editing the connection 374
Duplicate drawing elements 73, 227 EIA Format 51
DWF format 87 Ellipse: Center, Point, Angle 198
import in OmniWin 87 Ellipse: Center, Point, Angle function 71
DWG Ellipse: Center, Point, Distance 199
Import from AutoCAD 592 Ellipse: Point, Point, Angle 199
DWG DXF Import 162 Ellipse: Point, Point, Distance 199
DWG export Ellipses, construct 70, 189, 198
production data 99 End bevel 430
DWG files End bevel, parameter 433
bevel information 459 End macros, display 431
DWG files import 137 End parameter for a bevel 424
DWG format, import from AutoCAD 591 Erase function 231

Erase function for nesting 251 Fields, restore 371
Error corrections in part drawings 592 File Menu 84
ESSI code Files, input/output directories 146
import as drawing or plan 102 Fill Parts and Plate 129
ESSI Code 444 Fillet function 239
ESSI Format 51 Fillet Function 74
ESSI Format, scan 353 Fillet radius for lead-in line 506
ESSI import Film
settings 159 vaporize 577
EssiImp.ini with DIN import settings 159 Filter
Evaporation See Vaporization database 381
EVERY_START 582 Find Contours in Image
Exit function 116 dialog 103
Expanded options to join contours 445 function 103
Explode Fine Feature Cutting
function 421 process data 325
EXPLODE 245 FIRST_START 582
Explode all Fix dialog window 34
function 245, 421 Fixed numbers and distances, Multiple
Explode contours 73, 228 torch operation with automatic nesting 408
Explode dimension, leader, tolerance Option 163 Fixed numbers, Multiple torch operation
with automatic nesting 407
Explode function 245
Flank angle 408
Explode Function 74
Flexible zero point
EXPLODEALL 245
Export
Font type for text 158
CSV 97
Foreground, card in OmniWin options 152
list of parts 97
Forerun
nesting plan data 84, 97
REA text 584
production data 99
Formed ends 530
templates 98
Forward function 350
Export functions 13
Front color of the 3D object 502
Export Path 97
Front View function 515, 525
Extend drawing elements 73, 227
Full Auto, Multiple torch operation
Extend function 240 with automatic nesting 407
Extend Function 74 Full circle inner contours 485
Extended, card in Data Link dialog 375 Full render of a 3D object 502
Extension line spacing 174 Functions
Extract contours from images 84 for export 13
for import 13
F move and copy 63
FACTOR_DIST_CROSS_CUT 578 Functions for dimensions 78, 221
FACTOR_SPEED_CROSS_CUT 578 Functions for nesting 79
FF
Fine Feature Cutting 325 G
Fiberblade Laser cutting machine GC position
Postprocessor 573

multitorch 397 Group Headings
GC_LASER 573 shade light blue 373
GC_OXY_DRILL 570 Group of parts
GC_OXY_DRILL_ATC 570, 572 add to workspace 279
GC_PLASMA_DRILL 570 Grouping according to one or more
GC_PLASMA_DRILL_ATC 570, 572 columns 378
GC_PLASMA_DRILL_TRUEHOLE 570, 572

GC_PLASMA_DRILL_TRUEHOLE_ATC 572 H
GC_PLASMA_MTORCH 569 H1
GC_PLASMA_MTORCH_3.01 GC_ tool code 577
OXY_MTORCH 569 H2
GC_PLASMA_MTORCH_TRUEHOLE 569 tool code 577
General H3
section in Technology dialog 440 tool code 577
Generate production data H4
configuration 99 tool code 577
Geometry, edit in Part Info 21 Header
GeoTech DSTV 598
program data 152 Heat Distribution Sequence 290
Global continued cut length 313, 321 Height adaption
Global Control rapid rate 305
Boiler End 555 Height of the dimension text 174
Grain restriction 145 Height sensing 579
automatic nesting 359 change mode 576
rotate 230, 253 kerfs 578
Graphic board offset 467
system information 341 tactile or swing-arm 576
Graphics Help for OmniWin 68, 341
in Reports 107 Help lines
Graphics file spacing 501
import 87 Help lines in tube development 500
Grid Help Menu 341
menu option 178 Hide dialog window 34
options 147 Hole attributes 475
snap points 147 Home function 350
Grid for drawing page 274 Home page in Macro, change 351
Grid function 515, 525 Horizontal Array function 232
Grid options 147 Horizontal arrow size 174
Grid spacing Horizontal linear dimensioning feature 222
OmniWin-Tube 529 Horizontal Linear, function 79
Gross area for a part 20 HPRXD
Gross weight for a part 20 True Hole 484
Group Code 999 HPRXD-MGC-UWP 325
DXF import 164 Hypertherm
Group columns 378 Process parameters 329
Group Dialog Windows 33 underwater plasma systems 325

Hypertherm (HPRXD) Import of Lantek geometry files 356
True Hole 484 Import profile
select 88, 95
I view 95
I Vertical cut 408 Import Profile 387
Icons Importing of Parts and Plans in DIN- or

ESSI code as drawing or as Plan 84
add back removed 62
Inch
move and copy 63
DSTV 600
ID field 376
measurement 147
Identical parts
Inclination angle
copy techology 281
pipe penetration 541
Identification Text 165
Inclined bevel 424
Identification texts for administration data 176
Increments
IGES files 87
for rotation 185
IGES format
Info Lines for Pipe 2 500
load drawing 87
Info Lines for Pipe 3 500
Images
Information
reports 113
in NC code 567
IMP\DIN subdirectory 159
Information on the layer Plotinfo, delete
IMP\ESSI subdirectory 159 for nesting 171
Import INI file
Create plate 162 Postprocessors 564
drill points 593 INI files for postprocessors 300
DSTV options 163 Inkjet
graphics file 87 texts 203
Lead-In/Lead-Out recognition 162 Inkjet REA
move or delete file 169 DIN output 586
options 169 Inner Contour Settings 313
part drawing 87 Inner contours
part in database 169 Join macro 445
Part recognition 162 link cuts 445
parts into workspace 162 sequence 303, 451
pixel formats 103 sequence to reduce the heat input 290
Import Color 157 Inner contours sequence 503
Import DIN Code as Drawing 102 Inner contours, sort 173
Import DIN Code as Plan 102 Inner radius for rounded right poly 496
Import DIN/ESSI code Input and Output 529
changed parts 283 Inputs, list previous 17
Import ESSI Code as Drawing 102 Insert inner contour
Import ESSI Code as Plan 102 Boiler End 541
Import file Installation 14
splitting 597 Boiler End 536
Import functions 13 Invert Selection function 120
Import layer Isocteur 203
untranslated 142
Import Layer 141

J delete 140
delete on import 93
Job, Plan Info 48, 85, 331
hide individually 140
Join
missing 142
function 421
OmniScript 444
Join All function 245
Overview 137
Join contours 73, 228
translate manually 92
Join function 245, 255
translate on import 92
Join macro
Layer /'Administration/'
inner contours 445
hide 176
Join macros, display 432
Layer „Import“ 157
JOINALL
Layer Administration
DXF import 163
Auto Translation 141
Joint dialog window 514
dialog 174
Layer Toolbox 174
K
Layer Administration, function 77
K cut 409
Layer cutting for projection cut 512
Kerf compensation 285
Layer cutting for surface cut 512
Kerf crossing
Layer for projection cuts 498
height sensing 578
Layer Inkjet
Kerf Width 324
texts 203
Key combinations
Layer of the lead-in and lead-out lines 82
for manipulator 189
Layer syntax
Key combinations for functions 35
drill points 593
Key symbol 376
Layer Toolbox in Layer Administration 174
crossed out 376
Layer translation
KEY.INI file for short cuts 149
on import 92
Keys for functions 35
Layer Translation 137
Kjellberg
Dialog 137
Contour Cut 484
Layer Translation, function 78
Process parameters 329
Lead in
underwater plasma systems 325
Layer 82
Lead In
L pre-piercing 574
Land height 409 process first 574
Language 150 Lead in type
Language support Messer Hole Technology 329
OmniWin user interface 150 Lead in types 505
Lantek geometry files, import 356 Lead lines
Large icons, checkbox 67 Change length and angle 284
Lateral compensation rotate 284
bevel cut 471 Lead lines for inner contours, types 314
Lateral offset Lead lines, no rotation 312
definition 553 Lead out
Layer Layer 82
Administration 136 Lead Point

for the inner contour 314 Line function 70, 72, 191
set 316 Line thickness 152
Leader dimension function 225 Line Type 151
Lead-in Lines, construct 70, 189
Boiler End 548 Link Function 74, 75
on breakpoint 284 Linking cuts 255
placement 284 List of parts
pre-piercing 265 export 97
Lead-In Load All Database Records, function 365
for inner contours 314 Logo
for outer contours 321 in Reports 107
Lead-in and lead-out Loop 75
collision check 284 Loops
Lead-in length 506 corner loops 263
Lead-in line setting 505
Lead-in/Lead-out M
configure remnant cut 310 M112
Lead-In/Lead-Out recognition on import 162 tool code 577
Lead-ins and lead-outs Machine Code 300
delete 285 Machine code creation 493, 499, 507
form 284 Machine code creation with selected
place 284 postprocessor 300
Lead-ins and lead-outs at inner contours Machine Code Export function 493, 507
shape 313 Machine data creation 493, 507
Lead-ins and lead-outs at outer contours Machine Data Export function 493, 507
shape 320 Machine independent data format 493, 507
Lead-out Machine profile 388
Boiler End 548 activate/lock 176
continued cut 319 production data 99
for inner contours 314 regional package 177
for outer contours 321 select 389
stitch 318 Machines Settings 327
Left function 274 Macro
Length of lead-in 506 calculate input parameters 352
Letter format change Home page 351
reports 177 define for bevels 468
License direct parameter input 351
registration 344 edit parameters 468
License information Select from macro pictures 351
exporting 342 Macro database
Lifter time minimization 302, 450 PerfectCut Editor 464
Limiting angle for cuts without Macro dialog window 349
rotary axis 505, 512 Macro Docked View function 350
Line Macro parameter
convert into arc 246 bevel database 467
Line Commands 191, 218 Macro sketch, view 435

Macro window view 350 Matrix function for nesting 75, 252
Macros Matrix nesting 74
Boiler End 548 MAX_DISTANCE 580
Macro parameters, dialog 465, 472 MAX_PIERCE_POINTS 580
Macros and macro parameters Maximum area for speed reduction 326
dialog 464 maximum size of the rectangle
Main Toolbar 59, 68 circumscribed around the contour for
laser cutting 574
Main Tube 517
ME10 format 596
Main window 15
Measure angle 120, 136
Make remnant cut 211
Measure Angle, function 77
Manipulator
Measure Bar 77, 136
decrease 180
Measure length 120, 135
increase 180
Measure Length, function 77
Manipulators
Measure Point 120, 135
configuration 154
Measure Point, function 77
menu 180
Measure Radius 120, 135
show/hide 180
Measure Radius, function 77
Manufacturing time 330
Measure Toolbar 60, 77, 136
Mark
Measurement
process first 306, 451
Inch 121, 147
process sequence 306, 451
millimeter 121, 147
REA 203
switch 121, 147
Mark processes
View in status bar 147
multitorch 397
mec files 356
Mark texts 172
Memory information 341
Marking contour, sort 173
Menu
Marking contours
Bevel when nesting 439
DSTV 599
Menu animations 67
Marking drill 477
Menu Database 361
Marking of Points 573
Menu Dimensions 221
Marking time
Menu Draw for Nesting 206
calculation for plan 330
Menu Edit 116
Material
Menu File 84
bevel database 461
Menu Help 341
DXF import 164
Menu Modify 227
in drill database 482
Menu Snap 274
minimize requirement 230
Menu View 120, 177
nesting plan 27
Menu, Draw 189
process data 339, 340
Menus
Material description, entry 500
customize 63
Material group
undo changes 65, 66
bevel database 461
Messer Hole
show in nesting plan 440
Cutting Speed 486
Material names for drilling 480
process database 336
Material table in the database 480
Messer Hole in process database 336
Materials 327

Messer Hole technology Mirror function for nesting 75, 254
checkbox 328 Mirror Plan 71, 206
use 485 Mirror Plan, function 73, 221
Messer Hole Technology Modify commands 73, 74
inner contours 303 repeat 18, 36, 190, 207
Postprocessor 572 Modify drawings 227
sequence 303 Modify Menu 227
Messer Process Optimization 302, 450 Modify Toolbar 60
MesserSoft Type E Modify Toolbar for Nesting 74
dongle 344 Modify Toolbar for Part Construction 73
MesserSoft Type F Mouse pointer
dongle 345 rotating arrows 126
Meta data Mouse wheel
in DXF files 164 pan horizontal 125
Method of choosing lead point 316 vertical pan 125
in the inner contour 313 zoom 125
in the outer contour 320 Mouse wheel for vertical pan 125
MGDrillDB.mdb 341, 479 Move
MI files drag and drop 181
Show in Open File dialog in OmniWin 596 objects 181
MI files: 596 Move drawing elements 73, 227
Micro stitches 580 Move function 73, 229
MICRO_STITCH Move function for nesting 75, 252
micro stitch 580 Move left function for nesting 76
Min required plate length/width 30 Move parts 74
Min. required plate length 30 Move point to the center of the drawing
Min. required plate width 30 window 124
MIN_TACTILE_THICKNESS 576 Move relative CS 133

Move relative CS, function 78
minimized surrounding rectangle for a part 230
Minimum area, remnant plate 211 Move right function for nesting 76
Minimum distance Move to bottom function for nesting 76

Move top function for nesting 76
multitorch carriages 394
Minimum distance of the start point to Moving a 3D picture 511
the contour 506 MSTITCH 262
Minimum outline rectangle length, MSTITCHB 262
remnant plate 211 MTEXT command in DXF 87
Minimum outline rectangle width,
MULTI_AXIS 572
remnant plate 211
Multi-axis machine 582
Minimum raster width, remnant plate 210
Multilines function 70, 72, 192
Minimum Size for readable objects in
picture 103 Multiple stitches
Mirror configuration 323
allow for auto nesting 359 delete 263

import from DXF 168 Multiple Stitches 75, 262
Mirror a plan 73, 221 3 Points 75
Mirror drawing elements 73, 227 Multiple torch operation

Mirror function 74, 240 with automatic nesting 406

Multitorch close 96
carriage setting 399 export data 99
dialog 392 find in database 363
mark processes 397 open 39
menu 392 print 105
park position 397 rotate view 125
Multitorch dialog save 96
toolbar 398 Nesting plan data
Multitorch dialog docked view, function 394 export 99
MultiTorch docked view, function 394 Nesting plan options
Multitorch in "Autonest Option" dialog 406 Messer Hole configuration 328, 485
MultiTorch operation Plan check 308, 453
postprocessors 569 process parameters 329
Multitorch Options 394 Technology (Bevel) 445
MULTITORCH section in multiple torch Nesting plans
postprocessor 569 Show four latest 116
MULTITORCH_INFOFILE section in
Nesting plans, import/export directories 121
multiple torch postprocessor 569
Nesting Toolbar 61, 79
Network settings for database connection 375
N
New bevel
Name of the original tube in the drawing 527
dialog 469
Navigate back in OmniWin Macro 350
New button in Macro 350
Navigate forward in OmniWin Macro 350
New drawing function 68, 85
Navigate to the Macro home page 350
New function 493, 494
NC
New Nesting Plan 68, 85
DSTV 597
New tube creation 493, 494
NC code
Next bevel
plan information 567
parameter 431, 433
production data 99
Next bevel
view bevel plans 444
set in database 469
NC Code creation with selected
Next bevel area in OmniBevel database 466
postprocessor 300
No (Drilling) 477
NC code, save to separate directory 146
Nodes 513
NC Import, card in OmniWin options 159
Notes, Plan Info 48, 85, 331
Negative, for picture contours 104
Null point
Nest Array 74
absolute and relative 131, 133
Nest Array function 235
Number
Nest function 79
of parts in the workspace 148
Nest Menu 277
Number Info Lines for Pipe 1 500
NEST.MDB 591
Number of parts
NESTI.MDB 591
on import 92
Nesting commands 74
Nesting in row pattern 74
Nesting Parameter Toolbar 49, 61, 81
O
Nesting plan O2/O2 process for mild steel and holes
whose diameter is the same as the
background color 147 material thickness 484

Object Info Dialog 18 Open drawings 84
Drill 478 Open drawings and plans 68
Object snapping to the grid 76 Open nesting plan 68
Offset from end 467 OpenGL
Offset from start 467 System information 341
Offset function 74, 241 Operating sequence of part contours,
Offset, none, left, right 285 specify manually for a part 287
Optimization Level 358
OmniBevel
bevel plans, further processing 444 Options Auto Remnant Plate, dialog 207
further processing of bevel plans 444 Options dialog for tube connections 527
Options dialog of OmniWin Tube 499
macros 465
OmniBevel DB Macro Options for OmniWin 12
program 472 Options for tube joints 515

Options function 69
OmniScript
layer 444 Options function for nesting. 79
OmniScript 2 444 Options function for tube joints 527

Options function in OmniWin Tube 493
OmniScript2
texts 205 Options in OmniWin 86
OmniWin Enhanced 11 Options in the nest menu 299

Options, setting 145
OmniWin Help 14, 68
OmniWin Help Contents 341 OPTROTATE command for rotating a part 230
OmniWin interface OR combination for search criteria 364

Orbit tool
Profile 383
OmniWin Macro rotate view 125
Calculator 352 Orientation

rotate view 125
selection bar 351
OmniWin options Original contours, display 434
Open and Save 158 Orthogonal

OmniWin Options
Administration Data 164 Orthogonal coordinate system
NC Import 159 Boiler End 538

Orthogonal View 128
OmniWin Options, open dialog 86
OmniWin Professional 11 Outer bend
OmniWin Standard 11 cutting zone 539

Outer contour must exist 171
OmniWin Tube defaults 499
OmniWin Tube docked view Function 510 Outer Contour Settings 320
OmniWin user interface Outer contours

split serveral 118
languages 150
On the contour lead-in 505 Outer radius for rounded right poly 496
Online Help 14 Output directory, separate for NC file 146

Overrun
Open
menu 86 REA text 584
Open and Save, card in OmniWin options 158 Overview

production data 99
Open contours do not allow 171
Open contours with precision for joining 171
Open drawing 68

P Part Number Position for sequence
numbers 304, 451
Pan horizontal with the mouse wheel 125 Part of part list, show in geometry
Pan Realtime function 69, 124 window 376
Pan vertical with the mouse wheel 125 Part or Plate List columns, change width 378
Parallel contour, create 74, 241 Part overview
parallel contours, create 227 Reporting 105
Parallel contours, create 73 Part parameter for active part in workspace 25
Parameter name 165 Part part distance 312
Parameters Part plate distance 312
reports 110, 111 Part plate distance for remnant plates 211
Parameters of the original tube in the Part preview
drawing 528 on import 91
park position Part properties
multitorch 394 DXF import 164
Park position on import 90, 92
multitorch 397 Part recognition on import 162
Parking Part record identification 376
during process change 582 Part sequence
Part 38 in Reports 115
copy 183 Part side
delete selected 371 cutting sense 444
find in database 363 Part side right or left 301
import 87 Part, minimize circumscribed rectangle 230
rotate 184 Parting cuts in inner contours 193
Part info PartLib.mdb 375
reports 110 Parts
Part Info 367 open 39
Part Info Dialog 143, 369 separate into several drawings 118
Part Info in the Object Info Dialog 19 workspace 38
Part Info, edit 20 Parts for auto nest 358
Part information Parts Import
reports 110 in database 169
Part Library 360 move or delete file 169
enable in the dongle 360 options 169
load all parts 365 select files 89
Part list settings 89
configure view 372 Parts Import dialog 89
edit 376 Parts list
view 376 display all columns without scrolling 373
Part name view a part 367
DXF import 164 Parts with several contours inside each other 173
on import 92 Parts, in color 152
Part names Paste drawing elements 68
in Reports 115 Paste function 69, 118
show in nesting plan 298 Path

sequence of subcontours 435 in NC code 567
PDF Plan: Run After Import 162
production data 99 Planar Rendering Mode 128
PDF documentation 14 Planinfo
Permit Mirror 145 reports 111
Permit Part in Part for auto nest 358 Plans
Perpendicular lead-in 505 edit several at the same time 68
Perpendicular Rounding lead-in 506 Plastic film
Perspective 128 vaporize 577
Perspective function 515, 525 Plate
Perspective of a 3D picture 500, 511 compensation values 441
Perspective View 128 create 369
Perspective view of the tube combination 525 delete selected 371
Picture files import 103 find in database 363
Picture objects macro data 441
reports 113 save 369
Pictures Plate for auto nest 358
extract contours 103 Plate in bevel database 465, 472
Piercing Plate Library
pre-piercing 265 load all plates 365
Piercing time 324 Plate list
Pin in window title 34 configure view 372
PINSTAMP edit 376
text marking 205 view 376
Pipe cutting Plate material 27
Postprocessors 575 Plate of plate list, show in geometry window 376
Pipe penetration Plate record identification 376
axial, radial 532 Plates
Boiler End 530, 540 compensation values 470
Pivot point Plates administration in OmniWin database 360
move 181, 186 Plates list
Pixel formats display all columns without scrolling 373
import 103 view a plate 367
Place Lead-in/Lead-out function 79 PLC angle calculation
Place Lead-in/Lead-out, function 284 REA 588
Plan PLC_ANGLE_CORRECTION 588
find in database 363 PLC_ANGLE_ROT 588
save in plan library 370 POINT entity 593
Plan check option 308, 453 Point function 70, 190
Plan data 22 Point marking 573
Plan Info Dialog 22 Points, construct 70, 189
plan info folder 22 Polar
Workspace 25 coordinate system 131
Plan Info in plan info folder 22 Polar Array function 73, 234
Plan Info, edit 26 Polar coordinate system
Plan information Boiler End 539

Polygon PP_GCTubePlasmaDin 591
construct circumscribing a circle 200 PP_MgEssi 590
construct inscribed in circle 200 PP_ObevelEssi 590
Polygon circumscribed about circle 189 Precision for joining objects into contour 171
Polygon circumscribed about circle, function 201 PreDrillDiameter1 483
Polygon inscribed in circle 189 Preliminary License 343
Polygon inscribed in circle, function 200 Pre-Piercing
Polyline, break into several polylines 246 laser postprocessor 574
Polyline, break up into elements 245 Pre-piercing geometries 265
Post Import Actions Pre-point offset
OmniWin options 169 height sensing off 467
Post-point offset Prerotate parts for auto nest 358
height sensing on 467 Pressure vessels 530
Postprocessor Preview selected layers 94
configuration for Boiler End 546 Previous bevel
FiberBlade Laser cutting machine 573 parameter 432, 433
INI file 564 set in database 469
installation 556 Previous bevel area in OmniBevel
modify 562 database 466
Print
pre-piercing 574
Save configuration 563 parts, nesting plans 105
select for bevels 443 parts, nestings 105

production data 99
show in nesting plan 440
Tube 575 Print drawings 84
universal 300, 444 Print drawings and plans 68

Print function 68
where stored 556
Postprocessor for Messer Hole Technology 572 Print Image 3D function 516, 529
Postprocessor GC_LASER 573 Print preview 105

Print template creation 84
Postprocessor GC_TUBE
INI file 575 Print templates
Postprocessor, select 300 create 109

edit 108
Postprocessors
drill support 570 Priority 145
INI files 300 automatic nesting 359

import from DXF 168
where stored 152
PP_GCLaserDin 590 Process
PP_GCOxyDin 590 assign layers on import 92

Boiler End 545
PP_GCOxyDinMTorch 590
PP_GCOxyDrillDin 590 new process 339, 340
PP_GCOxyDrillPneumaDin 591 options 324

Process „Drill“ 476
PP_GCPlasmaDin 591
PP_GCPlasmaDinMTorch 591 in the Object Info Dialog 478
PP_GCPlasmaDrillDin 591 Process data

adding 338
PP_GCPlasmaDrillPneumaDin 591
PP_GCTubeLaserDin 591 assign automatically 340
PP_GCTubeOxyDin 591 based on available data 338

calculate 339 Profiles toolbar 61, 384, 385
copying 338 Program Data Directory 152
delete 339 Program window
new material 339, 340 configure 16
process database 335 Programmer, Plan Info 48, 85, 331
updating 340 Projection cut 490, 505, 512
Process data editing 333 Provider, card in Data Link dialog 375
Process Database Prozess launch
technology data 335 NC code 582
Process descriptions 325 Pulling a window for selection 37
Process layer 151
properties 151 Q
Process material 27, 86 QR code
Process parameters in Reports 115
Messer Hole 329 Quality
Process selection bevel 424
Boiler End 554 FF and CCS 325
Process Selection 307
Process, Representation 151 R
ProcessData 152
Radial pipe penetration
Processes
Boiler End 554
Availability in the machine profile 307
Radius
in process database 325
multitorch carriages 394
Radius dimension function 224
Selection for nesting plan 307
Radius function 79
Sequence 306, 451
Radius of the rounding 496
Processor
Rapid move time
system information 341
calculation for plan 330
Production data
Rapid rate
additional functions 100
convert for marking texts 243
external application 100
Rapid traverse distance minimization 302, 450
further processing 100
Rapid traverse lines 303, 451
generate 99
in Reports 115
location 101
REA
log 99
character spacing 589
options 100
character width 589
Production Statistics 331
DIN output 586
Production time
text marking 203
Configuration 310
REA rotation
Production Time 330
in NC code or PLC 588
Profile 383
REA rotation axis
change 385
define 587
find in database 363
REA text
Profile for bevel machines 390
actual length 585
Profiles
configuration 583
database 383

font 585 Cut 217
forerun 585 Draw 216
forerun, overrun 584 Save as XML file 216
overrun 585 Remnant plate cut
position 584 change 218
PP settings 586 Remnant plate cutting
REA tool type 586 configuration 310
REA type configuration for straight cutting 310
set 586 Remnant plate type
REA_16PIN Negative 208
REA type in ini 586 Optimized 213
Read Raster 212
button 424 Stripes 210
Read Multitorch 393 Remnant plates, automatic
REA-Text creation 71, 72, 206, 207
display 584 Remove by vaporizing

plastic film 577
Recent files function 116
Reconnect to PartLib.mdb 376 Remove command from a menu or a
toolbar 66
Record
Remove function for nesting 75
search in database 363
Rendering 126
Records
Repetition of Draw
filter 381 Commands 18, 36, 190, 207
Records list Repetition of Modify
view all 367 Commands 18, 36, 190, 207
Rectangle Report
draw 219 activate/lock 176

rounded 219 generate PDF 107
surrounding 30 HTML 107
Rectangle function 71, 73, 200 MS Word 107

Rectangles, construct 70, 189 Report Designer 109
Rectangular plate utilization 30 Report templates 106
Redo command 69, 117 create 109

Redo commands 68, 116 edit 108
Reduce Speed Factor 325 for all languages 107
Reduce Speed Parameters 327 Report Window 17

Region Reporting 105
Show elements 177 Reports
Registration 344 data structure 109

Relative production data 99
coordinate system 131 regional package 177
Relative Ortho CS, function 78 Resolve dimensions 162

Relative Polar CS, function 78 Revision number
Remnant plate OmniWin 341
change cutting sense 218 Right function 274

delete 216 Right View function 515, 525
Remnant Plate Rotate 184

change center 186 Scanning of NC Code in DIN and ESSI
objects 181 Formats 353
step angle 185, 230, 253 Scrap frame of inner contours 193
Rotate a plan 73, 220 Scrap Line 193

Scrap Line function 70
Rotate drawing elements 73, 227
Rotate function 73, 229 Search criteria 363
Rotate function for nesting 75, 253 add 364

combine AND or OR 364
Rotate Lead-in/Lead-out function 79
Rotate Lead-in/Lead-out, function 284 delete 364
Rotate parts on a plan 74 Search Records in Database, function 363

Select a command when scanning 355
Rotate Plan 71, 206
Rotate Plan, function 73, 220 Select a contour when scanning 355
Rotate relative CS 133 Select All function 120

Select drawing elements 116
Rotate relative CS, function 78
Rotate view Select functions 35
Orbit 125 Select orders 35

Selected objects in the Object Info Dialog 18
Rotating a 3D picture 511
Rotating arrows Selected objects in the Plan Info Dialog 25
mouse pointer 126 Selection tool

configuration 154
Rotating lead lines 284
Rotation axis 504 Selection window 36
Rotation of the 3D object, stopping 499, 511 Sensing

change mode 576
Rounded Rectangle 219
Rounded rectangle function 71, 73, 200 swing-arm 576
Rounding tactile 576

thin plates 576
corners 445
Rounding corners 73, 227 Sentinel HL Pro
Rounding radius for rounded rectangle 496 dongle 344

Sentinel HL Time
Rounding X coord. Shift lead-in 506
Run before saving, automatic sequence 301 dongle 345
Separate
parts and drawings 118
S
Separate Parts 118
Save
Separate parts before saving into the
imported files 142 database 173
missing layers 142 Separate parts before saving into the
Save Active Records, function 370 database, option 173
Save As 96 Separate parts for separating several
parts in a drawing into several
Save drawings 84
separate drawings 116
non-translated import layers 142
Sequence
Save drawings and plans 68
automatic start corner 302, 450
Save function 96
in Reports 115
Save plate
meander 302, 450
dialog 369
Sequence numbers 304, 451
Scale for picture contours 104
Sequence of parts
Scaling Function 74, 240
automatic determination 286
Scaling objects 73, 227

set manually 294 Show Only Import, checkbox 138
Sequence of processes Show Only Toolbox, checkbox 138
drill and mark 306, 451 Show Original Contours
Sequence settings function 441
bevel plans 449 Show Original Contours, function 434
Sequence Settings 302, 450 Show Part function 515, 526
Serial number Show Part Names
Dongle ID 342 function 80, 298
Set Show parts or plates of one group
button 424 only 379
Show Plate Null 179
Set Contour Sequence function 80
Set Contour Sequence, function 287 Show Project Editor 515, 516
Set Cut Process to Bevel Layer Show relative CS, function 78, 179
Show result in notepad 300
checkbox 459
Set Default Connection 376 Show Result in Notepad
Set default length by database outer bevel plan 444

contour parameters, checkbox 260 Show Selection, checkbox 139
Set Fields, function 371 Show Start Points 299
Set null of coordinate system for plate 80 Show Start-End Marker
Set Part Sequence function 80 function 421
Set Part Sequence, function 294 Show Start-End Marker, function 179
Set Plate Null 299 Show technocontour
Set Rows 251 function 441
Set Rows function 75 Show unfold contour for projection cut 501
SET_DLOG_ON 568 Side Cutting 503
SET_PREPIERCING SIMPLE_DRILL 570
lead in first 574 Simulate a scanned drawing 355
SET_PREPIERCING_DIST Simulation Function 80
lead in first 574 Simulation toolbar 297
SET_VAPORIZATION 577 Simulation, function 297
SETBEVSEQ 435 Single Line Text
Setting the sequence for inner and function 71
marking contours 121, 173 Single stitch
Settings for tube connections 527
configuration 323
Shade Group Headings 373 Single Stitch 261
Shift function (Offset) 241 Single stitches
Short Key 149
min. width 323
Short keys for functions 35 Sink diameter
Show absolute CS, function 78 graphical display 477
Show All Records, function 367
Sink diameter, graphical display 180
Show drilling hole Sketch 38
Menu item 228 Sketch: Run After Import 161
Show drilling hole, function 477
Skew
Show empty group nodes corner rounding 445
workspace 148 Small Contour Area Limit 505
Show null of coordinate system 80
Small Contour length limit 505

Smooth Method 103 Split
Snap parts and drawings 118
grid 275 Splitting the drawing region into several
Snap function 274 drawing windows 68
Start Auto Nest function 356
Snap Menu 274
Snap Modes 274 Start automatic nesting 80
Snap point 181 Start Bevel 430

Start bevel, parameter 433
move 187
Snap Release function 77, 277 Start corner
Snap the start point of contour 284 automatic sequence 302

automatic sequence 450
Snap to center function 76
Snap to Center function 276 Start corner for auto nest 357
Snap to end point function 76 Start macros, show 430

Start parameter for a bevel 424
Snap to Endpoint function 275
Snap to Intersection function 76, 276 Start point
Snap to middle point function 76 of coordinate system 131, 133

on Part import 92
Snap to Middlepoint function 276
Snap to Nearest function 77, 276 Start point, distance to the contour 506
Snap To Ortho 192 Start-End Marker for Contour

Elements, show 179, 228
Snap to ortho function 77
Statement
Snap to Ortho function 277
production data 99
Snap to perpendicular function 76
Statements 105
Snap to Perpendicular function 276
Step angle
Snap to quadrant function 76
automatic nesting 359
Snap to Quadrant function 276
for rotation 185
Snap to tangent function 76
Stickers 32
Snap to Tangent function 276
Stitch 75
Snap to the grid 76
for common cut 257
Snap Toolbar 60, 76
lead-out 318
Software protection plug (dongle) 342
min. width 323
Sort a column 378
Parameters 261
Sort records, ascending or descending 378
Stitch Function 261
Specific weight 324
Stitch parameters 323
Speed
Stitch width
bevels 155
micro stitch 580
Boiler End 554
Stitches
for contour element 155
several 262
set manually 155
Storing location
for production data 101
Speed reduction
Storing Options for drawings 170
calculate values 326
Straight
max. Entries 327
directory 556
process database 337
Straight line
process database values 326
convert into arc 246
Speed reduction when plasma cutting
Straight lines
small inner contours 325

break 246 Technology data missing 81
Strip distance 505 Technology databases
Strip Width 210 where stored 152
Strips before and after the corners for Technology dialog
rectangular and polygonal tubes 505 part construction 419
Subcontours quality value 424
join 445 toolbar when nesting 441
sequence 435
Technology Dialog
SUPPORT_CROSS_CUT 578 3D view of bevel objects 422
Surface cut 490, 512 Toolbar (parts construction) 421
Surface cut to the edge of the tube 513
Technology dialog Bevel when nesting 440
Surface of the 3D object saved as Technology Docking View 439
DXF 494, 508
Technology functions
Surrounding rectangle 30
not available with bevel support 443
System information
Technology menu
show 341
part construction 416
System requirements 14
Technology Menu when nesting 439
System Settings 300
Technology objects, create 74
Technology window
T
Change view 439
T code
Telesis
for laser cutting outer contours and
OmniScript layer 444
large inner contours 574
text marking 205
for laser cutting small inner contours 574
Templates
for sensing 576
export 98
Tactile
Text 201
sensing 576
align to circle 243
Taking parts into the workspace for
nesting 121 character style 201, 226
Tapped hole 477 font 201, 225, 226
Tapped hole with countersink 477 function 71
Tapped holes 483 REA 203
TechDB Material Mapping Width/Height Scale 201, 226
drill database 482 Text conversion 171
Technifor Text height
OmniScript layer 444 REA 203
Technocontours 429 text in DXF format in Unicode 87
Technology Text input 201
copy 281 Text input, dialog window 225, 226
transfer to identical parts 281 Text marking
Technology (Bevel) Telesis Pinstamp 205
Nesting plan options 445 Text type
Technology card in CAD options 322 OmniScript2 205
Technology contours Texts
definition 429 cutting 242
Technology data marking 242
process database 335 Texts added to the tube drawing 497

Texts with REA Inkjet output in DIN format 586 Toolbar Attribute dialog 61, 81
Texts, construct 70, 189 Toolbar for tube joints 515
Texts, mark 172 Toolbar in Macro 350
Thickness Toolbar in the Database dialog 362
add for material in bevel database 461 Toolbar Nesting Parameter 61, 81
of tube in a 3D image 511 Toolbar of OmniWin Tube 493
process data 339, 340 Toolbar View/Change Technocontour 442
Technology Dialog 423 Toolbar, profiles 61
Thickness entry 500 Toolbars
Thickness range for laser cutting 574 Anchor 16
Thickness range, change for material customize 63
group 461 delete new 64
Thickness setting 497 hide and show 63, 64
Thickness values 327
move 16
Thread type 481 new 64
Thread Types table 481 new renaming 64
Threshold for gray tones 103
position within drawing window 16
Through hole 475, 477 Store in profile 17
Time Summary 59
Production Time 330
Switch on and off 16
Time Calculation Switching on and off 120
Configuration 310 undo changes 65, 66
Toggle Break 228
Toolbars function 123
function 421 Toolpath sequence
Tool offset 285 sequence of subcontours 435
Tool Usages table in the drill database 481
Tools
TOOL_ID_SWINGARM 576 Switching on and off 120
Toolbar Top Down View
Add icons 62
default 126
CS (Coordinate System) 60, 77 Top View function 515, 525
Dimension 61, 78 Torch
Drag bar for moving 16
disable 400
Draw 59, 70 enable 400
Draw for Nesting 71 lifter movement 305
incompletely shown 61
park 400
Main 59, 68 Translate by Color 157
Measure 60 Translate by Layer 157
Modify 60
Translate by Layer and Color 157
Modify for Nesting 74 Trim connected tubes 528
Modify for Part Construction 73 Trim drawing elements 73, 227
Nesting 61, 79
Trim function 238
Remove icons 62 Trim Function 74
Snap 60, 76 Trim of a plate contour 71, 206
Technology dialog (nesting) 441
Trim plate contour 73, 220
Technology dialog (parts construction) 421 True Hole
Zoom 59, 69 Hypertherm (HPRXD) 484

Tube Universal Postprocessor 300, 444
directory 556 Unselect All function 120
Postprocessors 575 Up function 274
Tube and Cut Contour display 502 Update
Tube axis activated 490 in database 368
Tube axis fixed 489 Update All Records 368
Tube branch creation 519 Update auto layer translation table with
Tube branches, developing 523 your choice 94
Tube combination, Front view 525 Update counter
Tube combination, Grid 525 Dongle 342

Update function 493, 499, 511
Tube combination, perspective view 525
Tube combination, right view 525 Update parts 368
Tube combination, Top view 525 Update plan

database parameters 282
Tube combinations as 3D object,
displaying 520 Update Plan
Tube connections workspace part 282
settings 527 Use inner area, checkbox 212
Tube dialog window 491 Used plate rectangle 30
Tube dialog, change view 510 UWP 325
Tube docking view function 494
Tube joints 513 V
Tube Options dialog, Machine Code 575 V.E.PRINTHEAD_DIR
Tube Parameters dialog 494 REA 588
Tube parting cut 503 V.E.Textformat 588
Tube Tree dialog window 517 Vaporization
hiding 522 plastic film 577
Tube type pre-piercing 577
circle 495 sequence of processing 577, 578
Rounded Rectangle 496 VAPORIZATION 577
Rounded Right Poly 496 VAS cut 409
select 494 VDS cut 408
Types of profiles 383 Vector
lead point 317
U Version information
Underwater cutting 325 OmniWin 341
Undo command undo 117 Version number
Undo commands 68, 116, 117 OmniWin 341
Undo function 69, 117 Vertical Array function 232
Unicode Vertical arrow size 174
text in DXF format 87 Vertical cut 408
Unit system Vertical linear dimensioning feature 222
bevel database 465, 472 Vertical Linear, function 79
DSTV 600 View / Edit Current Part Info, function 77
unit types table in the drill database 480 View / Edit Current Plan Info function 79
Unit Types table in the drill database 480 View / Edit Current Plan Info, function 331
Units 147 View / Edit Process DB 333, 591

View cutting contour Show empty group nodes 148
function 433 Workspace in the Plan Info Dialog 25
View cutting contour, function 442 Write Multitorch 393
View Help Picture of Macro
function 441 X
View Help Picture of Macro, function 435 X coord. Shift lead-in 506
View leadin X cut 409
function 430 X/Y axes
View lead-in, function 442 coordinate system 131
View lead-out XML
function 431 DSTV 597
View lead-out, function 442 XML export
View Menu 120, 177 production data 99
View of a 3D object 511 X-Ray 130
View/Change Join XSL Postprocessor
function 432 Save configuration 563
View/Change Join, function 442
View/Change Start Point Y
function 417, 421
YAS cut 409
View/Change Technocontour
YDS cut 409
Function 429
Toolbar 442
Z
View/Edit Current Part Info 143
Zero point
View/Edit Selected Record, function 367
Viewing and Rendering Options 126
Zero Position 504
Volumetric Rendering Mode 128
Zoom all function 69, 123
Volumetric view 128
Zoom Center function 69, 124
Zoom Functions 69
W
Zoom In function 69, 123
Weld preparation
Zoom Out function 69, 124
pipe penetration 532, 544
Zoom Previous function 69, 124
Weld seam for developments 497
Zoom Realtime function 69, 124
Wheel
Zoom Selected function 69, 124
manipulators 181
Zoom Toolbar 59, 69
Wireframe 129
Zoom Window function 69, 124
Workspace 37
Zoom with the mouse wheel 125
display options 148
Zoom, undo steps 124
edit part parameter 25
Zooming 120
parts 38
Zooming a 3D picture 511
Show all 149

OW13.1 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OW13.1 User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OW13.1 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OmniWin 2013

www.messersoft.com Legal Notice

2 OmniWin - Menus and Functions 84

4 Technical Appendix 547

OmniWin – Overview and Toolbars

OmniWin – Menus and Functions

OmniWin – Advanced Functions

OmniWin – Technical Appendix

1.1.1 Scope of functions and Options

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 12

1.1.2 OmniWin – Summary of functions

Nesting and Autonest

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 13

Import / Export functions

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 14

Support of drilling heads

Tubes and tube connections (Option Tube)

Boiler End for the cutting of dished ends

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 15

1.2 Basic operation

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 16

1.2.2 Configuring the program window

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 17

1.2.3 Command Line Dialog

Calculation functions in the coordinate input

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 18

1.2.4 Object Info Dialog

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 19

Certain geometry parameters such as length, width, cutting length and

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 20

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 21

1.2.5 Plan Info Dialog

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 22

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 23

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 24

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 25

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 26

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 27

Create a nesting plan based on a plate stored in the database:

Create the plate when creating the nesting plan:

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 28

Changing the process material

Changing the plate material for several objects

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 29

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 30

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 31

1.2.6 Adjusting Dialog Windows

1.2.6.1 Docking of Dialog Windows with the help of Marks (Stickers)

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 32

1.2.6.2 Switching between widow and docked positions of a dialog

1.2.6.3 Combining Dialog Windows into Groups

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 33

1.2.6.4 Fixing or Automatically hiding Dialog Windows

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 34

1.2.7 Selection of the Functions

1.2.8 Notes about the Execution of Functions

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 35

1.2.9 Selection of elements or objects

www.messersoft.com OmniWin - Overview and Toolbars | 36

1.3 The Workspace - current tasks